rpms/binutils
6
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Pull Requests Releases Activity
0121fcb4e5
binutils/binutils-section-ordering.patch
Nick Clifton 983effec90 Add section-ordering patch to bfd linker. 
Resolves: PTG-287
2024-05-13 15:28:05 +00:00

26974 lines
886 KiB
Diff
Raw Blame History

This file contains invisible Unicode characters

This file contains invisible Unicode characters that are indistinguishable to humans but may be processed differently by a computer. If you think that this is intentional, you can safely ignore this warning. Use the Escape button to reveal them.

diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/NEWS binutils-2.41/ld/NEWS
--- binutils.orig/ld/NEWS 2024-05-13 13:03:48.141602288 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/NEWS 2024-05-13 13:04:43.757681506 +0100
@@ -1,5 +1,8 @@
-*- text -*-
+* Add --section-ordering-file <FILE> option to add extra mapping of input
+ sections to output sections.
+
* On RISC-V, add ld target option --[no-]check-uleb128. Should rebuild the
objects by binutils 2.42 and up if enabling the option and get warnings,
since the non-zero addend of SUB_ULEB128 shouldn't be generated from .uleb128
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/NEWS.orig binutils-2.41/ld/NEWS.orig
--- binutils.orig/ld/NEWS.orig 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/NEWS.orig 2024-05-13 13:04:08.590633292 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,991 @@
+-*- text -*-
+
+* On RISC-V, add ld target option --[no-]check-uleb128. Should rebuild the
+ objects by binutils 2.42 and up if enabling the option and get warnings,
+ since the non-zero addend of SUB_ULEB128 shouldn't be generated from .uleb128
+ directives.
+
+* Added --warn-execstack-objects to warn about executable stacks only when an
+ input object file requests one. Also added --error-execstack and
+ --error-rxw-segments options to convert warnings about executable stacks and
+ segments into errors.
+
+ Also added --enable-error-execstack=[yes|no] and
+ --enable-error-rwx-segments=[yes|no] configure options to set the default for
+ converting warnings into errors.
+
+Changes in 2.41:
+
+* The linker now accepts a command line option of --remap-inputs
+ <PATTERN>=<FILE> to relace any input file that matches <PATTERN> with
+ <FILE>. In addition the option --remap-inputs-file=<FILE> can be used to
+ specify a file containing any number of these remapping directives.
+
+* The linker command line option --print-map-locals can be used to include
+ local symbols in a linker map. (ELF targets only).
+
+* For most ELF based targets, if the --enable-linker-version option is used
+ then the version of the linker will be inserted as a string into the .comment
+ section.
+
+* The linker script syntax has a new command for output sections: ASCIZ "string"
+ This will insert a zero-terminated string at the current location.
+
+* Add command-line option, -z nosectionheader, to omit ELF section
+ header.
+
+Changes in 2.40:
+
+* The linker has a new command line option to suppress the generation of any
+ warning or error messages. This can be useful when there is a need to create
+ a known non-working binary. The option is -w or --no-warnings.
+
+* ld now supports zstd compressed debug sections. The new option
+ --compress-debug-sections=zstd compresses debug sections with zstd.
+
+* Add --enable-default-compressed-debug-sections-algorithm={zlib,zstd}
+ that selects the default compression algorithm
+ for --enable-compressed-debug-sections.
+
+* Remove support for -z bndplt (MPX prefix instructions).
+
+Changes in 2.39:
+
+* The ELF linker will now generate a warning message if the stack is made
+ executable. By default this warning is not issued if the user has
+ specifically requested an executable stack via the "-z execstack"
+ command line option, but the warning can be forced via the new
+ "--warn-execstack" option. Alternatively all warnings about creating
+ an executable stack can be suppressed via the "--no-warn-execstack"
+ option.
+
+ In addition the ELF linker will also warn if it creates a memory resident
+ segment with all three of the Read, Write and eXecute permissions set, or
+ if it creates a thread local data segment with the eXecute permission set.
+ These warnings can be disabled via --no-warn-rwx-segments option and
+ re-enabled via the --warn-rwx-segments option.
+
+ New configure options can also control these new features:
+
+ --enable-warn-execstack=no
+ will disable the warnings about creating an executable stack.
+
+ --enable-warn-execstack=yes
+ will make --warn-execstack enabled by default.
+
+ --enable-warn-rwx-segments=no
+ will make --no-warn-rwx-segments enabled by default.
+
+ --enable-default-execstack=no
+ will stop the creation of an executable stack simply because an input file
+ is missing a .note.GNU-stack section, even on architectures where this
+ behaviour is the default.
+
+* TYPE=<type> is now supported in an output section description to set the
+ section type value.
+
+* Remove (rudimentary) support for the x86-64 sub-architectures Intel L1OM and
+ Intel K1OM.
+
+* The ELF linker now supports a new --package-metadata option that allows
+ embedding a JSON payload in accordance to the Package Metadata specification.
+ If support for libjansson is enabled at build time, the linker will use it to
+ validate the input. This can be enabled with --enable-jansson.
+ For more details, see: https://systemd.io/ELF_PACKAGE_METADATA/
+
+Changes in 2.38:
+
+* Add -z pack-relative-relocs/-z no pack-relative-relocs to x86 ELF
+ linker to pack relative relocations in the DT_RELR section.
+
+* Add support for the LoongArch architecture.
+
+* Add -z indirect-extern-access/-z noindirect-extern-access to x86 ELF
+ linker to control canonical function pointers and copy relocation.
+
+* Add --max-cache-size=SIZE to set the the maximum cache size to SIZE
+ bytes.
+
+Changes in 2.37:
+
+* arm-symbianelf support removed.
+
+* Add -z report-relative-reloc to x86 ELF linker to report dynamic
+ relative relocations.
+
+* Add -z start-stop-gc to disable special treatment of __start_*/__stop_*
+ references when --gc-sections.
+
+* Add -Bno-symbolic to cancel -Bsymbolic and -Bsymbolic-functions.
+
+Changes in 2.36:
+
+* Add libdep plugin, for linking dependencies of static libraries that
+ were recorded by ar in the __.LIBDEP archive member.
+
+* Add --error-handling-script=<NAME> command line option to allow a helper
+ script to be invoked when an undefined symbol or a missing library is
+ encountered. This option can be suppressed via the configure time
+ switch: --enable-error-handling-script=no.
+
+* Add -z lam-u48 to x86-64 ELF linker to generate LAM_U48 property.
+
+* Add -z lam-u57 to x86-64 ELF linker to enerate LAM_U57 property.
+
+* Add -z lam-u48-report=[none|warning|error] to report missing LAM_U48
+ property.
+
+* Add -z lam-u57-report=[none|warning|error] to report missing LAM_U57
+ property.
+
+* Add -z lam-report=[none|warning|error] to report missing LAM_U48 and
+ LAM_U57 properties.
+
+* Add -z x86-64-{baseline|v[234]} to the x86 ELF linker to mark
+ x86-64-{baseline|v[234]} ISA level as needed.
+
+* Add -z unique-symbol to avoid duplicated local symbol names.
+
+* The creation of PE format DLLs now defaults to using a more secure set of DLL
+ characteristics.
+
+* The linker now deduplicates the types in .ctf sections. The new
+ command-line option --ctf-share-types describes how to do this:
+ its default value, share-unconflicted, produces the most compact
+ output.
+
+* The linker now omits the "variable section" from .ctf sections by
+ default, saving space. This is almost certainly what you want
+ unless you are working on a project that has its own analogue
+ of symbol tables that are not reflected in the ELF symtabs.
+
+* Add support for the SHF_GNU_RETAIN ELF section flag.
+ This flag specifies that the section should not be garbage collected by the
+ linker.
+
+Changes in 2.35:
+
+* X86 NaCl target support is removed.
+
+* Add ELF linker command-line options, --export-dynamic-symbol and
+ --export-dynamic-symbol-list, to make symbols dynamic.
+
+* Add a configure option, --enable-textrel-check=[no|yes|warning|error],
+ to decide what ELF linker should do by default with DT_TEXTREL in an
+ executable or shared library. Default to yes for Linux/x86 targets.
+
+* The -Map=<filename> command line option has been extended so that if
+ <filename> is a directory then <filename>/<output-filename>.map will be
+ created.
+
+* Add a command-line option for ELF linker, --warn-textrel, to warn that
+ DT_TEXTREL is set in a position-independent executable or shared object.
+
+* Add command-line options --enable-non-contiguous-regions and
+ --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings.
+
+* Add command-line option --imagic for the pdp11-aout target to output format
+ IMAGIC (0411) for separate instruction and data spaces, and change the
+ default format option for pdp11-aout to be --omagic.
+
+* Relative pathnames in INPUT() and GROUP() directives in linker scripts are
+ searched relative to the directory of the linker script before other search
+ paths.
+
+* Add ELF linker command-line option `-z start-stop-visibility=...' to control
+ the visibility of synthetic `__start_SECNAME` and `__stop_SECNAME` symbols.
+
+* Add command-line option --dependency-file to write a Make-style dependency
+ file listing the input files consulted by the linker, like the files written
+ by the compiler's -M -MP options.
+
+Changes in 2.34:
+
+* The ld check for "PHDR segment not covered by LOAD segment" is more
+ effective, catching cases that were wrongly allowed by previous versions of
+ ld. If you see this error it is likely you are linking with a bad linker
+ script or the binary you are building is not intended to be loaded by a
+ dynamic loader. In the latter case --no-dynamic-linker is appropriate.
+
+* cr16c support removed.
+
+* Add support for z80-elf.
+
+* Add support for relocation of each byte or word of multibyte value to Z80
+ targets.
+
+* Add support for Zilog eZ80 (both ADL and Z80 mode) and Zilog Z180 CPUs.
+
+Changes in 2.33:
+
+* Add command-line option --no-print-map-discarded.
+
+* The Cortex-A53 Erratum 843419 workaround now supports a choice of which
+ workaround to use. The option --fix-cortex-a53-843419 now takes an
+ optional argument --fix-cortex-a53-843419[=full|adr|adrp] which can be
+ used to force a particular workaround to be used. See --help for AArch64
+ for more details.
+
+* Add target handlers for AArch64 for ELF GNU program properties.
+
+* Add support for GNU_PROPERTY_AARCH64_FEATURE_1_BTI in ELF GNU program
+ properties in the AArch64 ELF linker.
+
+* Add support for GNU_PROPERTY_AARCH64_FEATURE_1_PAC in ELF GNU program
+ properties in the AArch64 ELF linker.
+
+* Add -z force-bti for AArch64 to enable GNU_PROPERTY_AARCH64_FEATURE_1_BTI
+ on output while warning about missing GNU_PROPERTY_AARCH64_FEATURE_1_BTI
+ on inputs and use PLTs protected with BTI.
+
+* Add -z pac-plt for AArch64 to pick PAC enabled PLTs.
+
+Changes in 2.32:
+
+* Report property change in linker map file when merging GNU properties.
+
+* Add support for the C-SKY processor series.
+
+* -t now doesn't report members within archives, unless -t is given twice.
+ A single -t is now more useful when generating a list of files that should be
+ packaged for a linker bug report. For example:
+ gcc hello.c -save-temps -Wl,-t | xargs realpath | sort | uniq > files
+ tar cJf test.tar.xz `cat files`
+
+Changes in 2.31:
+
+* Speed up direct linking with DLLs for Cygwin and Mingw targets.
+
+* Add a configure option --enable-separate-code to decide whether
+ -z separate-code should be enabled in ELF linker by default. Default
+ to yes for Linux/x86 targets. Note that -z separate-code can increase
+ disk and memory size.
+
+Changes in 2.30:
+
+* Add -z separate-code to generate separate code PT_LOAD segment.
+
+* Add "-z undefs" command-line option as the inverse of the "-z defs" option.
+
+* Add -z globalaudit command-line option to force audit libraries to be run
+ for every dynamic object loaded by an executable - provided that the loader
+ supports this functionality.
+
+* Tighten linker script grammar around file name specifiers to prevent the use
+ of SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT and SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY on filenames. These would
+ previously be accepted but had no effect.
+
+* The EXCLUDE_FILE directive can now be placed within any SORT_* directive
+ within input section lists.
+
+Changes in 2.29:
+
+* Support for -z shstk in the x86 ELF linker to generate
+ GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in ELF GNU program properties.
+
+* Add support for GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in ELF GNU program
+ properties in the x86 ELF linker.
+
+* Add support for GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in ELF GNU program
+ properties in the x86 ELF linker.
+
+* Support for -z ibtplt in the x86 ELF linker to generate IBT-enabled
+ PLT.
+
+* Support for -z ibt in the x86 ELF linker to generate IBT-enabled
+ PLT as well as GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in ELF GNU program
+ properties.
+
+* Add support for ELF SHF_GNU_MBIND and PT_GNU_MBIND_XXX.
+
+* Add support for ELF GNU program properties.
+
+* Add support for the Texas Instruments PRU processor.
+
+* When configuring for arc*-*-linux* targets the default linker emulation will
+ change if --with-cpu=nps400 is used at configure time.
+
+* Improve assignment of LMAs to orphan sections in some edge cases where a
+ mixture of both AT>LMA_REGION and AT(LMA) are used.
+
+* Orphan sections placed after an empty section that has an AT(LMA) will now
+ take an load memory address starting from LMA.
+
+* Section groups can now be resolved (the group deleted and the group members
+ placed like normal sections) at partial link time either using the new linker
+ option --force-group-allocation or by placing FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION into the
+ linker script.
+
+Changes in 2.28:
+
+* The EXCLUDE_FILE linker script construct can now be applied outside of the
+ section list in order for the exclusions to apply over all input sections in
+ the list.
+
+* Add support for the RISC-V architecture.
+
+* The command-line option --no-eh-frame-hdr can now be used in ELF based
+ linkers to disable the automatic generation of .eh_frame_hdr sections.
+
+* Add --in-implib=<infile> to the ARM linker to enable specifying a set of
+ Secure Gateway veneers that must exist in the output import library specified
+ by --out-implib=<outfile> and the address they must have. As such,
+ --in-implib is only supported in combination with --cmse-implib.
+
+* Extended the --out-implib=<file> option, previously restricted to x86 PE
+ targets, to any ELF based target. This allows the generation of an import
+ library for an ELF executable, which can then be used by another application
+ to link against the executable.
+
+Changes in 2.27:
+
+* Add a configure option --enable-relro to decide whether -z relro should
+ be enabled in ELF linker by default. Default to yes for all Linux
+ targets except FRV, HPPA, IA64 and MIPS. Note that -z relro can increase
+ disk and memory size.
+
+* Support for -z noreloc-overflow in the x86-64 ELF linker to disable
+ relocation overflow check.
+
+* Add -z common/-z nocommon options for ELF targets to control whether to
+ convert common symbols to the STT_COMMON type during a relocatable link.
+
+* Support for -z nodynamic-undefined-weak in the x86 ELF linker, which
+ avoids dynamic relocations against undefined weak symbols in executable.
+
+* The NOCROSSREFSTO command was added to the linker script language.
+
+* Add --no-apply-dynamic-relocs to the AArch64 linker to do not apply link-time
+ values for dynamic relocations.
+
+Changes in 2.26:
+
+* Add --fix-stm32l4xx-629360 to the ARM linker to enable a link-time
+ workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
+ the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx)
+
+* Add a configure option --enable-compressed-debug-sections={all,ld} to
+ decide whether DWARF debug sections should be compressed by default.
+
+* Add support for the ARC EM/HS, and ARC600/700 architectures.
+
+* Experimental support for linker garbage collection (--gc-sections)
+ has been enabled for COFF and PE based targets.
+
+* New command-line option for ELF targets to compress DWARF debug
+ sections, --compress-debug-sections=[none|zlib|zlib-gnu|zlib-gabi].
+
+* New command-line option, --orphan-handling=[place|warn|error|discard], to
+ adjust how orphan sections are handled. The default is 'place' which gives
+ the current behaviour, 'warn' and 'error' issue a warning or error
+ respectively when orphan sections are found, and 'discard' will discard all
+ orphan sections.
+
+* Add support for LLVM plugin.
+
+* Add --print-memory-usage option to report memory blocks usage.
+
+* Add --require-defined option, it's like --undefined except the new symbol
+ must be defined by the end of the link.
+
+Changes in 2.25:
+
+* PE binaries now once again contain real timestamps by default. To disable
+ the inclusion of a timestamp in a PE binary, use the --no-insert-timestamp
+ command-line option.
+
+* Replace support for openrisc and or32 with support for or1k.
+
+* Add support for the --build-id command-line option to COFF based targets.
+
+* x86/x86_64 pe-coff now supports the --build-id option.
+
+* Add support for the Andes NDS32.
+
+Changes in 2.24:
+
+* Add LOG2CEIL() builtin function to the linker script language
+
+* Add support for the Texas Instruments MSP430X processor.
+
+* Add support for Altera Nios II.
+
+* Add support for the V850E3V5 architecture.
+
+* Add support for the Imagination Technologies Meta processor.
+
+* --enable-new-dtags no longer generates old dtags in addition to new dtags.
+
+* Remove linker support for MIPS ECOFF targets.
+
+* Add ALIGN_WITH_INPUT to the linker script language to force the alignment of
+ an output section to use the maximum alignment of all its input sections.
+
+Changes in 2.23:
+
+* Enable compressed debug section feature for x86/x86_64 pe-coff.
+
+* Add support for the 64-bit ARM architecture: AArch64.
+
+* Added SORT_NONE to the linker script language to disable section sorting.
+
+* Add a linker-provided symbol when producing ELF output, '__ehdr_start'
+ to point to the ELF file header (and nearby program headers) in the
+ program's memory image.
+
+* Add support for S12X processor.
+
+* Add support for the VLE extension to the PowerPC architecture.
+
+* Add support for the Freescale XGATE architecture.
+
+* Add option -f FILE on AIX (for response file).
+
+* Add support for the Renesas RL78 architecture.
+
+* Add support for the Adapteva EPIPHANY architecture.
+
+Changes in 2.22:
+
+* --copy-dt-needed-entries is no longer enabled by default. Instead
+ --no-copy-dt-needed-entries is the default.
+
+* INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS has been added to the linker script language
+ to allow selection of input sections by section header section flags.
+
+* Add support for the Tilera TILEPro and TILE-Gx architectures.
+
+* Added SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY to the linker script language to permit
+ sorting sections by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
+ encoded in the section name.
+
+Changes in 2.21:
+
+* Linker script expression evaluation is somewhat more sane. This may
+ break scripts that depend on quirks of the old expression evaluation.
+
+* Turn off underscoring for x86_64 PE+-COFF targets. For old behavior the
+ option --enable-leading-mingw64-underscores can be used on configure of
+ bfd.
+
+* Add support for the TMS320C6000 (TI C6X) processor family.
+
+* --add-needed renamed to --copy-dt-needed-entries in order to avoid confusion
+ with --as-needed option.
+
+* Extend .def file syntax by '== <ID>' for imports and exports. This allows
+ to alias the import/export table name written in PE image.
+
+* Add --exclude-all-symbols option to PE based linkers. This prevents all
+ symbols from automatically being exported.
+
+* Add support for the Renesas RX processor.
+
+* Add support for alpha-vms target.
+
+Changes in 2.20:
+
+* GNU/Linux targets now support the STB_GNU_UNIQUE symbol binding. This is a
+ GNU extension to the standard set of ELF symbol bindings. The binding will
+ be passed on to the dynamic linker which will make sure that in the entire
+ process there is just one symbol with the given name and type in use.
+
+* PE targets now support a GNU extension to allow the alignment of common
+ common symbols to be specified. This support uses custom options in
+ the .drectve section, which will be disregarded by the native tools.
+
+* PE targets now add primitive support for ELF version scripts; symbols
+ are not versioned, but the local and global symbol visibility directives
+ are respected when filtering symbols in auto-export mode.
+
+* New option --no-export-dynamic to undo the effect of the -E and
+ --export-dynamic options.
+
+* ELF: --warn-alternate-em option to warn if an object has alternate
+ ELF machine code.
+
+* New script function REGION_ALIAS to add alias names to memory regions.
+
+* PE targets no longer make use of the long section names PE extension to
+ the COFF format when generating executable images, by default. The old
+ (slightly non-conformant) behaviour can still be invoked by using the
+ new '--enable-long-section-names' command-line option. It is also enabled
+ automatically in the presence of un-stripped debug information, as GDB
+ needs to be able to find the debug info sections by their full names.
+
+* For GNU/Linux systems the linker will now avoid processing any relocations
+ made against symbols of the STT_GNU_IFUNC type and instead emit them into
+ the resulting binary for processing by the loader.
+
+* --as-needed now links in a dynamic library if it satisfies undefined
+ symbols in regular objects, or in other dynamic libraries. In the
+ latter case the library is not linked if it is found in a DT_NEEDED
+ entry of one of the libraries already linked.
+
+* Add a new command-line option, -Ttext-segment ADDR, for ELF targets
+ to set the address of the first byte of the text segment.
+
+* Add support for Sunplus score architecture.
+
+* Add new option --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables to ld for PE targets to
+ allow fallback to old import table generation with null element prefix.
+
+* Windows PE systems now support a new --exclude-modules-for-implib option,
+ allowing users to partition object files and archive members between a DLL
+ and its associated import library as they are generated during linking.
+
+* Add support for Lattice Mico32 (lm32) architecture.
+
+* Add CR16 ELF --embedded-relocs (used to embedded relocations into binaries
+ for Embedded-PIC code) option.
+
+* Add to the PE/PE+ targets the support of two different kinds of
+ pseudo-relocations. They can be selected by the switches
+ --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc-v1 and --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc-v2.
+ For the switch --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc it uses for 32-bit
+ runtime pseudo relocation version one, for 64-bit the version two.
+
+Changes in 2.19:
+
+* Linker scripts support a new INSERT command that makes it easier to
+ augment the default script.
+
+* Linker script input section filespecs may now specify a file within an
+ archive by writing "archive:file".
+
+* The --sort-common switch now has an optional argument which specifies the
+ direction of sorting.
+
+* The M68K linker now supports multiple GOT generation schemes controlled via
+ the --got=<type> command-line option.
+
+* The ARM EABI linker will now generate stubs for function calls to symbols
+ that are too far away. The placement of the stubs is controlled by a new
+ linker command-line option: --stub-group-size=N.
+
+Changes in 2.18:
+
+* Linker sources now released under version 3 of the GNU General Public
+ License.
+
+* ELF: New --build-id option to generate a unique per-binary identifier
+ embedded in a note section.
+
+* Added support for National Semicondutor CompactRISC (ie CR16) target.
+
+* -l:foo now searches the library path for a filename called foo,
+ without converting it to libfoo.a or libfoo.so.
+
+* Add a new command-line option '--default-script=FILE' or '-dT FILE'
+ which specifies a replacement for the built in, default linker
+ script.
+
+* ELF: Add -Bsymbolic-functions, --dynamic-list-cpp-new, which puts C++
+ operator new and delete on the dynamic list, and --dynamic-list-data,
+ builtin list for --dynamic-list, which puts global data symbols on the
+ dynamic list.
+
+* Add support for x86_64 PE+ target.
+
+* Add support for Score target.
+
+* ELF: Add --dynamic-list option to specify a list of global symbols
+ whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition within the
+ shared library, or a list of symbols which should be added to the
+ symbol table in the executable.
+
+* The default output section LMA has changed for allocatable sections from
+ being equal to VMA, to keeping the difference between LMA and VMA the same as
+ the previous output section in the same region. This is a more useful
+ default when using overlays and other cases where you specify an LMA
+ differing from the VMA for some sections.
+
+* New switch: --print-gc-sections to list any sections removed by garabge
+ collection.
+
+* ARM: Added --vfp11-denorm-fix option to work around an erratum in current
+ VFP11 coprocessors.
+
+Changes in 2.17:
+
+* Support for the Infineon XC16X has been added by KPIT Cummins Infosystems.
+
+* Modify the Linux linker search order to better match ld.so search order.
+ Look for DT_NEEDED libraries in paths specified by ld.so.conf before
+ searching the default directories, rather than vice versa.
+ Use $prefix/etc/ld.so.conf if it exists, otherwise /etc/ld.so.conf.
+
+* PE-COFF: Forward exports from DLL's can now be specified in .def files
+ passed directly to ld.
+
+* Support for the Z80 processor family has been added.
+
+* Add support for the "@<file>" syntax to the command line, so that extra
+ switches can be read from <file>.
+
+Changes in 2.16:
+
+* Support for the R_ARM_V4BX relocation as defined in the ARM AAELF
+ specification has been added via the --fix-v4bx command-line option.
+
+* New linker script construct AS_NEEDED(), which sets the --as-needed flag
+ for input files listed inside of it.
+
+* A new command-line option, --sysroot, can be used to override the
+ default sysroot location. It only applies to toolchains that were
+ configured using --with-sysroot.
+
+* New linker script functions: ORIGIN() and LENGTH() which return information
+ about a specified memory region.
+
+* Port to MAXQ processor contributed by HCL Tech.
+
+* Added SEGMENT_START to the linker script language to permit the user to
+ override the base address for a segment from the command-line.
+
+* ELF: --warn-shared-textrel option to warn if adding a DT_TEXTREL to a shared
+ object.
+
+* Added SORT_BY_NAME and SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT to the linker script
+ language to permit sorting sections by section name or section
+ maximum alignment.
+
+* Added a new linker command-line switch, --sort-section name|alignment,
+ to sort sections by section name or maximum alignment.
+
+* ELF: --add-needed/--no-add-needed options to control if a DT_NEEDED tag
+ should be added when a shared library comes from DT_NEEDED tags.
+
+* Support for the crx-elf target added.
+
+* Support for the sh-symbianelf target added.
+
+* A new linker command-line switch has been added which allows the hash table
+ size to be set to a suitable prime value near to its argument. This switch
+ is --hash-size=<NUMBER>. Also if the switch --reduce-memory-overheads is
+ used, and --hash-size has not been used, then the default value will be set
+ to 1021.
+
+* Linker map files are now generated with an O(N) algorithm for finding symbols
+ that are defined in each section. This uses about 40% more memory for
+ symbols than the old O(N^2) algorithm. You can use the new
+ --reduce-memory-overheads option to select the old algorithm; this option
+ might also be used in the future to select similar tradeoffs.
+
+Changes in 2.15:
+
+* ELF: --as-needed/--no-as-needed options to control if a DT_NEEDED tag should
+ be added only when a shared library is referenced.
+
+* PE: --large-address-aware option to indicate executables support virtual
+ addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
+
+* DWARF 2 support for i386pe added.
+
+* The linker script operator DEFINED() will now yield 1 only for a symbol that
+ is defined before the statement where DEFINED is used.
+
+* The MIPS --embedded-relocs (used to embed relocations into binaries for
+ Embedded-PIC code) is deprecated and will be removed in a future release.
+
+* cr16c support added by NSC.
+
+* m32r Linux (ELF) support added by Renesas.
+
+* Improved linker's handling of unresolved symbols. The switch
+ --unresolved-symbols=<method> has been added to tell the linker when it
+ should report them and the switch --warn-unresolved-symbols has been added to
+ make reports be issued as warning messages rather than errors.
+
+Changes in 2.14:
+
+* Added support for Xtensa architecture.
+
+* Added --with-sysroot configure switch to specify a target system root, for
+ linking against a target filesystem image.
+
+* Added --accept-unknown-linker-format to restore old linker behaviour (pre
+ 2.14) of silently accepting and linking in any files in an unknown binary
+ file format.
+
+* Added --no-omagic to undo the effects of the -N option.
+
+* Support for Texas Instruments TMS320C4x and TMS320C3x series of
+ DSP's contributed by Michael Hayes and Svein E. Seldal.
+
+* Added --with-lib-path configure switch to specify default value for
+ LIB_PATH.
+
+* ARM port to QNX operating system added by Graeme Peterson.
+
+* IP2K support added by Denis Chertykov.
+
+Changes in 2.13:
+
+* Support for the Fujitsu FRV architecture added by Red Hat. Models for FR400
+ and FR500 included.
+
+Changes in version 2.13:
+
+* DEC VAX ELF support, by Matt Thomas.
+
+Changes in version 2.12:
+
+* Support for Don Knuth's MMIX, by Hans-Peter Nilsson.
+
+* Support for the OpenRISC 32-bit embedded processor by OpenCores.
+
+* Support for -z nocopyreloc in the x86 ELF linker, which disables
+ production of copy relocs. Warning: using this option may result in
+ non-sharable applications.
+
+* Support for -z combreloc in the ELF linker, which puts dynamic
+ relocations against the same symbol together, so that dynamic linker
+ can use an one-entry symbol lookup cache.
+
+* Support for ELF SHF_MERGE section merging, by Jakub Jelinek.
+
+Changes in version 2.11:
+
+* Support for AMD x86-64 architecture, by Jan Hubicka, SuSE Labs.
+
+* Support added for eliminating duplicate DWARF2 debug information by
+ having the compiler generate the information in sections called
+ .gnu.linkonce.wi.XXXX where XXXX is a checksum for the contents. The
+ linker then merges these sections together into the normal .debug_info
+ section.
+
+* The native ELF linker now searches the directories in DT_RUNPATH or
+ DT_RPATH of a shared library for shared libraries needed by it.
+
+* TI C54x support, by Timothy Wall.
+
+* Added command-line switch --section-start to set the start address of any
+ specified section.
+
+* Added ability to emit full relocation information in linked executables,
+ enabled by --emit-relocs. Some post-linkage optimization tools need
+ this information in order to be able to correctly identify and perform
+ symbol relative addressing in the event of changes in section contents
+ (instructions being added or deleted, extending data sections, etc.)
+
+* Support for i860, by Jason Eckhardt (preliminary, alpha quality).
+
+* Support for CRIS (Axis Communications ETRAX series).
+
+* Support for PDP-11 and 2.11BSD a.out format, by Lars Brinkhoff.
+
+Changes in version 2.10:
+
+* Added AT> to the linker script language to allow load-time allocation of
+ sections into regions.
+
+* Added garbage collection of unused sections, enabled by --gc-sections.
+ It does require a bit of backend support; currently implemented are
+ arm-elf, avr-elf, d10v-elf, fr30-elf, i386-elf, m32r-elf, m68k-elf,
+ mcore-elf, mips-elf, mn10300-elf, ppc-elf, sh-elf, sparc-elf, and v850-elf.
+ Others will ignore the option.
+
+* Added SORT to the linker script language to permit sorting sections by file
+ name or section name.
+
+* Added EXTERN to the linker script language as an equivalent to the -u
+ command-line option.
+
+* Added ASSERT to the linker script language.
+
+* Added EXCLUDE_FILE to the linker script language for further control over
+ wildcard file names.
+
+* Added -O option to optimize linker output (as of this writing, this only
+ affects ELF shared library generation).
+
+* The -e option now accepts a number as well as a symbol name.
+
+* Added --no-undefined option to disallow undefined symbols when creating a
+ shared library.
+
+* The linker now issues a warning, not an error, for an undefined symbol when
+ using -Bsymbolic; use the new --no-undefined option to get the old
+ behaviour.
+
+* Added --demangle and --no-demangle options.
+
+Changes in version 2.9:
+
+* Added SQUAD to the linker script language.
+
+* New option --no-warn-mismatch.
+
+* The MEMORY command now parses the attributes to determine where sections that
+ are not placed in a specific memory region are placed.
+
+Changes in version 2.8:
+
+* Linker scripts may now contain shell wildcard characters for file and section
+ names.
+
+* The linker now supports symbol versions in ELF.
+
+* The NOCROSSREFS command was added to the linker script language.
+
+* The LOADADDR expression was added to the linker script language.
+
+* MAX and MIN functions were added to the linker script language.
+
+* The OVERLAY construct was added to the linker script language.
+
+* New option --warn-section-align to warn when the address of an output section
+ changes due to alignment of an input section.
+
+* New options --filter/-F and --auxiliary/-f.
+
+Changes in version 2.7:
+
+* New option --cref to print out a cross reference table.
+
+* New option --wrap SYMBOL.
+
+* New option --no-whole-archive, to turn off the effect of --whole-archive.
+
+* Input sections assigned to the output section /DISCARD/ in the linker script
+ are not included in the output file.
+
+* The SunOS and ELF linkers now merge stabs debugging information which uses
+ the N_BINCL and N_EINCL stab types. This reduces the amount of debugging
+ information generated.
+
+Changes in version 2.6:
+
+* When an ELF section name is representable as a C identifier (this is not true
+of most ELF section names), the linker will automatically define symbols
+__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the section name, at the
+beginning and the end of the section. This is used by glibc.
+
+ Addendum: Current versions of the linker (at least for version 2.18 onwards
+and possibly much earlier as well) place two restrictions on this feature: The
+symbols are only implemented for orphaned sections, not for explicitly placed
+sections and they are PROVIDEd rather than being defined.
+
+* When an ELF section named .gnu.warning is encountered in an input file, the
+contents of the section are displayed as an error message, and the section is
+not copied into the output file. This is used by glibc.
+
+* When an ELF section named .gnu.warning.SYMBOL is encountered in an input
+file, and the symbol SYMBOL is referenced by some object file, the contents of
+the section are displayed as an error message. The section is not copied into
+the output file, unless doing a relocatable or shared link. This is used by
+glibc.
+
+* New options -split-by-reloc and -split-by-file.
+
+* The linker now supports linking PIC compiled code on SPARC SunOS. It can
+also create SPARC SunOS shared libraries, and, like the native SunOS linker,
+will do so whenever there is an undefined symbol in the link and neither the -e
+nor the -r option was used.
+
+* The -rpath option may be used on SunOS to set the list of directories to be
+searched at run time. This overrides the default of building the list from the
+-L options.
+
+* The COFF linker now combines debugging information for structs, unions, and
+enums, so that even if the same type is defined in multiple input files it will
+only be defined once in the output file. The --traditional-format switch will
+prevent this optimization.
+
+Changes in version 2.5:
+
+* The linker now supports linking against SunOS shared libraries. It still can
+not link SunOS PIC (Position Independent Code) files, so it can not be used to
+generate shared libraries.
+
+* The linker now supports linking against ELF shared libraries for the i386
+(UnixWare) and SPARC (Solaris). It can also link ELF PIC files, and can be
+used to generate shared libraries. Shared library generation is not well
+tested; please report any problems encountered. The linker is now enabled for
+Solaris again.
+
+* Eric Youngdale has contributed Linux support code, including linking against
+Linux a.out shared libraries. The linker produces Linux QMAGIC binaries.
+
+* The ELF backend has been converted to the new linker code. To use the new
+ELF linker, each particular target requires a relocation function. So far,
+this function has been written for i386 (UnixWare), SPARC (Solaris) MIPS (Irix
+5), and HPPA ELF targets.
+
+* The -( (--start-group) and -) (--end-group) options have been added to
+support searching a group of archives as though they were a single archive.
+This can also be used in a linker script, as GROUP ( files ).
+
+* When a file is named on the command line, and the linker does not recognize
+it as an object file, the linker will now treat the file as a linker script
+file. A linker script named in this way augments, but does not replace, the
+default linker script.
+
+* The -warn-once option was added. It causes the linker to only warn once per
+undefined symbol, rather than once per reference.
+
+* The COFF backend has been converted to the new linker code. As with ELF, to
+use the new linker, each particular target requires a relocation function. So
+far, this function has been written for the i386, m68k, a29k and SH targets.
+
+* The -V flag was made a synonym for -v, for SVR4 compatibility. The old -V
+behaviour is available via --verbose.
+
+Changes in version 2.4:
+
+* New linker code, by Steve Chamberlain and Ian Taylor. For a.out and ecoff
+ formats (so far), this should result in considerable savings in time
+ and memory used while linking; slightly poorer performance than
+ before for formats not converted yet.
+
+* Command-line parsing is no longer done with flex. This means
+ oddball characters in filenames won't get treated as argument
+ separators.
+
+* HP-PA ELF support, by Jeff Law. (No SOM support yet.)
+
+* Mach i386 support, by David Mackenzie.
+
+* Irix 4 shared libraries are now supported (Irix 5 uses ELF, and ELF shared
+ libraries are not yet supported).
+
+* COFF shared libraries (as on SCO) should work as well.
+
+* The linker is disabled for Solaris. (Actually, it was in 2.3 also, I just
+ forgot to note it.) Some of their C library routines don't work when
+ statically linked, and the GNU linker doesn't support dynamic linking yet.
+
+Changes in version 2.3:
+
+* Weak symbols are now supported.
+
+* ELF support has been added. The linker has been bootstrapped on
+ UnixWare and Solaris.
+
+* Alpha OSF/1 support has been added (non dynamic linking only).
+
+Changes in version 2.2:
+
+* The `bfd' library has been updated to reduce a.out-format string
+ table size. The effect of this is that files linked from many input
+ files with duplicate symbols (`-g' debugging records, or identical
+ static symbols) should be much smaller.
+
+Changes in version 2.1:
+
+* The ld -ySYMBOL flag (to trace references to SYMBOL) is now implemented.
+
+* There is now support for writing ECOFF files, so ld and the
+ other utilities should work on Risc/Ultrix and Irix.
+
+
+Copyright (C) 2012-2023 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Copying and distribution of this file, with or without modification,
+are permitted in any medium without royalty provided the copyright
+notice and this notice are preserved.
+
+Local variables:
+fill-column: 79
+End:
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/NEWS.rej binutils-2.41/ld/NEWS.rej
--- binutils.orig/ld/NEWS.rej 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/NEWS.rej 2024-05-13 13:04:08.590633292 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+--- ld/NEWS
++++ ld/NEWS
+@@ -1,5 +1,8 @@
+ -*- text -*-
+
++* Add --section-ordering-file <FILE> option to add extra mapping of input
++ sections to output sections.
++
+ * Add -plugin-save-temps to store plugin intermediate files permanently.
+
+ Changes in 2.42:
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/ld.h binutils-2.41/ld/ld.h
--- binutils.orig/ld/ld.h 2024-05-13 13:03:47.798601768 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/ld.h 2024-05-13 13:04:08.591633294 +0100
@@ -193,6 +193,9 @@ typedef struct
/* Default linker script. */
char *default_script;
+
+ /* Linker script fragment provided by the --section-order command line option. */
+ char *section_ordering_file;
} args_type;
extern args_type command_line;
@@ -319,6 +322,7 @@ extern ld_config_type config;
extern FILE * saved_script_handle;
extern bool force_make_executable;
+extern bool in_section_ordering;
extern int yyparse (void);
extern void add_cref (const char *, bfd *, asection *, bfd_vma);
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/ld.h.orig binutils-2.41/ld/ld.h.orig
--- binutils.orig/ld/ld.h.orig 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/ld.h.orig 2023-07-03 00:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,338 @@
+/* ld.h -- general linker header file
+ Copyright (C) 1991-2023 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+ This file is part of the GNU Binutils.
+
+ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or
+ (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+ Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street - Fifth Floor, Boston,
+ MA 02110-1301, USA. */
+
+#ifndef LD_H
+#define LD_H
+
+#ifndef SEEK_CUR
+#define SEEK_CUR 1
+#endif
+#ifndef SEEK_END
+#define SEEK_END 2
+#endif
+
+#ifndef ENABLE_NLS
+ /* The Solaris version of locale.h always includes libintl.h. If we have
+ been configured with --disable-nls then ENABLE_NLS will not be defined
+ and the dummy definitions of bindtextdomain (et al) below will conflict
+ with the defintions in libintl.h. So we define these values to prevent
+ the bogus inclusion of libintl.h. */
+# define _LIBINTL_H
+# define _LIBGETTEXT_H
+#endif
+#include <locale.h>
+
+#ifdef ENABLE_NLS
+# include <libintl.h>
+# define _(String) gettext (String)
+# ifdef gettext_noop
+# define N_(String) gettext_noop (String)
+# else
+# define N_(String) (String)
+# endif
+#else
+# define gettext(Msgid) (Msgid)
+# define dgettext(Domainname, Msgid) (Msgid)
+# define dcgettext(Domainname, Msgid, Category) (Msgid)
+# define ngettext(Msgid1, Msgid2, n) \
+ (n == 1 ? Msgid1 : Msgid2)
+# define dngettext(Domainname, Msgid1, Msgid2, n) \
+ (n == 1 ? Msgid1 : Msgid2)
+# define dcngettext(Domainname, Msgid1, Msgid2, n, Category) \
+ (n == 1 ? Msgid1 : Msgid2)
+# define textdomain(Domainname) do {} while (0)
+# define bindtextdomain(Domainname, Dirname) do {} while (0)
+# define _(String) (String)
+# define N_(String) (String)
+#endif
+
+/* Look in this environment name for the linker to pretend to be */
+#define EMULATION_ENVIRON "LDEMULATION"
+/* If in there look for the strings: */
+
+/* Look in this variable for a target format */
+#define TARGET_ENVIRON "GNUTARGET"
+
+/* Input sections which are put in a section of this name are actually
+ discarded. */
+#define DISCARD_SECTION_NAME "/DISCARD/"
+
+/* A file name list. */
+typedef struct name_list
+{
+ const char *name;
+ struct name_list *next;
+}
+name_list;
+
+typedef enum {sort_none, sort_ascending, sort_descending} sort_order;
+
+/* A wildcard specification. */
+
+typedef enum
+{
+ none, by_name, by_alignment, by_name_alignment, by_alignment_name,
+ by_none, by_init_priority
+} sort_type;
+
+extern sort_type sort_section;
+
+struct wildcard_spec
+{
+ const char *name;
+ struct name_list *exclude_name_list;
+ struct flag_info *section_flag_list;
+ size_t namelen, prefixlen, suffixlen;
+ sort_type sorted;
+};
+
+struct wildcard_list
+{
+ struct wildcard_list *next;
+ struct wildcard_spec spec;
+};
+
+#define BYTE_SIZE (1)
+#define SHORT_SIZE (2)
+#define LONG_SIZE (4)
+#define QUAD_SIZE (8)
+
+enum endian_enum { ENDIAN_UNSET = 0, ENDIAN_BIG, ENDIAN_LITTLE };
+
+typedef struct
+{
+ /* 1 => assign space to common symbols even if `relocatable_output'. */
+ bool force_common_definition;
+
+ /* If TRUE, build MIPS embedded PIC relocation tables in the output
+ file. */
+ bool embedded_relocs;
+
+ /* If TRUE, force generation of a file with a .exe file. */
+ bool force_exe_suffix;
+
+ /* If TRUE, generate a cross reference report. */
+ bool cref;
+
+ /* If TRUE (which is the default), warn about mismatched input
+ files. */
+ bool warn_mismatch;
+
+ /* Warn on attempting to open an incompatible library during a library
+ search. */
+ bool warn_search_mismatch;
+
+ /* If non-zero check section addresses, once computed,
+ for overlaps. Relocatable links only check when this is > 0. */
+ signed char check_section_addresses;
+
+ /* If TRUE allow the linking of input files in an unknown architecture
+ assuming that the user knows what they are doing. This was the old
+ behaviour of the linker. The new default behaviour is to reject such
+ input files. */
+ bool accept_unknown_input_arch;
+
+ /* Name of the import library to generate. */
+ char *out_implib_filename;
+
+ /* If TRUE we'll just print the default output on stdout. */
+ bool print_output_format;
+
+ /* If set, display the target memory usage (per memory region). */
+ bool print_memory_usage;
+
+ /* Should we force section groups to be resolved? Controlled with
+ --force-group-allocation on the command line or FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
+ in the linker script. */
+ bool force_group_allocation;
+
+ /* Big or little endian as set on command line. */
+ enum endian_enum endian;
+
+ /* Name of runtime interpreter to invoke. */
+ char *interpreter;
+
+ /* Name to give runtime library from the -soname argument. */
+ char *soname;
+
+ /* Runtime library search path from the -rpath argument. */
+ char *rpath;
+
+ /* Link time runtime library search path from the -rpath-link
+ argument. */
+ char *rpath_link;
+
+ /* Name of shared object whose symbol table should be filtered with
+ this shared object. From the --filter option. */
+ char *filter_shlib;
+
+ /* Name of shared object for whose symbol table this shared object
+ is an auxiliary filter. From the --auxiliary option. */
+ char **auxiliary_filters;
+
+ /* A version symbol to be applied to the symbol names found in the
+ .exports sections. */
+ char *version_exports_section;
+
+ /* Default linker script. */
+ char *default_script;
+} args_type;
+
+extern args_type command_line;
+
+typedef int token_code_type;
+
+/* Different ways we can handle orphan sections. */
+
+enum orphan_handling_enum
+{
+ /* The classic strategy, find a suitable section to place the orphan
+ into. */
+ orphan_handling_place = 0,
+
+ /* Discard any orphan sections as though they were assign to the section
+ /DISCARD/. */
+ orphan_handling_discard,
+
+ /* Find somewhere to place the orphan section, as with
+ ORPHAN_HANDLING_PLACE, but also issue a warning. */
+ orphan_handling_warn,
+
+ /* Issue a fatal error if any orphan sections are found. */
+ orphan_handling_error,
+};
+
+typedef struct
+{
+ bool magic_demand_paged;
+ bool make_executable;
+
+ /* If TRUE, -shared is supported. */
+ /* ??? A better way to do this is perhaps to define this in the
+ ld_emulation_xfer_struct since this is really a target dependent
+ parameter. */
+ bool has_shared;
+
+ /* If TRUE, build constructors. */
+ bool build_constructors;
+
+ /* If TRUE, warn about any constructors. */
+ bool warn_constructors;
+
+ /* If TRUE, warn about merging common symbols with others. */
+ bool warn_common;
+
+ /* If TRUE, only warn once about a particular undefined symbol. */
+ bool warn_once;
+
+ /* How should we deal with orphan sections. */
+ enum orphan_handling_enum orphan_handling;
+
+ /* If TRUE, warn if multiple global-pointers are needed (Alpha
+ only). */
+ bool warn_multiple_gp;
+
+ /* If TRUE, warn if the starting address of an output section
+ changes due to the alignment of an input section. */
+ bool warn_section_align;
+
+ /* If TRUE, warning messages are fatal. */
+ bool fatal_warnings;
+
+ /* If TRUE, warning and error messages are ignored. */
+ bool no_warnings;
+
+ sort_order sort_common;
+
+ bool text_read_only;
+
+ bool stats;
+
+ /* If set, orphan input sections will be mapped to separate output
+ sections. */
+ bool unique_orphan_sections;
+
+ /* If set, only search library directories explicitly selected
+ on the command line. */
+ bool only_cmd_line_lib_dirs;
+
+ /* If set, numbers and absolute symbols are simply treated as
+ numbers everywhere. */
+ bool sane_expr;
+
+ /* If set, code and non-code sections should never be in one segment. */
+ bool separate_code;
+
+ /* If set, generation of ELF section header should be suppressed. */
+ bool no_section_header;
+
+ /* The rpath separation character. Usually ':'. */
+ char rpath_separator;
+
+ char *map_filename;
+ FILE *map_file;
+
+ char *dependency_file;
+
+ unsigned int split_by_reloc;
+ bfd_size_type split_by_file;
+
+ /* The size of the hash table to use. */
+ unsigned long hash_table_size;
+
+ /* If set, print discarded sections in map file output. */
+ bool print_map_discarded;
+
+ /* If set, print local symbols in map file output. */
+ bool print_map_locals;
+
+ /* If set, emit the names and types of statically-linked variables
+ into the CTF. */
+ bool ctf_variables;
+
+ /* If set, share only duplicated types in CTF, rather than sharing
+ all types that are not in conflict. */
+ bool ctf_share_duplicated;
+
+ /* Compress DWARF debug sections. */
+ enum compressed_debug_section_type compress_debug;
+} ld_config_type;
+
+extern ld_config_type config;
+
+extern FILE * saved_script_handle;
+extern bool force_make_executable;
+
+extern int yyparse (void);
+extern void add_cref (const char *, bfd *, asection *, bfd_vma);
+extern bool handle_asneeded_cref (bfd *, enum notice_asneeded_action);
+extern void output_cref (FILE *);
+extern void check_nocrossrefs (void);
+extern void ld_abort (const char *, int, const char *) ATTRIBUTE_NORETURN;
+
+/* If gcc >= 2.6, we can give a function name, too. */
+#if __GNUC__ < 2 || (__GNUC__ == 2 && __GNUC_MINOR__ < 6)
+#define __PRETTY_FUNCTION__ NULL
+#endif
+
+#undef abort
+#define abort() ld_abort (__FILE__, __LINE__, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)
+
+#endif
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/ld.texi binutils-2.41/ld/ld.texi
--- binutils.orig/ld/ld.texi 2024-05-13 13:03:48.141602288 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/ld.texi 2024-05-13 13:04:08.594633298 +0100
@@ -301,6 +301,7 @@ and the script command language. If @em
are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
message @samp{No input files}.
+@anchor{unrecognised-input-files}
If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
@@ -1146,18 +1147,32 @@ a linker bug report.
@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it),
-unless the script contains @code{INSERT}, so
-@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
-output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
-the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
-specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
-options accumulate.
+unless the script contains @code{INSERT}, so @var{commandfile} must
+specify everything necessary to describe the output file.
+@xref{Scripts}.
+
+If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in the current directory, @code{ld}
+looks for it in the directories specified by any preceding @samp{-L}
+options.
+
+Command line options that appear before the @option{-T} option can
+affect the script, but command line options that appear after it do
+not.
+
+Multiple @samp{-T} options will accumulate if they are augmenting the
+current script, otherwise the last, non-augmenting, @option{-T} option
+will be used.
+
+There are other ways of specifying linker scripts. See
+@xref{--default-script}, @xref{--section-ordering-file} and
+@xref{unrecognised-input-files}.
@kindex -dT @var{script}
@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
@cindex script files
@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
+@anchor{--default-script}
Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
@@ -2487,6 +2502,51 @@ warning and continue with the link.
@end ifset
+@kindex --section-ordering-file
+@item --section-ordering-file=@var{script}
+@anchor{--section-ordering-file}
+This option is used to augment the current linker script with
+additional mapping of input sections to output sections. This file
+must use the same syntax for @code{SECTIONS} as is used in normal
+linker scripts, but it should not do anything other than place input
+sections into output sections. @pxref{SECTIONS}
+
+A second constraint on the section ordering script is that it can only
+reference output sections that are already defined by whichever linker
+script is currently in use. (Ie the default linker script or a script
+specified on the command line). The benefit of the section ordering
+script however is that the input sections are mapped to the start of
+the output sections, so that they can ensure the ordering of sections
+in the output section. For example, imagine that the default linker
+script looks like this:
+
+@smallexample
+SECTIONS @{
+ .text : @{ *(.text.hot) ; *(.text .text.*) @}
+ .data : @{ *(.data.big) ; *(.data .data.*) @}
+ @}
+@end smallexample
+
+Then if a section ordering file like this is used:
+
+@smallexample
+ .text : @{ *(.text.first) ; *(.text.z*) @}
+ .data : @{ foo.o(.data.first) ; *(.data.small) @}
+@end smallexample
+
+This would be equivalent to a linker script like this:
+
+@smallexample
+SECTIONS @{
+ .text : @{ *(.text.first) ; *(.text.z*) ; *(.text.hot) ; *(.text .text.*) @}
+ .data : @{ foo.o(.data.first) ; *(.data.small) ; *(.data.big) ; *(.data .data.*) @}
+ @}
+@end smallexample
+
+The advantage of the section ordering file is that it can be used to
+order those sections that matter to the user without having to worry
+about any other sections, or memory regions, or anything else.
+
@kindex -shared
@kindex -Bshareable
@item -shared
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/ld.texi.orig binutils-2.41/ld/ld.texi.orig
--- binutils.orig/ld/ld.texi.orig 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/ld.texi.orig 2024-05-13 13:03:26.615569650 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,9639 @@
+\input texinfo
+@setfilename ld.info
+@c Copyright (C) 1991-2023 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+@syncodeindex ky cp
+@c man begin INCLUDE
+@include configdoc.texi
+@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
+@include bfdver.texi
+@c man end
+
+@c @smallbook
+
+@macro gcctabopt{body}
+@code{\body\}
+@end macro
+
+@c man begin NAME
+@ifset man
+@c Configure for the generation of man pages
+@set UsesEnvVars
+@set GENERIC
+@set ARM
+@set C6X
+@set CSKY
+@set H8300
+@set HPPA
+@set M68HC11
+@set M68K
+@set MIPS
+@set MMIX
+@set MSP430
+@set NDS32
+@set NIOSII
+@set PDP11
+@set POWERPC
+@set POWERPC64
+@set Renesas
+@set S/390
+@set SPU
+@set TICOFF
+@set WIN32
+@set XTENSA
+@end ifset
+@c man end
+
+@ifnottex
+@dircategory Software development
+@direntry
+* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
+@end direntry
+@end ifnottex
+
+@copying
+This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
+@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
+@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
+@end ifset
+version @value{VERSION}.
+
+Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2023 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
+or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
+with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
+Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
+section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
+@end copying
+@iftex
+@finalout
+@setchapternewpage odd
+@settitle The GNU linker
+@titlepage
+@title The GNU linker
+@sp 1
+@subtitle @code{ld}
+@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
+@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
+@end ifset
+@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
+@author Steve Chamberlain
+@author Ian Lance Taylor
+@page
+
+@tex
+{\parskip=0pt
+\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
+\hfill nickc\@redhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
+\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
+\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
+}
+\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
+@end tex
+
+@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
+@c man begin COPYRIGHT
+Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2023 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
+or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
+with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
+Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
+section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
+@c man end
+
+@end titlepage
+@end iftex
+@contents
+@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
+
+@ifnottex
+@node Top
+@top LD
+This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
+@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
+@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
+@end ifset
+version @value{VERSION}.
+
+This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
+Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
+in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
+
+@menu
+* Overview:: Overview
+* Invocation:: Invocation
+* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
+* Plugins:: Linker Plugins
+@ifset GENERIC
+* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@ifset H8300
+* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
+@end ifset
+@ifset Renesas
+* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
+@end ifset
+@ifset ARM
+* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
+@end ifset
+@ifset M68HC11
+* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
+@end ifset
+@ifset HPPA
+* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
+@end ifset
+@ifset M68K
+* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
+@end ifset
+@ifset MIPS
+* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
+@end ifset
+@ifset POWERPC
+* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
+@end ifset
+@ifset POWERPC64
+* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
+@end ifset
+@ifset S/390
+* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
+@end ifset
+@ifset SPU
+* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
+@end ifset
+@ifset TICOFF
+* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
+@end ifset
+@ifset WIN32
+* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
+@end ifset
+@ifset XTENSA
+* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
+@end ifset
+@end ifclear
+@ifclear SingleFormat
+* BFD:: BFD
+@end ifclear
+@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
+
+* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
+* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
+* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
+* LD Index:: LD Index
+@end menu
+@end ifnottex
+
+@node Overview
+@chapter Overview
+
+@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
+@cindex what is this?
+
+@ifset man
+@c man begin SYNOPSIS
+ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
+@c man end
+
+@c man begin SEEALSO
+ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
+the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
+@file{ld}.
+@c man end
+@end ifset
+
+@c man begin DESCRIPTION
+
+@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
+their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
+compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
+
+@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
+a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
+to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
+
+@ifset man
+@c For the man only
+This man page does not describe the command language; see the
+@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
+language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
+@end ifset
+
+@ifclear SingleFormat
+This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
+to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
+write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
+@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
+available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
+@end ifclear
+
+Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
+linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
+execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
+@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
+(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
+
+@c man end
+
+@node Invocation
+@chapter Invocation
+
+@c man begin DESCRIPTION
+
+The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
+and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
+you have many choices to control its behavior.
+
+@c man end
+
+@ifset UsesEnvVars
+@menu
+* Options:: Command-line Options
+* Environment:: Environment Variables
+@end menu
+
+@node Options
+@section Command-line Options
+@end ifset
+
+@cindex command line
+@cindex options
+
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+
+The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
+practice few of them are used in any particular context.
+@cindex standard Unix system
+For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
+object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
+link a file @code{hello.o}:
+
+@smallexample
+ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
+@end smallexample
+
+This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
+result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
+the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
+directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
+
+Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
+point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
+as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
+which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
+files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
+different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
+occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
+option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
+noted in the descriptions below.
+
+@cindex object files
+Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
+together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
+options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
+an option and its argument.
+
+Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
+specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
+and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
+are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
+message @samp{No input files}.
+
+If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
+assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
+augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
+linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
+permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
+or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
+@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
+script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
+extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
+to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
+the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
+
+For options whose names are a single letter,
+option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
+whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
+option that requires them.
+
+For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
+precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
+@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
+this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
+only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
+@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
+name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
+output.
+
+Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
+option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
+immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
+@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
+Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
+accepted.
+
+Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
+(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
+prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
+compiler driver) like this:
+
+@smallexample
+ gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
+@end smallexample
+
+This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
+silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
+may also arise when passing options that require values through a
+driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
+a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
+and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
+the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
+
+@smallexample
+ gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
+@end smallexample
+
+Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
+linker:
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+@include at-file.texi
+
+@kindex -a @var{keyword}
+@item -a @var{keyword}
+This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
+argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
+@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
+@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
+to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
+
+@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
+@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
+Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
+@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
+specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
+will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
+finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
+it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
+This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
+interface.
+
+@ifclear SingleFormat
+@cindex binary input format
+@kindex -b @var{format}
+@kindex --format=@var{format}
+@cindex input format
+@cindex input format
+@item -b @var{input-format}
+@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
+@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
+file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
+@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
+that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
+configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
+to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
+default input format the most usual format on each machine.
+@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
+supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
+formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
+@xref{BFD}.
+
+You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
+binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
+linking object files of different formats), by including
+@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
+particular format.
+
+The default format is taken from the environment variable
+@code{GNUTARGET}.
+@ifset UsesEnvVars
+@xref{Environment}.
+@end ifset
+You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
+@code{TARGET};
+@ifclear man
+see @ref{Format Commands}.
+@end ifclear
+@end ifclear
+
+@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
+@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
+@cindex compatibility, MRI
+@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
+@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
+For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
+files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
+@ifclear man
+@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
+@end ifclear
+@ifset man
+the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
+@end ifset
+Introduce MRI script files with
+the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
+scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
+If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
+specified by any @samp{-L} options.
+
+@cindex common allocation
+@kindex -d
+@kindex -dc
+@kindex -dp
+@item -d
+@itemx -dc
+@itemx -dp
+These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
+compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
+even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
+script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
+@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
+
+@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
+@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
+@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
+@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
+Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
+@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
+specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
+will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
+option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
+The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
+
+@kindex --enable-linker-version
+@item --enable-linker-version
+Enables the @code{LINKER_VERSION} linker script directive, described
+in @ref{Output Section Data}. If this directive is used in a linker
+script and this option has been enabled then a string containing the
+linker version will be inserted at the current point.
+
+Note - this location of this option on the linker command line is
+significant. It will only affect linker scripts that come after it on
+the command line, or which are built into the linker.
+
+@kindex --disable-linker-version
+@item --disable-linker-version
+Disables the @code{LINKER_VERSION} linker script directive, so that it
+does not insert a version string. This is the default.
+
+@kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions
+@item --enable-non-contiguous-regions
+This option avoids generating an error if an input section does not
+fit a matching output section. The linker tries to allocate the input
+section to subseque nt matching output sections, and generates an
+error only if no output section is large enough. This is useful when
+several non-contiguous memory regions are available and the input
+section does not require a particular one. The order in which input
+sections are evaluated does not change, for instance:
+
+@smallexample
+ MEMORY @{
+ MEM1 (rwx) : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x14
+ MEM2 (rwx) : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x40
+ MEM3 (rwx) : ORIGIN = 0x2000, LENGTH = 0x40
+ @}
+ SECTIONS @{
+ mem1 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM1
+ mem2 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
+ mem3 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM3
+ @}
+
+ with input sections:
+ .data.1: size 8
+ .data.2: size 0x10
+ .data.3: size 4
+
+ results in .data.1 affected to mem1, and .data.2 and .data.3
+ affected to mem2, even though .data.3 would fit in mem3.
+@end smallexample
+
+This option is incompatible with INSERT statements because it changes
+the way input sections are mapped to output sections.
+
+@kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
+@item --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
+This option enables warnings when
+@code{--enable-non-contiguous-regions} allows possibly unexpected
+matches in sections mapping, potentially leading to silently
+discarding a section instead of failing because it does not fit any
+output region.
+
+@cindex entry point, from command line
+@kindex -e @var{entry}
+@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
+@item -e @var{entry}
+@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
+Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
+program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
+named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
+and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
+base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
+@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
+and other ways of specifying the entry point.
+
+@kindex --exclude-libs
+@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
+Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
+exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
+@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
+automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
+port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
+explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
+option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
+be treated as hidden.
+
+@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
+@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
+Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
+should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
+into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
+may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
+used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
+the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
+match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
+command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
+of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
+regardless of this option.
+
+@cindex dynamic symbol table
+@kindex -E
+@kindex --export-dynamic
+@kindex --no-export-dynamic
+@item -E
+@itemx --export-dynamic
+@itemx --no-export-dynamic
+When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
+option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
+all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
+set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
+
+If you do not use either of these options (or use the
+@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
+dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
+referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
+
+If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
+back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
+dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
+linking the program itself.
+
+You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
+be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
+See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
+
+Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
+support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
+the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
+
+@kindex --export-dynamic-symbol=@var{glob}
+@cindex export dynamic symbol
+@item --export-dynamic-symbol=@var{glob}
+When creating a dynamically linked executable, symbols matching
+@var{glob} will be added to the dynamic symbol table. When creating a
+shared library, references to symbols matching @var{glob} will not be
+bound to the definitions within the shared library. This option is a
+no-op when creating a shared library and @samp{-Bsymbolic} or
+@samp{--dynamic-list} are not specified. This option is only meaningful
+on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
+
+@kindex --export-dynamic-symbol-list=@var{file}
+@cindex export dynamic symbol list
+@item --export-dynamic-symbol-list=@var{file}
+Specify a @samp{--export-dynamic-symbol} for each pattern in the file.
+The format of the file is the same as the version node without
+scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
+
+@ifclear SingleFormat
+@cindex big-endian objects
+@cindex endianness
+@kindex -EB
+@item -EB
+Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
+
+@cindex little-endian objects
+@kindex -EL
+@item -EL
+Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
+@end ifclear
+
+@kindex -f @var{name}
+@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
+@item -f @var{name}
+@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
+When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
+to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
+table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
+symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
+
+If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
+run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
+the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
+first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
+@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
+in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
+Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
+implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
+machine-specific performance.
+
+This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
+will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
+
+@kindex -F @var{name}
+@kindex --filter=@var{name}
+@item -F @var{name}
+@itemx --filter=@var{name}
+When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
+the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
+of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
+on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
+
+If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
+run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
+dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
+filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
+found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
+used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
+@var{name}.
+
+Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
+toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
+object files.
+@ifclear SingleFormat
+The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
+@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
+@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
+environment variable.
+@end ifclear
+The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
+creating an ELF shared object.
+
+@cindex finalization function
+@kindex -fini=@var{name}
+@item -fini=@var{name}
+When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
+executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
+address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
+the function to call.
+
+@kindex -g
+@item -g
+Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
+
+@kindex -G @var{value}
+@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
+@cindex object size
+@item -G @var{value}
+@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
+Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
+@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
+MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
+sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
+
+@cindex runtime library name
+@kindex -h @var{name}
+@kindex -soname=@var{name}
+@item -h @var{name}
+@itemx -soname=@var{name}
+When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
+the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
+which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
+linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
+field rather than using the file name given to the linker.
+
+@kindex -i
+@cindex incremental link
+@item -i
+Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
+
+@cindex initialization function
+@kindex -init=@var{name}
+@item -init=@var{name}
+When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
+executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
+of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
+function to call.
+
+@cindex archive files, from cmd line
+@kindex -l @var{namespec}
+@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
+@item -l @var{namespec}
+@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
+Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
+list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
+If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
+will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
+will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
+
+On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
+files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
+and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
+called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
+@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
+indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
+to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
+@var{filename}.
+
+The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
+specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
+was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
+command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
+archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
+the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
+
+See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
+archives multiple times.
+
+You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
+
+@ifset GENERIC
+This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
+if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
+behaviour of the AIX linker.
+@end ifset
+
+@cindex search directory, from cmd line
+@kindex -L @var{dir}
+@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
+@item -L @var{searchdir}
+@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
+Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
+for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
+option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
+in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
+on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
+@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
+order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
+how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
+option is specified.
+
+If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
+prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
+@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
+
+@ifset UsesEnvVars
+The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
+@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
+some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
+@end ifset
+
+The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
+@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
+at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
+
+@cindex emulation
+@kindex -m @var{emulation}
+@item -m @var{emulation}
+Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
+emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
+
+If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
+@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
+
+Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
+configured.
+
+@cindex remapping inputs
+@kindex --remap-inputs=@file{pattern}=@file{filename}
+@kindex --remap-inputs-file=@file{file}
+@item --remap-inputs=@file{pattern}=@file{filename}
+@itemx --remap-inputs-file=@file{file}
+These options allow the names of input files to be changed before the
+linker attempts to open them. The option
+@option{--remap-inputs=foo.o=bar.o} will cause any attempt to load a
+file called @file{foo.o} to instead try to load a file called
+@file{bar.o}. Wildcard patterns are permitted in the first filename,
+so @option{--remap-inputs=foo*.o=bar.o} will rename any input file that
+matches @file{foo*.o} to @file{bar.o}.
+
+An alternative form of the option
+@option{--remap-inputs-file=filename} allows the remappings to be read
+from a file. Each line in the file can contain a single remapping.
+Blank lines are ignored. Anything from a hash character (@samp{#}) to
+the end of a line is considered to be a comment and is also ignored.
+The mapping pattern can be separated from the filename by whitespace
+or an equals (@samp{=}) character.
+
+The options can be specified multiple times. Their contents
+accumulate. The remappings will be processed in the order in which
+they occur on the command line, and if they come from a file, in the
+order in which they occur in the file. If a match is made, no further
+checking for that filename will be performed.
+
+If the replacement filename is @file{/dev/null} or just @file{NUL}
+then the remapping will actually cause the input file to be ignored.
+This can be a convenient way to experiment with removing input files
+from a complicated build environment.
+
+Note that this option is position dependent and only affects filenames
+that come after it on the command line. Thus:
+
+@smallexample
+ ld foo.o --remap-inputs=foo.o=bar.o
+@end smallexample
+
+Will have no effect, whereas:
+
+@smallexample
+ ld --remap-inputs=foo.o=bar.o foo.o
+@end smallexample
+
+Will rename the input file @file{foo.o} to @file{bar.o}.
+
+Note - these options also affect files referenced by @emph{INPUT}
+statements in linker scripts. But since linker scripts are processed
+after the entire command line is read, the position of the remap
+options on the command line is not significant.
+
+If the @option{verbose} option is enabled then any mappings that match
+will be reported, although again the @option{verbose} option needs to
+be enabled on the command line @emph{before} the remaped filenames
+appear.
+
+If the @option{-Map} or @option{--print-map} options are enabled then
+the remapping list will be included in the map output.
+
+@cindex link map
+@kindex -M
+@kindex --print-map
+@item -M
+@itemx --print-map
+Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
+information about the link, including the following:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+Where object files are mapped into memory.
+@item
+How common symbols are allocated.
+@item
+All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
+which caused the archive member to be brought in.
+@item
+The values assigned to symbols.
+
+Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
+involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
+have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
+linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
+of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
+the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
+linker script containing:
+
+@smallexample
+ foo = 1
+ foo = foo * 4
+ foo = foo + 8
+@end smallexample
+
+will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
+option is used:
+
+@smallexample
+ 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
+ [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
+ [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
+@end smallexample
+
+See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
+scripts.
+
+@item
+How GNU properties are merged.
+
+When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
+.note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
+These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
+
+@smallexample
+Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
+@end smallexample
+
+This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
+merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
+is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
+
+@smallexample
+Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
+@end smallexample
+
+This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
+when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
+is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
+@end itemize
+
+@cindex link map discarded
+@kindex --print-map-discarded
+@kindex --no-print-map-discarded
+@item --print-map-discarded
+@itemx --no-print-map-discarded
+Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
+in the link map. Enabled by default.
+
+@kindex --print-map-locals
+@kindex --no-print-map-locals
+@item --print-map-locals
+@itemx --no-print-map-locals
+Print (or do not print) local symbols in the link map. Local symbols
+will have the text @samp{(local)} printed before their name, and will
+be listed after all of the global symbols in a given section.
+Temporary local symbols (typically those that start with @samp{.L})
+will not be included in the output. Disabled by default.
+
+@kindex -n
+@cindex read-only text
+@cindex NMAGIC
+@kindex --nmagic
+@item -n
+@itemx --nmagic
+Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
+libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
+mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
+
+@kindex -N
+@kindex --omagic
+@cindex read/write from cmd line
+@cindex OMAGIC
+@item -N
+@itemx --omagic
+Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
+not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
+libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
+mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
+is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
+specification published by Microsoft.
+
+@kindex --no-omagic
+@cindex OMAGIC
+@item --no-omagic
+This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
+sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
+be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
+shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
+
+@kindex -o @var{output}
+@kindex --output=@var{output}
+@cindex naming the output file
+@item -o @var{output}
+@itemx --output=@var{output}
+Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
+option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
+script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
+
+@kindex --dependency-file=@var{depfile}
+@cindex dependency file
+@item --dependency-file=@var{depfile}
+Write a @dfn{dependency file} to @var{depfile}. This file contains a rule
+suitable for @code{make} describing the output file and all the input files
+that were read to produce it. The output is similar to the compiler's
+output with @samp{-M -MP} (@pxref{Preprocessor Options,, Options
+Controlling the Preprocessor, gcc.info, Using the GNU Compiler
+Collection}). Note that there is no option like the compiler's @samp{-MM},
+to exclude ``system files'' (which is not a well-specified concept in the
+linker, unlike ``system headers'' in the compiler). So the output from
+@samp{--dependency-file} is always specific to the exact state of the
+installation where it was produced, and should not be copied into
+distributed makefiles without careful editing.
+
+@kindex -O @var{level}
+@cindex generating optimized output
+@item -O @var{level}
+If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
+the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
+should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
+option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
+the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
+no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
+of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
+
+@kindex -plugin @var{name}
+@item -plugin @var{name}
+Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
+the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
+automatically added by the complier, when using link time
+optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
+wish.
+
+Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
+from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
+@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
+those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
+copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
+based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
+just copy in the newest one.
+
+@kindex --push-state
+@cindex push state governing input file handling
+@item --push-state
+The @option{--push-state} allows one to preserve the current state of the
+flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
+restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
+
+The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
+@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
+@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
+@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
+@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
+@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
+
+One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
+used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
+listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
+something as follows:
+
+@smallexample
+-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
+@end smallexample
+
+@kindex --pop-state
+@cindex pop state governing input file handling
+@item --pop-state
+Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
+flags governing input file handling.
+
+@kindex -q
+@kindex --emit-relocs
+@cindex retain relocations in final executable
+@item -q
+@itemx --emit-relocs
+Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
+Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
+order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
+in larger executables.
+
+This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
+
+@kindex --force-dynamic
+@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
+@item --force-dynamic
+Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
+to VxWorks targets.
+
+@cindex partial link
+@cindex relocatable output
+@kindex -r
+@kindex --relocatable
+@item -r
+@itemx --relocatable
+Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
+turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
+linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
+magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
+@code{OMAGIC}.
+@c ; see @option{-N}.
+If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
+linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
+constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
+
+When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
+partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
+relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
+example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
+with input files in other formats at all.
+
+This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
+
+@kindex -R @var{file}
+@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
+@cindex symbol-only input
+@item -R @var{filename}
+@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
+Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
+relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
+to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
+programs. You may use this option more than once.
+
+For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
+followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
+the @option{-rpath} option.
+
+@kindex -s
+@kindex --strip-all
+@cindex strip all symbols
+@item -s
+@itemx --strip-all
+Omit all symbol information from the output file.
+
+@kindex -S
+@kindex --strip-debug
+@cindex strip debugger symbols
+@item -S
+@itemx --strip-debug
+Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
+
+@kindex --strip-discarded
+@kindex --no-strip-discarded
+@item --strip-discarded
+@itemx --no-strip-discarded
+Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
+Enabled by default.
+
+@kindex -t
+@kindex --trace
+@cindex input files, displaying
+@item -t
+@itemx --trace
+Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
+@samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
+@samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
+and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
+a linker bug report.
+
+@kindex -T @var{script}
+@kindex --script=@var{script}
+@cindex script files
+@item -T @var{scriptfile}
+@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
+Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
+@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it),
+unless the script contains @code{INSERT}, so
+@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
+output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
+the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
+specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
+options accumulate.
+
+@kindex -dT @var{script}
+@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
+@cindex script files
+@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
+@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
+Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
+
+This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
+processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
+command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
+@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
+behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
+command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
+the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
+@samp{gcc}).
+
+@kindex -u @var{symbol}
+@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
+@cindex undefined symbol
+@item -u @var{symbol}
+@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
+Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
+symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
+modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
+different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
+option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
+
+If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
+into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
+undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
+instead.
+
+@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
+@cindex symbols, require defined
+@cindex defined symbol
+@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
+Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
+is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
+is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
+and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
+@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
+can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
+
+@kindex -Ur
+@cindex constructors
+@item -Ur
+
+For programs that do not use constructors or destructors, or for ELF
+based systems this option is equivalent to @option{-r}: it generates
+relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in turn serve as
+input to @command{ld}. For other binaries however the @option{-Ur}
+option is similar to @option{-r} but it also resolves references to
+constructors and destructors.
+
+For those systems where @option{-r} and @option{-Ur} behave
+differently, it does not work to use @option{-Ur} on files that were
+themselves linked with @option{-Ur}; once the constructor table has
+been built, it cannot be added to. Use @option{-Ur} only for the last
+partial link, and @option{-r} for the others.
+
+@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
+@cindex orphan sections
+@cindex sections, orphan
+@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
+Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
+specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
+
+@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
+
+@table @code
+@item place
+Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
+the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
+@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
+
+@item discard
+All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
+@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
+
+@item warn
+The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
+issue a warning.
+
+@item error
+The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
+@end table
+
+The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
+
+@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
+@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
+Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
+@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
+missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
+specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
+multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
+input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
+in a linker script.
+
+@kindex -v
+@kindex -V
+@kindex --version
+@cindex version
+@item -v
+@itemx --version
+@itemx -V
+Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
+lists the supported emulations. See also the description of the
+@option{--enable-linker-version} in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}
+which can be used to insert the linker version string into a binary.
+
+@kindex -x
+@kindex --discard-all
+@cindex deleting local symbols
+@item -x
+@itemx --discard-all
+Delete all local symbols.
+
+@kindex -X
+@kindex --discard-locals
+@cindex local symbols, deleting
+@item -X
+@itemx --discard-locals
+Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
+system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
+or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
+
+@kindex -y @var{symbol}
+@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
+@cindex symbol tracing
+@item -y @var{symbol}
+@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
+Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
+option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
+to prepend an underscore.
+
+This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
+don't know where the reference is coming from.
+
+@kindex -Y @var{path}
+@item -Y @var{path}
+Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
+for Solaris compatibility.
+
+@kindex -z @var{keyword}
+@item -z @var{keyword}
+The recognized keywords are:
+@table @samp
+
+@item call-nop=prefix-addr
+@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
+@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
+@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
+Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
+to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
+@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
+@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
+@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
+@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
+Supported for i386 and x86_64.
+
+@item cet-report=none
+@itemx cet-report=warning
+@itemx cet-report=error
+Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
+GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
+section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
+linker not report missing properties in input files.
+@option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
+missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
+the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
+Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
+GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
+turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
+Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
+
+@item combreloc
+@itemx nocombreloc
+Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
+dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
+
+@item common
+@itemx nocommon
+Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
+link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
+
+@item common-page-size=@var{value}
+Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
+layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
+using pages of this size.
+
+@item defs
+Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
+is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
+This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
+
+@item dynamic-undefined-weak
+@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
+Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
+if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
+by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
+@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
+may default to either option being in force, or make some other
+selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
+these options.
+
+@item execstack
+Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
+
+@item global
+This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
+the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
+of subsequently loaded libraries.
+
+@item globalaudit
+This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
+This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
+setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
+tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
+the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
+all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
+
+@item ibtplt
+Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
+Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
+
+@item ibt
+Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
+to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
+Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
+
+@item indirect-extern-access
+@itemx noindirect-extern-access
+Generate GNU_PROPERTY_1_NEEDED_INDIRECT_EXTERN_ACCESS in
+.note.gnu.property section to indicate that object file requires
+canonical function pointers and cannot be used with copy relocation.
+This option also implies @option{noextern-protected-data} and
+@option{nocopyreloc}. Supported for i386 and x86-64.
+
+@option{noindirect-extern-access} removes
+GNU_PROPERTY_1_NEEDED_INDIRECT_EXTERN_ACCESS from .note.gnu.property
+section.
+
+@item initfirst
+This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
+It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
+before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
+the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
+the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
+objects.
+
+@item interpose
+Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
+so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
+libraries not so marked.
+
+@item unique
+@itemx nounique
+When generating a shared library or other dynamically loadable ELF
+object mark it as one that should (by default) only ever be loaded once,
+and only in the main namespace (when using @code{dlmopen}). This is
+primarily used to mark fundamental libraries such as libc, libpthread et
+al which do not usually function correctly unless they are the sole instances
+of themselves. This behaviour can be overridden by the @code{dlmopen} caller
+and does not apply to certain loading mechanisms (such as audit libraries).
+
+@item lam-u48
+Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_LAM_U48 in .note.gnu.property section
+to indicate compatibility with Intel LAM_U48. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
+
+@item lam-u57
+Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_LAM_U57 in .note.gnu.property section
+to indicate compatibility with Intel LAM_U57. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
+
+@item lam-u48-report=none
+@itemx lam-u48-report=warning
+@itemx lam-u48-report=error
+Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_LAM_U48
+property in input .note.gnu.property section.
+@option{lam-u48-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
+linker not report missing properties in input files.
+@option{lam-u48-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
+missing properties in input files. @option{lam-u48-report=error} will
+make the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
+Supported for Linux/x86_64.
+
+@item lam-u57-report=none
+@itemx lam-u57-report=warning
+@itemx lam-u57-report=error
+Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_LAM_U57
+property in input .note.gnu.property section.
+@option{lam-u57-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
+linker not report missing properties in input files.
+@option{lam-u57-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
+missing properties in input files. @option{lam-u57-report=error} will
+make the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
+Supported for Linux/x86_64.
+
+@item lam-report=none
+@itemx lam-report=warning
+@itemx lam-report=error
+Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_LAM_U48 and
+GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_LAM_U57 properties in input .note.gnu.property
+section. @option{lam-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
+linker not report missing properties in input files.
+@option{lam-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
+missing properties in input files. @option{lam-report=error} will make
+the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
+Supported for Linux/x86_64.
+
+@item lazy
+When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
+dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
+the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
+Lazy binding is the default.
+
+@item loadfltr
+Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
+
+@item max-page-size=@var{value}
+Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
+
+@item muldefs
+Allow multiple definitions.
+
+@item nocopyreloc
+Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
+defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
+
+@item nodefaultlib
+Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
+should ignore any default library search paths.
+
+@item nodelete
+Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
+
+@item nodlopen
+Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
+
+@item nodump
+Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
+
+@item noexecstack
+Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
+
+@item noextern-protected-data
+Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
+library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
+used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
+generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
+module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
+i386 and x86-64.
+
+@item noreloc-overflow
+Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
+relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
+overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
+
+@item now
+When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
+dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
+when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
+function call resolution to the point when the function is first
+called.
+
+@item origin
+Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
+
+@item pack-relative-relocs
+@itemx nopack-relative-relocs
+Generate compact relative relocation in position-independent executable
+and shared library. It adds @code{DT_RELR}, @code{DT_RELRSZ} and
+@code{DT_RELRENT} entries to the dynamic section. It is ignored when
+building position-dependent executable and relocatable output.
+@option{nopack-relative-relocs} is the default, which disables compact
+relative relocation. When linked against the GNU C Library, a
+GLIBC_ABI_DT_RELR symbol version dependency on the shared C Library is
+added to the output. Supported for i386 and x86-64.
+
+@item relro
+@itemx norelro
+Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
+specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
+relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
+than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
+Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
+
+@item report-relative-reloc
+Report dynamic relative relocations generated by linker. Supported for
+Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
+
+@item sectionheader
+@itemx nosectionheader
+Generate section header. Don't generate section header if
+@samp{nosectionheader} is used. @option{sectionheader} is the default.
+
+@item separate-code
+@itemx noseparate-code
+Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
+specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
+be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
+code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
+
+@item shstk
+Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
+to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
+Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
+
+@item stack-size=@var{value}
+Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
+Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
+@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
+
+@item start-stop-gc
+@itemx nostart-stop-gc
+@cindex start-stop-gc
+When @samp{--gc-sections} is in effect, a reference from a retained
+section to @code{__start_SECNAME} or @code{__stop_SECNAME} causes all
+input sections named @code{SECNAME} to also be retained, if
+@code{SECNAME} is representable as a C identifier and either
+@code{__start_SECNAME} or @code{__stop_SECNAME} is synthesized by the
+linker. @samp{-z start-stop-gc} disables this effect, allowing
+sections to be garbage collected as if the special synthesized symbols
+were not defined. @samp{-z start-stop-gc} has no effect on a
+definition of @code{__start_SECNAME} or @code{__stop_SECNAME} in an
+object file or linker script. Such a definition will prevent the
+linker providing a synthesized @code{__start_SECNAME} or
+@code{__stop_SECNAME} respectively, and therefore the special
+treatment by garbage collection for those references.
+
+@item start-stop-visibility=@var{value}
+@cindex visibility
+@cindex ELF symbol visibility
+Specify the ELF symbol visibility for synthesized
+@code{__start_SECNAME} and @code{__stop_SECNAME} symbols (@pxref{Input
+Section Example}). @var{value} must be exactly @samp{default},
+@samp{internal}, @samp{hidden}, or @samp{protected}. If no @samp{-z
+start-stop-visibility} option is given, @samp{protected} is used for
+compatibility with historical practice. However, it's highly
+recommended to use @samp{-z start-stop-visibility=hidden} in new
+programs and shared libraries so that these symbols are not exported
+between shared objects, which is not usually what's intended.
+
+@item text
+@itemx notext
+@itemx textoff
+Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the position-independent
+or shared object has dynamic relocations in read-only sections. Don't
+report an error if @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
+
+@item undefs
+Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
+either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
+This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
+
+@item unique-symbol
+@itemx nounique-symbol
+Avoid duplicated local symbol names in the symbol string table. Append
+".@code{number}" to duplicated local symbol names if @samp{unique-symbol}
+is used. @option{nounique-symbol} is the default.
+
+@item x86-64-baseline
+@item x86-64-v2
+@item x86-64-v3
+@itemx x86-64-v4
+Specify the x86-64 ISA level needed in .note.gnu.property section.
+@option{x86-64-baseline} generates @code{GNU_PROPERTY_X86_ISA_1_BASELINE}.
+@option{x86-64-v2} generates @code{GNU_PROPERTY_X86_ISA_1_V2}.
+@option{x86-64-v3} generates @code{GNU_PROPERTY_X86_ISA_1_V3}.
+@option{x86-64-v4} generates @code{GNU_PROPERTY_X86_ISA_1_V4}.
+Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
+
+@end table
+
+Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
+
+@kindex -(
+@cindex groups of archives
+@item -( @var{archives} -)
+@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
+The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
+either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
+
+The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
+references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
+the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
+archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
+object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
+would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
+they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
+resolved.
+
+Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
+it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
+more archives.
+
+@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
+@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
+@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
+@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
+Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
+recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
+and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
+the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
+behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
+so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
+restore the old behaviour.
+
+@kindex --as-needed
+@kindex --no-as-needed
+@item --as-needed
+@itemx --no-as-needed
+This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
+on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
+the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
+on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
+needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
+emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
+non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
+the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
+non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
+Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
+the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
+needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
+from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
+
+Note: On Linux based systems the @option{--as-needed} option also has
+an affect on the behaviour of the @option{--rpath} and
+@option{--rpath-link} options. See the description of
+@option{--rpath-link} for more details.
+
+@kindex --add-needed
+@kindex --no-add-needed
+@item --add-needed
+@itemx --no-add-needed
+These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
+their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
+options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
+and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
+
+@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
+@item -assert @var{keyword}
+This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
+
+@kindex -Bdynamic
+@kindex -dy
+@kindex -call_shared
+@item -Bdynamic
+@itemx -dy
+@itemx -call_shared
+Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
+for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
+default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
+for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
+multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
+@option{-l} options which follow it.
+
+@kindex -Bgroup
+@item -Bgroup
+Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
+section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
+object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
+@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
+only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
+
+@kindex -Bstatic
+@kindex -dn
+@kindex -non_shared
+@kindex -static
+@item -Bstatic
+@itemx -dn
+@itemx -non_shared
+@itemx -static
+Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
+platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
+variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
+may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
+library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
+option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
+option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
+shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
+references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
+libraries.
+
+@kindex -Bsymbolic
+@item -Bsymbolic
+When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
+definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
+for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
+within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
+platforms which support shared libraries.
+
+@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
+@item -Bsymbolic-functions
+When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
+symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
+This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
+libraries.
+
+@kindex -Bno-symbolic
+@item -Bno-symbolic
+This option can cancel previously specified @samp{-Bsymbolic} and
+@samp{-Bsymbolic-functions}.
+
+@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
+@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
+Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
+typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
+global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
+within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
+to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
+in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
+which support shared libraries.
+
+The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
+scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
+
+@kindex --dynamic-list-data
+@item --dynamic-list-data
+Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
+
+@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
+@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
+Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
+is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
+
+@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
+@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
+Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
+
+@kindex --check-sections
+@kindex --no-check-sections
+@item --check-sections
+@itemx --no-check-sections
+Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
+been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
+perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
+suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
+allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
+restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
+Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
+force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
+option.
+
+@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
+@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
+@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
+@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
+This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
+by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
+command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
+output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
+input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
+specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
+follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
+behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
+
+This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
+libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
+mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
+their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
+required by the output binary. With the default setting however
+the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
+dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
+symbols.
+
+@cindex cross reference table
+@kindex --cref
+@item --cref
+Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
+generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
+Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
+
+The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
+easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
+sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
+symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
+definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
+where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
+symbol are listed.
+
+@cindex ctf variables
+@kindex --ctf-variables
+@kindex --no-ctf-variables
+@item --ctf-variables
+@item --no-ctf-variables
+The CTF debuginfo format supports a section which encodes the names and
+types of variables found in the program which do not appear in any symbol
+table. These variables clearly cannot be looked up by address by
+conventional debuggers, so the space used for their types and names is
+usually wasted: the types are usually small but the names are often not.
+@option{--ctf-variables} causes the generation of such a section.
+The default behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-ctf-variables}.
+
+@cindex ctf type sharing
+@kindex --ctf-share-types
+@item --ctf-share-types=@var{method}
+Adjust the method used to share types between translation units in CTF.
+
+@table @samp
+@item share-unconflicted
+Put all types that do not have ambiguous definitions into the shared dictionary,
+where debuggers can easily access them, even if they only occur in one
+translation unit. This is the default.
+
+@item share-duplicated
+Put only types that occur in multiple translation units into the shared
+dictionary: types with only one definition go into per-translation-unit
+dictionaries. Types with ambiguous definitions in multiple translation units
+always go into per-translation-unit dictionaries. This tends to make the CTF
+larger, but may reduce the amount of CTF in the shared dictionary. For very
+large projects this may speed up opening the CTF and save memory in the CTF
+consumer at runtime.
+@end table
+
+@cindex common allocation
+@kindex --no-define-common
+@item --no-define-common
+This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
+The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
+@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
+
+The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
+the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
+of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
+forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
+Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
+from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
+This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
+and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
+duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
+paths for runtime symbol resolution.
+
+@cindex group allocation in linker script
+@cindex section groups
+@cindex COMDAT
+@kindex --force-group-allocation
+@item --force-group-allocation
+This option causes the linker to place section group members like
+normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
+default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
+change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
+command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
+effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
+
+@cindex symbols, from command line
+@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
+@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
+Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
+address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
+times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
+limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
+context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
+symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
+constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
+using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
+@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
+equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
+
+The linker processes @samp{--defsym} arguments and @samp{-T} arguments
+in order, placing @samp{--defsym} before @samp{-T} will define the
+symbol before the linker script from @samp{-T} is processed, while
+placing @samp{--defsym} after @samp{-T} will define the symbol after
+the linker script has been processed. This difference has
+consequences for expressions within the linker script that use the
+@samp{--defsym} symbols, which order is correct will depend on what
+you are trying to achieve.
+
+@cindex demangling, from command line
+@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
+@kindex --no-demangle
+@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
+@itemx --no-demangle
+These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
+and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
+present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
+underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
+mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
+different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
+to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
+demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
+is set. These options may be used to override the default.
+
+@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
+@kindex -I@var{file}
+@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
+@item -I@var{file}
+@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
+Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
+generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
+linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
+doing.
+
+@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
+@item --no-dynamic-linker
+When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
+linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
+executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
+entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
+
+@kindex --embedded-relocs
+@item --embedded-relocs
+This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
+that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
+is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
+targets.
+
+@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
+@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
+Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
+in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
+
+@kindex --fatal-warnings
+@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
+@item --fatal-warnings
+@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
+Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
+with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
+
+@kindex -w
+@kindex --no-warnings
+@item -w
+@itemx --no-warnings
+Do not display any warning or error messages. This overrides
+@option{--fatal-warnings} if it has been enabled. This option can be
+used when it is known that the output binary will not work, but there
+is still a need to create it.
+
+@kindex --force-exe-suffix
+@item --force-exe-suffix
+Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
+
+If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
+@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
+the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
+option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
+Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
+it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
+
+@kindex --gc-sections
+@kindex --no-gc-sections
+@cindex garbage collection
+@item --gc-sections
+@itemx --no-gc-sections
+Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
+targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
+performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
+@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
+collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
+implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
+
+@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
+examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
+symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
+command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
+referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
+libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
+referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
+the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
+relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
+@samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
+
+This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
+@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
+specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
+@samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
+command in the linker script.
+
+As a GNU extension, ELF input sections marked with the
+@code{SHF_GNU_RETAIN} flag will not be garbage collected.
+
+@kindex --print-gc-sections
+@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
+@cindex garbage collection
+@item --print-gc-sections
+@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
+List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
+printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
+collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
+default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
+be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
+line.
+
+@kindex --gc-keep-exported
+@cindex garbage collection
+@item --gc-keep-exported
+When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
+collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
+default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
+executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
+collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
+Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
+it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
+ELF format targets.
+
+@kindex --print-output-format
+@cindex output format
+@item --print-output-format
+Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
+other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
+in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
+
+@kindex --print-memory-usage
+@cindex memory usage
+@item --print-memory-usage
+Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
+the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
+quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
+headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
+parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
+
+@smallexample
+Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
+ ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
+ RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
+@end smallexample
+
+@cindex help
+@cindex usage
+@kindex --help
+@item --help
+Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
+
+@kindex --target-help
+@item --target-help
+Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
+
+@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
+@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
+Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
+@option{-M} option, above. If @var{mapfile} is just the character
+@code{-} then the map will be written to stdout.
+
+Specifying a directory as @var{mapfile} causes the linker map to be
+written as a file inside the directory. Normally name of the file
+inside the directory is computed as the basename of the @var{output}
+file with @code{.map} appended. If however the special character
+@code{%} is used then this will be replaced by the full path of the
+output file. Additionally if there are any characters after the
+@var{%} symbol then @code{.map} will no longer be appended.
+
+@smallexample
+ -o foo.exe -Map=bar [Creates ./bar]
+ -o ../dir/foo.exe -Map=bar [Creates ./bar]
+ -o foo.exe -Map=../dir [Creates ../dir/foo.exe.map]
+ -o ../dir2/foo.exe -Map=../dir [Creates ../dir/foo.exe.map]
+ -o foo.exe -Map=% [Creates ./foo.exe.map]
+ -o ../dir/foo.exe -Map=% [Creates ../dir/foo.exe.map]
+ -o foo.exe -Map=%.bar [Creates ./foo.exe.bar]
+ -o ../dir/foo.exe -Map=%.bar [Creates ../dir/foo.exe.bar]
+ -o ../dir2/foo.exe -Map=../dir/% [Creates ../dir/../dir2/foo.exe.map]
+ -o ../dir2/foo.exe -Map=../dir/%.bar [Creates ../dir/../dir2/foo.exe.bar]
+@end smallexample
+
+It is an error to specify more than one @code{%} character.
+
+If the map file already exists then it will be overwritten by this
+operation.
+
+@cindex memory usage
+@kindex --no-keep-memory
+@item --no-keep-memory
+@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
+symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
+instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
+necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
+while linking a large executable.
+
+@kindex --no-undefined
+@kindex -z defs
+@kindex -z undefs
+@item --no-undefined
+@itemx -z defs
+Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
+is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
+The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
+behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
+libraries being linked in.
+
+The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
+
+@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
+@kindex -z muldefs
+@item --allow-multiple-definition
+@itemx -z muldefs
+Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
+report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
+first definition will be used.
+
+@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
+@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
+@item --allow-shlib-undefined
+@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
+Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
+This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
+determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
+shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
+how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
+
+The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
+referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
+an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
+a shared library.
+
+The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
+libraries specified at link time are that:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
+that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
+resolvable at load time.
+@item
+There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
+symbols in shared libraries are normal.
+
+The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
+select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
+architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
+appropriate memset function.
+@end itemize
+
+@kindex --error-handling-script=@var{scriptname}
+@item --error-handling-script=@var{scriptname}
+If this option is provided then the linker will invoke
+@var{scriptname} whenever an error is encountered. Currently however
+only two kinds of error are supported: missing symbols and missing
+libraries. Two arguments will be passed to script: the keyword
+``undefined-symbol'' or `missing-lib'' and the @var{name} of the
+undefined symbol or missing library. The intention is that the script
+will provide suggestions to the user as to where the symbol or library
+might be found. After the script has finished then the normal linker
+error message will be displayed.
+
+The availability of this option is controlled by a configure time
+switch, so it may not be present in specific implementations.
+
+@kindex --no-undefined-version
+@item --no-undefined-version
+Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
+it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
+will be issued instead.
+
+@kindex --default-symver
+@item --default-symver
+Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
+exported symbols.
+
+@kindex --default-imported-symver
+@item --default-imported-symver
+Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
+imported symbols.
+
+@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
+@item --no-warn-mismatch
+Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
+files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
+been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
+This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
+errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
+have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
+inappropriate.
+
+@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
+@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
+Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
+library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
+
+@kindex --no-whole-archive
+@item --no-whole-archive
+Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
+archive files.
+
+@cindex output file after errors
+@kindex --noinhibit-exec
+@item --noinhibit-exec
+Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
+Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
+errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
+when it issues any error whatsoever.
+
+@kindex -nostdlib
+@item -nostdlib
+Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
+command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
+(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
+
+@ifclear SingleFormat
+@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
+@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
+@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
+file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
+@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
+object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
+object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
+should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
+usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
+name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
+list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
+command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
+this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
+@end ifclear
+
+@kindex --out-implib
+@item --out-implib @var{file}
+Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
+the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
+library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
+may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
+behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
+step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
+the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
+
+@kindex -pie
+@kindex --pic-executable
+@item -pie
+@itemx --pic-executable
+@cindex position independent executables
+Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
+ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
+libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
+address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
+normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
+defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
+
+@kindex -no-pie
+@item -no-pie
+@cindex position dependent executables
+Create a position dependent executable. This is the default.
+
+@kindex -qmagic
+@item -qmagic
+This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
+
+@kindex -Qy
+@item -Qy
+This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
+
+@kindex --relax
+@cindex synthesizing linker
+@cindex relaxing addressing modes
+@cindex --no-relax
+@item --relax
+@itemx --no-relax
+An option with machine dependent effects.
+@ifset GENERIC
+This option is only supported on a few targets.
+@end ifset
+@ifset H8300
+@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
+@end ifset
+@ifset XTENSA
+@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
+@end ifset
+@ifset M68HC11
+@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
+@end ifset
+@ifset NIOSII
+@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
+@end ifset
+@ifset POWERPC
+@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
+@end ifset
+
+On some platforms the @option{--relax} option performs target specific,
+global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
+addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
+synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
+instructions, and combining constant values.
+
+On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
+debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
+@ifset GENERIC
+This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
+family of processors.
+@end ifset
+
+On platforms where the feature is supported, the option
+@option{--no-relax} will disable it.
+
+On platforms where the feature is not supported, both @option{--relax}
+and @option{--no-relax} are accepted, but ignored.
+
+@cindex retaining specified symbols
+@cindex stripping all but some symbols
+@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
+@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
+@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
+Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
+discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
+symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
+@ifset GENERIC
+(such as VxWorks)
+@end ifset
+where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
+run-time memory.
+
+@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
+or symbols needed for relocations.
+
+You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
+line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
+
+@ifset GENERIC
+@item -rpath=@var{dir}
+@cindex runtime library search path
+@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
+Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
+linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
+arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
+them to locate shared objects at runtime.
+
+The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
+are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
+description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
+in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
+have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
+
+If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
+contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
+is defined.
+
+The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
+SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
+@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
+runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
+options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
+gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
+file systems.
+
+For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
+followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
+the @option{-rpath} option.
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset GENERIC
+@cindex link-time runtime library search path
+@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
+@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
+When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
+happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
+of the input files.
+
+When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
+non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
+shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
+explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
+specifies the first set of directories to search. The
+@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
+either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
+appearing multiple times.
+
+The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
+directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
+containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
+and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
+64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
+
+The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
+@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
+supported.
+
+This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
+that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
+is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
+runtime linker would do.
+
+The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
+libraries:
+
+@enumerate
+@item
+Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
+@item
+Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
+between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
+specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
+used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
+at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
+by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
+the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
+@item
+On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
+@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
+environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
+@item
+On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
+directories specified using @option{-L} options.
+@item
+For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
+variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
+@item
+For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
+@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
+libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
+@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
+@item
+For a linker for a Linux system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
+exists, the list of directories found in that file. Note: the path
+to this file is prefixed with the @code{sysroot} value, if that is
+defined, and then any @code{prefix} string if the linker was
+configured with the @command{--prefix=<path>} option.
+@item
+For a native linker on a FreeBSD system, any directories specified by
+the @code{_PATH_ELF_HINTS} macro defined in the @file{elf-hints.h}
+header file.
+@item
+Any directories specified by a @code{SEARCH_DIR} command in a
+linker script given on the command line, including scripts specified
+by @option{-T} (but not @option{-dT}).
+@item
+The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
+@item
+Any directories specified by a plugin LDPT_SET_EXTRA_LIBRARY_PATH.
+@item
+Any directories specified by a @code{SEARCH_DIR} command in a default
+linker script.
+@end enumerate
+
+Note however on Linux based systems there is an additional caveat: If
+the @option{--as-needed} option is active @emph{and} a shared library
+is located which would normally satisfy the search @emph{and} this
+library does not have DT_NEEDED tag for @file{libc.so}
+@emph{and} there is a shared library later on in the set of search
+directories which also satisfies the search @emph{and}
+this second shared library does have a DT_NEEDED tag for
+@file{libc.so} @emph{then} the second library will be selected instead
+of the first.
+
+If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
+warning and continue with the link.
+
+@end ifset
+
+@kindex -shared
+@kindex -Bshareable
+@item -shared
+@itemx -Bshareable
+@cindex shared libraries
+Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
+and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
+shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
+undefined symbols in the link.
+
+@kindex --sort-common
+@item --sort-common
+@itemx --sort-common=ascending
+@itemx --sort-common=descending
+This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
+ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
+sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
+eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
+between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
+specified, then descending order is assumed.
+
+@kindex --sort-section=name
+@item --sort-section=name
+This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
+patterns in the linker script.
+
+@kindex --sort-section=alignment
+@item --sort-section=alignment
+This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
+patterns in the linker script.
+
+@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
+@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
+This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
+.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
+post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
+
+@kindex --split-by-file
+@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
+Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
+each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
+size of 1 if not given.
+
+@kindex --split-by-reloc
+@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
+Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
+output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
+This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
+certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
+cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
+that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
+support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
+input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
+more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
+many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
+
+@kindex --stats
+@item --stats
+Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
+as execution time and memory usage.
+
+@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
+@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
+Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
+configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
+that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
+
+@kindex --task-link
+@item --task-link
+This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
+file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
+
+@kindex --traditional-format
+@cindex traditional format
+@item --traditional-format
+For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
+the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
+use the traditional format instead.
+
+@cindex dbx
+For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
+symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
+full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
+@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
+trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
+combine duplicate entries.
+
+@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
+@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
+Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
+address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
+times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
+line.
+@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
+for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
+@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
+should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
+sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
+
+@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
+@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
+@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
+@cindex segment origins, cmd line
+@item -Tbss=@var{org}
+@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
+@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
+Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
+@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
+
+@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
+@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
+@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
+When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
+byte of the text segment.
+
+@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
+@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
+@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
+When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
+the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
+text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
+
+@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
+@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
+@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
+When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
+model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
+
+@kindex --unresolved-symbols
+@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
+Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
+values for @samp{method}:
+
+@table @samp
+@item ignore-all
+Do not report any unresolved symbols.
+
+@item report-all
+Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
+
+@item ignore-in-object-files
+Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
+ignore them if they come from regular object files.
+
+@item ignore-in-shared-libs
+Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
+ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
+when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
+libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
+command line.
+@end table
+
+The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
+by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
+
+Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
+unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
+can change this to a warning.
+
+@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
+@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
+@item --dll-verbose
+@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
+Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
+supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
+the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
+argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
+
+@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
+@cindex version script, symbol versions
+@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
+Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
+used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
+about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
+is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
+see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
+use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
+symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
+@xref{WIN32}.
+
+@kindex --warn-common
+@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
+@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
+@item --warn-common
+Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
+a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
+but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
+you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
+Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
+warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
+
+There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
+
+@table @samp
+@item int i = 1;
+A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
+file.
+
+@item extern int i;
+An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
+There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
+variable somewhere.
+
+@item int i;
+A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
+variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
+The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
+single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
+size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
+a definition of the same variable.
+@end table
+
+The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
+Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
+just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
+encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
+a common symbol.
+
+@enumerate
+@item
+Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
+definition for the symbol.
+@smallexample
+@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
+ overridden by definition
+@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
+@end smallexample
+
+@item
+Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
+the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
+except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
+@smallexample
+@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
+ overriding common
+@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
+@end smallexample
+
+@item
+Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
+@smallexample
+@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
+ of `@var{symbol}'
+@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
+@end smallexample
+
+@item
+Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
+@smallexample
+@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
+ overridden by larger common
+@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
+@end smallexample
+
+@item
+Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
+the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
+encountered in a different order.
+@smallexample
+@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
+ overriding smaller common
+@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
+@end smallexample
+@end enumerate
+
+@kindex --warn-constructors
+@item --warn-constructors
+Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
+object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
+detect the use of global constructors.
+
+@kindex --warn-execstack
+@cindex warnings, on executable stack
+@cindex executable stack, warnings on
+@item --warn-execstack
+@itemx --warn-execstack-objects
+@itemx --no-warn-execstack
+On ELF platforms the linker may generate warning messages if it is
+asked to create an output file that contains an executable stack.
+There are three possible states:
+@enumerate
+@item
+Do not generate any warnings.
+@item
+Always generate warnings, even if the executable stack is requested
+via the @option{-z execstack} command line option.
+@item
+Only generate a warning if an object file requests an executable
+stack, but not if the @option{-z execstack} option is used.
+@end enumerate
+
+The default state depends upon how the linker was configured when it
+was built. The @option{--no-warn-execstack} option always puts the
+linker into the no-warnings state. The @option{--warn-execstack}
+option puts the linker into the warn-always state. The
+@option{--warn-execstack-objects} option puts the linker into the
+warn-for-object-files-only state.
+
+Note: ELF format input files can specify that they need an executable
+stack by having a @var{.note.GNU-stack} section with the executable
+bit set in its section flags. They can specify that they do not need
+an executable stack by having the same section, but without the
+executable flag bit set. If an input file does not have a
+@var{.note.GNU-stack} section then the default behaviour is target
+specific. For some targets, then absence of such a section implies
+that an executable stack @emph{is} required. This is often a problem
+for hand crafted assembler files.
+
+@kindex --error-execstack
+@item --error-execstack
+@itemx --no-error-execstack
+If the linker is going to generate a warning message about an
+executable stack then the @option{--error-execstack} option will
+instead change that warning into an error. Note - this option does
+not change the linker's execstack warning generation state. Use
+@option{--warn-execstack} or @option{--warn-execstack-objects} to set
+a specific warning state.
+
+The @option{--no-error-execstack} option will restore the default
+behaviour of generating warning messages.
+
+@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
+@item --warn-multiple-gp
+Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
+This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
+Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
+section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
+of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
+base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
+base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
+bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
+large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
+values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
+option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
+
+@kindex --warn-once
+@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
+@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
+@item --warn-once
+Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
+which refers to it.
+
+@kindex --warn-rwx-segments
+@cindex warnings, on writeable and exectuable segments
+@cindex executable segments, warnings on
+@item --warn-rwx-segments
+@itemx --no-warn-rwx-segments
+Warn if the linker creates a loadable, non-zero sized segment that has
+all three of the read, write and execute permission flags set. Such a
+segment represents a potential security vulnerability. In addition
+warnings will be generated if a thread local storage segment is
+created with the execute permission flag set, regardless of whether or
+not it has the read and/or write flags set.
+
+These warnings are enabled by default. They can be disabled via the
+@option{--no-warn-rwx-segments} option and re-enabled via the
+@option{--warn-rwx-segments} option.
+
+@kindex --error-rwx-segments
+@item --error-rwx-segments
+@itemx --no-error-rwx-segments
+If the linker is going to generate a warning message about an
+executable, writeable segment, or an executable TLS segment, then the
+@option{--error-rwx-segments} option will turn this warning into an
+error instead. The @option{--no-error-rwx-segments} option will
+restore the default behaviour of just generating a warning message.
+
+Note - the @option{--error-rwx-segments} option does not by itself
+turn on warnings about these segments. These warnings are either
+enabled by default, if the linker was configured that way, or via the
+@option{--warn-rwx-segments} command line option.
+
+@kindex --warn-section-align
+@cindex warnings, on section alignment
+@cindex section alignment, warnings on
+@item --warn-section-align
+Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
+alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
+The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
+is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
+the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
+
+@kindex --warn-textrel
+@item --warn-textrel
+Warn if the linker adds DT_TEXTREL to a position-independent executable
+or shared object.
+
+@kindex --warn-alternate-em
+@item --warn-alternate-em
+Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
+
+@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
+@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
+If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
+@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
+This option makes it generate a warning instead.
+
+@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
+@item --error-unresolved-symbols
+This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
+it is reporting unresolved symbols.
+
+@kindex --whole-archive
+@cindex including an entire archive
+@item --whole-archive
+For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
+@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
+in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
+files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
+library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
+library. This option may be used more than once.
+
+Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
+about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
+Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
+list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
+your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
+
+@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
+@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
+Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
+@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
+undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
+@var{symbol}.
+
+This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
+wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
+wishes to call the system function, it should call
+@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
+
+Here is a trivial example:
+
+@smallexample
+void *
+__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
+@{
+ printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
+ return __real_malloc (c);
+@}
+@end smallexample
+
+If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
+all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
+instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
+call the real @code{malloc} function.
+
+You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
+links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
+you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
+file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
+call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
+
+Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
+internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
+@code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
+@code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
+
+@smallexample
+int
+f (void)
+@{
+ return 123;
+@}
+
+int
+g (void)
+@{
+ return f();
+@}
+@end smallexample
+
+@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
+@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
+@item --eh-frame-hdr
+@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
+Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
+(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
+section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
+
+@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
+@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
+Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
+generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
+if linker generated unwind info is supported. This option also
+controls the generation of @code{.sframe} stack trace info for linker
+generated code sections like PLT.
+
+@kindex --enable-new-dtags
+@kindex --disable-new-dtags
+@item --enable-new-dtags
+@itemx --disable-new-dtags
+This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
+systems may not understand them. If you specify
+@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
+and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
+If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
+created. By default, the new dynamic tags are created. Note that
+those options are only available for ELF systems.
+
+@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
+@item --hash-size=@var{number}
+Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
+close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
+time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
+increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
+value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
+
+@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
+@item --hash-style=@var{style}
+Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
+@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
+new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
+the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
+hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
+but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
+
+@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
+@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
+@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
+@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
+@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zstd
+@item --compress-debug-sections=none
+@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
+@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
+@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
+@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zstd
+On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
+compressed using zlib.
+
+@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
+sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
+DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
+instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
+also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
+sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
+
+The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
+@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
+
+@option{--compress-debug-sections=zstd} compresses DWARF debug sections using
+zstd.
+
+Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
+sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
+for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
+uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
+
+The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
+involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
+default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
+@option{--help} option.
+
+@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
+@item --reduce-memory-overheads
+This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
+linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
+for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
+about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
+
+Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
+1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
+run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
+has been used.
+
+The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
+enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
+
+@kindex --max-cache-size=@var{size}
+@item --max-cache-size=@var{size}
+@command{ld} normally caches the relocation information and symbol tables
+of input files in memory with the unlimited size. This option sets the
+maximum cache size to @var{size}.
+
+@kindex --build-id
+@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
+@item --build-id
+@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
+Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
+or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
+unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
+@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
+@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
+@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
+the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
+string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
+@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
+is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
+
+The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
+that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
+unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
+to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
+file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
+string identifying the original linked file does not change.
+
+Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
+@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
+
+@kindex --package-metadata=@var{JSON}
+@item --package-metadata=@var{JSON}
+Request the creation of a @code{.note.package} ELF note section. The
+contents of the note are in JSON format, as per the package metadata
+specification. For more information see:
+https://systemd.io/ELF_PACKAGE_METADATA/
+If the JSON argument is missing/empty then this will disable the
+creation of the metadata note, if one had been enabled by an earlier
+occurrence of the --package-metdata option.
+If the linker has been built with libjansson, then the JSON string
+will be validated.
+@end table
+
+@c man end
+
+@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
+
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+
+The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
+the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
+normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
+use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
+@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
+like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
+symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
+object file).
+
+In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
+support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
+PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
+values by either a space or an equals sign.
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+
+@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
+@item --add-stdcall-alias
+If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
+as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@kindex --base-file
+@item --base-file @var{file}
+Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
+addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
+@file{dlltool}.
+[This is an i386 PE specific option]
+
+@kindex --dll
+@item --dll
+Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
+@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
+file.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@kindex --enable-long-section-names
+@kindex --disable-long-section-names
+@item --enable-long-section-names
+@itemx --disable-long-section-names
+The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
+the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
+for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
+fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
+to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
+allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
+disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
+generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
+as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
+with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
+GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
+information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
+option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
+section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
+when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
+image and not stripping symbols.
+[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
+
+@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
+@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
+@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
+@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
+If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
+do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
+only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
+resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
+undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
+@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
+to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
+warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
+import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
+to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
+feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
+@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
+mismatches are considered to be errors.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@kindex --leading-underscore
+@kindex --no-leading-underscore
+@item --leading-underscore
+@itemx --no-leading-underscore
+For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
+in target's description. By this option it is possible to
+disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
+
+@cindex DLLs, creating
+@kindex --export-all-symbols
+@item --export-all-symbols
+If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
+be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
+otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
+explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
+attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
+option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
+@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
+@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
+exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
+re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
+such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
+@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
+@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
+Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
+not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
+extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
+(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
+These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
+@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
+@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
+@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
+@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@kindex --exclude-symbols
+@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
+Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
+exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
+@item --exclude-all-symbols
+Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@kindex --file-alignment
+@item --file-alignment
+Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
+file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
+512.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@cindex heap size
+@kindex --heap
+@item --heap @var{reserve}
+@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
+Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
+to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
+committed.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@cindex image base
+@kindex --image-base
+@item --image-base @var{value}
+Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
+the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
+is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
+your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
+other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
+for dlls.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@kindex --kill-at
+@item --kill-at
+If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
+symbols before they are exported.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@kindex --large-address-aware
+@item --large-address-aware
+If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
+header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
+greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
+or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
+section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
+[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
+
+@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
+@item --disable-large-address-aware
+Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
+This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
+driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
+addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
+[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
+
+@kindex --major-image-version
+@item --major-image-version @var{value}
+Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@kindex --major-os-version
+@item --major-os-version @var{value}
+Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@kindex --major-subsystem-version
+@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
+Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@kindex --minor-image-version
+@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
+Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@kindex --minor-os-version
+@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
+Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
+@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
+Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@cindex DEF files, creating
+@cindex DLLs, creating
+@kindex --output-def
+@item --output-def @var{file}
+The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
+file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
+(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
+library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
+automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@cindex DLLs, creating
+@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
+@item --enable-auto-image-base
+@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
+Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
+@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
+By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
+for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
+execution are avoided.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
+@item --disable-auto-image-base
+Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
+user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
+default.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@cindex DLLs, linking to
+@kindex --dll-search-prefix
+@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
+When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
+search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
+@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
+between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
+uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
+@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@kindex --enable-auto-import
+@item --enable-auto-import
+Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
+DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
+mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
+feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
+
+Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
+of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
+PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
+
+Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
+data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
+placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
+around a problem with consts that is described here:
+http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
+
+Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
+see this message:
+
+"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
+documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
+
+This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
+ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
+allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
+fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
+constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
+multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
+this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
+of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
+the warning, and exit.
+
+There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
+data type of the exported variable:
+
+One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
+of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
+this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
+
+A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
+that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
+there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
+a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
+
+@example
+extern type extern_array[];
+extern_array[1] -->
+ @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
+@end example
+
+or
+
+@example
+extern type extern_array[];
+extern_array[1] -->
+ @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
+@end example
+
+For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
+is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
+
+@example
+extern struct s extern_struct;
+extern_struct.field -->
+ @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
+@end example
+
+or
+
+@example
+extern long long extern_ll;
+extern_ll -->
+ @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
+@end example
+
+A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
+'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
+@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
+requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
+building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
+merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
+between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
+constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
+
+Original:
+@example
+--foo.h
+extern int arr[];
+--foo.c
+#include "foo.h"
+void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
+ printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
+@}
+@end example
+
+Solution 1:
+@example
+--foo.h
+extern int arr[];
+--foo.c
+#include "foo.h"
+void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
+ /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
+ volatile int *parr = arr;
+ printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
+@}
+@end example
+
+Solution 2:
+@example
+--foo.h
+/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
+#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
+ !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
+#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
+#else
+#define FOO_IMPORT
+#endif
+extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
+--foo.c
+#include "foo.h"
+void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
+ printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
+@}
+@end example
+
+A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
+library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
+for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
+functions).
+
+@kindex --disable-auto-import
+@item --disable-auto-import
+Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
+@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
+@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
+If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
+that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
+a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
+environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
+@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
+Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
+@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
+Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@kindex --section-alignment
+@item --section-alignment
+Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
+addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@cindex stack size
+@kindex --stack
+@item --stack @var{reserve}
+@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
+Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
+to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
+committed.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+@kindex --subsystem
+@item --subsystem @var{which}
+@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
+@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
+Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
+legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
+@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
+the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
+@var{which}.
+[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
+of the PE file header:
+[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
+
+@kindex --high-entropy-va
+@item --high-entropy-va
+@itemx --disable-high-entropy-va
+Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
+(ASLR). This option is enabled by default for 64-bit PE images.
+
+This option also implies @option{--dynamicbase} and
+@option{--enable-reloc-section}.
+
+@kindex --dynamicbase
+@item --dynamicbase
+@itemx --disable-dynamicbase
+The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
+randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
+Vista for i386 PE targets. This option is enabled by default but
+can be disabled via the @option{--disable-dynamicbase} option.
+This option also implies @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
+
+@kindex --forceinteg
+@item --forceinteg
+@itemx --disable-forceinteg
+Code integrity checks are enforced. This option is disabled by
+default.
+
+@kindex --nxcompat
+@item --nxcompat
+@item --disable-nxcompat
+The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
+This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE
+targets. The option is enabled by default.
+
+@kindex --no-isolation
+@item --no-isolation
+@itemx --disable-no-isolation
+Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
+This option is disabled by default.
+
+@kindex --no-seh
+@item --no-seh
+@itemx --disable-no-seh
+The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
+this image. This option is disabled by default.
+
+@kindex --no-bind
+@item --no-bind
+@itemx --disable-no-bind
+Do not bind this image. This option is disabled by default.
+
+@kindex --wdmdriver
+@item --wdmdriver
+@itemx --disable-wdmdriver
+The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model. This option is disabled
+by default.
+
+@kindex --tsaware
+@item --tsaware
+@itemx --disable-tsaware
+The image is Terminal Server aware. This option is disabled by
+default.
+
+@kindex --insert-timestamp
+@item --insert-timestamp
+@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
+Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
+as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
+other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
+will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
+same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
+can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
+that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
+identically.
+
+@kindex --enable-reloc-section
+@item --enable-reloc-section
+@itemx --disable-reloc-section
+Create the base relocation table, which is necessary if the image
+is loaded at a different image base than specified in the PE header.
+This option is enabled by default.
+@end table
+
+@c man end
+
+@ifset C6X
+@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
+
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+
+The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
+libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
+all executables use an index of 0.
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+
+@kindex --dsbt-size
+@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
+This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
+or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
+entries.
+
+@kindex --dsbt-index
+@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
+This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
+to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
+executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
+@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
+
+@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
+The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
+exidx entries in frame unwind info.
+
+@end table
+
+@c man end
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset CSKY
+@subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
+
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+
+@kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
+@item --branch-stub
+This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
+sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
+usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
+can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
+the compiler or assembler.
+
+@kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
+@item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
+This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
+It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
+be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
+stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
+sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
+@samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
+linker should choose suitable defaults.
+
+@end table
+
+@c man end
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset M68HC11
+@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
+
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+
+The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
+memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+
+@kindex --no-trampoline
+@item --no-trampoline
+This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
+is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
+instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
+
+@kindex --bank-window
+@item --bank-window @var{name}
+This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
+the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
+The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
+paging and addresses within the memory window.
+
+@end table
+
+@c man end
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset M68K
+@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
+
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+
+The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
+when linking for 68K targets.
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+
+@kindex --got
+@item --got=@var{type}
+This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
+@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
+@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
+Info entry for @file{ld}.
+
+@end table
+
+@c man end
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset MIPS
+@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
+
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+
+The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
+generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
+linking for MIPS targets.
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+
+@kindex --insn32
+@item --insn32
+@kindex --no-insn32
+@itemx --no-insn32
+These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
+generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
+or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
+32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
+used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
+possible.
+
+@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
+@item --ignore-branch-isa
+@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
+@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
+These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
+transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
+accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
+is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
+instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
+equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
+calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
+a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
+an error.
+
+@kindex --compact-branches
+@item --compact-branches
+@kindex --no-compact-branches
+@itemx --no-compact-branches
+These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
+in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
+
+@end table
+
+@c man end
+@end ifset
+
+
+@ifset PDP11
+@subsection Options specific to PDP11 targets
+
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+
+For the pdp11-aout target, three variants of the output format can be
+produced as selected by the following options. The default variant
+for pdp11-aout is the @samp{--omagic} option, whereas for other
+targets @samp{--nmagic} is the default. The @samp{--imagic} option is
+defined only for the pdp11-aout target, while the others are described
+here as they apply to the pdp11-aout target.
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+
+@kindex -N
+@item -N
+@kindex --omagic
+@itemx --omagic
+
+Mark the output as @code{OMAGIC} (0407) in the @file{a.out} header to
+indicate that the text segment is not to be write-protected and
+shared. Since the text and data sections are both readable and
+writable, the data section is allocated immediately contiguous after
+the text segment. This is the oldest format for PDP11 executable
+programs and is the default for @command{ld} on PDP11 Unix systems
+from the beginning through 2.11BSD.
+
+@kindex -n
+@item -n
+@kindex --nmagic
+@itemx --nmagic
+
+Mark the output as @code{NMAGIC} (0410) in the @file{a.out} header to
+indicate that when the output file is executed, the text portion will
+be read-only and shareable among all processes executing the same
+file. This involves moving the data areas up to the first possible 8K
+byte page boundary following the end of the text. This option creates
+a @emph{pure executable} format.
+
+@kindex -z
+@item -z
+@kindex --imagic
+@itemx --imagic
+
+Mark the output as @code{IMAGIC} (0411) in the @file{a.out} header to
+indicate that when the output file is executed, the program text and
+data areas will be loaded into separate address spaces using the split
+instruction and data space feature of the memory management unit in
+larger models of the PDP11. This doubles the address space available
+to the program. The text segment is again pure, write-protected, and
+shareable. The only difference in the output format between this
+option and the others, besides the magic number, is that both the text
+and data sections start at location 0. The @samp{-z} option selected
+this format in 2.11BSD. This option creates a @emph{separate
+executable} format.
+
+@kindex --no-omagic
+@item --no-omagic
+
+Equivalent to @samp{--nmagic} for pdp11-aout.
+
+@end table
+
+@c man end
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset UsesEnvVars
+@node Environment
+@section Environment Variables
+
+@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
+
+You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
+@ifclear SingleFormat
+@code{GNUTARGET},
+@end ifclear
+@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
+
+@ifclear SingleFormat
+@kindex GNUTARGET
+@cindex default input format
+@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
+use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
+of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
+@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
+of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
+attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
+this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
+there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
+object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
+BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
+in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
+@end ifclear
+
+@kindex LDEMULATION
+@cindex default emulation
+@cindex emulation, default
+@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
+@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
+behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
+available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
+the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
+variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
+linker was configured.
+
+@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
+@cindex demangling, default
+Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
+@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
+default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
+a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
+may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
+options.
+
+@c man end
+@end ifset
+
+@node Scripts
+@chapter Linker Scripts
+
+@cindex scripts
+@cindex linker scripts
+@cindex command files
+Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
+written in the linker command language.
+
+The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
+the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
+the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
+more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
+direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
+described below.
+
+The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
+yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
+linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
+to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
+such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
+
+You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
+line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
+default linker script.
+
+You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
+to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
+Linker Scripts}.
+
+@menu
+* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
+* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
+* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
+* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
+* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
+* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
+* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
+* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
+* VERSION:: VERSION Command
+* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
+* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
+@end menu
+
+@node Basic Script Concepts
+@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
+@cindex linker script concepts
+We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
+describe the linker script language.
+
+The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
+file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
+@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
+The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
+purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
+among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
+section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
+in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
+
+Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
+also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
+contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
+the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
+A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
+area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
+loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
+which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
+of debugging information.
+
+Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
+first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
+the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
+@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
+section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
+same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
+is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
+(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
+based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
+RAM address would be the VMA.
+
+You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
+program with the @samp{-h} option.
+
+Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
+@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
+has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
+information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
+will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
+static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
+referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
+
+You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
+program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
+option.
+
+@node Script Format
+@section Linker Script Format
+@cindex linker script format
+Linker scripts are text files.
+
+You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
+either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
+symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
+generally ignored.
+
+Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
+If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
+otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
+double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
+file name.
+
+You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
+@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
+to whitespace.
+
+@node Simple Example
+@section Simple Linker Script Example
+@cindex linker script example
+@cindex example of linker script
+Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
+
+The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
+@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
+memory layout of the output file.
+
+The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
+describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
+code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
+@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
+Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
+your input files.
+
+For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
+0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
+linker script which will do that:
+@smallexample
+SECTIONS
+@{
+ . = 0x10000;
+ .text : @{ *(.text) @}
+ . = 0x8000000;
+ .data : @{ *(.data) @}
+ .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
+@}
+@end smallexample
+
+You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
+followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
+descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
+
+The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
+sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
+counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
+other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
+current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
+incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
+@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
+
+The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
+required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
+after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
+which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
+wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
+means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
+
+Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
+@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
+@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
+
+The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
+the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
+at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
+output section, the value of the location counter will be
+@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
+effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
+immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
+
+The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
+alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
+example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
+sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
+may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
+sections.
+
+That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
+
+@node Simple Commands
+@section Simple Linker Script Commands
+@cindex linker script simple commands
+In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
+
+@menu
+* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
+* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
+@ifclear SingleFormat
+* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
+@end ifclear
+
+* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
+* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
+@end menu
+
+@node Entry Point
+@subsection Setting the Entry Point
+@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
+@cindex start of execution
+@cindex first instruction
+@cindex entry point
+The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
+point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
+entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
+@smallexample
+ENTRY(@var{symbol})
+@end smallexample
+
+There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
+entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
+stopping when one of them succeeds:
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
+@item
+the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
+@item
+the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
+targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
+check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
+@item
+the address of the first byte of the code section, if present and an
+executable is being created - the code section is usually
+@samp{.text}, but can be something else;
+@item
+The address @code{0}.
+@end itemize
+
+@node File Commands
+@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
+@cindex linker script file commands
+Several linker script commands deal with files.
+
+@table @code
+@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
+@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
+@cindex including a linker script
+Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
+be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
+with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
+10 levels deep.
+
+You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
+@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
+
+@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
+@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
+@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
+@cindex input files in linker scripts
+@cindex input object files in linker scripts
+@cindex linker script input object files
+The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
+in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
+
+For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
+a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
+then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
+
+In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
+script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
+
+In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
+with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
+located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
+for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying
+@code{=} as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the
+filename path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of
+@samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
+
+If a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is not used then the linker will try to open
+the file in the directory containing the linker script. If it is not
+found the linker will then search the current directory. If it is still
+not found the linker will search through the archive library search
+path.
+
+If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
+name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
+@samp{-l}.
+
+When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
+files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
+script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
+
+@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
+@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
+@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
+@cindex grouping input files
+The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
+files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
+new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
+in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
+
+@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
+@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
+@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
+This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
+commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
+as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
+with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
+when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
+@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
+and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
+setting afterwards.
+
+@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
+@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
+@cindex output file name in linker script
+The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
+@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
+@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
+Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
+precedence.
+
+You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
+output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
+
+@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
+@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
+@cindex library search path in linker script
+@cindex archive search path in linker script
+@cindex search path in linker script
+The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
+@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
+@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
+on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
+are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
+the command-line option are searched first.
+
+@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
+@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
+@cindex first input file
+The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
+that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
+though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
+when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
+first file.
+@end table
+
+@ifclear SingleFormat
+@node Format Commands
+@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
+A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
+
+@table @code
+@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
+@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
+@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
+@cindex output file format in linker script
+The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
+output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
+exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
+(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
+line option takes precedence.
+
+You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
+formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
+This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
+desired endianness.
+
+If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
+will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
+output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
+used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
+
+For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
+command:
+@smallexample
+OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
+@end smallexample
+This says that the default format for the output file is
+@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
+option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
+format.
+
+@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
+@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
+@cindex input file format in linker script
+The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
+files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
+This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
+(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
+is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
+command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
+@end table
+@end ifclear
+
+@node REGION_ALIAS
+@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
+@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
+@cindex region alias
+@cindex region names
+
+Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
+@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
+
+@smallexample
+REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
+@end smallexample
+
+The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
+memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
+to memory regions. An example follows.
+
+Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
+memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
+that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
+non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
+access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
+read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
+sections:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+@code{.text} program code;
+@item
+@code{.rodata} read-only data;
+@item
+@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
+@item
+@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
+@end itemize
+
+The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
+part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
+output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
+systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
+@code{C}:
+@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
+@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
+@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
+@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
+@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
+@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
+@end multitable
+The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
+loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
+the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
+the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
+
+The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
+includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
+memory layout:
+@smallexample
+INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
+
+SECTIONS
+ @{
+ .text :
+ @{
+ *(.text)
+ @} > REGION_TEXT
+ .rodata :
+ @{
+ *(.rodata)
+ rodata_end = .;
+ @} > REGION_RODATA
+ .data : AT (rodata_end)
+ @{
+ data_start = .;
+ *(.data)
+ @} > REGION_DATA
+ data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
+ data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
+ .bss :
+ @{
+ *(.bss)
+ @} > REGION_BSS
+ @}
+@end smallexample
+
+Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
+regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
+variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
+@table @code
+@item A
+Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
+@smallexample
+MEMORY
+ @{
+ RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
+ @}
+
+REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
+REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
+REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
+REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
+@end smallexample
+@item B
+Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
+into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
+@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
+@smallexample
+MEMORY
+ @{
+ ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
+ RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
+ @}
+
+REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
+REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
+REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
+REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
+@end smallexample
+@item C
+Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
+@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
+initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
+system start into the @code{RAM}.
+@smallexample
+MEMORY
+ @{
+ ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
+ ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
+ RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
+ @}
+
+REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
+REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
+REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
+REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
+@end smallexample
+@end table
+
+It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
+@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
+necessary:
+@smallexample
+#include <string.h>
+
+extern char data_start [];
+extern char data_size [];
+extern char data_load_start [];
+
+void copy_data(void)
+@{
+ if (data_start != data_load_start)
+ @{
+ memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
+ @}
+@}
+@end smallexample
+
+@node Miscellaneous Commands
+@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
+There are a few other linker scripts commands.
+
+@table @code
+@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
+@kindex ASSERT
+@cindex assertion in linker script
+Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
+with an error code, and print @var{message}.
+
+Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
+take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
+inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
+for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
+symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
+
+@smallexample
+ .stack :
+ @{
+ PROVIDE (__stack = .);
+ PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
+ ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
+ @}
+@end smallexample
+
+will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
+PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
+can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
+
+@smallexample
+ PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
+ .stack :
+ @{
+ PROVIDE (__stack = .);
+ ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
+ @}
+@end smallexample
+
+will work.
+
+@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
+@kindex EXTERN
+@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
+Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
+symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
+modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
+each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
+command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
+
+@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
+@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
+@cindex common allocation in linker script
+This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
+to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
+output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
+
+@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
+@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
+@cindex common allocation in linker script
+This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
+command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
+to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
+
+@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
+@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
+@cindex group allocation in linker script
+@cindex section groups
+@cindex COMDAT
+This command has the same effect as the
+@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
+@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
+and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
+specified (@samp{-r}).
+
+@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
+@kindex INSERT
+@cindex insert user script into default script
+This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
+augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
+inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
+@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
+default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
+sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
+linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
+insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
+linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
+default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
+of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
+to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
+is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
+
+@smallexample
+SECTIONS
+@{
+ OVERLAY :
+ @{
+ .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
+ .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
+ @}
+@}
+INSERT AFTER .text;
+@end smallexample
+
+Note that when @samp{-T} is used twice, once to override the default
+script and once to augment that script using @code{INSERT} the order
+of parsing and section assignments apply as for the default script.
+The script with @code{INSERT} should be specified @emph{first} on the
+command line.
+
+@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
+@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
+@cindex cross references
+This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
+references among certain output sections.
+
+In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
+using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
+will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
+errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
+a function defined in the other section.
+
+The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
+@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
+an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
+@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
+names.
+
+@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
+@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
+@cindex cross references
+This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
+references to one section from a list of other sections.
+
+The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
+output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
+a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
+there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
+must never call back.
+
+The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
+The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
+If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
+the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
+status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
+names, not input section names.
+
+@ifclear SingleFormat
+@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
+@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
+@cindex machine architecture
+@cindex architecture
+Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
+of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
+architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
+the @samp{-f} option.
+@end ifclear
+
+@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
+@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
+This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
+@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
+in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
+@xref{Expression Section}.
+@end table
+
+@node Assignments
+@section Assigning Values to Symbols
+@cindex assignment in scripts
+@cindex symbol definition, scripts
+@cindex variables, defining
+You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
+the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
+
+@menu
+* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
+* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
+* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
+* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
+* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
+@end menu
+
+@node Simple Assignments
+@subsection Simple Assignments
+
+You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
+
+@table @code
+@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
+@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
+@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
+@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
+@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
+@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
+@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
+@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
+@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
+@end table
+
+The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
+@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
+defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
+
+The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
+may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
+
+The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
+
+Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
+
+You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
+statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
+section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
+
+The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
+expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
+
+Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
+assignments may be used:
+
+@smallexample
+floating_point = 0;
+SECTIONS
+@{
+ .text :
+ @{
+ *(.text)
+ _etext = .;
+ @}
+ _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
+ .data : @{ *(.data) @}
+@}
+@end smallexample
+@noindent
+In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
+zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
+the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
+defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
+upward to a 4 byte boundary.
+
+@node HIDDEN
+@subsection HIDDEN
+@cindex HIDDEN
+For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
+exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
+
+Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
+@code{HIDDEN}:
+
+@smallexample
+HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
+SECTIONS
+@{
+ .text :
+ @{
+ *(.text)
+ HIDDEN(_etext = .);
+ @}
+ HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
+ .data : @{ *(.data) @}
+@}
+@end smallexample
+@noindent
+In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
+
+@node PROVIDE
+@subsection PROVIDE
+@cindex PROVIDE
+In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
+only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
+the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
+@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
+@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
+@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
+@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
+@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
+
+Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
+@smallexample
+SECTIONS
+@{
+ .text :
+ @{
+ *(.text)
+ _etext = .;
+ PROVIDE(etext = .);
+ @}
+@}
+@end smallexample
+
+In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
+underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition diagnostic. If,
+on the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
+underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
+If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
+linker will use the definition in the linker script.
+
+Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
+defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
+that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
+when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
+@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
+
+@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
+@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
+@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
+Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
+hidden and won't be exported.
+
+@node Source Code Reference
+@subsection Source Code Reference
+
+Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
+intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
+a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
+symbol that does not have a value.
+
+Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
+transform names in the source code into different names when they are
+stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
+prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
+mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
+of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
+variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
+linker script variable might be referred to as:
+
+@smallexample
+ extern int foo;
+@end smallexample
+
+But in the linker script it might be defined as:
+
+@smallexample
+ _foo = 1000;
+@end smallexample
+
+In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
+transformation has taken place.
+
+When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
+things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
+in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
+second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
+table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
+contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
+value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
+
+@smallexample
+ int foo = 1000;
+@end smallexample
+
+creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
+holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
+number 1000 is initially stored.
+
+When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
+first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
+memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
+So:
+
+@smallexample
+ foo = 1;
+@end smallexample
+
+looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
+associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
+address. Whereas:
+
+@smallexample
+ int * a = & foo;
+@end smallexample
+
+looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
+and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
+the variable @samp{a}.
+
+Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
+the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
+an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
+
+@smallexample
+ foo = 1000;
+@end smallexample
+
+creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
+the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
+address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
+linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
+access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
+
+Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
+you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
+use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
+section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
+linker script contains these declarations:
+
+@smallexample
+@group
+ start_of_ROM = .ROM;
+ end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
+ start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
+
+@smallexample
+@group
+ extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
+
+ memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
+Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
+arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
+
+@smallexample
+@group
+ extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
+
+ memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
+operators.
+
+@node SECTIONS
+@section SECTIONS Command
+@kindex SECTIONS
+The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
+into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
+
+The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
+@smallexample
+SECTIONS
+@{
+ @var{sections-command}
+ @var{sections-command}
+ @dots{}
+@}
+@end smallexample
+
+Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
+@item
+a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
+@item
+an output section description
+@item
+an overlay description
+@end itemize
+
+The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
+@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
+those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
+understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
+the layout of the output file.
+
+Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
+below.
+
+If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
+linker will place each input section into an identically named output
+section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
+input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
+example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
+in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
+
+@menu
+* Output Section Description:: Output section description
+* Output Section Name:: Output section name
+* Output Section Address:: Output section address
+* Input Section:: Input section description
+* Output Section Data:: Output section data
+* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
+* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
+* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
+* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
+@end menu
+
+@node Output Section Description
+@subsection Output Section Description
+The full description of an output section looks like this:
+@smallexample
+@group
+@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
+ [AT(@var{lma})]
+ [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
+ [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
+ [@var{constraint}]
+ @{
+ @var{output-section-command}
+ @var{output-section-command}
+ @dots{}
+ @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
+
+The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
+name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
+The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
+the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
+The line breaks and other white space are optional.
+
+Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
+@item
+an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
+@item
+data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
+@item
+a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
+@end itemize
+
+@node Output Section Name
+@subsection Output Section Name
+@cindex name, section
+@cindex section name
+The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
+meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
+support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
+must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
+example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
+output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
+names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
+quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
+characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
+commas must be quoted.
+
+The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
+Discarding}.
+
+@node Output Section Address
+@subsection Output Section Address
+@cindex address, section
+@cindex section address
+The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
+address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
+is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
+
+If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
+section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
+to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
+alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
+contained within the output section.
+
+The output section address heuristic is as follows:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
+is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
+in that region.
+
+@item
+If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
+regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
+section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
+be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
+
+@item
+If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
+the output address will be based on the current value of the location
+counter.
+@end itemize
+
+@noindent
+For example:
+
+@smallexample
+.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
+@end smallexample
+
+@noindent
+and
+
+@smallexample
+.text : @{ *(.text) @}
+@end smallexample
+
+@noindent
+are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
+@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
+counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
+counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
+input sections.
+
+The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
+For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
+so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
+do something like this:
+@smallexample
+.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
+@end smallexample
+@noindent
+This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
+aligned upward to the specified value.
+
+Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
+location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
+sections are ignored).
+
+@node Input Section
+@subsection Input Section Description
+@cindex input sections
+@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
+The most common output section command is an input section description.
+
+The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
+You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
+in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
+map the input files into your memory layout.
+
+@menu
+* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
+* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
+* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
+* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
+* Input Section Example:: Input section example
+@end menu
+
+@node Input Section Basics
+@subsubsection Input Section Basics
+@cindex input section basics
+An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
+by a list of section names in parentheses.
+
+The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
+describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
+
+The most common input section description is to include all input
+sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
+include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
+@smallexample
+*(.text)
+@end smallexample
+@noindent
+Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
+@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
+of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
+match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
+example:
+@smallexample
+EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
+@end smallexample
+@noindent
+will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
+and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
+placed inside the section list, for example:
+@smallexample
+*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
+@end smallexample
+@noindent
+The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
+two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
+more than one section, as described below.
+
+There are two ways to include more than one section:
+@smallexample
+*(.text .rdata)
+*(.text) *(.rdata)
+@end smallexample
+@noindent
+The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
+@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
+first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
+they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
+@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
+@samp{.rdata} input sections.
+
+When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
+is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
+immediately following section, for example:
+@smallexample
+*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
+@end smallexample
+@noindent
+will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
+@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
+from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
+exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
+could be modified to:
+@smallexample
+*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
+@end smallexample
+@noindent
+Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
+before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
+all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
+@smallexample
+EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
+@end smallexample
+
+You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
+You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
+needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
+@smallexample
+data.o(.data)
+@end smallexample
+
+To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
+of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
+
+Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
+
+@smallexample
+@group
+SECTIONS @{
+ .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
+ .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
+@}
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
+input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
+@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
+@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
+whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
+
+You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
+matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
+with no whitespace around the colon.
+
+@table @samp
+@item archive:file
+matches file within archive
+@item archive:
+matches the whole archive
+@item :file
+matches file but not one in an archive
+@end table
+
+Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
+wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
+single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
+@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
+within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
+also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
+other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
+from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
+command.
+
+If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
+the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
+commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
+@smallexample
+data.o
+@end smallexample
+
+When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
+and does not contain any wild card
+characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
+name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
+did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
+though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
+@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
+the archive search path.
+
+@node Input Section Wildcards
+@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
+@cindex input section wildcards
+@cindex wildcard file name patterns
+@cindex file name wildcard patterns
+@cindex section name wildcard patterns
+In an input section description, either the file name or the section
+name or both may be wildcard patterns.
+
+The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
+pattern for the file name.
+
+The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
+
+@table @samp
+@item *
+matches any number of characters
+@item ?
+matches any single character
+@item [@var{chars}]
+matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
+character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
+@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
+@item \
+quotes the following character
+@end table
+
+File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
+specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
+does not search directories to expand wildcards.
+
+If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
+appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
+will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
+sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
+@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
+@smallexample
+.data : @{ *(.data) @}
+.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
+@end smallexample
+
+@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
+Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
+in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
+this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
+pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
+@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
+into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
+
+@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
+@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
+@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into descending order of
+alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
+alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
+needed.
+
+@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
+@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is also similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
+@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into ascending
+numerical order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the
+section name before placing them in the output file. In
+@code{.init_array.NNNNN} and @code{.fini_array.NNNNN}, @code{NNNNN} is
+the init_priority. In @code{.ctors.NNNNN} and @code{.dtors.NNNNN},
+@code{NNNNN} is 65535 minus the init_priority.
+
+@cindex SORT
+@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
+
+When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
+can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
+
+@enumerate
+@item
+@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
+It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
+sections have the same name.
+@item
+@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
+It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
+sections have the same alignment.
+@item
+@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
+treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
+@item
+@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
+is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
+@item
+All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
+@end enumerate
+
+When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
+section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
+takes precedence over the command-line option.
+
+If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
+command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
+treated as nested sorting command.
+
+@enumerate
+@item
+@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
+@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
+@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
+@item
+@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
+@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
+@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
+@end enumerate
+
+If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
+command-line option will be ignored.
+
+@cindex SORT_NONE
+@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
+section sorting option.
+
+If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
+@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
+precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
+
+This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
+files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
+sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
+The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
+with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
+linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
+@smallexample
+@group
+SECTIONS @{
+ .text : @{ *(.text) @}
+ .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
+ .data : @{ *(.data) @}
+ .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
+@}
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+@node Input Section Common
+@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
+@cindex common symbol placement
+@cindex uninitialized data placement
+A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
+file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
+linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
+named @samp{COMMON}.
+
+You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
+other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
+particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
+input files are placed in another section.
+
+In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
+@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
+@smallexample
+.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
+@end smallexample
+
+@cindex scommon section
+@cindex small common symbols
+Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
+example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
+symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
+different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
+the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
+symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
+to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
+locations.
+
+@cindex [COMMON]
+You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
+notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
+@samp{*(COMMON)}.
+
+@node Input Section Keep
+@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
+@cindex KEEP
+@cindex garbage collection
+When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
+it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
+This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
+with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
+@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
+
+@node Input Section Example
+@subsubsection Input Section Example
+The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
+to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
+start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
+@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
+follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
+@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
+@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
+All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
+files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
+
+@smallexample
+@group
+SECTIONS @{
+ outputa 0x10000 :
+ @{
+ all.o
+ foo.o (.input1)
+ @}
+@end group
+@group
+ outputb :
+ @{
+ foo.o (.input2)
+ foo1.o (.input1)
+ @}
+@end group
+@group
+ outputc :
+ @{
+ *(.input1)
+ *(.input2)
+ @}
+@}
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
+and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
+automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
+__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
+indicate the start address and end address of the output section
+respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
+C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
+
+@node Output Section Data
+@subsection Output Section Data
+@cindex data
+@cindex section data
+@cindex output section data
+@kindex ASCIZ ``@var{string}''
+@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
+@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
+@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
+@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
+@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
+You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
+@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
+an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
+parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
+value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
+counter.
+
+The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
+store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
+bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
+stored.
+
+For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
+of the symbol @samp{addr}:
+@smallexample
+BYTE(1)
+LONG(addr)
+@end smallexample
+
+When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
+same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
+target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
+@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
+@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
+
+If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
+which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
+When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
+true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
+endianness of the first input object file.
+
+You can include a zero-terminated string in an output section by using
+@code{ASCIZ}. The keyword is followed by a string which is stored at
+the current value of the location counter adding a zero byte at the
+end. If the string includes spaces it must be enclosed in double
+quotes. The string may contain '\n', '\r', '\t' and octal numbers.
+Hex numbers are not supported.
+
+For example, this string of 16 characters will create a 17 byte area
+@smallexample
+ ASCIZ "This is 16 bytes"
+@end smallexample
+
+Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
+between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
+@smallexample
+SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
+@end smallexample
+whereas this will work:
+@smallexample
+SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
+@end smallexample
+
+@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
+@cindex holes, filling
+@cindex unspecified memory
+You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
+current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
+otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
+gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
+with the value of the expression, repeated as
+necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
+point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
+than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
+different parts of an output section.
+
+This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
+value @samp{0x90}:
+@smallexample
+FILL(0x90909090)
+@end smallexample
+
+The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
+section attribute, but it only affects the
+part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
+entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
+precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
+expression.
+
+@kindex LINKER_VERSION
+@cindex LINKER_VERSION
+Inserts a string containing the version of the linker at the current
+point. Note - by default this directive is disabled and will do
+nothing. It only becomes active if the
+@option{--enable-linker-version} command line option is used.
+
+Built-in linker scripts for ELF based targets already include this
+directive in their @samp{.comment} section.
+
+@node Output Section Keywords
+@subsection Output Section Keywords
+There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
+commands.
+
+@table @code
+@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
+@cindex input filename symbols
+@cindex filename symbols
+@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
+The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
+The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
+file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
+the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
+
+This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
+normally used for any other object file format.
+
+@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
+@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
+@cindex constructors, arranging in link
+@item CONSTRUCTORS
+When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
+unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
+destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
+arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
+automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
+For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
+linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
+@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
+ignored for other object file formats.
+
+The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
+constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
+Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
+the start and end of the global destructors. The
+first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
+of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
+compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
+formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
+@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
+the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
+destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
+@code{exit}.
+
+For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
+arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
+addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
+and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
+linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
+runtime code expects to see.
+
+@smallexample
+ __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
+ LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
+ *(.ctors)
+ LONG(0)
+ __CTOR_END__ = .;
+ __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
+ LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
+ *(.dtors)
+ LONG(0)
+ __DTOR_END__ = .;
+@end smallexample
+
+If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
+which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
+are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
+are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
+command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
+@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
+@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
+@samp{*(.dtors)}.
+
+Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
+and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
+need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
+scripts.
+
+@end table
+
+@node Output Section Discarding
+@subsection Output Section Discarding
+@cindex discarding sections
+@cindex sections, discarding
+@cindex removing sections
+The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
+This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
+may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
+@smallexample
+.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
+@end smallexample
+@noindent
+will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
+@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
+sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
+space in an output section will also create the output section. So
+too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
+space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
+@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
+@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
+This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
+
+The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
+on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
+symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
+the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
+section is discarded.
+
+@cindex /DISCARD/
+The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
+input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
+section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
+
+This can be used to discard input sections marked with the ELF flag
+@code{SHF_GNU_RETAIN}, which would otherwise have been saved from linker
+garbage collection.
+
+Note, sections that match the @samp{/DISCARD/} output section will be
+discarded even if they are in an ELF section group which has other
+members which are not being discarded. This is deliberate.
+Discarding takes precedence over grouping.
+
+@node Output Section Attributes
+@subsection Output Section Attributes
+@cindex output section attributes
+We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
+like this:
+
+@smallexample
+@group
+@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
+ [AT(@var{lma})]
+ [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
+ [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
+ [@var{constraint}]
+ @{
+ @var{output-section-command}
+ @var{output-section-command}
+ @dots{}
+ @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
+@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
+remaining section attributes.
+
+@menu
+* Output Section Type:: Output section type
+* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
+* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
+* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
+* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
+* Output Section Region:: Output section region
+* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
+* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
+@end menu
+
+@node Output Section Type
+@subsubsection Output Section Type
+Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
+parentheses. The following types are defined:
+
+@table @code
+
+@item NOLOAD
+The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
+loaded into memory when the program is run.
+
+@item READONLY
+The section should be marked as read-only.
+
+@item DSECT
+@item COPY
+@item INFO
+@item OVERLAY
+These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
+rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
+marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
+section when the program is run.
+
+@item TYPE = @var{type}
+Set the section type to the integer @var{type}. When generating an ELF
+output file, type names @code{SHT_PROGBITS}, @code{SHT_STRTAB},
+@code{SHT_NOTE}, @code{SHT_NOBITS}, @code{SHT_INIT_ARRAY},
+@code{SHT_FINI_ARRAY}, and @code{SHT_PREINIT_ARRAY} are also allowed
+for @var{type}. It is the user's responsibility to ensure that any
+special requirements of the section type are met.
+
+Note - the TYPE only is used if some or all of the contents of the
+section do not have an implicit type of their own. So for example:
+@smallexample
+ .foo . TYPE = SHT_PROGBITS @{ *(.bar) @}
+@end smallexample
+will set the type of section @samp{.foo} to the type of the section
+@samp{.bar} in the input files, which may not be the SHT_PROGBITS
+type. Whereas:
+@smallexample
+ .foo . TYPE = SHT_PROGBITS @{ BYTE(1) @}
+@end smallexample
+will set the type of @samp{.foo} to SHT_PROGBBITS. If it is necessary
+to override the type of incoming sections and force the output section
+type then an extra piece of untyped data will be needed:
+@smallexample
+ .foo . TYPE = SHT_PROGBITS @{ BYTE(1); *(.bar) @}
+@end smallexample
+
+@item READONLY ( TYPE = @var{type} )
+This form of the syntax combines the @var{READONLY} type with the
+type specified by @var{type}.
+
+@end table
+
+@kindex NOLOAD
+@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
+@cindex loading, preventing
+The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
+the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
+the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
+@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
+need to be loaded when the program is run.
+@smallexample
+@group
+SECTIONS @{
+ ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
+ @dots{}
+@}
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+@node Output Section LMA
+@subsubsection Output Section LMA
+@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
+@kindex AT(@var{lma})
+@cindex load address
+@cindex section load address
+Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
+@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
+@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
+specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
+address is optional.
+
+The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
+specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
+takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
+load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
+region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
+
+If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
+section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
+load address:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
+the LMA address as well.
+
+@item
+If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
+
+@item
+Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
+with the current section, and this region contains at least one
+section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
+VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
+the last section in the located region.
+
+@item
+If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
+that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
+
+@item
+If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
+section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
+@end itemize
+
+@cindex ROM initialized data
+@cindex initialized data in ROM
+This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
+example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
+called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
+@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
+even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
+uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
+defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
+counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
+
+@smallexample
+@group
+SECTIONS
+ @{
+ .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
+ .mdata 0x2000 :
+ AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
+ @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
+ .bss 0x3000 :
+ @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
+@}
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
+this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
+the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
+how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
+script.
+
+@smallexample
+@group
+extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
+char *src = &_etext;
+char *dst = &_data;
+
+/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
+while (dst < &_edata)
+ *dst++ = *src++;
+
+/* Zero bss. */
+for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
+ *dst = 0;
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+@node Forced Output Alignment
+@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
+@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
+@cindex forcing output section alignment
+@cindex output section alignment
+You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
+alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
+intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
+
+@node Forced Input Alignment
+@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
+@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
+@cindex forcing input section alignment
+@cindex input section alignment
+You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
+SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
+sections, whether larger or smaller.
+
+@node Output Section Constraint
+@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
+@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
+@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
+@cindex constraints on output sections
+You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
+of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
+read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
+@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
+
+@node Output Section Region
+@subsubsection Output Section Region
+@kindex >@var{region}
+@cindex section, assigning to memory region
+@cindex memory regions and sections
+You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
+using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
+
+Here is a simple example:
+@smallexample
+@group
+MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
+SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+@node Output Section Phdr
+@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
+@kindex :@var{phdr}
+@cindex section, assigning to program header
+@cindex program headers and sections
+You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
+using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
+one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
+assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
+@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
+linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
+
+Here is a simple example:
+@smallexample
+@group
+PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
+SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+@node Output Section Fill
+@subsubsection Output Section Fill
+@kindex =@var{fillexp}
+@cindex section fill pattern
+@cindex fill pattern, entire section
+You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
+@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
+(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
+within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
+alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
+necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
+of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
+an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
+fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
+other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
+pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
+expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
+
+You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
+output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
+
+Here is a simple example:
+@smallexample
+@group
+SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+@node Overlay Description
+@subsection Overlay Description
+@kindex OVERLAY
+@cindex overlays
+An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
+are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
+the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
+copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
+required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
+can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
+than another.
+
+Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
+@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
+output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
+command is as follows:
+@smallexample
+@group
+OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
+ @{
+ @var{secname1}
+ @{
+ @var{output-section-command}
+ @var{output-section-command}
+ @dots{}
+ @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
+ @var{secname2}
+ @{
+ @var{output-section-command}
+ @var{output-section-command}
+ @dots{}
+ @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
+ @dots{}
+ @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
+section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
+section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
+those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
+except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
+sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
+
+The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
+the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
+
+The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
+addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
+memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
+whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
+and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
+and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
+
+If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
+references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
+the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
+sense for one section to refer directly to another.
+@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
+
+For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
+provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
+defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
+@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
+the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
+within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
+symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
+
+At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
+the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
+
+Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
+@code{SECTIONS} construct.
+@smallexample
+@group
+ OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
+ @{
+ .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
+ .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
+ @}
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+@noindent
+This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
+address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
+@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
+following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
+@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
+@code{__load_stop_text1}.
+
+C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
+like the following.
+
+@smallexample
+@group
+ extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
+ memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
+ &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
+everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
+example could have been written identically as follows.
+
+@smallexample
+@group
+ .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
+ PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
+ PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
+ .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
+ PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
+ PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
+ . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+@node MEMORY
+@section MEMORY Command
+@kindex MEMORY
+@cindex memory regions
+@cindex regions of memory
+@cindex allocating memory
+@cindex discontinuous memory
+The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
+memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
+
+The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
+memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
+may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
+can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
+set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
+regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
+around to fit into the available regions.
+
+A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
+however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
+specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
+@code{MEMORY} is:
+@smallexample
+@group
+MEMORY
+ @{
+ @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
+ @dots{}
+ @}
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
+region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
+Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
+with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
+must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
+add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
+command.
+
+@cindex memory region attributes
+The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
+whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
+not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
+@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
+section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
+the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
+them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
+
+The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
+@table @samp
+@item R
+Read-only section
+@item W
+Read/write section
+@item X
+Executable section
+@item A
+Allocatable section
+@item I
+Initialized section
+@item L
+Same as @samp{I}
+@item !
+Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
+@end table
+
+If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
+@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
+attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
+unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
+not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
+string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
+or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
+the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
+
+@kindex ORIGIN =
+@kindex o =
+@kindex org =
+The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
+the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
+cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
+abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
+@code{ORG}).
+
+@kindex LENGTH =
+@kindex len =
+@kindex l =
+The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
+region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
+be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
+@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
+
+In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
+available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
+and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
+linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
+is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
+or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
+explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
+region.
+
+@smallexample
+@group
+MEMORY
+ @{
+ rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
+ ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
+ @}
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
+specific output sections into that memory region by using the
+@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
+a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
+output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
+was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
+the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
+output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
+region, the linker will issue an error message.
+
+It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
+expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
+@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
+
+@smallexample
+@group
+ _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+@node PHDRS
+@section PHDRS Command
+@kindex PHDRS
+@cindex program headers
+@cindex ELF program headers
+@cindex program segments
+@cindex segments, ELF
+The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
+@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
+loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
+program with the @samp{-p} option.
+
+When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
+reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
+program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
+This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
+interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
+
+The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
+in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
+precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
+the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
+not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
+
+The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
+generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
+ignore @code{PHDRS}.
+
+This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
+@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
+
+@smallexample
+@group
+PHDRS
+@{
+ @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
+ [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
+@}
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
+of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
+header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
+with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
+must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
+is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
+
+Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
+system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
+specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
+sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
+attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
+Section Phdr}.
+
+It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
+merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
+repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
+contain the section.
+
+If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
+then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
+not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
+convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
+placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
+default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
+segment at all.
+
+@kindex FILEHDR
+@kindex PHDRS
+You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
+the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
+The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
+file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
+include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
+segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
+these keywords.
+
+The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
+value of the keyword.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
+Indicates an unused program header.
+
+@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
+Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
+the file.
+
+@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
+Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
+
+@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
+Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
+found.
+
+@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
+Indicates a segment holding note information.
+
+@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
+A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
+ABI.
+
+@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
+Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
+
+@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
+Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
+
+@item @var{expression}
+An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
+be used for types not defined above.
+@end table
+
+You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
+in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
+@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
+Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
+output section attribute.
+
+The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
+which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
+explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
+an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
+header.
+
+Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
+headers used on a native ELF system.
+
+@example
+@group
+PHDRS
+@{
+ headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
+ interp PT_INTERP ;
+ text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
+ data PT_LOAD ;
+ dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
+@}
+
+SECTIONS
+@{
+ . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
+ .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
+ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
+ .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
+ @dots{}
+ . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
+ .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
+ .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
+ @dots{}
+@}
+@end group
+@end example
+
+@node VERSION
+@section VERSION Command
+@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
+@cindex symbol versions
+@cindex version script
+@cindex versions of symbols
+The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
+only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
+symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
+a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
+shared library.
+
+You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
+you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
+also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
+
+The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
+@smallexample
+VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
+@end smallexample
+
+The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
+Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
+version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
+version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
+version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
+scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
+library.
+
+The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
+examples.
+
+@smallexample
+VERS_1.1 @{
+ global:
+ foo1;
+ local:
+ old*;
+ original*;
+ new*;
+@};
+
+VERS_1.2 @{
+ foo2;
+@} VERS_1.1;
+
+VERS_2.0 @{
+ bar1; bar2;
+ extern "C++" @{
+ ns::*;
+ "f(int, double)";
+ @};
+@} VERS_1.2;
+@end smallexample
+
+This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
+version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
+The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
+a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
+of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
+symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
+is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
+in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
+However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
+name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
+
+Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
+depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
+to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
+
+Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
+depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
+and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
+
+When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
+specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
+unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
+unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
+somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
+wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
+wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
+set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
+ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
+
+The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
+they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
+could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
+However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
+
+Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
+in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
+symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
+won't.
+
+@smallexample
+@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
+@end smallexample
+
+When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
+symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
+requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
+shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
+loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
+linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
+application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
+way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
+all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
+search for each symbol reference.
+
+The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
+doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
+that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
+functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
+the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
+required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
+that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
+versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
+the libraries being used with the application are too old.
+
+There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
+first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
+source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
+script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
+maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
+@smallexample
+__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
+@end smallexample
+@noindent
+in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
+be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
+The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
+@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
+takes precedence over a version script.
+
+The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
+function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
+an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
+version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
+linked against the old interface to continue to function.
+
+To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
+source file. Here is an example:
+
+@smallexample
+__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
+__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
+__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
+__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
+@end smallexample
+
+In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
+unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
+example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
+@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
+
+When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
+some way to specify a default version to which external references to
+this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
+@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
+declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
+you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
+
+If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
+within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
+(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
+specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
+
+You can also specify the language in the version script:
+
+@smallexample
+VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
+@end smallexample
+
+The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
+The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
+demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
+patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
+@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
+
+Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
+described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
+or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
+the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
+whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
+cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
+might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
+should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
+expect when you upgrade.
+
+@node Expressions
+@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
+@cindex expressions
+@cindex arithmetic
+The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
+that of C expressions, except that whitespace is required in some
+places to resolve syntactic ambiguities. All expressions are
+evaluated as integers. All expressions are evaluated in the same
+size, which is 32 bits if both the host and target are 32 bits, and is
+otherwise 64 bits.
+
+You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
+
+The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
+expressions.
+
+@menu
+* Constants:: Constants
+* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
+* Symbols:: Symbol Names
+* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
+* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
+* Operators:: Operators
+* Evaluation:: Evaluation
+* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
+* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
+@end menu
+
+@node Constants
+@subsection Constants
+@cindex integer notation
+@cindex constants in linker scripts
+All constants are integers.
+
+As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
+octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
+hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
+@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
+@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
+value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
+
+@cindex scaled integers
+@cindex K and M integer suffixes
+@cindex M and K integer suffixes
+@cindex suffixes for integers
+@cindex integer suffixes
+In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
+constant by
+@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
+@ifnottex
+@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
+@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
+@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
+@end ifnottex
+@tex
+${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
+@end tex
+@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
+respectively. For example, the following
+all refer to the same quantity:
+
+@smallexample
+_fourk_1 = 4K;
+_fourk_2 = 4096;
+_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
+_fourk_4 = 10000o;
+@end smallexample
+
+Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
+conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
+
+@node Symbolic Constants
+@subsection Symbolic Constants
+@cindex symbolic constants
+@kindex CONSTANT
+It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
+the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
+
+@table @code
+@item MAXPAGESIZE
+@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
+The target's maximum page size.
+
+@item COMMONPAGESIZE
+@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
+The target's default page size.
+@end table
+
+So for example:
+
+@smallexample
+ .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
+@end smallexample
+
+will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
+supported by the target.
+
+@node Symbols
+@subsection Symbol Names
+@cindex symbol names
+@cindex names
+@cindex quoted symbol names
+@kindex "
+Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
+and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
+Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
+specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
+keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
+@smallexample
+"SECTION" = 9;
+"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
+@end smallexample
+
+Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
+to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
+whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
+
+@node Orphan Sections
+@subsection Orphan Sections
+@cindex orphan
+Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
+are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
+script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
+output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
+in which to place the orphaned input section.
+
+If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
+an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
+placed at the end of that output section.
+
+If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
+sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
+name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
+orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
+one new output section.
+
+If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
+then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
+in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
+linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
+attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
+sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
+support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
+
+The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
+(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
+output sections an orphan is placed in.
+
+@node Location Counter
+@subsection The Location Counter
+@kindex .
+@cindex dot
+@cindex location counter
+@cindex current output location
+The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
+current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
+location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
+within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
+anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
+
+@cindex holes
+Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
+moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
+location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
+and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
+doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
+
+@smallexample
+SECTIONS
+@{
+ output :
+ @{
+ file1(.text)
+ . = . + 1000;
+ file2(.text)
+ . += 1000;
+ file3(.text)
+ @} = 0x12345678;
+@}
+@end smallexample
+@noindent
+In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
+located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
+followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
+@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
+@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
+specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
+
+@cindex dot inside sections
+Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
+current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
+statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
+absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
+however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
+not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
+
+@smallexample
+SECTIONS
+@{
+ . = 0x100
+ .text: @{
+ *(.text)
+ . = 0x200
+ @}
+ . = 0x500
+ .data: @{
+ *(.data)
+ . += 0x600
+ @}
+@}
+@end smallexample
+
+The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
+and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
+the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
+much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
+move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
+and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
+the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
+the @samp{.data} output section itself.
+
+@cindex dot outside sections
+Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
+output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
+needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
+
+@smallexample
+SECTIONS
+@{
+ start_of_text = . ;
+ .text: @{ *(.text) @}
+ end_of_text = . ;
+
+ start_of_data = . ;
+ .data: @{ *(.data) @}
+ end_of_data = . ;
+@}
+@end smallexample
+
+If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
+not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
+between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
+should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
+blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
+the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
+sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
+statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
+special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
+place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
+as follows:
+
+@smallexample
+SECTIONS
+@{
+ start_of_text = . ;
+ .text: @{ *(.text) @}
+ end_of_text = . ;
+
+ start_of_data = . ;
+ .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
+ .data: @{ *(.data) @}
+ end_of_data = . ;
+@}
+@end smallexample
+
+This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
+@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
+placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
+assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
+a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
+section. So you could write:
+
+@smallexample
+SECTIONS
+@{
+ start_of_text = . ;
+ .text: @{ *(.text) @}
+ end_of_text = . ;
+
+ . = . ;
+ start_of_data = . ;
+ .data: @{ *(.data) @}
+ end_of_data = . ;
+@}
+@end smallexample
+
+Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
+@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
+
+@need 2000
+@node Operators
+@subsection Operators
+@cindex operators for arithmetic
+@cindex arithmetic operators
+@cindex precedence in expressions
+The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
+the standard bindings and precedence levels:
+@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
+@ifnottex
+@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
+@smallexample
+precedence associativity Operators Notes
+(highest)
+1 left ! - ~ (1)
+2 left * / %
+3 left + -
+4 left >> <<
+5 left == != > < <= >=
+6 left &
+7 left |
+8 left &&
+9 left ||
+10 right ? :
+11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
+(lowest)
+@end smallexample
+Notes:
+(1) Prefix operators
+(2) @xref{Assignments}.
+@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
+@end ifnottex
+@tex
+\vskip \baselineskip
+%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
+\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
+\hrule
+\halign
+{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
+height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
+&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
+height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
+\noalign{\hrule}
+height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
+&highest&&&&&\cr
+% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
+&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
+&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
+&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
+&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
+&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
+&6&&left&&\&&\cr
+&7&&left&&|&\cr
+&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
+&9&&left&&||&\cr
+&10&&right&&? :&\cr
+&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
+&lowest&&&&&\cr
+height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
+\hrule}
+@end tex
+@iftex
+{
+@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
+@dag@quad Prefix operators.
+@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
+}
+@end iftex
+@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
+
+@node Evaluation
+@subsection Evaluation
+@cindex lazy evaluation
+@cindex expression evaluation order
+The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
+an expression when absolutely necessary.
+
+The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
+address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
+regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
+as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
+
+However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
+until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
+other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
+for use in the symbol assignment expression.
+
+The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
+assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
+allocation.
+
+Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
+@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
+
+If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
+available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
+following
+@smallexample
+@group
+SECTIONS
+ @{
+ .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
+ @{ *(.text) @}
+ @}
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+@noindent
+will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
+address}.
+
+@node Expression Section
+@subsection The Section of an Expression
+@cindex expression sections
+@cindex absolute expressions
+@cindex relative expressions
+@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
+@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
+@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
+Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
+relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
+using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
+value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
+symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
+operations.
+
+Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
+section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
+address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
+@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
+functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
+One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
+(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
+differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
+versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
+section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
+Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
+absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
+given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
+everywhere.
+
+In the following simple example,
+
+@smallexample
+@group
+SECTIONS
+ @{
+ . = 0x100;
+ __executable_start = 0x100;
+ .data :
+ @{
+ . = 0x10;
+ __data_start = 0x10;
+ *(.data)
+ @}
+ @dots{}
+ @}
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
+address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
+@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
+section in the second two assignments.
+
+For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
+addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
+operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
+absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
+@item
+Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
+relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
+and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
+@item
+Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
+in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
+address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
+before applying the operator.
+@end itemize
+
+The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
+@item
+The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
+@item
+The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
+relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
+(after above conversions) is also a number when
+@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
+but an absolute address otherwise.
+@item
+The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
+relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
+section as the relative operand(s).
+@item
+The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
+conversions) is an absolute address.
+@end itemize
+
+You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
+to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
+create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
+section @samp{.data}:
+@smallexample
+SECTIONS
+ @{
+ .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
+ @}
+@end smallexample
+@noindent
+If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
+@samp{.data} section.
+
+Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
+particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
+
+@node Builtin Functions
+@subsection Builtin Functions
+@cindex functions in expressions
+The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
+use in linker script expressions.
+
+@table @code
+@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
+@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
+@cindex expression, absolute
+Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
+of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
+value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
+normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
+
+@item ADDR(@var{section})
+@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
+@cindex section address in expression
+Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
+script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
+the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
+@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
+@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
+the other two will be absolute:
+@smallexample
+@group
+SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
+ .output1 :
+ @{
+ start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
+ @dots{}
+ @}
+ .output :
+ @{
+ symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
+ symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
+ @}
+@dots{} @}
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+@item ALIGN(@var{align})
+@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
+@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
+@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
+@cindex round up location counter
+@cindex align location counter
+@cindex round up expression
+@cindex align expression
+Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
+to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
+doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
+arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
+expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
+equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
+
+Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
+next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
+variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
+input sections:
+@smallexample
+@group
+SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
+ .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
+ *(.data)
+ variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
+ @}
+@dots{} @}
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+@noindent
+The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
+a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
+a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
+of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
+
+The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
+
+@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
+@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
+@cindex section alignment
+Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
+been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
+evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
+the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
+value in that section.
+@smallexample
+@group
+SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
+ .output @{
+ LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
+ @dots{}
+ @}
+@dots{} @}
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
+@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
+This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
+scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
+section.
+
+@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
+@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
+This is equivalent to either
+@smallexample
+(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
+@end smallexample
+or
+@smallexample
+(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
+ + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
+@end smallexample
+@noindent
+depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
+for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
+@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
+If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
+memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
+bytes in the on-disk file.
+
+This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
+any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
+@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
+be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
+running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
+that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
+page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
+
+@noindent
+Example:
+@smallexample
+ . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
+@end smallexample
+
+@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
+@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
+This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
+evaluation purposes.
+
+@smallexample
+ . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
+@end smallexample
+
+@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
+@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
+This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
+@samp{-z relro} option is used.
+When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
+does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
+@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
+argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
+script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
+@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
+padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
+section alignment.
+
+@smallexample
+ . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
+@end smallexample
+
+@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
+@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
+@cindex symbol defaults
+Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
+defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
+return 0. You can use this function to provide
+default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
+shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
+the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
+existed, its value is preserved:
+
+@smallexample
+@group
+SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
+ .text : @{
+ begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
+ @dots{}
+ @}
+ @dots{}
+@}
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
+@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
+Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
+
+@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
+@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
+@cindex section load address in expression
+Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
+Section LMA}).
+
+@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
+@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
+Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
+@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
+
+@kindex MAX
+@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
+Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
+
+@kindex MIN
+@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
+Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
+
+@item NEXT(@var{exp})
+@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
+@cindex unallocated address, next
+Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
+This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
+use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
+output file, the two functions are equivalent.
+
+@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
+@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
+Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
+
+@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
+@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
+Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
+value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
+@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
+will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
+can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
+``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
+name.
+
+@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
+@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
+@cindex section size
+Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
+been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
+evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
+@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
+@smallexample
+@group
+SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
+ .output @{
+ .start = . ;
+ @dots{}
+ .end = . ;
+ @}
+ symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
+ symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
+@dots{} @}
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
+@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
+@cindex header size
+Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
+information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
+this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
+choose, to facilitate paging.
+
+@cindex not enough room for program headers
+@cindex program headers, not enough room
+When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
+@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
+number of program headers before it has determined all the section
+addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
+additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
+room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
+the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
+script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
+you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
+command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
+@end table
+
+@node Implicit Linker Scripts
+@section Implicit Linker Scripts
+@cindex implicit linker scripts
+If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
+an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
+linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
+linker will report an error.
+
+An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
+
+Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
+assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
+commands.
+
+Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
+at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
+read. This can affect archive searching.
+
+@node Plugins
+@chapter Linker Plugins
+
+@cindex plugins
+@cindex linker plugins
+The linker can use dynamically loaded plugins to modify its behavior.
+For example, the link-time optimization feature that some compilers
+support is implemented with a linker plugin.
+
+Currently there is only one plugin shipped by default, but more may
+be added here later.
+
+Plugins are enabled via the use of the @option{-plugin @var{name}}
+command line option. @xref{Options}.
+
+@menu
+* libdep Plugin:: Static Library Dependencies Plugin
+@end menu
+
+@node libdep Plugin
+@section Static Library Dependencies Plugin
+@cindex static library dependencies
+Originally, static libraries were contained in an archive file consisting
+just of a collection of relocatable object files. Later they evolved to
+optionally include a symbol table, to assist in finding the needed objects
+within a library. There their evolution ended, and dynamic libraries
+rose to ascendance.
+
+One useful feature of dynamic libraries was that, more than just collecting
+multiple objects into a single file, they also included a list of their
+dependencies, such that one could specify just the name of a single dynamic
+library at link time, and all of its dependencies would be implicitly
+referenced as well. But static libraries lacked this feature, so if a
+link invocation was switched from using dynamic libraries to static
+libraries, the link command would usually fail unless it was rewritten to
+explicitly list the dependencies of the static library.
+
+The GNU @command{ar} utility now supports a @option{--record-libdeps} option
+to embed dependency lists into static libraries as well, and the @file{libdep}
+plugin may be used to read this dependency information at link time. The
+dependency information is stored as a single string, carrying @option{-l}
+and @option{-L} arguments as they would normally appear in a linker
+command line. As such, the information can be written with any text
+utility and stored into any archive, even if GNU @command{ar} is not
+being used to create the archive. The information is stored in an
+archive member named @samp{__.LIBDEP}.
+
+For example, given a library @file{libssl.a} that depends on another
+library @file{libcrypto.a} which may be found in @file{/usr/local/lib},
+the @samp{__.LIBDEP} member of @file{libssl.a} would contain
+
+@smallexample
+-L/usr/local/lib -lcrypto
+@end smallexample
+
+@ifset GENERIC
+@node Machine Dependent
+@chapter Machine Dependent Features
+
+@cindex machine dependencies
+@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
+sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
+functionality are not listed.
+
+@menu
+@ifset H8300
+* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
+@end ifset
+@ifset M68HC11
+* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
+@end ifset
+@ifset ARM
+* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
+@end ifset
+@ifset HPPA
+* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
+@end ifset
+@ifset M68K
+* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
+@end ifset
+@ifset MIPS
+* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
+@end ifset
+@ifset MMIX
+* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
+@end ifset
+@ifset MSP430
+* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
+@end ifset
+@ifset NDS32
+* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
+@end ifset
+@ifset NIOSII
+* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
+@end ifset
+@ifset POWERPC
+* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
+@end ifset
+@ifset POWERPC64
+* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
+@end ifset
+@ifset S/390
+* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
+@end ifset
+@ifset SPU
+* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
+@end ifset
+@ifset TICOFF
+* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
+@end ifset
+@ifset WIN32
+* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
+@end ifset
+@ifset XTENSA
+* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
+@end ifset
+@end menu
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset H8300
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@raisesections
+@end ifclear
+
+@node H8/300
+@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
+
+@cindex H8/300 support
+For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
+you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
+
+@table @emph
+@cindex relaxing on H8/300
+@item relaxing address modes
+@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
+targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
+program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
+respectively.
+
+@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
+@item synthesizing instructions
+@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
+@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
+sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
+page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
+(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
+@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
+top page of memory).
+
+@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
+indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
+displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
+the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
+@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
+whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
+range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
+
+@item bit manipulation instructions
+@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
+biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
+which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
+page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
+(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
+@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
+the top page of memory).
+
+@item system control instructions
+@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
+32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
+changes them to use 16 bit address form.
+(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
+@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
+the top page of memory).
+@end table
+
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@lowersections
+@end ifclear
+@end ifset
+
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@ifset Renesas
+@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
+@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
+@node Renesas
+@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
+
+@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
+H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
+options are required for these chips.
+@end ifset
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset ARM
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@raisesections
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset M68HC11
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@raisesections
+@end ifclear
+
+@node M68HC11/68HC12
+@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
+
+@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
+
+@subsection Linker Relaxation
+
+For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
+optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
+
+@table @emph
+@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
+@item relaxing address modes
+@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
+targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
+program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
+respectively.
+
+@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
+transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
+page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
+
+@item relaxing gcc instruction group
+When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
+of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
+addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
+@code{bset} instructions.
+
+@end table
+
+@subsection Trampoline Generation
+
+@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
+@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
+For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
+call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
+will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
+trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
+case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
+point to the function trampoline.
+
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@lowersections
+@end ifclear
+@end ifset
+
+@node ARM
+@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
+
+@cindex ARM interworking support
+@kindex --support-old-code
+For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
+between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
+been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
+line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
+libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
+option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
+given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
+which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
+the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
+non-interworking aware Thumb code.
+
+@cindex thumb entry point
+@cindex entry point, thumb
+@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
+The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
+@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
+But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
+branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
+executing in Thumb mode straight away.
+
+@cindex PE import table prefixing
+@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
+The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
+the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
+element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
+import tables. By default this option is turned off.
+
+@cindex BE8
+@kindex --be8
+The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
+executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
+objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
+option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
+little-endian code.
+
+@cindex TARGET1
+@kindex --target1-rel
+@kindex --target1-abs
+The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
+@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
+or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
+and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
+
+@cindex TARGET2
+@kindex --target2=@var{type}
+The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
+@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
+meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
+@table @samp
+@item rel
+@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
+@item abs
+@samp{R_ARM_ABS32}
+@item got-rel
+@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
+@end table
+
+@cindex FIX_V4BX
+@kindex --fix-v4bx
+The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
+specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
+interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
+also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
+
+In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
+linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
+@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
+
+In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
+relocations are ignored.
+
+@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
+@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
+Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
+relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
+
+@smallexample
+TST rM, #1
+MOVEQ PC, rM
+BX Rn
+@end smallexample
+
+This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
+and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
+condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
+
+@cindex USE_BLX
+@kindex --use-blx
+The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
+BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
+situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
+code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
+each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
+
+@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
+@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
+The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
+bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
+instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
+to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
+the support code can read the intended values.
+
+The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
+intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
+and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
+intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
+full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
+you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
+
+If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
+enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
+@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
+mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
+vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
+@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
+
+If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
+potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
+such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
+first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
+instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
+the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
+are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
+
+@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
+@kindex --fix-arm1176
+@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
+The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
+in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
+are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
+unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
+
+Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
+Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
+http://infocenter.arm.com/.
+
+@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
+@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
+
+The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
+workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
+the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
+off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
+the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
+core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
+integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
+VPOP. Stores are not affected.
+
+The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
+necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
+
+The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
+@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
+STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
+linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
+@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
+
+If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
+potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
+such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
+replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
+branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
+then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
+
+The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
+the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
+
+The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
+they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
+there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
+occurs.
+
+The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
+PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
+large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
+cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
+occurs.
+
+@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
+@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
+The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
+warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
+enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
+linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
+using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
+not be diagnosed.
+
+@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
+@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
+The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
+warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
+@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
+linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
+using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
+
+@cindex PIC_VENEER
+@kindex --pic-veneer
+The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
+ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
+is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
+@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
+
+@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
+@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
+The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
+code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
+perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
+placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
+controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
+The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
+duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
+group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
+code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
+where they should be placed.
+
+The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
+@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
+placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
+branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
+placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
+value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
+exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
+A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
+linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
+from the input sections.
+
+The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
+@samp{N = +1}.
+
+Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
+only, because it relies on object files properties not present
+otherwise.
+
+@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
+@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
+@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
+The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
+
+The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
+
+@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
+@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
+@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
+The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
+
+Please contact ARM for further details.
+
+@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
+@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
+@cindex Merging exidx entries
+The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
+
+@kindex --long-plt
+@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
+The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
+which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
+entries which only support 512Mb of code.
+
+@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
+@cindex AArch64 rela addend
+The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
+link-time values for dynamic relocations.
+
+@cindex Placement of SG veneers
+All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
+Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
+@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
+veneers in memory.
+
+@kindex --cmse-implib
+@cindex Secure gateway import library
+The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
+specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
+secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
+executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
+
+@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
+@cindex Input import library
+The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
+must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
+given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
+in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
+@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
+library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
+library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
+for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
+specified.
+
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@lowersections
+@end ifclear
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset HPPA
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@raisesections
+@end ifclear
+
+@node HPPA ELF32
+@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
+@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
+@kindex --multi-subspace
+When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
+import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
+The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
+stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
+multiple sub-spaces.
+
+@cindex HPPA stub grouping
+@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
+Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
+stub sections located between groups of input sections.
+@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
+sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
+a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
+the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
+conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
+prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
+A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
+branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
+@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
+@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
+detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
+positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
+
+Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
+single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
+create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
+large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
+
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@lowersections
+@end ifclear
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset M68K
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@raisesections
+@end ifclear
+
+@node M68K
+@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
+
+@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
+@kindex --got=@var{type}
+The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
+The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
+@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
+the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
+@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
+entries only at non-negative offsets.
+@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
+entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
+support such GOTs.
+@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
+output file. All GOT references from a single input object
+file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
+files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
+
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@lowersections
+@end ifclear
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset MIPS
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@raisesections
+@end ifclear
+
+@node MIPS
+@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
+
+@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
+@kindex --insn32
+@kindex --no-insn32
+The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
+microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
+in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
+used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
+or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
+including 16-bit ones where possible.
+
+@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
+@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
+@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
+The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
+control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
+@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
+relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
+calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
+relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
+instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
+or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
+the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
+
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@lowersections
+@end ifclear
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset MMIX
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@raisesections
+@end ifclear
+
+@node MMIX
+@section @code{ld} and MMIX
+For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
+@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
+understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
+can translate between the two formats.
+
+There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
+Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
+registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
+equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
+@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
+global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
+this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
+symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
+
+Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
+@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
+The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
+of a section.
+
+Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
+are left out from an mmo file.
+
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@lowersections
+@end ifclear
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset MSP430
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@raisesections
+@end ifclear
+
+@node MSP430
+@section @code{ld} and MSP430
+For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
+will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
+just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
+
+@cindex MSP430 extra sections
+The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
+
+@table @code
+@item @samp{.vectors}
+Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
+
+@item @samp{.bootloader}
+Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
+in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
+
+@item @samp{.infomem}
+Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
+this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
+
+@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
+This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
+in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
+
+@item @samp{.noinit}
+Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
+
+The last two sections are used by gcc.
+@end table
+
+@table @option
+@cindex MSP430 Options
+@kindex --code-region
+@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
+This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
+argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
+using this option.
+
+@kindex --data-region
+@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
+This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
+[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
+for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
+
+@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
+@item --disable-sec-transformation
+Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
+and @code{--data-region} options.
+This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
+wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
+not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
+@end table
+
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@lowersections
+@end ifclear
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset NDS32
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@raisesections
+@end ifclear
+
+@node NDS32
+@section @code{ld} and NDS32
+@kindex relaxing on NDS32
+For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
+relaxes objects according to these options.
+
+@table @code
+@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
+Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
+
+@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
+Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
+
+@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
+Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
+
+@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
+Export the EX9 table after linking.
+
+@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
+Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
+
+@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
+Update the existing EX9 table.
+
+@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
+Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
+
+@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
+Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
+
+@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
+Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
+
+@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
+Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
+@end table
+
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@lowersections
+@end ifclear
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset NIOSII
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@raisesections
+@end ifclear
+
+@node Nios II
+@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
+@cindex Nios II call relaxation
+@kindex --relax on Nios II
+
+Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
+transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
+which may result in @command{ld} giving
+@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
+The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
+trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
+outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
+trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
+be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
+larger than 256MB.
+
+The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
+is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
+@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
+locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
+source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
+register as a temporary.
+
+Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
+relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
+option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
+
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@lowersections
+@end ifclear
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset POWERPC
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@raisesections
+@end ifclear
+
+@node PowerPC ELF32
+@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
+@cindex PowerPC long branches
+@kindex --relax on PowerPC
+Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
+displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
+@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
+@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
+the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
+section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
+section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
+@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
+both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
+considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
+
+@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
+@table @option
+@cindex PowerPC PLT
+@kindex --bss-plt
+@item --bss-plt
+Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
+generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
+the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
+writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
+@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
+PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
+compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
+BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
+
+@kindex --secure-plt
+@item --secure-plt
+@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
+@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
+when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
+layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
+style BSS PLT.
+
+@cindex PowerPC GOT
+@kindex --sdata-got
+@item --sdata-got
+The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
+sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
+@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
+section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
+@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
+@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
+@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
+@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
+PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
+pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
+GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
+really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
+
+@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
+@kindex --emit-stub-syms
+@item --emit-stub-syms
+This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
+symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
+
+@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
+@kindex --no-tls-optimize
+@item --no-tls-optimize
+PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
+sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
+disable the optimization.
+@end table
+
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@lowersections
+@end ifclear
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset POWERPC64
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@raisesections
+@end ifclear
+
+@node PowerPC64 ELF64
+@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
+
+@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
+@table @option
+@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
+@kindex --stub-group-size
+@item --stub-group-size
+Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
+by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
+@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
+sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
+a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
+the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
+conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
+prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
+A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
+branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
+@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
+@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
+detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
+positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
+
+Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
+single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
+create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
+large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
+
+@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
+@kindex --emit-stub-syms
+@item --emit-stub-syms
+This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
+symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
+
+@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
+@kindex --dotsyms
+@kindex --no-dotsyms
+@item --dotsyms
+@itemx --no-dotsyms
+These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
+in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
+function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
+code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
+properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
+to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
+@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
+dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
+feature.
+
+@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
+@kindex --save-restore-funcs
+@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
+@item --save-restore-funcs
+@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
+These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
+provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
+@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
+function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
+link.
+
+@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
+@kindex --no-tls-optimize
+@item --no-tls-optimize
+PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
+sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
+disable the optimization.
+
+@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
+@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
+@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
+@kindex --tls-get-addr-regsave
+@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-regsave
+@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
+@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
+These options control how PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
+stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
+an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
+@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
+stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables
+generation of the stub when glibc advertises the availability of
+__tls_get_addr_opt.
+Using @option{--tls-get-addr-optimize} with an older glibc won't do
+much besides slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking
+an application against an older glibc with the expectation that it
+will normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
+@option{--tls-get-addr-regsave} forces generation of a stub that saves
+and restores volatile registers around the call into glibc. Normally,
+this is done when the linker detects a call to __tls_get_addr_desc.
+Such calls then go via the register saving stub to __tls_get_addr_opt.
+@option{--no-tls-get-addr-regsave} disables generation of the
+register saves.
+
+@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
+@kindex --no-opd-optimize
+@item --no-opd-optimize
+PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
+corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
+the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
+Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
+
+@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
+@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
+@item --non-overlapping-opd
+Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
+@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
+the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
+entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
+
+@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
+@kindex --no-toc-optimize
+@item --no-toc-optimize
+PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
+entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
+reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
+marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
+marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
+relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
+unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
+reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
+discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
+reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
+code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
+optimization.
+
+@cindex PowerPC64 inline PLT call optimization
+@kindex --no-inline-optimize
+@item --no-inline-optimize
+PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally replaces inline PLT call sequences
+marked with @code{R_PPC64_PLTSEQ}, @code{R_PPC64_PLTCALL},
+@code{R_PPC64_PLT16_HA} and @code{R_PPC64_PLT16_LO_DS} relocations by
+a number of @code{nop}s and a direct call when the function is defined
+locally and can't be overridden by some other definition. This option
+disables that optimization.
+
+@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
+@kindex --no-multi-toc
+@item --no-multi-toc
+If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
+@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
+where TOC
+entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
+total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
+grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
+TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
+calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
+help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
+64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
+Use this option to turn off this feature.
+
+@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
+@kindex --no-toc-sort
+@item --no-toc-sort
+By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
+happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
+placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
+with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
+referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
+@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
+results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
+off this feature.
+
+@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
+@kindex --plt-align
+@kindex --no-plt-align
+@item --plt-align
+@itemx --no-plt-align
+Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
+aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
+boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
+specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
+specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
+if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
+PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
+
+@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
+@kindex --plt-static-chain
+@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
+@item --plt-static-chain
+@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
+Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
+chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
+chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
+
+@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
+@kindex --plt-thread-safe
+@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
+@item --plt-thread-safe
+@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
+With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
+lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
+another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
+order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
+memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
+barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
+looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
+seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
+default behaviour.
+
+@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
+@kindex --plt-localentry
+@kindex --no-plt-localentry
+@item --plt-localentry
+@itemx --no-localentry
+ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
+ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
+(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
+Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
+or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
+functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
+in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
+interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
+including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
+to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
+complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
+care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
+
+@cindex PowerPC64 Power10 stubs
+@kindex --power10-stubs
+@kindex --no-power10-stubs
+@item --power10-stubs
+@itemx --no-power10-stubs
+When PowerPC64 @command{ld} links input object files containing
+relocations used on power10 prefixed instructions it normally creates
+linkage stubs (PLT call and long branch) using power10 instructions
+for @code{@@notoc} PLT calls where @code{r2} is not known. The
+power10 notoc stubs are smaller and faster, so are preferred for
+power10. @option{--power10-stubs} and @option{--no-power10-stubs}
+allow you to override the linker's selection of stub instructions.
+@option{--power10-stubs=auto} allows the user to select the default
+auto mode.
+@end table
+
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@lowersections
+@end ifclear
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset S/390
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@raisesections
+@end ifclear
+
+@node S/390 ELF
+@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
+
+@cindex S/390 ELF options
+@table @option
+
+@cindex S/390
+@kindex --s390-pgste
+@item --s390-pgste
+This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
+segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
+binaries marked that way.
+@end table
+
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@lowersections
+@end ifclear
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset SPU
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@raisesections
+@end ifclear
+
+@node SPU ELF
+@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
+
+@cindex SPU ELF options
+@table @option
+
+@cindex SPU plugins
+@kindex --plugin
+@item --plugin
+This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
+
+@cindex SPU overlays
+@kindex --no-overlays
+@item --no-overlays
+Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
+regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
+@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
+turns off all this special overlay handling.
+
+@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
+@kindex --emit-stub-syms
+@item --emit-stub-syms
+This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
+symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
+
+@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
+@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
+@item --extra-overlay-stubs
+This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
+function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
+on calls to non-overlay regions.
+
+@cindex SPU local store size
+@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
+@item --local-store=lo:hi
+@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
+the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
+range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
+
+@cindex SPU
+@kindex --stack-analysis
+@item --stack-analysis
+SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
+unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
+under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
+@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
+@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
+determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
+for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
+for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
+for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
+find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
+and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
+under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
+dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
+is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
+and calls will be given.
+
+@cindex SPU
+@kindex --emit-stack-syms
+@item --emit-stack-syms
+This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
+in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
+These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
+functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
+functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
+such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
+The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
+@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
+@end table
+
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@lowersections
+@end ifclear
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset TICOFF
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@raisesections
+@end ifclear
+
+@node TI COFF
+@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
+@cindex TI COFF versions
+@kindex --format=@var{version}
+The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
+TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
+also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
+format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
+header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
+
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@lowersections
+@end ifclear
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset WIN32
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@raisesections
+@end ifclear
+
+@node WIN32
+@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
+
+This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
+See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
+command-line options mentioned here.
+
+@table @emph
+@cindex import libraries
+@item import libraries
+The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
+libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
+regular static archives and are handled as any other static
+archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
+support for creating such libraries provided with the
+@samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
+
+@item Resource only DLLs
+It is possible to create a DLL that only contains resources, ie just a
+@samp{.rsrc} section, but in order to do so a custom linker script
+must be used. This is because the built-in default linker scripts
+will always create @samp{.text} and @samp{.idata} sections, even if
+there is no input to go into them.
+
+The script should look like this, although the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT}
+should be changed to match the desired format.
+
+@example
+OUTPUT_FORMAT(pei-i386)
+SECTIONS
+@{
+ . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
+ . = ALIGN(__section_alignment__);
+ .rsrc __image_base__ + __section_alignment__ : ALIGN(4)
+ @{
+ KEEP (*(.rsrc))
+ KEEP (*(.rsrc$*))
+ @}
+ /DISCARD/ : @{ *(*) @}
+@}
+@end example
+
+With this script saved to a file called, eg @file{rsrc.ld}, a command
+line like this can be used to create the resource only DLL
+@file{rsrc.dll} from an input file called @file{rsrc.o}:
+
+@smallexample
+ld -dll --subsystem windows -e 0 -s rsrc.o -o rsrc.dll -T rsrc.ld
+@end smallexample
+
+@item exporting DLL symbols
+@cindex exporting DLL symbols
+The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
+
+@table @emph
+@item using auto-export functionality
+@cindex using auto-export functionality
+By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
+which is controlled by the following command-line options:
+
+@itemize
+@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
+@item --exclude-symbols
+@item --exclude-libs
+@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
+@item --version-script
+@end itemize
+
+When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
+(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
+symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
+often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
+private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
+options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
+exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
+final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
+
+If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
+command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
+if either of the following are true:
+
+@itemize
+@item A DEF file is used.
+@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
+@end itemize
+
+@item using a DEF file
+@cindex using a DEF file
+Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
+an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
+exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
+name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
+command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
+
+@example
+gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
+@end example
+
+Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
+@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
+
+Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
+
+@example
+LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
+
+EXPORTS
+foo
+bar
+_bar = bar
+another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
+var1 DATA
+doo = foo == foo2
+eoo DATA == var1
+@end example
+
+This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
+symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
+alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
+by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
+@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
+@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
+export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
+in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
+symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
+
+The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
+name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
+the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
+
+When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
+library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
+@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
+executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
+
+With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
+specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
+non-default base address for the image.
+
+If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
+or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
+filename specified on the command line.
+
+The complete specification of an export symbol is:
+
+@example
+EXPORTS
+ ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
+ | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
+ [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
+@end example
+
+Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
+@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
+@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
+@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
+Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
+@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
+string in import/export table for the symbol.
+
+The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
+
+@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
+will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
+by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
+linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
+library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
+
+@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
+The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
+the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
+@code{*_imp__foo}).
+
+@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
+well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
+read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
+variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
+the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
+extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
+application will behave unexpectedly.
+
+@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
+it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
+symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
+API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
+the DLL without an import library.
+
+See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
+other DEF file statements
+
+@cindex creating a DEF file
+While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
+with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
+
+@item Using decorations
+@cindex Using decorations
+Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
+itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
+declared as:
+
+@example
+__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
+__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
+@end example
+
+All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
+any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
+this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
+the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
+
+Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
+decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
+instead:
+
+@example
+__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
+__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
+@end example
+
+This complicates the structure of library header files, because
+when included by the library itself the header must declare the
+variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
+code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
+of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
+omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
+@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
+information.
+@end table
+
+@cindex automatic data imports
+@item automatic data imports
+The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
+by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
+compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
+issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
+code to these platforms, especially for large
+c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
+initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
+decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
+platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
+command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
+The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
+suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
+trigger the feature's use.
+
+auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
+additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
+
+"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
+documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
+
+The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
+occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
+One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
+below.
+
+@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
+For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
+object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
+offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
+field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
+in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
+without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
+The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
+references.
+
+The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
+be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
+themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
+runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
+compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
+support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
+run without error on an older system.
+
+@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
+enabled as needed.
+
+@cindex direct linking to a dll
+@item direct linking to a dll
+The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
+including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
+libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
+traditional import library method, especially when linking large
+libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
+function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
+though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
+storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
+tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
+large or complex libraries when using import libs.
+
+Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
+@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
+of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
+perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
+select the dll instead of an import library.
+
+
+For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
+to find, in the first directory of its search path,
+
+@example
+libxxx.dll.a
+xxx.dll.a
+libxxx.a
+xxx.lib
+libxxx.lib
+cygxxx.dll (*)
+libxxx.dll
+xxx.dll
+@end example
+
+before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
+
+(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
+where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
+@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
+file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
+@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
+
+Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
+@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
+was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
+various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
+could coexist on the same machine.
+
+The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
+applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
+libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
+
+@example
+bin/
+ cygxxx.dll
+lib/
+ libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
+ libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
+@end example
+
+Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
+done two ways:
+
+1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
+@example
+gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
+@end example
+
+However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
+(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
+@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
+not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
+
+2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
+directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
+should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
+making the app/dll.
+
+@example
+ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
+@end example
+
+Then you can link without any make environment changes.
+
+@example
+gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
+@end example
+
+This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
+perfectly legal
+
+@example
+bin/
+ cygxxx-5.dll
+lib/
+ libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
+@end example
+
+Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
+even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
+@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
+
+Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
+wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
+
+1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
+work with auto-imported data.
+
+2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
+import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
+symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
+for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
+possible to do this without an import lib.
+
+3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
+critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
+in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
+stdcall-decorated assembly names.
+
+So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
+true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
+a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
+binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
+massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
+requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
+will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
+
+@item symbol aliasing
+@table @emph
+@item adding additional names
+Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
+A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
+exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
+when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
+import library. Consider the following DEF file:
+
+@example
+LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
+
+EXPORTS
+foo
+_foo = foo
+@end example
+
+The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
+
+Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
+source code using the "weak" attribute:
+
+@example
+void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
+void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
+@end example
+
+See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
+symbols.
+
+@item renaming symbols
+Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
+kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
+@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
+DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
+created). In the following example:
+
+@example
+LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
+
+EXPORTS
+_foo = foo
+@end example
+
+The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
+@samp{_foo}.
+@end table
+
+Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
+unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
+If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
+@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
+that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
+@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
+renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
+to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
+the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
+In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
+which is probably not what you wanted.
+
+@cindex weak externals
+@item weak externals
+The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
+weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
+defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
+are three variants of weak externals:
+@itemize
+@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
+called lazy externals.
+@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
+This form is not presently implemented.
+@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
+implemented.
+@end itemize
+As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
+are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
+uses a default value.
+
+@cindex aligned common symbols
+@item aligned common symbols
+As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
+desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
+the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
+carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
+by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
+tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
+but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
+warnings about unknown linker directives.
+
+@end table
+
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@lowersections
+@end ifclear
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset XTENSA
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@raisesections
+@end ifclear
+
+@node Xtensa
+@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
+
+@cindex Xtensa processors
+The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
+@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
+specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
+keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
+example, with the command:
+
+@smallexample
+SECTIONS
+@{
+ .text : @{
+ *(.literal .text)
+ @}
+@}
+@end smallexample
+
+@noindent
+@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
+and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
+literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
+interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
+group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
+files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
+and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
+
+@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
+@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
+Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
+provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
+is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
+literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
+will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
+location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
+the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
+unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
+@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
+range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
+
+For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
+to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
+instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
+instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
+instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
+@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
+hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
+By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
+switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
+density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
+instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
+performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
+linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
+a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
+
+The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
+control the linker:
+
+@cindex Xtensa options
+@table @option
+@item --size-opt
+When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
+more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
+no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
+alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
+preserve the correctness of the code.
+
+@item --abi-windowed
+@itemx --abi-call0
+Choose ABI for the output object and for the generated PLT code.
+PLT code inserted by the linker must match ABI of the output object
+because windowed and call0 ABI use incompatible function call
+conventions.
+Default ABI is chosen by the ABI tag in the @code{.xtensa.info} section
+of the first input object.
+A warning is issued if ABI tags of input objects do not match each other
+or the chosen output object ABI.
+@end table
+
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@lowersections
+@end ifclear
+@end ifset
+
+@ifclear SingleFormat
+@node BFD
+@chapter BFD
+
+@cindex back end
+@cindex object file management
+@cindex object formats available
+@kindex objdump -i
+The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
+These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
+object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
+format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
+it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
+associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
+object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
+(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
+list all the formats available for your configuration.
+
+@cindex BFD requirements
+@cindex requirements for BFD
+As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
+several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
+BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
+formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
+been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
+BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
+may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
+
+One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
+mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
+useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
+conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
+
+@menu
+* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
+@end menu
+
+@node BFD outline
+@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
+@cindex opening object files
+@include bfdsumm.texi
+@end ifclear
+
+@node Reporting Bugs
+@chapter Reporting Bugs
+@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
+@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
+
+Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
+
+Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
+it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
+to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
+work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
+@command{ld}.
+
+In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
+information that enables us to fix the bug.
+
+@menu
+* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
+* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
+@end menu
+
+@node Bug Criteria
+@section Have You Found a Bug?
+@cindex bug criteria
+
+If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@cindex fatal signal
+@cindex linker crash
+@cindex crash of linker
+@item
+If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
+@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
+
+@cindex error on valid input
+@item
+If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
+
+@cindex invalid input
+@item
+If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
+may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
+object files are correct.
+
+@item
+If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
+improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
+@end itemize
+
+@node Bug Reporting
+@section How to Report Bugs
+@cindex bug reports
+@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
+
+A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
+products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
+recommend you contact that organization first.
+
+You can find contact information for many support companies and
+individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
+distribution.
+
+@ifset BUGURL
+Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
+@value{BUGURL}.
+@end ifset
+
+The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
+@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
+fact or leave it out, state it!
+
+Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
+problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
+assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
+matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
+the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
+location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
+were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
+into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
+specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
+and the most helpful.
+
+Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
+the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
+on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
+
+Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
+bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
+respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
+You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
+
+To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
+the @samp{--version} argument.
+
+Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
+the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
+
+@item
+Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
+patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
+
+@item
+The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
+version number.
+
+@item
+What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
+``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
+
+@item
+The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
+observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
+list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
+sufficient.
+
+If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
+and then we might not encounter the bug.
+
+@item
+A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
+bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
+provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
+bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
+state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
+requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
+we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
+attachments are best.
+
+If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
+@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
+object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
+@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
+how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
+
+@item
+A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
+incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
+
+Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
+will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
+not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
+a chance to make a mistake.
+
+Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
+say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
+copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
+C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
+and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
+fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
+you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
+any conclusion from our observations.
+
+@item
+If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
+diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
+@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
+If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
+context, not by line number.
+
+The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
+sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
+@end itemize
+
+Here are some things that are not necessary:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+A description of the envelope of the bug.
+
+Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
+which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
+changes will not affect it.
+
+This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
+will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
+with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
+We recommend that you save your time for something else.
+
+Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
+of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
+output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
+less time, and so on.
+
+However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
+report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
+
+@item
+A patch for the bug.
+
+A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
+the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
+a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
+to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
+
+Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
+construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
+through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
+able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
+fixed.
+
+And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
+patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
+help us to understand.
+
+@item
+A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
+
+Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
+things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
+@end itemize
+
+@node MRI
+@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
+@cindex MRI compatibility
+To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
+linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
+alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
+described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
+simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
+@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
+linker commands; these commands are described here.
+
+In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
+file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
+features to make use of them.
+
+You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
+@samp{-c} command-line option.
+
+Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
+command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
+blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
+MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
+issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
+
+Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
+
+You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
+lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
+The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
+
+@table @code
+@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
+@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
+@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
+Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
+the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
+@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
+your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
+script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
+commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
+input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
+@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
+
+@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
+@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
+Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
+in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
+
+@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
+
+@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
+@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
+Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
+@var{expression} should be a power of two.
+
+@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
+@item BASE @var{expression}
+Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
+absolute addresses) in the output file.
+
+@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
+@item CHIP @var{expression}
+@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
+This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
+
+@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
+@item END
+This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
+
+@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
+@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
+Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
+language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
+
+@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
+@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
+Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
+@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
+
+The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
+same line, with no change in its effect.
+
+@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
+@item LOAD @var{filename}
+@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
+Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
+same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
+command line.
+
+@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
+@item NAME @var{output-name}
+@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
+MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
+option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
+
+@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
+@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
+@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
+Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
+order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
+script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
+sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
+file, in the order specified.
+
+@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
+@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
+@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
+@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
+Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
+@var{name} used in the linker input files.
+
+@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
+@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
+@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
+@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
+You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
+specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
+If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
+@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
+@end table
+
+@node GNU Free Documentation License
+@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
+@include fdl.texi
+
+@node LD Index
+@unnumbered LD Index
+
+@printindex cp
+
+@tex
+% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
+% meantime:
+\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
+\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
+\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
+\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
+\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
+\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
+\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
+\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
+\page\colophon
+% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
+@end tex
+
+@bye
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/ldfile.c binutils-2.41/ld/ldfile.c
--- binutils.orig/ld/ldfile.c 2024-05-13 13:03:47.800601771 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/ldfile.c 2024-05-13 13:04:08.595633300 +0100
@@ -868,19 +868,7 @@ ldfile_find_command_file (const char *na
return result;
}
-enum script_open_style {
- script_nonT,
- script_T,
- script_defaultT
-};
-
-struct script_name_list
-{
- struct script_name_list *next;
- enum script_open_style open_how;
- char name[1];
-};
-
+struct script_name_list *processed_scripts = NULL;
/* Open command file NAME. */
static void
@@ -888,7 +876,6 @@ ldfile_open_command_file_1 (const char *
{
FILE *ldlex_input_stack;
bool sysrooted;
- static struct script_name_list *processed_scripts = NULL;
struct script_name_list *script;
size_t len;
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/ldfile.c.orig binutils-2.41/ld/ldfile.c.orig
--- binutils.orig/ld/ldfile.c.orig 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/ldfile.c.orig 2023-07-03 00:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,998 @@
+/* Linker file opening and searching.
+ Copyright (C) 1991-2023 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+ This file is part of the GNU Binutils.
+
+ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or
+ (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+ Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street - Fifth Floor, Boston,
+ MA 02110-1301, USA. */
+
+#include "sysdep.h"
+#include "bfd.h"
+#include "bfdlink.h"
+#include "ctf-api.h"
+#include "safe-ctype.h"
+#include "ld.h"
+#include "ldmisc.h"
+#include "ldexp.h"
+#include "ldlang.h"
+#include "ldfile.h"
+#include "ldmain.h"
+#include <ldgram.h>
+#include "ldlex.h"
+#include "ldemul.h"
+#include "libiberty.h"
+#include "filenames.h"
+#include <fnmatch.h>
+#if BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS
+#include "plugin-api.h"
+#include "plugin.h"
+#endif /* BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS */
+
+bool ldfile_assumed_script = false;
+const char *ldfile_output_machine_name = "";
+unsigned long ldfile_output_machine;
+enum bfd_architecture ldfile_output_architecture;
+search_dirs_type *search_head;
+
+#ifdef VMS
+static char *slash = "";
+#else
+#if defined (_WIN32) && !defined (__CYGWIN32__)
+static char *slash = "\\";
+#else
+static char *slash = "/";
+#endif
+#endif
+
+typedef struct search_arch
+{
+ char *name;
+ struct search_arch *next;
+} search_arch_type;
+
+static search_dirs_type **search_tail_ptr = &search_head;
+static search_arch_type *search_arch_head;
+static search_arch_type **search_arch_tail_ptr = &search_arch_head;
+
+typedef struct input_remap
+{
+ const char * pattern; /* Pattern to match input files. */
+ const char * renamed; /* Filename to use if the pattern matches. */
+ struct input_remap * next; /* Link in a chain of these structures. */
+} input_remap;
+
+static struct input_remap * input_remaps = NULL;
+
+void
+ldfile_add_remap (const char * pattern, const char * renamed)
+{
+ struct input_remap * new_entry;
+
+ new_entry = xmalloc (sizeof * new_entry);
+ new_entry->pattern = xstrdup (pattern);
+ new_entry->next = NULL;
+
+ /* Look for special filenames that mean that the input file should be ignored. */
+ if (strcmp (renamed, "/dev/null") == 0
+ || strcmp (renamed, "NUL") == 0)
+ new_entry->renamed = NULL;
+ else
+ /* FIXME: Should we add sanity checking of the 'renamed' string ? */
+ new_entry->renamed = xstrdup (renamed);
+
+ /* It would be easier to add this new node at the start of the chain,
+ but users expect that remapping will occur in the order in which
+ they occur on the command line, and in the remapping files. */
+ if (input_remaps == NULL)
+ {
+ input_remaps = new_entry;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ struct input_remap * i;
+
+ for (i = input_remaps; i->next != NULL; i = i->next)
+ ;
+ i->next = new_entry;
+ }
+}
+
+void
+ldfile_remap_input_free (void)
+{
+ while (input_remaps != NULL)
+ {
+ struct input_remap * i = input_remaps;
+
+ input_remaps = i->next;
+ free ((void *) i->pattern);
+ free ((void *) i->renamed);
+ free (i);
+ }
+}
+
+bool
+ldfile_add_remap_file (const char * file)
+{
+ FILE * f;
+
+ f = fopen (file, FOPEN_RT);
+ if (f == NULL)
+ return false;
+
+ size_t linelen = 256;
+ char * line = xmalloc (linelen);
+
+ do
+ {
+ char * p = line;
+ char * q;
+
+ /* Normally this would use getline(3), but we need to be portable. */
+ while ((q = fgets (p, linelen - (p - line), f)) != NULL
+ && strlen (q) == linelen - (p - line) - 1
+ && line[linelen - 2] != '\n')
+ {
+ line = xrealloc (line, 2 * linelen);
+ p = line + linelen - 1;
+ linelen += linelen;
+ }
+
+ if (q == NULL && p == line)
+ break;
+
+ p = strchr (line, '\n');
+ if (p)
+ *p = '\0';
+
+ /* Because the file format does not know any form of quoting we
+ can search forward for the next '#' character and if found
+ make it terminating the line. */
+ p = strchr (line, '#');
+ if (p)
+ *p = '\0';
+
+ /* Remove leading whitespace. NUL is no whitespace character. */
+ p = line;
+ while (*p == ' ' || *p == '\f' || *p == '\r' || *p == '\t' || *p == '\v')
+ ++p;
+
+ /* If the line is blank it is ignored. */
+ if (*p == '\0')
+ continue;
+
+ char * pattern = p;
+
+ /* Advance past the pattern. We accept whitespace or '=' as an
+ end-of-pattern marker. */
+ while (*p && *p != '=' && *p != ' ' && *p != '\t' && *p != '\f'
+ && *p != '\r' && *p != '\v')
+ ++p;
+
+ if (*p == '\0')
+ {
+ einfo ("%F%P: malformed remap file entry: %s\n", line);
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ * p++ = '\0';
+
+ /* Skip whitespace again. */
+ while (*p == ' ' || *p == '\f' || *p == '\r' || *p == '\t' || *p == '\v')
+ ++p;
+
+ if (*p == '\0')
+ {
+ einfo ("%F%P: malformed remap file entry: %s\n", line);
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ char * renamed = p;
+
+ /* Advance past the rename entry. */
+ while (*p && *p != '=' && *p != ' ' && *p != '\t' && *p != '\f'
+ && *p != '\r' && *p != '\v')
+ ++p;
+ /* And terminate it. */
+ *p = '\0';
+
+ ldfile_add_remap (pattern, renamed);
+ }
+ while (! feof (f));
+
+ free (line);
+ fclose (f);
+
+ return true;
+}
+
+const char *
+ldfile_possibly_remap_input (const char * filename)
+{
+ struct input_remap * i;
+
+ if (filename == NULL)
+ return NULL;
+
+ for (i = input_remaps; i != NULL; i = i->next)
+ {
+ if (fnmatch (i->pattern, filename, 0) == 0)
+ {
+ if (verbose)
+ {
+ if (strpbrk ((i->pattern), "?*[") != NULL)
+ {
+ if (i->renamed)
+ info_msg (_("remap input file '%s' to '%s' based upon pattern '%s'\n"),
+ filename, i->renamed, i->pattern);
+ else
+ info_msg (_("remove input file '%s' based upon pattern '%s'\n"),
+ filename, i->pattern);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (i->renamed)
+ info_msg (_("remap input file '%s' to '%s'\n"),
+ filename, i->renamed);
+ else
+ info_msg (_("remove input file '%s'\n"),
+ filename);
+ }
+ }
+
+ return i->renamed;
+ }
+ }
+
+ return filename;
+}
+
+void
+ldfile_print_input_remaps (void)
+{
+ if (input_remaps == NULL)
+ return;
+
+ minfo (_("\nInput File Remapping\n\n"));
+
+ struct input_remap * i;
+
+ for (i = input_remaps; i != NULL; i = i->next)
+ minfo (_(" Pattern: %s\tMaps To: %s\n"), i->pattern,
+ i->renamed ? i->renamed : _("<discard>"));
+}
+
+
+/* Test whether a pathname, after canonicalization, is the same or a
+ sub-directory of the sysroot directory. */
+
+static bool
+is_sysrooted_pathname (const char *name)
+{
+ char *realname;
+ int len;
+ bool result;
+
+ if (ld_canon_sysroot == NULL)
+ return false;
+
+ realname = lrealpath (name);
+ len = strlen (realname);
+ result = false;
+ if (len > ld_canon_sysroot_len
+ && IS_DIR_SEPARATOR (realname[ld_canon_sysroot_len]))
+ {
+ realname[ld_canon_sysroot_len] = '\0';
+ result = FILENAME_CMP (ld_canon_sysroot, realname) == 0;
+ }
+
+ free (realname);
+ return result;
+}
+
+/* Adds NAME to the library search path.
+ Makes a copy of NAME using xmalloc(). */
+
+void
+ldfile_add_library_path (const char *name, bool cmdline)
+{
+ search_dirs_type *new_dirs;
+
+ if (!cmdline && config.only_cmd_line_lib_dirs)
+ return;
+
+ new_dirs = (search_dirs_type *) xmalloc (sizeof (search_dirs_type));
+ new_dirs->next = NULL;
+ new_dirs->cmdline = cmdline;
+ *search_tail_ptr = new_dirs;
+ search_tail_ptr = &new_dirs->next;
+
+ /* If a directory is marked as honoring sysroot, prepend the sysroot path
+ now. */
+ if (name[0] == '=')
+ new_dirs->name = concat (ld_sysroot, name + 1, (const char *) NULL);
+ else if (startswith (name, "$SYSROOT"))
+ new_dirs->name = concat (ld_sysroot, name + strlen ("$SYSROOT"), (const char *) NULL);
+ else
+ new_dirs->name = xstrdup (name);
+}
+
+/* Try to open a BFD for a lang_input_statement. */
+
+bool
+ldfile_try_open_bfd (const char *attempt,
+ lang_input_statement_type *entry)
+{
+ entry->the_bfd = bfd_openr (attempt, entry->target);
+
+ if (verbose)
+ {
+ if (entry->the_bfd == NULL)
+ info_msg (_("attempt to open %s failed\n"), attempt);
+ else
+ info_msg (_("attempt to open %s succeeded\n"), attempt);
+ }
+
+ if (entry->the_bfd == NULL)
+ {
+ if (bfd_get_error () == bfd_error_invalid_target)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: invalid BFD target `%s'\n"), entry->target);
+ return false;
+ }
+
+ /* PR 30568: Do not track lto generated temporary object files. */
+#if BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS
+ if (!entry->flags.lto_output)
+#endif
+ track_dependency_files (attempt);
+
+ /* Linker needs to decompress sections. */
+ entry->the_bfd->flags |= BFD_DECOMPRESS;
+
+ /* This is a linker input BFD. */
+ entry->the_bfd->is_linker_input = 1;
+
+#if BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS
+ if (entry->flags.lto_output)
+ entry->the_bfd->lto_output = 1;
+#endif
+
+ /* If we are searching for this file, see if the architecture is
+ compatible with the output file. If it isn't, keep searching.
+ If we can't open the file as an object file, stop the search
+ here. If we are statically linking, ensure that we don't link
+ a dynamic object.
+
+ In the code below, it's OK to exit early if the check fails,
+ closing the checked BFD and returning false, but if the BFD
+ checks out compatible, do not exit early returning true, or
+ the plugins will not get a chance to claim the file. */
+
+ if (entry->flags.search_dirs || !entry->flags.dynamic)
+ {
+ bfd *check;
+
+ if (bfd_check_format (entry->the_bfd, bfd_archive))
+ check = bfd_openr_next_archived_file (entry->the_bfd, NULL);
+ else
+ check = entry->the_bfd;
+
+ if (check != NULL)
+ {
+ if (!bfd_check_format (check, bfd_object))
+ {
+ if (check == entry->the_bfd
+ && entry->flags.search_dirs
+ && bfd_get_error () == bfd_error_file_not_recognized
+ && !ldemul_unrecognized_file (entry))
+ {
+ int token, skip = 0;
+ char *arg, *arg1, *arg2, *arg3;
+ extern FILE *yyin;
+
+ /* Try to interpret the file as a linker script. */
+ ldfile_open_command_file (attempt);
+
+ ldfile_assumed_script = true;
+ parser_input = input_selected;
+ ldlex_script ();
+ token = INPUT_SCRIPT;
+ while (token != 0)
+ {
+ switch (token)
+ {
+ case OUTPUT_FORMAT:
+ if ((token = yylex ()) != '(')
+ continue;
+ if ((token = yylex ()) != NAME)
+ continue;
+ arg1 = yylval.name;
+ arg2 = NULL;
+ arg3 = NULL;
+ token = yylex ();
+ if (token == ',')
+ {
+ if ((token = yylex ()) != NAME)
+ {
+ free (arg1);
+ continue;
+ }
+ arg2 = yylval.name;
+ if ((token = yylex ()) != ','
+ || (token = yylex ()) != NAME)
+ {
+ free (arg1);
+ free (arg2);
+ continue;
+ }
+ arg3 = yylval.name;
+ token = yylex ();
+ }
+ if (token == ')')
+ {
+ switch (command_line.endian)
+ {
+ default:
+ case ENDIAN_UNSET:
+ arg = arg1; break;
+ case ENDIAN_BIG:
+ arg = arg2 ? arg2 : arg1; break;
+ case ENDIAN_LITTLE:
+ arg = arg3 ? arg3 : arg1; break;
+ }
+ if (strcmp (arg, lang_get_output_target ()) != 0)
+ skip = 1;
+ }
+ free (arg1);
+ free (arg2);
+ free (arg3);
+ break;
+ case NAME:
+ case LNAME:
+ case VERS_IDENTIFIER:
+ case VERS_TAG:
+ free (yylval.name);
+ break;
+ case INT:
+ free (yylval.bigint.str);
+ break;
+ }
+ token = yylex ();
+ }
+ ldlex_popstate ();
+ ldfile_assumed_script = false;
+ fclose (yyin);
+ yyin = NULL;
+ if (skip)
+ {
+ if (command_line.warn_search_mismatch)
+ einfo (_("%P: skipping incompatible %s "
+ "when searching for %s\n"),
+ attempt, entry->local_sym_name);
+ bfd_close (entry->the_bfd);
+ entry->the_bfd = NULL;
+ return false;
+ }
+ }
+ goto success;
+ }
+
+ if (!entry->flags.dynamic && (entry->the_bfd->flags & DYNAMIC) != 0)
+ {
+ einfo (_("%F%P: attempted static link of dynamic object `%s'\n"),
+ attempt);
+ bfd_close (entry->the_bfd);
+ entry->the_bfd = NULL;
+ return false;
+ }
+
+ if (entry->flags.search_dirs
+ && !bfd_arch_get_compatible (check, link_info.output_bfd,
+ command_line.accept_unknown_input_arch)
+ /* XCOFF archives can have 32 and 64 bit objects. */
+ && !(bfd_get_flavour (check) == bfd_target_xcoff_flavour
+ && (bfd_get_flavour (link_info.output_bfd)
+ == bfd_target_xcoff_flavour)
+ && bfd_check_format (entry->the_bfd, bfd_archive)))
+ {
+ if (command_line.warn_search_mismatch)
+ einfo (_("%P: skipping incompatible %s "
+ "when searching for %s\n"),
+ attempt, entry->local_sym_name);
+ bfd_close (entry->the_bfd);
+ entry->the_bfd = NULL;
+ return false;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ success:
+#if BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS
+ /* If plugins are active, they get first chance to claim
+ any successfully-opened input file. We skip archives
+ here; the plugin wants us to offer it the individual
+ members when we enumerate them, not the whole file. We
+ also ignore corefiles, because that's just weird. It is
+ a needed side-effect of calling bfd_check_format with
+ bfd_object that it sets the bfd's arch and mach, which
+ will be needed when and if we want to bfd_create a new
+ one using this one as a template. */
+ if (link_info.lto_plugin_active
+ && !no_more_claiming
+ && bfd_check_format (entry->the_bfd, bfd_object))
+ plugin_maybe_claim (entry);
+#endif /* BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS */
+
+ /* It opened OK, the format checked out, and the plugins have had
+ their chance to claim it, so this is success. */
+ return true;
+}
+
+/* Search for and open the file specified by ENTRY. If it is an
+ archive, use ARCH, LIB and SUFFIX to modify the file name. */
+
+bool
+ldfile_open_file_search (const char *arch,
+ lang_input_statement_type *entry,
+ const char *lib,
+ const char *suffix)
+{
+ search_dirs_type *search;
+
+ /* If this is not an archive, try to open it in the current
+ directory first. */
+ if (!entry->flags.maybe_archive)
+ {
+ if (entry->flags.sysrooted && IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (entry->filename))
+ {
+ char *name = concat (ld_sysroot, entry->filename,
+ (const char *) NULL);
+ if (ldfile_try_open_bfd (name, entry))
+ {
+ entry->filename = name;
+ return true;
+ }
+ free (name);
+ }
+ else if (ldfile_try_open_bfd (entry->filename, entry))
+ return true;
+
+ if (IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (entry->filename))
+ return false;
+ }
+
+ for (search = search_head; search != NULL; search = search->next)
+ {
+ char *string;
+
+ if (entry->flags.dynamic && !bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info))
+ {
+ if (ldemul_open_dynamic_archive (arch, search, entry))
+ return true;
+ }
+
+ if (entry->flags.maybe_archive && !entry->flags.full_name_provided)
+ string = concat (search->name, slash, lib, entry->filename,
+ arch, suffix, (const char *) NULL);
+ else
+ string = concat (search->name, slash, entry->filename,
+ (const char *) 0);
+
+ if (ldfile_try_open_bfd (string, entry))
+ {
+ entry->filename = string;
+ return true;
+ }
+
+ free (string);
+ }
+
+ return false;
+}
+
+/* Open the input file specified by ENTRY.
+ PR 4437: Do not stop on the first missing file, but
+ continue processing other input files in case there
+ are more errors to report. */
+
+void
+ldfile_open_file (lang_input_statement_type *entry)
+{
+ if (entry->the_bfd != NULL)
+ return;
+
+ if (!entry->flags.search_dirs)
+ {
+ if (ldfile_try_open_bfd (entry->filename, entry))
+ return;
+
+ if (filename_cmp (entry->filename, entry->local_sym_name) != 0)
+ einfo (_("%P: cannot find %s (%s): %E\n"),
+ entry->filename, entry->local_sym_name);
+ else
+ einfo (_("%P: cannot find %s: %E\n"), entry->local_sym_name);
+
+ entry->flags.missing_file = true;
+ input_flags.missing_file = true;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ search_arch_type *arch;
+ bool found = false;
+
+ /* If extra_search_path is set, entry->filename is a relative path.
+ Search the directory of the current linker script before searching
+ other paths. */
+ if (entry->extra_search_path)
+ {
+ char *path = concat (entry->extra_search_path, slash, entry->filename,
+ (const char *)0);
+ if (ldfile_try_open_bfd (path, entry))
+ {
+ entry->filename = path;
+ entry->flags.search_dirs = false;
+ return;
+ }
+
+ free (path);
+ }
+
+ /* Try to open <filename><suffix> or lib<filename><suffix>.a. */
+ for (arch = search_arch_head; arch != NULL; arch = arch->next)
+ {
+ found = ldfile_open_file_search (arch->name, entry, "lib", ".a");
+ if (found)
+ break;
+#ifdef VMS
+ found = ldfile_open_file_search (arch->name, entry, ":lib", ".a");
+ if (found)
+ break;
+#endif
+ found = ldemul_find_potential_libraries (arch->name, entry);
+ if (found)
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* If we have found the file, we don't need to search directories
+ again. */
+ if (found)
+ entry->flags.search_dirs = false;
+ else
+ {
+ if (entry->flags.sysrooted
+ && ld_sysroot
+ && IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (entry->local_sym_name))
+ einfo (_("%P: cannot find %s inside %s\n"),
+ entry->local_sym_name, ld_sysroot);
+#if SUPPORT_ERROR_HANDLING_SCRIPT
+ else if (error_handling_script != NULL)
+ {
+ char * argv[4];
+ const char * res;
+ int status, err;
+
+ argv[0] = error_handling_script;
+ argv[1] = "missing-lib";
+ argv[2] = (char *) entry->local_sym_name;
+ argv[3] = NULL;
+
+ if (verbose)
+ einfo (_("%P: About to run error handling script '%s' with arguments: '%s' '%s'\n"),
+ argv[0], argv[1], argv[2]);
+
+ res = pex_one (PEX_SEARCH, error_handling_script, argv,
+ N_("error handling script"),
+ NULL /* Send stdout to random, temp file. */,
+ NULL /* Write to stderr. */,
+ &status, &err);
+ if (res != NULL)
+ {
+ einfo (_("%P: Failed to run error handling script '%s', reason: "),
+ error_handling_script);
+ /* FIXME: We assume here that errrno == err. */
+ perror (res);
+ }
+ else /* We ignore the return status of the script
+ and always print the error message. */
+ einfo (_("%P: cannot find %s: %E\n"), entry->local_sym_name);
+ }
+#endif
+ else
+ einfo (_("%P: cannot find %s: %E\n"), entry->local_sym_name);
+
+ /* PR 25747: Be kind to users who forgot to add the
+ "lib" prefix to their library when it was created. */
+ for (arch = search_arch_head; arch != NULL; arch = arch->next)
+ {
+ if (ldfile_open_file_search (arch->name, entry, "", ".a"))
+ {
+ const char * base = lbasename (entry->filename);
+
+ einfo (_("%P: note to link with %s use -l:%s or rename it to lib%s\n"),
+ entry->filename, base, base);
+ bfd_close (entry->the_bfd);
+ entry->the_bfd = NULL;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+
+ entry->flags.missing_file = true;
+ input_flags.missing_file = true;
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/* Try to open NAME. */
+
+static FILE *
+try_open (const char *name, bool *sysrooted)
+{
+ FILE *result;
+
+ result = fopen (name, "r");
+
+ if (result != NULL)
+ *sysrooted = is_sysrooted_pathname (name);
+
+ if (verbose)
+ {
+ if (result == NULL)
+ info_msg (_("cannot find script file %s\n"), name);
+ else
+ info_msg (_("opened script file %s\n"), name);
+ }
+
+ return result;
+}
+
+/* Return TRUE iff directory DIR contains an "ldscripts" subdirectory. */
+
+static bool
+check_for_scripts_dir (char *dir)
+{
+ char *buf;
+ struct stat s;
+ bool res;
+
+ buf = concat (dir, "/ldscripts", (const char *) NULL);
+ res = stat (buf, &s) == 0 && S_ISDIR (s.st_mode);
+ free (buf);
+ return res;
+}
+
+/* Return the default directory for finding script files.
+ We look for the "ldscripts" directory in:
+
+ SCRIPTDIR (passed from Makefile)
+ (adjusted according to the current location of the binary)
+ the dir where this program is (for using it from the build tree). */
+
+static char *
+find_scripts_dir (void)
+{
+ char *dir;
+
+ dir = make_relative_prefix (program_name, BINDIR, SCRIPTDIR);
+ if (dir)
+ {
+ if (check_for_scripts_dir (dir))
+ return dir;
+ free (dir);
+ }
+
+ dir = make_relative_prefix (program_name, TOOLBINDIR, SCRIPTDIR);
+ if (dir)
+ {
+ if (check_for_scripts_dir (dir))
+ return dir;
+ free (dir);
+ }
+
+ /* Look for "ldscripts" in the dir where our binary is. */
+ dir = make_relative_prefix (program_name, ".", ".");
+ if (dir)
+ {
+ if (check_for_scripts_dir (dir))
+ return dir;
+ free (dir);
+ }
+
+ return NULL;
+}
+
+/* If DEFAULT_ONLY is false, try to open NAME; if that fails, look for
+ it in directories specified with -L, then in the default script
+ directory. If DEFAULT_ONLY is true, the search is restricted to
+ the default script location. */
+
+static FILE *
+ldfile_find_command_file (const char *name,
+ bool default_only,
+ bool *sysrooted)
+{
+ search_dirs_type *search;
+ FILE *result = NULL;
+ char *path;
+ static search_dirs_type *script_search;
+
+ if (!default_only)
+ {
+ /* First try raw name. */
+ result = try_open (name, sysrooted);
+ if (result != NULL)
+ return result;
+ }
+
+ if (!script_search)
+ {
+ char *script_dir = find_scripts_dir ();
+ if (script_dir)
+ {
+ search_dirs_type **save_tail_ptr = search_tail_ptr;
+ search_tail_ptr = &script_search;
+ ldfile_add_library_path (script_dir, true);
+ search_tail_ptr = save_tail_ptr;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Temporarily append script_search to the path list so that the
+ paths specified with -L will be searched first. */
+ *search_tail_ptr = script_search;
+
+ /* Try now prefixes. */
+ for (search = default_only ? script_search : search_head;
+ search != NULL;
+ search = search->next)
+ {
+ path = concat (search->name, slash, name, (const char *) NULL);
+ result = try_open (path, sysrooted);
+ free (path);
+ if (result)
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Restore the original path list. */
+ *search_tail_ptr = NULL;
+
+ return result;
+}
+
+enum script_open_style {
+ script_nonT,
+ script_T,
+ script_defaultT
+};
+
+struct script_name_list
+{
+ struct script_name_list *next;
+ enum script_open_style open_how;
+ char name[1];
+};
+
+/* Open command file NAME. */
+
+static void
+ldfile_open_command_file_1 (const char *name, enum script_open_style open_how)
+{
+ FILE *ldlex_input_stack;
+ bool sysrooted;
+ static struct script_name_list *processed_scripts = NULL;
+ struct script_name_list *script;
+ size_t len;
+
+ /* PR 24576: Catch the case where the user has accidentally included
+ the same linker script twice. */
+ for (script = processed_scripts; script != NULL; script = script->next)
+ {
+ if ((open_how != script_nonT || script->open_how != script_nonT)
+ && strcmp (name, script->name) == 0)
+ {
+ einfo (_("%F%P: error: linker script file '%s'"
+ " appears multiple times\n"), name);
+ return;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* FIXME: This memory is never freed, but that should not really matter.
+ It will be released when the linker exits, and it is unlikely to ever
+ be more than a few tens of bytes. */
+ len = strlen (name);
+ script = xmalloc (sizeof (*script) + len);
+ script->next = processed_scripts;
+ script->open_how = open_how;
+ memcpy (script->name, name, len + 1);
+ processed_scripts = script;
+
+ ldlex_input_stack = ldfile_find_command_file (name,
+ open_how == script_defaultT,
+ &sysrooted);
+ if (ldlex_input_stack == NULL)
+ {
+ bfd_set_error (bfd_error_system_call);
+ einfo (_("%F%P: cannot open linker script file %s: %E\n"), name);
+ return;
+ }
+
+ track_dependency_files (name);
+
+ lex_push_file (ldlex_input_stack, name, sysrooted);
+
+ lineno = 1;
+
+ saved_script_handle = ldlex_input_stack;
+}
+
+/* Open command file NAME in the current directory, -L directories,
+ the default script location, in that order. */
+
+void
+ldfile_open_command_file (const char *name)
+{
+ ldfile_open_command_file_1 (name, script_nonT);
+}
+
+void
+ldfile_open_script_file (const char *name)
+{
+ ldfile_open_command_file_1 (name, script_T);
+}
+
+/* Open command file NAME at the default script location. */
+
+void
+ldfile_open_default_command_file (const char *name)
+{
+ ldfile_open_command_file_1 (name, script_defaultT);
+}
+
+void
+ldfile_add_arch (const char *in_name)
+{
+ char *name = xstrdup (in_name);
+ search_arch_type *new_arch
+ = (search_arch_type *) xmalloc (sizeof (search_arch_type));
+
+ ldfile_output_machine_name = in_name;
+
+ new_arch->name = name;
+ new_arch->next = NULL;
+ while (*name)
+ {
+ *name = TOLOWER (*name);
+ name++;
+ }
+ *search_arch_tail_ptr = new_arch;
+ search_arch_tail_ptr = &new_arch->next;
+
+}
+
+/* Set the output architecture. */
+
+void
+ldfile_set_output_arch (const char *string, enum bfd_architecture defarch)
+{
+ const bfd_arch_info_type *arch = bfd_scan_arch (string);
+
+ if (arch)
+ {
+ ldfile_output_architecture = arch->arch;
+ ldfile_output_machine = arch->mach;
+ ldfile_output_machine_name = arch->printable_name;
+ }
+ else if (defarch != bfd_arch_unknown)
+ ldfile_output_architecture = defarch;
+ else
+ einfo (_("%F%P: cannot represent machine `%s'\n"), string);
+}
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/ldfile.h binutils-2.41/ld/ldfile.h
--- binutils.orig/ld/ldfile.h 2024-05-13 13:03:47.801601773 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/ldfile.h 2024-05-13 13:04:08.595633300 +0100
@@ -29,7 +29,8 @@ extern const char *ldfile_output_machine
/* Structure used to hold the list of directories to search for
libraries. */
-typedef struct search_dirs {
+typedef struct search_dirs
+{
/* Next directory on list. */
struct search_dirs *next;
/* Name of directory. */
@@ -38,6 +39,22 @@ typedef struct search_dirs {
bool cmdline;
} search_dirs_type;
+enum script_open_style
+{
+ script_nonT,
+ script_T,
+ script_defaultT
+};
+
+struct script_name_list
+{
+ struct script_name_list * next;
+ enum script_open_style open_how;
+ char name[1];
+};
+
+extern struct script_name_list * processed_scripts;
+
extern search_dirs_type *search_head;
extern void ldfile_add_arch
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/ldgram.y binutils-2.41/ld/ldgram.y
--- binutils.orig/ld/ldgram.y 2024-05-13 13:03:47.802601774 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/ldgram.y 2024-05-13 13:04:08.596633302 +0100
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ static int error_index;
%token LOG2CEIL FORMAT PUBLIC DEFSYMEND BASE ALIAS TRUNCATE REL
%token INPUT_SCRIPT INPUT_MRI_SCRIPT INPUT_DEFSYM CASE EXTERN START
%token <name> VERS_TAG VERS_IDENTIFIER
-%token GLOBAL LOCAL VERSIONK INPUT_VERSION_SCRIPT
+%token GLOBAL LOCAL VERSIONK INPUT_VERSION_SCRIPT INPUT_SECTION_ORDERING_SCRIPT
%token KEEP ONLY_IF_RO ONLY_IF_RW SPECIAL INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS ALIGN_WITH_INPUT
%token EXCLUDE_FILE
%token CONSTANT
@@ -169,6 +169,7 @@ file:
INPUT_SCRIPT script_file
| INPUT_MRI_SCRIPT mri_script_file
| INPUT_VERSION_SCRIPT version_script_file
+ | INPUT_SECTION_ORDERING_SCRIPT section_ordering_script_file
| INPUT_DYNAMIC_LIST dynamic_list_file
| INPUT_DEFSYM defsym_expr
;
@@ -1503,6 +1504,39 @@ opt_semicolon:
| ';'
;
+section_ordering_script_file:
+ {
+ ldlex_script ();
+ PUSH_ERROR (_("section-ordering-file script"));
+ }
+ section_ordering_list
+ {
+ ldlex_popstate ();
+ POP_ERROR ();
+ }
+ ;
+
+section_ordering_list:
+ section_ordering_list section_order
+ | section_ordering_list statement_anywhere
+ |
+ ;
+
+section_order: NAME ':'
+ {
+ ldlex_wild ();
+ lang_enter_output_section_statement
+ ($1, NULL, 0, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0);
+ }
+ '{'
+ statement_list_opt
+ '}'
+ {
+ ldlex_popstate ();
+ lang_leave_output_section_statement (NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL);
+ }
+ opt_comma
+
%%
void
yyerror(arg)
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/ldgram.y.orig binutils-2.41/ld/ldgram.y.orig
--- binutils.orig/ld/ldgram.y.orig 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/ldgram.y.orig 2023-07-03 00:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,1518 @@
+/* A YACC grammar to parse a superset of the AT&T linker scripting language.
+ Copyright (C) 1991-2023 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ Written by Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support (steve@cygnus.com).
+
+ This file is part of the GNU Binutils.
+
+ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or
+ (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+ Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street - Fifth Floor, Boston,
+ MA 02110-1301, USA. */
+
+%{
+/*
+
+ */
+
+#define DONTDECLARE_MALLOC
+
+#include "sysdep.h"
+#include "bfd.h"
+#include "bfdlink.h"
+#include "ctf-api.h"
+#include "ld.h"
+#include "ldexp.h"
+#include "ldver.h"
+#include "ldlang.h"
+#include "ldfile.h"
+#include "ldemul.h"
+#include "ldmisc.h"
+#include "ldmain.h"
+#include "mri.h"
+#include "ldctor.h"
+#include "ldlex.h"
+
+#ifndef YYDEBUG
+#define YYDEBUG 1
+#endif
+
+static enum section_type sectype;
+static etree_type *sectype_value;
+static lang_memory_region_type *region;
+
+static bool ldgram_had_keep = false;
+static char *ldgram_vers_current_lang = NULL;
+
+#define ERROR_NAME_MAX 20
+static char *error_names[ERROR_NAME_MAX];
+static int error_index;
+#define PUSH_ERROR(x) if (error_index < ERROR_NAME_MAX) error_names[error_index] = x; error_index++;
+#define POP_ERROR() error_index--;
+%}
+%union {
+ bfd_vma integer;
+ struct big_int
+ {
+ bfd_vma integer;
+ char *str;
+ } bigint;
+ fill_type *fill;
+ char *name;
+ const char *cname;
+ struct wildcard_spec wildcard;
+ struct wildcard_list *wildcard_list;
+ struct name_list *name_list;
+ struct flag_info_list *flag_info_list;
+ struct flag_info *flag_info;
+ int token;
+ union etree_union *etree;
+ struct phdr_info
+ {
+ bool filehdr;
+ bool phdrs;
+ union etree_union *at;
+ union etree_union *flags;
+ } phdr;
+ struct lang_nocrossref *nocrossref;
+ struct lang_output_section_phdr_list *section_phdr;
+ struct bfd_elf_version_deps *deflist;
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr *versyms;
+ struct bfd_elf_version_tree *versnode;
+}
+
+%type <etree> exp opt_exp_with_type mustbe_exp opt_at phdr_type phdr_val
+%type <etree> opt_exp_without_type opt_subalign opt_align
+%type <fill> fill_opt fill_exp
+%type <name_list> exclude_name_list
+%type <wildcard_list> section_name_list
+%type <flag_info_list> sect_flag_list
+%type <flag_info> sect_flags
+%type <name> memspec_opt memspec_at_opt paren_script_name casesymlist
+%type <cname> wildcard_name
+%type <wildcard> section_name_spec filename_spec wildcard_maybe_exclude
+%token <bigint> INT
+%token <name> NAME LNAME
+%type <integer> length
+%type <phdr> phdr_qualifiers
+%type <nocrossref> nocrossref_list
+%type <section_phdr> phdr_opt
+%type <integer> opt_nocrossrefs
+
+%right <token> PLUSEQ MINUSEQ MULTEQ DIVEQ '=' LSHIFTEQ RSHIFTEQ ANDEQ OREQ
+%right <token> '?' ':'
+%left <token> OROR
+%left <token> ANDAND
+%left <token> '|'
+%left <token> '^'
+%left <token> '&'
+%left <token> EQ NE
+%left <token> '<' '>' LE GE
+%left <token> LSHIFT RSHIFT
+
+%left <token> '+' '-'
+%left <token> '*' '/' '%'
+
+%right UNARY
+%token END
+%left <token> '('
+%token <token> ALIGN_K BLOCK BIND QUAD SQUAD LONG SHORT BYTE ASCIZ
+%token SECTIONS PHDRS INSERT_K AFTER BEFORE LINKER_VERSION
+%token DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END DATA_SEGMENT_END
+%token SORT_BY_NAME SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT SORT_NONE
+%token SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
+%token '{' '}'
+%token SIZEOF_HEADERS OUTPUT_FORMAT FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION OUTPUT_ARCH
+%token INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
+%token SEGMENT_START
+%token INCLUDE
+%token MEMORY
+%token REGION_ALIAS
+%token LD_FEATURE
+%token NOLOAD DSECT COPY INFO OVERLAY
+%token READONLY
+%token TYPE
+%token DEFINED TARGET_K SEARCH_DIR MAP ENTRY
+%token <integer> NEXT
+%token SIZEOF ALIGNOF ADDR LOADADDR MAX_K MIN_K
+%token STARTUP HLL SYSLIB FLOAT NOFLOAT NOCROSSREFS NOCROSSREFS_TO
+%token ORIGIN FILL
+%token LENGTH CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS INPUT GROUP OUTPUT CONSTRUCTORS
+%token ALIGNMOD AT SUBALIGN HIDDEN PROVIDE PROVIDE_HIDDEN AS_NEEDED
+%type <token> assign_op atype attributes_opt sect_constraint opt_align_with_input
+%type <name> filename
+%token CHIP LIST SECT ABSOLUTE LOAD NEWLINE ENDWORD ORDER NAMEWORD ASSERT_K
+%token LOG2CEIL FORMAT PUBLIC DEFSYMEND BASE ALIAS TRUNCATE REL
+%token INPUT_SCRIPT INPUT_MRI_SCRIPT INPUT_DEFSYM CASE EXTERN START
+%token <name> VERS_TAG VERS_IDENTIFIER
+%token GLOBAL LOCAL VERSIONK INPUT_VERSION_SCRIPT
+%token KEEP ONLY_IF_RO ONLY_IF_RW SPECIAL INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS ALIGN_WITH_INPUT
+%token EXCLUDE_FILE
+%token CONSTANT
+%type <versyms> vers_defns
+%type <versnode> vers_tag
+%type <deflist> verdep
+%token INPUT_DYNAMIC_LIST
+
+%%
+
+file:
+ INPUT_SCRIPT script_file
+ | INPUT_MRI_SCRIPT mri_script_file
+ | INPUT_VERSION_SCRIPT version_script_file
+ | INPUT_DYNAMIC_LIST dynamic_list_file
+ | INPUT_DEFSYM defsym_expr
+ ;
+
+
+filename: NAME;
+
+
+defsym_expr:
+ { ldlex_expression(); }
+ assignment
+ { ldlex_popstate(); }
+ ;
+
+/* SYNTAX WITHIN AN MRI SCRIPT FILE */
+mri_script_file:
+ {
+ ldlex_mri_script ();
+ PUSH_ERROR (_("MRI style script"));
+ }
+ mri_script_lines
+ {
+ ldlex_popstate ();
+ mri_draw_tree ();
+ POP_ERROR ();
+ }
+ ;
+
+mri_script_lines:
+ mri_script_lines mri_script_command NEWLINE
+ |
+ ;
+
+mri_script_command:
+ CHIP exp
+ | CHIP exp ',' exp
+ | NAME {
+ einfo(_("%F%P: unrecognised keyword in MRI style script '%s'\n"),$1);
+ }
+ | LIST {
+ config.map_filename = "-";
+ }
+ | ORDER ordernamelist
+ | ENDWORD
+ | PUBLIC NAME '=' exp
+ { mri_public($2, $4); }
+ | PUBLIC NAME ',' exp
+ { mri_public($2, $4); }
+ | PUBLIC NAME exp
+ { mri_public($2, $3); }
+ | FORMAT NAME
+ { mri_format($2); }
+ | SECT NAME ',' exp
+ { mri_output_section($2, $4);}
+ | SECT NAME exp
+ { mri_output_section($2, $3);}
+ | SECT NAME '=' exp
+ { mri_output_section($2, $4);}
+ | ALIGN_K NAME '=' exp
+ { mri_align($2,$4); }
+ | ALIGN_K NAME ',' exp
+ { mri_align($2,$4); }
+ | ALIGNMOD NAME '=' exp
+ { mri_alignmod($2,$4); }
+ | ALIGNMOD NAME ',' exp
+ { mri_alignmod($2,$4); }
+ | ABSOLUTE mri_abs_name_list
+ | LOAD mri_load_name_list
+ | NAMEWORD NAME
+ { mri_name($2); }
+ | ALIAS NAME ',' NAME
+ { mri_alias($2,$4,0);}
+ | ALIAS NAME ',' INT
+ { mri_alias ($2, 0, (int) $4.integer); }
+ | BASE exp
+ { mri_base($2); }
+ | TRUNCATE INT
+ { mri_truncate ((unsigned int) $2.integer); }
+ | CASE casesymlist
+ | EXTERN extern_name_list
+ | INCLUDE filename
+ { ldfile_open_command_file ($2); }
+ mri_script_lines END
+ | START NAME
+ { lang_add_entry ($2, false); }
+ |
+ ;
+
+ordernamelist:
+ ordernamelist ',' NAME { mri_order($3); }
+ | ordernamelist NAME { mri_order($2); }
+ |
+ ;
+
+mri_load_name_list:
+ NAME
+ { mri_load($1); }
+ | mri_load_name_list ',' NAME { mri_load($3); }
+ ;
+
+mri_abs_name_list:
+ NAME
+ { mri_only_load($1); }
+ | mri_abs_name_list ',' NAME
+ { mri_only_load($3); }
+ ;
+
+casesymlist:
+ /* empty */ { $$ = NULL; }
+ | NAME
+ | casesymlist ',' NAME
+ ;
+
+extern_name_list:
+ NAME
+ { ldlang_add_undef ($1, false); }
+ | extern_name_list NAME
+ { ldlang_add_undef ($2, false); }
+ | extern_name_list ',' NAME
+ { ldlang_add_undef ($3, false); }
+ ;
+
+script_file:
+ { ldlex_script (); }
+ ifile_list
+ { ldlex_popstate (); }
+ ;
+
+ifile_list:
+ ifile_list ifile_p1
+ |
+ ;
+
+
+ifile_p1:
+ memory
+ | sections
+ | phdrs
+ | startup
+ | high_level_library
+ | low_level_library
+ | floating_point_support
+ | statement_anywhere
+ | version
+ | ';'
+ | TARGET_K '(' NAME ')'
+ { lang_add_target($3); }
+ | SEARCH_DIR '(' filename ')'
+ { ldfile_add_library_path ($3, false); }
+ | OUTPUT '(' filename ')'
+ { lang_add_output($3, 1); }
+ | OUTPUT_FORMAT '(' NAME ')'
+ { lang_add_output_format ($3, (char *) NULL,
+ (char *) NULL, 1); }
+ | OUTPUT_FORMAT '(' NAME ',' NAME ',' NAME ')'
+ { lang_add_output_format ($3, $5, $7, 1); }
+ | OUTPUT_ARCH '(' NAME ')'
+ { ldfile_set_output_arch ($3, bfd_arch_unknown); }
+ | FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
+ { command_line.force_common_definition = true ; }
+ | FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
+ { command_line.force_group_allocation = true ; }
+ | INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
+ { link_info.inhibit_common_definition = true ; }
+ | INPUT '(' input_list ')'
+ | GROUP
+ { lang_enter_group (); }
+ '(' input_list ')'
+ { lang_leave_group (); }
+ | MAP '(' filename ')'
+ { lang_add_map($3); }
+ | INCLUDE filename
+ { ldfile_open_command_file ($2); }
+ ifile_list END
+ | NOCROSSREFS '(' nocrossref_list ')'
+ {
+ lang_add_nocrossref ($3);
+ }
+ | NOCROSSREFS_TO '(' nocrossref_list ')'
+ {
+ lang_add_nocrossref_to ($3);
+ }
+ | EXTERN '(' { ldlex_expression (); } extern_name_list ')'
+ { ldlex_popstate (); }
+ | INSERT_K AFTER NAME
+ { lang_add_insert ($3, 0); }
+ | INSERT_K BEFORE NAME
+ { lang_add_insert ($3, 1); }
+ | REGION_ALIAS '(' NAME ',' NAME ')'
+ { lang_memory_region_alias ($3, $5); }
+ | LD_FEATURE '(' NAME ')'
+ { lang_ld_feature ($3); }
+ ;
+
+input_list:
+ { ldlex_inputlist(); }
+ input_list1
+ { ldlex_popstate(); }
+
+input_list1:
+ NAME
+ { lang_add_input_file($1,lang_input_file_is_search_file_enum,
+ (char *)NULL); }
+ | input_list1 ',' NAME
+ { lang_add_input_file($3,lang_input_file_is_search_file_enum,
+ (char *)NULL); }
+ | input_list1 NAME
+ { lang_add_input_file($2,lang_input_file_is_search_file_enum,
+ (char *)NULL); }
+ | LNAME
+ { lang_add_input_file($1,lang_input_file_is_l_enum,
+ (char *)NULL); }
+ | input_list1 ',' LNAME
+ { lang_add_input_file($3,lang_input_file_is_l_enum,
+ (char *)NULL); }
+ | input_list1 LNAME
+ { lang_add_input_file($2,lang_input_file_is_l_enum,
+ (char *)NULL); }
+ | AS_NEEDED '('
+ { $<integer>$ = input_flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_regular;
+ input_flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_regular = true; }
+ input_list1 ')'
+ { input_flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_regular = $<integer>3; }
+ | input_list1 ',' AS_NEEDED '('
+ { $<integer>$ = input_flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_regular;
+ input_flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_regular = true; }
+ input_list1 ')'
+ { input_flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_regular = $<integer>5; }
+ | input_list1 AS_NEEDED '('
+ { $<integer>$ = input_flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_regular;
+ input_flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_regular = true; }
+ input_list1 ')'
+ { input_flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_regular = $<integer>4; }
+ ;
+
+sections:
+ SECTIONS '{' sec_or_group_p1 '}'
+ ;
+
+sec_or_group_p1:
+ sec_or_group_p1 section
+ | sec_or_group_p1 statement_anywhere
+ |
+ ;
+
+statement_anywhere:
+ ENTRY '(' NAME ')'
+ { lang_add_entry ($3, false); }
+ | assignment separator
+ | ASSERT_K {ldlex_expression ();} '(' exp ',' NAME ')'
+ { ldlex_popstate ();
+ lang_add_assignment (exp_assert ($4, $6)); }
+ ;
+
+wildcard_name:
+ NAME
+ {
+ $$ = $1;
+ }
+ ;
+
+wildcard_maybe_exclude:
+ wildcard_name
+ {
+ $$.name = $1;
+ $$.sorted = none;
+ $$.exclude_name_list = NULL;
+ $$.section_flag_list = NULL;
+ }
+ | EXCLUDE_FILE '(' exclude_name_list ')' wildcard_name
+ {
+ $$.name = $5;
+ $$.sorted = none;
+ $$.exclude_name_list = $3;
+ $$.section_flag_list = NULL;
+ }
+ ;
+
+filename_spec:
+ wildcard_maybe_exclude
+ | SORT_BY_NAME '(' wildcard_maybe_exclude ')'
+ {
+ $$ = $3;
+ $$.sorted = by_name;
+ }
+ | SORT_NONE '(' wildcard_maybe_exclude ')'
+ {
+ $$ = $3;
+ $$.sorted = by_none;
+ }
+ ;
+
+section_name_spec:
+ wildcard_maybe_exclude
+ | SORT_BY_NAME '(' wildcard_maybe_exclude ')'
+ {
+ $$ = $3;
+ $$.sorted = by_name;
+ }
+ | SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT '(' wildcard_maybe_exclude ')'
+ {
+ $$ = $3;
+ $$.sorted = by_alignment;
+ }
+ | SORT_NONE '(' wildcard_maybe_exclude ')'
+ {
+ $$ = $3;
+ $$.sorted = by_none;
+ }
+ | SORT_BY_NAME '(' SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT '(' wildcard_maybe_exclude ')' ')'
+ {
+ $$ = $5;
+ $$.sorted = by_name_alignment;
+ }
+ | SORT_BY_NAME '(' SORT_BY_NAME '(' wildcard_maybe_exclude ')' ')'
+ {
+ $$ = $5;
+ $$.sorted = by_name;
+ }
+ | SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT '(' SORT_BY_NAME '(' wildcard_maybe_exclude ')' ')'
+ {
+ $$ = $5;
+ $$.sorted = by_alignment_name;
+ }
+ | SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT '(' SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT '(' wildcard_maybe_exclude ')' ')'
+ {
+ $$ = $5;
+ $$.sorted = by_alignment;
+ }
+ | SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY '(' wildcard_maybe_exclude ')'
+ {
+ $$ = $3;
+ $$.sorted = by_init_priority;
+ }
+ ;
+
+sect_flag_list: NAME
+ {
+ struct flag_info_list *n;
+ n = ((struct flag_info_list *) xmalloc (sizeof *n));
+ if ($1[0] == '!')
+ {
+ n->with = without_flags;
+ n->name = &$1[1];
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ n->with = with_flags;
+ n->name = $1;
+ }
+ n->valid = false;
+ n->next = NULL;
+ $$ = n;
+ }
+ | sect_flag_list '&' NAME
+ {
+ struct flag_info_list *n;
+ n = ((struct flag_info_list *) xmalloc (sizeof *n));
+ if ($3[0] == '!')
+ {
+ n->with = without_flags;
+ n->name = &$3[1];
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ n->with = with_flags;
+ n->name = $3;
+ }
+ n->valid = false;
+ n->next = $1;
+ $$ = n;
+ }
+ ;
+
+sect_flags:
+ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS '(' sect_flag_list ')'
+ {
+ struct flag_info *n;
+ n = ((struct flag_info *) xmalloc (sizeof *n));
+ n->flag_list = $3;
+ n->flags_initialized = false;
+ n->not_with_flags = 0;
+ n->only_with_flags = 0;
+ $$ = n;
+ }
+ ;
+
+exclude_name_list:
+ exclude_name_list wildcard_name
+ {
+ struct name_list *tmp;
+ tmp = (struct name_list *) xmalloc (sizeof *tmp);
+ tmp->name = $2;
+ tmp->next = $1;
+ $$ = tmp;
+ }
+ |
+ wildcard_name
+ {
+ struct name_list *tmp;
+ tmp = (struct name_list *) xmalloc (sizeof *tmp);
+ tmp->name = $1;
+ tmp->next = NULL;
+ $$ = tmp;
+ }
+ ;
+
+section_name_list:
+ section_name_list opt_comma section_name_spec
+ {
+ struct wildcard_list *tmp;
+ tmp = (struct wildcard_list *) xmalloc (sizeof *tmp);
+ tmp->next = $1;
+ tmp->spec = $3;
+ $$ = tmp;
+ }
+ |
+ section_name_spec
+ {
+ struct wildcard_list *tmp;
+ tmp = (struct wildcard_list *) xmalloc (sizeof *tmp);
+ tmp->next = NULL;
+ tmp->spec = $1;
+ $$ = tmp;
+ }
+ ;
+
+input_section_spec_no_keep:
+ NAME
+ {
+ struct wildcard_spec tmp;
+ tmp.name = $1;
+ tmp.exclude_name_list = NULL;
+ tmp.sorted = none;
+ tmp.section_flag_list = NULL;
+ lang_add_wild (&tmp, NULL, ldgram_had_keep);
+ }
+ | sect_flags NAME
+ {
+ struct wildcard_spec tmp;
+ tmp.name = $2;
+ tmp.exclude_name_list = NULL;
+ tmp.sorted = none;
+ tmp.section_flag_list = $1;
+ lang_add_wild (&tmp, NULL, ldgram_had_keep);
+ }
+ | '[' section_name_list ']'
+ {
+ lang_add_wild (NULL, $2, ldgram_had_keep);
+ }
+ | sect_flags '[' section_name_list ']'
+ {
+ struct wildcard_spec tmp;
+ tmp.name = NULL;
+ tmp.exclude_name_list = NULL;
+ tmp.sorted = none;
+ tmp.section_flag_list = $1;
+ lang_add_wild (&tmp, $3, ldgram_had_keep);
+ }
+ | filename_spec '(' section_name_list ')'
+ {
+ lang_add_wild (&$1, $3, ldgram_had_keep);
+ }
+ | sect_flags filename_spec '(' section_name_list ')'
+ {
+ $2.section_flag_list = $1;
+ lang_add_wild (&$2, $4, ldgram_had_keep);
+ }
+ ;
+
+input_section_spec:
+ input_section_spec_no_keep
+ | KEEP '('
+ { ldgram_had_keep = true; }
+ input_section_spec_no_keep ')'
+ { ldgram_had_keep = false; }
+ ;
+
+statement:
+ ';'
+ | assignment separator
+ | CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
+ {
+ lang_add_attribute (lang_object_symbols_statement_enum);
+ }
+ | CONSTRUCTORS
+ {
+ lang_add_attribute (lang_constructors_statement_enum);
+ }
+ | SORT_BY_NAME '(' CONSTRUCTORS ')'
+ {
+ constructors_sorted = true;
+ lang_add_attribute (lang_constructors_statement_enum);
+ }
+ | input_section_spec
+ | length '(' mustbe_exp ')'
+ {
+ lang_add_data ((int) $1, $3);
+ }
+ | ASCIZ NAME
+ {
+ lang_add_string ($2);
+ }
+ | FILL '(' fill_exp ')'
+ {
+ lang_add_fill ($3);
+ }
+ | LINKER_VERSION
+ {
+ lang_add_version_string ();
+ }
+ | ASSERT_K
+ { ldlex_expression (); }
+ '(' exp ',' NAME ')' separator
+ {
+ ldlex_popstate ();
+ lang_add_assignment (exp_assert ($4, $6));
+ }
+ | INCLUDE filename
+ {
+ ldfile_open_command_file ($2);
+ }
+ statement_list_opt END
+ ;
+
+statement_list:
+ statement_list statement
+ | statement
+ ;
+
+statement_list_opt:
+ /* empty */
+ | statement_list
+ ;
+
+length:
+ QUAD
+ { $$ = $1; }
+ | SQUAD
+ { $$ = $1; }
+ | LONG
+ { $$ = $1; }
+ | SHORT
+ { $$ = $1; }
+ | BYTE
+ { $$ = $1; }
+ ;
+
+fill_exp:
+ mustbe_exp
+ {
+ $$ = exp_get_fill ($1, 0, _("fill value"));
+ }
+ ;
+
+fill_opt:
+ '=' fill_exp
+ { $$ = $2; }
+ | { $$ = (fill_type *) 0; }
+ ;
+
+assign_op:
+ PLUSEQ
+ { $$ = '+'; }
+ | MINUSEQ
+ { $$ = '-'; }
+ | MULTEQ
+ { $$ = '*'; }
+ | DIVEQ
+ { $$ = '/'; }
+ | LSHIFTEQ
+ { $$ = LSHIFT; }
+ | RSHIFTEQ
+ { $$ = RSHIFT; }
+ | ANDEQ
+ { $$ = '&'; }
+ | OREQ
+ { $$ = '|'; }
+
+ ;
+
+separator: ';' | ','
+ ;
+
+
+assignment:
+ NAME '=' mustbe_exp
+ {
+ lang_add_assignment (exp_assign ($1, $3, false));
+ }
+ | NAME assign_op mustbe_exp
+ {
+ lang_add_assignment (exp_assign ($1,
+ exp_binop ($2,
+ exp_nameop (NAME,
+ $1),
+ $3), false));
+ }
+ | HIDDEN '(' NAME '=' mustbe_exp ')'
+ {
+ lang_add_assignment (exp_assign ($3, $5, true));
+ }
+ | PROVIDE '(' NAME '=' mustbe_exp ')'
+ {
+ lang_add_assignment (exp_provide ($3, $5, false));
+ }
+ | PROVIDE_HIDDEN '(' NAME '=' mustbe_exp ')'
+ {
+ lang_add_assignment (exp_provide ($3, $5, true));
+ }
+ ;
+
+
+opt_comma:
+ ',' | ;
+
+
+memory:
+ MEMORY '{' memory_spec_list_opt '}'
+ ;
+
+memory_spec_list_opt: memory_spec_list | ;
+
+memory_spec_list:
+ memory_spec_list opt_comma memory_spec
+ | memory_spec
+ ;
+
+
+memory_spec: NAME
+ { region = lang_memory_region_lookup ($1, true); }
+ attributes_opt ':'
+ origin_spec opt_comma length_spec
+ {}
+ | INCLUDE filename
+ { ldfile_open_command_file ($2); }
+ memory_spec_list_opt END
+ ;
+
+origin_spec:
+ ORIGIN '=' mustbe_exp
+ {
+ region->origin_exp = $3;
+ }
+ ;
+
+length_spec:
+ LENGTH '=' mustbe_exp
+ {
+ if (yychar == NAME)
+ {
+ yyclearin;
+ ldlex_backup ();
+ }
+ region->length_exp = $3;
+ }
+ ;
+
+attributes_opt:
+ /* empty */
+ { /* dummy action to avoid bison 1.25 error message */ }
+ | '(' attributes_list ')'
+ ;
+
+attributes_list:
+ attributes_string
+ | attributes_list attributes_string
+ ;
+
+attributes_string:
+ NAME
+ { lang_set_flags (region, $1, 0); }
+ | '!' NAME
+ { lang_set_flags (region, $2, 1); }
+ ;
+
+startup:
+ STARTUP '(' filename ')'
+ { lang_startup($3); }
+ ;
+
+high_level_library:
+ HLL '(' high_level_library_NAME_list ')'
+ | HLL '(' ')'
+ { ldemul_hll((char *)NULL); }
+ ;
+
+high_level_library_NAME_list:
+ high_level_library_NAME_list opt_comma filename
+ { ldemul_hll($3); }
+ | filename
+ { ldemul_hll($1); }
+ ;
+
+low_level_library:
+ SYSLIB '(' low_level_library_NAME_list ')'
+ ;
+
+low_level_library_NAME_list:
+ low_level_library_NAME_list opt_comma filename
+ { ldemul_syslib($3); }
+ |
+ ;
+
+floating_point_support:
+ FLOAT
+ { lang_float(true); }
+ | NOFLOAT
+ { lang_float(false); }
+ ;
+
+nocrossref_list:
+ /* empty */
+ {
+ $$ = NULL;
+ }
+ | NAME nocrossref_list
+ {
+ struct lang_nocrossref *n;
+
+ n = (struct lang_nocrossref *) xmalloc (sizeof *n);
+ n->name = $1;
+ n->next = $2;
+ $$ = n;
+ }
+ | NAME ',' nocrossref_list
+ {
+ struct lang_nocrossref *n;
+
+ n = (struct lang_nocrossref *) xmalloc (sizeof *n);
+ n->name = $1;
+ n->next = $3;
+ $$ = n;
+ }
+ ;
+
+paren_script_name: { ldlex_script (); }
+ '(' NAME ')'
+ { ldlex_popstate (); $$ = $3; }
+
+mustbe_exp: { ldlex_expression (); }
+ exp
+ { ldlex_popstate (); $$ = $2; }
+ ;
+
+exp :
+ '-' exp %prec UNARY
+ { $$ = exp_unop ('-', $2); }
+ | '(' exp ')'
+ { $$ = $2; }
+ | NEXT '(' exp ')' %prec UNARY
+ { $$ = exp_unop ((int) $1,$3); }
+ | '!' exp %prec UNARY
+ { $$ = exp_unop ('!', $2); }
+ | '+' exp %prec UNARY
+ { $$ = $2; }
+ | '~' exp %prec UNARY
+ { $$ = exp_unop ('~', $2);}
+
+ | exp '*' exp
+ { $$ = exp_binop ('*', $1, $3); }
+ | exp '/' exp
+ { $$ = exp_binop ('/', $1, $3); }
+ | exp '%' exp
+ { $$ = exp_binop ('%', $1, $3); }
+ | exp '+' exp
+ { $$ = exp_binop ('+', $1, $3); }
+ | exp '-' exp
+ { $$ = exp_binop ('-' , $1, $3); }
+ | exp LSHIFT exp
+ { $$ = exp_binop (LSHIFT , $1, $3); }
+ | exp RSHIFT exp
+ { $$ = exp_binop (RSHIFT , $1, $3); }
+ | exp EQ exp
+ { $$ = exp_binop (EQ , $1, $3); }
+ | exp NE exp
+ { $$ = exp_binop (NE , $1, $3); }
+ | exp LE exp
+ { $$ = exp_binop (LE , $1, $3); }
+ | exp GE exp
+ { $$ = exp_binop (GE , $1, $3); }
+ | exp '<' exp
+ { $$ = exp_binop ('<' , $1, $3); }
+ | exp '>' exp
+ { $$ = exp_binop ('>' , $1, $3); }
+ | exp '&' exp
+ { $$ = exp_binop ('&' , $1, $3); }
+ | exp '^' exp
+ { $$ = exp_binop ('^' , $1, $3); }
+ | exp '|' exp
+ { $$ = exp_binop ('|' , $1, $3); }
+ | exp '?' exp ':' exp
+ { $$ = exp_trinop ('?' , $1, $3, $5); }
+ | exp ANDAND exp
+ { $$ = exp_binop (ANDAND , $1, $3); }
+ | exp OROR exp
+ { $$ = exp_binop (OROR , $1, $3); }
+ | DEFINED '(' NAME ')'
+ { $$ = exp_nameop (DEFINED, $3); }
+ | INT
+ { $$ = exp_bigintop ($1.integer, $1.str); }
+ | SIZEOF_HEADERS
+ { $$ = exp_nameop (SIZEOF_HEADERS,0); }
+
+ | ALIGNOF paren_script_name
+ { $$ = exp_nameop (ALIGNOF, $2); }
+ | SIZEOF paren_script_name
+ { $$ = exp_nameop (SIZEOF, $2); }
+ | ADDR paren_script_name
+ { $$ = exp_nameop (ADDR, $2); }
+ | LOADADDR paren_script_name
+ { $$ = exp_nameop (LOADADDR, $2); }
+ | CONSTANT '(' NAME ')'
+ { $$ = exp_nameop (CONSTANT,$3); }
+ | ABSOLUTE '(' exp ')'
+ { $$ = exp_unop (ABSOLUTE, $3); }
+ | ALIGN_K '(' exp ')'
+ { $$ = exp_unop (ALIGN_K,$3); }
+ | ALIGN_K '(' exp ',' exp ')'
+ { $$ = exp_binop (ALIGN_K,$3,$5); }
+ | DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN '(' exp ',' exp ')'
+ { $$ = exp_binop (DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN, $3, $5); }
+ | DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END '(' exp ',' exp ')'
+ { $$ = exp_binop (DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END, $5, $3); }
+ | DATA_SEGMENT_END '(' exp ')'
+ { $$ = exp_unop (DATA_SEGMENT_END, $3); }
+ | SEGMENT_START { ldlex_script (); } '(' NAME
+ { ldlex_popstate (); } ',' exp ')'
+ { /* The operands to the expression node are
+ placed in the opposite order from the way
+ in which they appear in the script as
+ that allows us to reuse more code in
+ fold_binary. */
+ $$ = exp_binop (SEGMENT_START,
+ $7,
+ exp_nameop (NAME, $4)); }
+ | BLOCK '(' exp ')'
+ { $$ = exp_unop (ALIGN_K,$3); }
+ | NAME
+ { $$ = exp_nameop (NAME,$1); }
+ | MAX_K '(' exp ',' exp ')'
+ { $$ = exp_binop (MAX_K, $3, $5 ); }
+ | MIN_K '(' exp ',' exp ')'
+ { $$ = exp_binop (MIN_K, $3, $5 ); }
+ | ASSERT_K '(' exp ',' NAME ')'
+ { $$ = exp_assert ($3, $5); }
+ | ORIGIN paren_script_name
+ { $$ = exp_nameop (ORIGIN, $2); }
+ | LENGTH paren_script_name
+ { $$ = exp_nameop (LENGTH, $2); }
+ | LOG2CEIL '(' exp ')'
+ { $$ = exp_unop (LOG2CEIL, $3); }
+ ;
+
+
+memspec_at_opt:
+ AT '>' NAME { $$ = $3; }
+ | { $$ = 0; }
+ ;
+
+opt_at:
+ AT '(' exp ')' { $$ = $3; }
+ | { $$ = 0; }
+ ;
+
+opt_align:
+ ALIGN_K '(' exp ')' { $$ = $3; }
+ | { $$ = 0; }
+ ;
+
+opt_align_with_input:
+ ALIGN_WITH_INPUT { $$ = ALIGN_WITH_INPUT; }
+ | { $$ = 0; }
+ ;
+
+opt_subalign:
+ SUBALIGN '(' exp ')' { $$ = $3; }
+ | { $$ = 0; }
+ ;
+
+sect_constraint:
+ ONLY_IF_RO { $$ = ONLY_IF_RO; }
+ | ONLY_IF_RW { $$ = ONLY_IF_RW; }
+ | SPECIAL { $$ = SPECIAL; }
+ | { $$ = 0; }
+ ;
+
+section: NAME
+ { ldlex_expression(); }
+ opt_exp_with_type
+ opt_at
+ opt_align
+ opt_align_with_input
+ opt_subalign
+ sect_constraint
+ {
+ ldlex_popstate ();
+ ldlex_wild ();
+ lang_enter_output_section_statement ($1, $3, sectype,
+ sectype_value, $5, $7, $4, $8, $6);
+ }
+ '{'
+ statement_list_opt
+ '}'
+ { ldlex_popstate (); }
+ memspec_opt memspec_at_opt phdr_opt fill_opt
+ {
+ /* fill_opt may have switched the lexer into
+ expression state, and back again, but in
+ order to find the end of the fill
+ expression the parser must look ahead one
+ token. If it is a NAME, throw it away as
+ it will have been lexed in the wrong
+ state. */
+ if (yychar == NAME)
+ {
+ yyclearin;
+ ldlex_backup ();
+ }
+ lang_leave_output_section_statement ($17, $14,
+ $16, $15);
+ }
+ opt_comma
+ | OVERLAY
+ { ldlex_expression (); }
+ opt_exp_without_type opt_nocrossrefs opt_at opt_subalign
+ { ldlex_popstate (); }
+ '{'
+ {
+ lang_enter_overlay ($3, $6);
+ }
+ overlay_section
+ '}'
+ memspec_opt memspec_at_opt phdr_opt fill_opt
+ {
+ if (yychar == NAME)
+ {
+ yyclearin;
+ ldlex_backup ();
+ }
+ lang_leave_overlay ($5, (int) $4,
+ $15, $12, $14, $13);
+ }
+ opt_comma
+ | /* The GROUP case is just enough to support the gcc
+ svr3.ifile script. It is not intended to be full
+ support. I'm not even sure what GROUP is supposed
+ to mean. */
+ GROUP
+ { ldlex_expression (); }
+ opt_exp_with_type
+ {
+ ldlex_popstate ();
+ lang_add_assignment (exp_assign (".", $3, false));
+ }
+ '{' sec_or_group_p1 '}'
+ | INCLUDE filename
+ {
+ ldfile_open_command_file ($2);
+ }
+ sec_or_group_p1 END
+ ;
+
+type:
+ NOLOAD { sectype = noload_section; }
+ | DSECT { sectype = noalloc_section; }
+ | COPY { sectype = noalloc_section; }
+ | INFO { sectype = noalloc_section; }
+ | OVERLAY { sectype = noalloc_section; }
+ | READONLY '(' TYPE '=' exp ')' { sectype = typed_readonly_section; sectype_value = $5; }
+ | READONLY { sectype = readonly_section; }
+ | TYPE '=' exp { sectype = type_section; sectype_value = $3; }
+ ;
+
+atype:
+ '(' type ')'
+ | /* EMPTY */ { sectype = normal_section; }
+ | '(' ')' { sectype = normal_section; }
+ ;
+
+opt_exp_with_type:
+ exp atype ':' { $$ = $1; }
+ | atype ':' { $$ = (etree_type *)NULL; }
+ | /* The BIND cases are to support the gcc svr3.ifile
+ script. They aren't intended to implement full
+ support for the BIND keyword. I'm not even sure
+ what BIND is supposed to mean. */
+ BIND '(' exp ')' atype ':' { $$ = $3; }
+ | BIND '(' exp ')' BLOCK '(' exp ')' atype ':'
+ { $$ = $3; }
+ ;
+
+opt_exp_without_type:
+ exp ':' { $$ = $1; }
+ | ':' { $$ = (etree_type *) NULL; }
+ ;
+
+opt_nocrossrefs:
+ /* empty */
+ { $$ = 0; }
+ | NOCROSSREFS
+ { $$ = 1; }
+ ;
+
+memspec_opt:
+ '>' NAME
+ { $$ = $2; }
+ | { $$ = DEFAULT_MEMORY_REGION; }
+ ;
+
+phdr_opt:
+ /* empty */
+ {
+ $$ = NULL;
+ }
+ | phdr_opt ':' NAME
+ {
+ struct lang_output_section_phdr_list *n;
+
+ n = ((struct lang_output_section_phdr_list *)
+ xmalloc (sizeof *n));
+ n->name = $3;
+ n->used = false;
+ n->next = $1;
+ $$ = n;
+ }
+ ;
+
+overlay_section:
+ /* empty */
+ | overlay_section
+ NAME
+ {
+ ldlex_wild ();
+ lang_enter_overlay_section ($2);
+ }
+ '{'
+ statement_list_opt
+ '}'
+ { ldlex_popstate (); }
+ phdr_opt fill_opt
+ {
+ if (yychar == NAME)
+ {
+ yyclearin;
+ ldlex_backup ();
+ }
+ lang_leave_overlay_section ($9, $8);
+ }
+ opt_comma
+ ;
+
+phdrs:
+ PHDRS '{' phdr_list '}'
+ ;
+
+phdr_list:
+ /* empty */
+ | phdr_list phdr
+ ;
+
+phdr:
+ NAME { ldlex_expression (); }
+ phdr_type phdr_qualifiers { ldlex_popstate (); }
+ ';'
+ {
+ lang_new_phdr ($1, $3, $4.filehdr, $4.phdrs, $4.at,
+ $4.flags);
+ }
+ ;
+
+phdr_type:
+ exp
+ {
+ $$ = $1;
+
+ if ($1->type.node_class == etree_name
+ && $1->type.node_code == NAME)
+ {
+ const char *s;
+ unsigned int i;
+ static const char * const phdr_types[] =
+ {
+ "PT_NULL", "PT_LOAD", "PT_DYNAMIC",
+ "PT_INTERP", "PT_NOTE", "PT_SHLIB",
+ "PT_PHDR", "PT_TLS"
+ };
+
+ s = $1->name.name;
+ for (i = 0;
+ i < sizeof phdr_types / sizeof phdr_types[0];
+ i++)
+ if (strcmp (s, phdr_types[i]) == 0)
+ {
+ $$ = exp_intop (i);
+ break;
+ }
+ if (i == sizeof phdr_types / sizeof phdr_types[0])
+ {
+ if (strcmp (s, "PT_GNU_EH_FRAME") == 0)
+ $$ = exp_intop (0x6474e550);
+ else if (strcmp (s, "PT_GNU_STACK") == 0)
+ $$ = exp_intop (0x6474e551);
+ else if (strcmp (s, "PT_GNU_RELRO") == 0)
+ $$ = exp_intop (0x6474e552);
+ else if (strcmp (s, "PT_GNU_PROPERTY") == 0)
+ $$ = exp_intop (0x6474e553);
+ else
+ {
+ einfo (_("\
+%X%P:%pS: unknown phdr type `%s' (try integer literal)\n"),
+ NULL, s);
+ $$ = exp_intop (0);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ ;
+
+phdr_qualifiers:
+ /* empty */
+ {
+ memset (&$$, 0, sizeof (struct phdr_info));
+ }
+ | NAME phdr_val phdr_qualifiers
+ {
+ $$ = $3;
+ if (strcmp ($1, "FILEHDR") == 0 && $2 == NULL)
+ $$.filehdr = true;
+ else if (strcmp ($1, "PHDRS") == 0 && $2 == NULL)
+ $$.phdrs = true;
+ else if (strcmp ($1, "FLAGS") == 0 && $2 != NULL)
+ $$.flags = $2;
+ else
+ einfo (_("%X%P:%pS: PHDRS syntax error at `%s'\n"),
+ NULL, $1);
+ }
+ | AT '(' exp ')' phdr_qualifiers
+ {
+ $$ = $5;
+ $$.at = $3;
+ }
+ ;
+
+phdr_val:
+ /* empty */
+ {
+ $$ = NULL;
+ }
+ | '(' exp ')'
+ {
+ $$ = $2;
+ }
+ ;
+
+dynamic_list_file:
+ {
+ ldlex_version_file ();
+ PUSH_ERROR (_("dynamic list"));
+ }
+ dynamic_list_nodes
+ {
+ ldlex_popstate ();
+ POP_ERROR ();
+ }
+ ;
+
+dynamic_list_nodes:
+ dynamic_list_node
+ | dynamic_list_nodes dynamic_list_node
+ ;
+
+dynamic_list_node:
+ '{' dynamic_list_tag '}' ';'
+ ;
+
+dynamic_list_tag:
+ vers_defns ';'
+ {
+ lang_append_dynamic_list (current_dynamic_list_p, $1);
+ }
+ ;
+
+/* This syntax is used within an external version script file. */
+
+version_script_file:
+ {
+ ldlex_version_file ();
+ PUSH_ERROR (_("VERSION script"));
+ }
+ vers_nodes
+ {
+ ldlex_popstate ();
+ POP_ERROR ();
+ }
+ ;
+
+/* This is used within a normal linker script file. */
+
+version:
+ {
+ ldlex_version_script ();
+ }
+ VERSIONK '{' vers_nodes '}'
+ {
+ ldlex_popstate ();
+ }
+ ;
+
+vers_nodes:
+ vers_node
+ | vers_nodes vers_node
+ ;
+
+vers_node:
+ '{' vers_tag '}' ';'
+ {
+ lang_register_vers_node (NULL, $2, NULL);
+ }
+ | VERS_TAG '{' vers_tag '}' ';'
+ {
+ lang_register_vers_node ($1, $3, NULL);
+ }
+ | VERS_TAG '{' vers_tag '}' verdep ';'
+ {
+ lang_register_vers_node ($1, $3, $5);
+ }
+ ;
+
+verdep:
+ VERS_TAG
+ {
+ $$ = lang_add_vers_depend (NULL, $1);
+ }
+ | verdep VERS_TAG
+ {
+ $$ = lang_add_vers_depend ($1, $2);
+ }
+ ;
+
+vers_tag:
+ /* empty */
+ {
+ $$ = lang_new_vers_node (NULL, NULL);
+ }
+ | vers_defns ';'
+ {
+ $$ = lang_new_vers_node ($1, NULL);
+ }
+ | GLOBAL ':' vers_defns ';'
+ {
+ $$ = lang_new_vers_node ($3, NULL);
+ }
+ | LOCAL ':' vers_defns ';'
+ {
+ $$ = lang_new_vers_node (NULL, $3);
+ }
+ | GLOBAL ':' vers_defns ';' LOCAL ':' vers_defns ';'
+ {
+ $$ = lang_new_vers_node ($3, $7);
+ }
+ ;
+
+vers_defns:
+ VERS_IDENTIFIER
+ {
+ $$ = lang_new_vers_pattern (NULL, $1, ldgram_vers_current_lang, false);
+ }
+ | NAME
+ {
+ $$ = lang_new_vers_pattern (NULL, $1, ldgram_vers_current_lang, true);
+ }
+ | vers_defns ';' VERS_IDENTIFIER
+ {
+ $$ = lang_new_vers_pattern ($1, $3, ldgram_vers_current_lang, false);
+ }
+ | vers_defns ';' NAME
+ {
+ $$ = lang_new_vers_pattern ($1, $3, ldgram_vers_current_lang, true);
+ }
+ | vers_defns ';' EXTERN NAME '{'
+ {
+ $<name>$ = ldgram_vers_current_lang;
+ ldgram_vers_current_lang = $4;
+ }
+ vers_defns opt_semicolon '}'
+ {
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr *pat;
+ for (pat = $7; pat->next != NULL; pat = pat->next);
+ pat->next = $1;
+ $$ = $7;
+ ldgram_vers_current_lang = $<name>6;
+ }
+ | EXTERN NAME '{'
+ {
+ $<name>$ = ldgram_vers_current_lang;
+ ldgram_vers_current_lang = $2;
+ }
+ vers_defns opt_semicolon '}'
+ {
+ $$ = $5;
+ ldgram_vers_current_lang = $<name>4;
+ }
+ | GLOBAL
+ {
+ $$ = lang_new_vers_pattern (NULL, "global", ldgram_vers_current_lang, false);
+ }
+ | vers_defns ';' GLOBAL
+ {
+ $$ = lang_new_vers_pattern ($1, "global", ldgram_vers_current_lang, false);
+ }
+ | LOCAL
+ {
+ $$ = lang_new_vers_pattern (NULL, "local", ldgram_vers_current_lang, false);
+ }
+ | vers_defns ';' LOCAL
+ {
+ $$ = lang_new_vers_pattern ($1, "local", ldgram_vers_current_lang, false);
+ }
+ | EXTERN
+ {
+ $$ = lang_new_vers_pattern (NULL, "extern", ldgram_vers_current_lang, false);
+ }
+ | vers_defns ';' EXTERN
+ {
+ $$ = lang_new_vers_pattern ($1, "extern", ldgram_vers_current_lang, false);
+ }
+ ;
+
+opt_semicolon:
+ /* empty */
+ | ';'
+ ;
+
+%%
+void
+yyerror(arg)
+ const char *arg;
+{
+ if (ldfile_assumed_script)
+ einfo (_("%P:%s: file format not recognized; treating as linker script\n"),
+ ldlex_filename ());
+ if (error_index > 0 && error_index < ERROR_NAME_MAX)
+ einfo (_("%F%P:%pS: %s in %s\n"), NULL, arg, error_names[error_index - 1]);
+ else
+ einfo ("%F%P:%pS: %s\n", NULL, arg);
+}
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/ldlang.c binutils-2.41/ld/ldlang.c
--- binutils.orig/ld/ldlang.c 2024-05-13 13:03:47.804601777 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/ldlang.c 2024-05-13 13:04:08.599633306 +0100
@@ -1282,6 +1282,7 @@ output_section_statement_newfunc (struct
ret->s.output_section_statement.section_alignment = NULL;
ret->s.output_section_statement.block_value = 1;
lang_list_init (&ret->s.output_section_statement.children);
+ lang_list_init (&ret->s.output_section_statement.sort_children);
lang_statement_append (stat_ptr, &ret->s, &ret->s.header.next);
/* For every output section statement added to the list, except the
@@ -7566,13 +7567,22 @@ lang_enter_output_section_statement (con
lang_output_section_statement_type *os;
os = lang_output_section_statement_lookup (output_section_statement_name,
- constraint, 2);
+ constraint,
+ in_section_ordering ? 0 : 2);
+ if (os == NULL) /* && in_section_ordering */
+ einfo (_("%F%P:%pS: error: output section '%s' must already exist\n"),
+ NULL, output_section_statement_name);
current_section = os;
+ /* Make next things chain into subchain of this. */
+ push_stat_ptr (in_section_ordering ? &os->sort_children : &os->children);
+
+ if (in_section_ordering)
+ return os;
+
if (os->addr_tree == NULL)
- {
- os->addr_tree = address_exp;
- }
+ os->addr_tree = address_exp;
+
os->sectype = sectype;
if (sectype == type_section || sectype == typed_readonly_section)
os->sectype_value = sectype_value;
@@ -7582,9 +7592,6 @@ lang_enter_output_section_statement (con
os->flags = SEC_NO_FLAGS;
os->block_value = 1;
- /* Make next things chain into subchain of this. */
- push_stat_ptr (&os->children);
-
os->align_lma_with_input = align_with_input == ALIGN_WITH_INPUT;
if (os->align_lma_with_input && align != NULL)
einfo (_("%F%P:%pS: error: align with input and explicit align specified\n"),
@@ -7924,21 +7931,6 @@ find_rescan_insertion (lang_input_statem
return iter;
}
-/* Insert SRCLIST into DESTLIST after given element by chaining
- on FIELD as the next-pointer. (Counterintuitively does not need
- a pointer to the actual after-node itself, just its chain field.) */
-
-static void
-lang_list_insert_after (lang_statement_list_type *destlist,
- lang_statement_list_type *srclist,
- lang_statement_union_type **field)
-{
- *(srclist->tail) = *field;
- *field = srclist->head;
- if (destlist->tail == field)
- destlist->tail = srclist->tail;
-}
-
/* Detach new nodes added to DESTLIST since the time ORIGLIST
was taken as a copy of it and leave them in ORIGLIST. */
@@ -7986,6 +7978,21 @@ find_next_input_statement (lang_statemen
}
#endif /* BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS */
+/* Insert SRCLIST into DESTLIST after given element by chaining
+ on FIELD as the next-pointer. (Counterintuitively does not need
+ a pointer to the actual after-node itself, just its chain field.) */
+
+static void
+lang_list_insert_after (lang_statement_list_type *destlist,
+ lang_statement_list_type *srclist,
+ lang_statement_union_type **field)
+{
+ *(srclist->tail) = *field;
+ *field = srclist->head;
+ if (destlist->tail == field)
+ destlist->tail = srclist->tail;
+}
+
/* Add NAME to the list of garbage collection entry points. */
void
@@ -8080,9 +8087,34 @@ reset_resolved_wilds (void)
lang_for_each_statement (reset_one_wild);
}
+/* For each output section statement, splice any entries on the
+ sort_children list before the first wild statement on the children
+ list. */
+
+static void
+lang_os_merge_sort_children (void)
+{
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os;
+ for (os = (void *) lang_os_list.head; os != NULL; os = os->next)
+ {
+ if (os->sort_children.head != NULL)
+ {
+ lang_statement_union_type **where;
+ for (where = &os->children.head;
+ *where != NULL;
+ where = &(*where)->header.next)
+ if ((*where)->header.type == lang_wild_statement_enum)
+ break;
+ lang_list_insert_after (&os->children, &os->sort_children, where);
+ }
+ }
+}
+
void
lang_process (void)
{
+ lang_os_merge_sort_children ();
+
/* Finalize dynamic list. */
if (link_info.dynamic_list)
lang_finalize_version_expr_head (&link_info.dynamic_list->head);
@@ -8764,6 +8796,10 @@ lang_leave_output_section_statement (fil
lang_output_section_phdr_list *phdrs,
const char *lma_memspec)
{
+ pop_stat_ptr ();
+ if (in_section_ordering)
+ return;
+
lang_get_regions (&current_section->region,
&current_section->lma_region,
memspec, lma_memspec,
@@ -8772,7 +8808,6 @@ lang_leave_output_section_statement (fil
current_section->fill = fill;
current_section->phdrs = phdrs;
- pop_stat_ptr ();
}
/* Set the output format type. -oformat overrides scripts. */
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/ldlang.c.orig binutils-2.41/ld/ldlang.c.orig
--- binutils.orig/ld/ldlang.c.orig 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/ldlang.c.orig 2023-07-03 00:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,9907 @@
+/* Linker command language support.
+ Copyright (C) 1991-2023 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+ This file is part of the GNU Binutils.
+
+ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or
+ (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+ Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street - Fifth Floor, Boston,
+ MA 02110-1301, USA. */
+
+#include "sysdep.h"
+#include <limits.h>
+#include "bfd.h"
+#include "libiberty.h"
+#include "filenames.h"
+#include "safe-ctype.h"
+#include "obstack.h"
+#include "bfdlink.h"
+#include "ctf-api.h"
+#include "ld.h"
+#include "ldmain.h"
+#include "ldexp.h"
+#include "ldlang.h"
+#include <ldgram.h>
+#include "ldlex.h"
+#include "ldmisc.h"
+#include "ldctor.h"
+#include "ldfile.h"
+#include "ldemul.h"
+#include "fnmatch.h"
+#include "demangle.h"
+#include "hashtab.h"
+#include "elf-bfd.h"
+#include "bfdver.h"
+
+#if BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS
+#include "plugin.h"
+#endif
+
+#ifndef offsetof
+#define offsetof(TYPE, MEMBER) ((size_t) & (((TYPE*) 0)->MEMBER))
+#endif
+
+/* Convert between addresses in bytes and sizes in octets.
+ For currently supported targets, octets_per_byte is always a power
+ of two, so we can use shifts. */
+#define TO_ADDR(X) ((X) >> opb_shift)
+#define TO_SIZE(X) ((X) << opb_shift)
+
+/* Local variables. */
+static struct obstack stat_obstack;
+static struct obstack map_obstack;
+static struct obstack pt_obstack;
+
+#define obstack_chunk_alloc xmalloc
+#define obstack_chunk_free free
+static const char *entry_symbol_default = "start";
+static bool map_head_is_link_order = false;
+static lang_output_section_statement_type *default_common_section;
+static bool map_option_f;
+static bfd_vma print_dot;
+static lang_input_statement_type *first_file;
+static const char *current_target;
+static lang_statement_list_type *stat_save[10];
+static lang_statement_list_type **stat_save_ptr = &stat_save[0];
+static struct unique_sections *unique_section_list;
+static struct asneeded_minfo *asneeded_list_head;
+static unsigned int opb_shift = 0;
+
+/* Forward declarations. */
+static void exp_init_os (etree_type *);
+static lang_input_statement_type *lookup_name (const char *);
+static bool wont_add_section_p (asection *,
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *);
+static void insert_undefined (const char *);
+static bool sort_def_symbol (struct bfd_link_hash_entry *, void *);
+static lang_statement_union_type *new_statement (enum statement_enum type,
+ size_t size,
+ lang_statement_list_type *list);
+static void print_statement (lang_statement_union_type *,
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *);
+static void print_statement_list (lang_statement_union_type *,
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *);
+static void print_statements (void);
+static void print_input_section (asection *, bool);
+static bool lang_one_common (struct bfd_link_hash_entry *, void *);
+static void lang_record_phdrs (void);
+static void lang_do_version_exports_section (void);
+static void lang_finalize_version_expr_head
+ (struct bfd_elf_version_expr_head *);
+static void lang_do_memory_regions (bool);
+
+/* Exported variables. */
+const char *output_target;
+lang_output_section_statement_type *abs_output_section;
+/* Header for list of statements corresponding to any files involved in the
+ link, either specified from the command-line or added implicitely (eg.
+ archive member used to resolved undefined symbol, wildcard statement from
+ linker script, etc.). Next pointer is in next field of a
+ lang_statement_header_type (reached via header field in a
+ lang_statement_union). */
+lang_statement_list_type statement_list;
+lang_statement_list_type lang_os_list;
+lang_statement_list_type *stat_ptr = &statement_list;
+/* Header for list of statements corresponding to files used in the final
+ executable. This can be either object file specified on the command-line
+ or library member resolving an undefined reference. Next pointer is in next
+ field of a lang_input_statement_type (reached via input_statement field in a
+ lang_statement_union). */
+lang_statement_list_type file_chain = { NULL, NULL };
+/* Header for list of statements corresponding to files specified on the
+ command-line for linking. It thus contains real object files and archive
+ but not archive members. Next pointer is in next_real_file field of a
+ lang_input_statement_type statement (reached via input_statement field in a
+ lang_statement_union). */
+lang_statement_list_type input_file_chain;
+static const char *current_input_file;
+struct bfd_elf_dynamic_list **current_dynamic_list_p;
+struct bfd_sym_chain entry_symbol = { NULL, NULL };
+const char *entry_section = ".text";
+struct lang_input_statement_flags input_flags;
+bool entry_from_cmdline;
+bool lang_has_input_file = false;
+bool had_output_filename = false;
+bool lang_float_flag = false;
+bool delete_output_file_on_failure = false;
+bool enable_linker_version = false;
+struct lang_phdr *lang_phdr_list;
+struct lang_nocrossrefs *nocrossref_list;
+struct asneeded_minfo **asneeded_list_tail;
+#ifdef ENABLE_LIBCTF
+static ctf_dict_t *ctf_output;
+#endif
+
+/* Functions that traverse the linker script and might evaluate
+ DEFINED() need to increment this at the start of the traversal. */
+int lang_statement_iteration = 0;
+
+/* Count times through one_lang_size_sections_pass after mark phase. */
+static int lang_sizing_iteration = 0;
+
+/* Return TRUE if the PATTERN argument is a wildcard pattern.
+ Although backslashes are treated specially if a pattern contains
+ wildcards, we do not consider the mere presence of a backslash to
+ be enough to cause the pattern to be treated as a wildcard.
+ That lets us handle DOS filenames more naturally. */
+#define wildcardp(pattern) (strpbrk ((pattern), "?*[") != NULL)
+
+#define new_stat(x, y) \
+ (x##_type *) new_statement (x##_enum, sizeof (x##_type), y)
+
+#define outside_section_address(q) \
+ ((q)->output_offset + (q)->output_section->vma)
+
+#define outside_symbol_address(q) \
+ ((q)->value + outside_section_address (q->section))
+
+/* CTF sections smaller than this are not compressed: compression of
+ dictionaries this small doesn't gain much, and this lets consumers mmap the
+ sections directly out of the ELF file and use them with no decompression
+ overhead if they want to. */
+#define CTF_COMPRESSION_THRESHOLD 4096
+
+void *
+stat_alloc (size_t size)
+{
+ return obstack_alloc (&stat_obstack, size);
+}
+
+/* Code for handling simple wildcards without going through fnmatch,
+ which can be expensive because of charset translations etc. */
+
+/* A simple wild is a literal string followed by a single '*',
+ where the literal part is at least 4 characters long. */
+
+static bool
+is_simple_wild (const char *name)
+{
+ size_t len = strcspn (name, "*?[");
+ return len >= 4 && name[len] == '*' && name[len + 1] == '\0';
+}
+
+static bool
+match_simple_wild (const char *pattern, const char *name)
+{
+ /* The first four characters of the pattern are guaranteed valid
+ non-wildcard characters. So we can go faster. */
+ if (pattern[0] != name[0] || pattern[1] != name[1]
+ || pattern[2] != name[2] || pattern[3] != name[3])
+ return false;
+
+ pattern += 4;
+ name += 4;
+ while (*pattern != '*')
+ if (*name++ != *pattern++)
+ return false;
+
+ return true;
+}
+
+static int
+name_match (const char *pattern, const char *name)
+{
+ if (is_simple_wild (pattern))
+ return !match_simple_wild (pattern, name);
+ if (wildcardp (pattern))
+ return fnmatch (pattern, name, 0);
+ return strcmp (pattern, name);
+}
+
+/* Given an analyzed wildcard_spec SPEC, match it against NAME,
+ returns zero on a match, non-zero if there's no match. */
+
+static int
+spec_match (const struct wildcard_spec *spec, const char *name)
+{
+ size_t nl = spec->namelen;
+ size_t pl = spec->prefixlen;
+ size_t sl = spec->suffixlen;
+ size_t inputlen = strlen (name);
+ int r;
+
+ if (pl)
+ {
+ if (inputlen < pl)
+ return 1;
+
+ r = memcmp (spec->name, name, pl);
+ if (r)
+ return r;
+ }
+
+ if (sl)
+ {
+ if (inputlen < sl)
+ return 1;
+
+ r = memcmp (spec->name + nl - sl, name + inputlen - sl, sl);
+ if (r)
+ return r;
+ }
+
+ if (nl == pl + sl + 1 && spec->name[pl] == '*')
+ return 0;
+
+ if (nl > pl)
+ return fnmatch (spec->name + pl, name + pl, 0);
+
+ if (inputlen >= nl)
+ return name[nl];
+
+ return 0;
+}
+
+static char *
+ldirname (const char *name)
+{
+ const char *base = lbasename (name);
+ char *dirname;
+
+ while (base > name && IS_DIR_SEPARATOR (base[-1]))
+ --base;
+ if (base == name)
+ return strdup (".");
+ dirname = strdup (name);
+ dirname[base - name] = '\0';
+ return dirname;
+}
+
+/* If PATTERN is of the form archive:file, return a pointer to the
+ separator. If not, return NULL. */
+
+static char *
+archive_path (const char *pattern)
+{
+ char *p = NULL;
+
+ if (link_info.path_separator == 0)
+ return p;
+
+ p = strchr (pattern, link_info.path_separator);
+#ifdef HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
+ if (p == NULL || link_info.path_separator != ':')
+ return p;
+
+ /* Assume a match on the second char is part of drive specifier,
+ as in "c:\silly.dos". */
+ if (p == pattern + 1 && ISALPHA (*pattern))
+ p = strchr (p + 1, link_info.path_separator);
+#endif
+ return p;
+}
+
+/* Given that FILE_SPEC results in a non-NULL SEP result from archive_path,
+ return whether F matches FILE_SPEC. */
+
+static bool
+input_statement_is_archive_path (const char *file_spec, char *sep,
+ lang_input_statement_type *f)
+{
+ bool match = false;
+
+ if ((*(sep + 1) == 0
+ || name_match (sep + 1, f->filename) == 0)
+ && ((sep != file_spec)
+ == (f->the_bfd != NULL && f->the_bfd->my_archive != NULL)))
+ {
+ match = true;
+
+ if (sep != file_spec)
+ {
+ const char *aname = bfd_get_filename (f->the_bfd->my_archive);
+ *sep = 0;
+ match = name_match (file_spec, aname) == 0;
+ *sep = link_info.path_separator;
+ }
+ }
+ return match;
+}
+
+static bool
+unique_section_p (const asection *sec,
+ const lang_output_section_statement_type *os)
+{
+ struct unique_sections *unam;
+ const char *secnam;
+
+ if (!link_info.resolve_section_groups
+ && sec->owner != NULL
+ && bfd_is_group_section (sec->owner, sec))
+ return !(os != NULL
+ && strcmp (os->name, DISCARD_SECTION_NAME) == 0);
+
+ secnam = sec->name;
+ for (unam = unique_section_list; unam; unam = unam->next)
+ if (name_match (unam->name, secnam) == 0)
+ return true;
+
+ return false;
+}
+
+/* Generic traversal routines for finding matching sections. */
+
+/* Return true if FILE matches a pattern in EXCLUDE_LIST, otherwise return
+ false. */
+
+static bool
+walk_wild_file_in_exclude_list (struct name_list *exclude_list,
+ lang_input_statement_type *file)
+{
+ struct name_list *list_tmp;
+
+ for (list_tmp = exclude_list;
+ list_tmp;
+ list_tmp = list_tmp->next)
+ {
+ char *p = archive_path (list_tmp->name);
+
+ if (p != NULL)
+ {
+ if (input_statement_is_archive_path (list_tmp->name, p, file))
+ return true;
+ }
+
+ else if (name_match (list_tmp->name, file->filename) == 0)
+ return true;
+
+ /* FIXME: Perhaps remove the following at some stage? Matching
+ unadorned archives like this was never documented and has
+ been superceded by the archive:path syntax. */
+ else if (file->the_bfd != NULL
+ && file->the_bfd->my_archive != NULL
+ && name_match (list_tmp->name,
+ bfd_get_filename (file->the_bfd->my_archive)) == 0)
+ return true;
+ }
+
+ return false;
+}
+
+/* Add SECTION (from input FILE) to the list of matching sections
+ within PTR (the matching wildcard is SEC). */
+
+static void
+add_matching_section (lang_wild_statement_type *ptr,
+ struct wildcard_list *sec,
+ asection *section,
+ lang_input_statement_type *file)
+{
+ lang_input_matcher_type *new_section;
+ /* Add a section reference to the list. */
+ new_section = new_stat (lang_input_matcher, &ptr->matching_sections);
+ new_section->section = section;
+ new_section->pattern = sec;
+ new_section->input_stmt = file;
+}
+
+/* Process section S (from input file FILE) in relation to wildcard
+ statement PTR. We already know that a prefix of the name of S matches
+ some wildcard in PTR's wildcard list. Here we check if the filename
+ matches as well (if it's specified) and if any of the wildcards in fact
+ does match. */
+
+static void
+walk_wild_section_match (lang_wild_statement_type *ptr,
+ lang_input_statement_type *file,
+ asection *s)
+{
+ struct wildcard_list *sec;
+ const char *file_spec = ptr->filename;
+ char *p;
+
+ /* Check if filenames match. */
+ if (file_spec == NULL)
+ ;
+ else if ((p = archive_path (file_spec)) != NULL)
+ {
+ if (!input_statement_is_archive_path (file_spec, p, file))
+ return;
+ }
+ else if (wildcardp (file_spec))
+ {
+ if (fnmatch (file_spec, file->filename, 0) != 0)
+ return;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* XXX Matching against non-wildcard filename in wild statements
+ was done by going through lookup_name, which uses
+ ->local_sym_name to compare against, not ->filename. We retain
+ this behaviour even though the above code paths use filename.
+ It would be more logical to use it here as well, in which
+ case the above wildcard() arm could be folded into this by using
+ name_match. This would also solve the worry of what to do
+ about unset local_sym_name (in which case lookup_name simply adds
+ the input file again). */
+ const char *filename = file->local_sym_name;
+ lang_input_statement_type *arch_is;
+ if (filename && filename_cmp (filename, file_spec) == 0)
+ ;
+ /* FIXME: see also walk_wild_file_in_exclude_list for why we
+ also check parents BFD (local_sym_)name to match input statements
+ with unadorned archive names. */
+ else if (file->the_bfd
+ && file->the_bfd->my_archive
+ && (arch_is = bfd_usrdata (file->the_bfd->my_archive))
+ && arch_is->local_sym_name
+ && filename_cmp (arch_is->local_sym_name, file_spec) == 0)
+ ;
+ else
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /* If filename is excluded we're done. */
+ if (walk_wild_file_in_exclude_list (ptr->exclude_name_list, file))
+ return;
+
+ /* Check section name against each wildcard spec. If there's no
+ wildcard all sections match. */
+ sec = ptr->section_list;
+ if (sec == NULL)
+ add_matching_section (ptr, sec, s, file);
+ else
+ {
+ const char *sname = bfd_section_name (s);
+ for (; sec != NULL; sec = sec->next)
+ {
+ if (sec->spec.name != NULL
+ && spec_match (&sec->spec, sname) != 0)
+ continue;
+
+ /* Don't process sections from files which were excluded. */
+ if (!walk_wild_file_in_exclude_list (sec->spec.exclude_name_list,
+ file))
+ add_matching_section (ptr, sec, s, file);
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/* Return the numerical value of the init_priority attribute from
+ section name NAME. */
+
+static int
+get_init_priority (const asection *sec)
+{
+ const char *name = bfd_section_name (sec);
+ const char *dot;
+
+ /* GCC uses the following section names for the init_priority
+ attribute with numerical values 101 to 65535 inclusive. A
+ lower value means a higher priority.
+
+ 1: .init_array.NNNNN/.fini_array.NNNNN: Where NNNNN is the
+ decimal numerical value of the init_priority attribute.
+ The order of execution in .init_array is forward and
+ .fini_array is backward.
+ 2: .ctors.NNNNN/.dtors.NNNNN: Where NNNNN is 65535 minus the
+ decimal numerical value of the init_priority attribute.
+ The order of execution in .ctors is backward and .dtors
+ is forward.
+
+ .init_array.NNNNN sections would normally be placed in an output
+ .init_array section, .fini_array.NNNNN in .fini_array,
+ .ctors.NNNNN in .ctors, and .dtors.NNNNN in .dtors. This means
+ we should sort by increasing number (and could just use
+ SORT_BY_NAME in scripts). However if .ctors.NNNNN sections are
+ being placed in .init_array (which may also contain
+ .init_array.NNNNN sections) or .dtors.NNNNN sections are being
+ placed in .fini_array then we need to extract the init_priority
+ attribute and sort on that. */
+ dot = strrchr (name, '.');
+ if (dot != NULL && ISDIGIT (dot[1]))
+ {
+ char *end;
+ unsigned long init_priority = strtoul (dot + 1, &end, 10);
+ if (*end == 0)
+ {
+ if (dot == name + 6
+ && (strncmp (name, ".ctors", 6) == 0
+ || strncmp (name, ".dtors", 6) == 0))
+ init_priority = 65535 - init_priority;
+ if (init_priority <= INT_MAX)
+ return init_priority;
+ }
+ }
+ return -1;
+}
+
+/* Compare sections ASEC and BSEC according to SORT. */
+
+static int
+compare_section (sort_type sort, asection *asec, asection *bsec)
+{
+ int ret;
+ int a_priority, b_priority;
+
+ switch (sort)
+ {
+ default:
+ abort ();
+
+ case by_init_priority:
+ a_priority = get_init_priority (asec);
+ b_priority = get_init_priority (bsec);
+ if (a_priority < 0 || b_priority < 0)
+ goto sort_by_name;
+ ret = a_priority - b_priority;
+ if (ret)
+ break;
+ else
+ goto sort_by_name;
+
+ case by_alignment_name:
+ ret = bfd_section_alignment (bsec) - bfd_section_alignment (asec);
+ if (ret)
+ break;
+ /* Fall through. */
+
+ case by_name:
+ sort_by_name:
+ ret = strcmp (bfd_section_name (asec), bfd_section_name (bsec));
+ break;
+
+ case by_name_alignment:
+ ret = strcmp (bfd_section_name (asec), bfd_section_name (bsec));
+ if (ret)
+ break;
+ /* Fall through. */
+
+ case by_alignment:
+ ret = bfd_section_alignment (bsec) - bfd_section_alignment (asec);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ return ret;
+}
+
+/* PE puts the sort key in the input statement. */
+
+static const char *
+sort_filename (bfd *abfd)
+{
+ lang_input_statement_type *is = bfd_usrdata (abfd);
+ if (is->sort_key)
+ return is->sort_key;
+ return bfd_get_filename (abfd);
+}
+
+/* Handle wildcard sorting. This returns the place in a binary search tree
+ where this FILE:SECTION should be inserted for wild statement WILD where
+ the spec SEC was the matching one. The tree is later linearized. */
+
+static lang_section_bst_type **
+wild_sort (lang_wild_statement_type *wild,
+ struct wildcard_list *sec,
+ lang_input_statement_type *file,
+ asection *section)
+{
+ lang_section_bst_type **tree;
+
+ if (!wild->filenames_sorted
+ && (sec == NULL || sec->spec.sorted == none
+ || sec->spec.sorted == by_none))
+ {
+ /* We might be called even if _this_ spec doesn't need sorting,
+ in which case we simply append at the right end of tree. */
+ return wild->rightmost;
+ }
+
+ tree = &wild->tree;
+ while (*tree)
+ {
+ /* Sorting by filename takes precedence over sorting by section
+ name. */
+
+ if (wild->filenames_sorted)
+ {
+ const char *fn, *ln;
+ bool fa, la;
+ int i;
+ asection *lsec = (*tree)->section;
+
+ /* The PE support for the .idata section as generated by
+ dlltool assumes that files will be sorted by the name of
+ the archive and then the name of the file within the
+ archive. */
+
+ fa = file->the_bfd->my_archive != NULL;
+ if (fa)
+ fn = sort_filename (file->the_bfd->my_archive);
+ else
+ fn = sort_filename (file->the_bfd);
+
+ la = lsec->owner->my_archive != NULL;
+ if (la)
+ ln = sort_filename (lsec->owner->my_archive);
+ else
+ ln = sort_filename (lsec->owner);
+
+ i = filename_cmp (fn, ln);
+ if (i > 0)
+ { tree = &((*tree)->right); continue; }
+ else if (i < 0)
+ { tree = &((*tree)->left); continue; }
+
+ if (fa || la)
+ {
+ if (fa)
+ fn = sort_filename (file->the_bfd);
+ if (la)
+ ln = sort_filename (lsec->owner);
+
+ i = filename_cmp (fn, ln);
+ if (i > 0)
+ { tree = &((*tree)->right); continue; }
+ else if (i < 0)
+ { tree = &((*tree)->left); continue; }
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Here either the files are not sorted by name, or we are
+ looking at the sections for this file. */
+
+ /* Find the correct node to append this section. */
+ if (sec && sec->spec.sorted != none && sec->spec.sorted != by_none
+ && compare_section (sec->spec.sorted, section, (*tree)->section) < 0)
+ tree = &((*tree)->left);
+ else
+ tree = &((*tree)->right);
+ }
+
+ return tree;
+}
+
+/* Use wild_sort to build a BST to sort sections. */
+
+static void
+output_section_callback_sort (lang_wild_statement_type *ptr,
+ struct wildcard_list *sec,
+ asection *section,
+ lang_input_statement_type *file,
+ void *output)
+{
+ lang_section_bst_type *node;
+ lang_section_bst_type **tree;
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os;
+
+ os = (lang_output_section_statement_type *) output;
+
+ if (unique_section_p (section, os))
+ return;
+
+ /* Don't add sections to the tree when we already know that
+ lang_add_section won't do anything with it. */
+ if (wont_add_section_p (section, os))
+ return;
+
+ node = (lang_section_bst_type *) xmalloc (sizeof (lang_section_bst_type));
+ node->left = 0;
+ node->right = 0;
+ node->section = section;
+ node->pattern = ptr->section_list;
+
+ tree = wild_sort (ptr, sec, file, section);
+ if (tree != NULL)
+ {
+ *tree = node;
+ if (tree == ptr->rightmost)
+ ptr->rightmost = &node->right;
+ }
+}
+
+/* Convert a sorted sections' BST back to list form. */
+
+static void
+output_section_callback_tree_to_list (lang_wild_statement_type *ptr,
+ lang_section_bst_type *tree,
+ void *output)
+{
+ if (tree->left)
+ output_section_callback_tree_to_list (ptr, tree->left, output);
+
+ lang_add_section (&ptr->children, tree->section, tree->pattern,
+ ptr->section_flag_list,
+ (lang_output_section_statement_type *) output);
+
+ if (tree->right)
+ output_section_callback_tree_to_list (ptr, tree->right, output);
+
+ free (tree);
+}
+
+
+/* Sections are matched against wildcard statements via a prefix tree.
+ The prefix tree holds prefixes of all matching patterns (up to the first
+ wildcard character), and the wild statement from which those patterns
+ came. When matching a section name against the tree we're walking through
+ the tree character by character. Each statement we hit is one that
+ potentially matches. This is checked by actually going through the
+ (glob) matching routines.
+
+ When the section name turns out to actually match we record that section
+ in the wild statements list of matching sections. */
+
+/* A prefix can be matched by multiple statement, so we need a list of them. */
+struct wild_stmt_list
+{
+ lang_wild_statement_type *stmt;
+ struct wild_stmt_list *next;
+};
+
+/* The prefix tree itself. */
+struct prefixtree
+{
+ /* The list of all children (linked via .next). */
+ struct prefixtree *child;
+ struct prefixtree *next;
+ /* This tree node is responsible for the prefix of parent plus 'c'. */
+ char c;
+ /* The statements that potentially can match this prefix. */
+ struct wild_stmt_list *stmt;
+};
+
+/* We always have a root node in the prefix tree. It corresponds to the
+ empty prefix. E.g. a glob like "*" would sit in this root. */
+static struct prefixtree the_root, *ptroot = &the_root;
+
+/* Given a prefix tree in *TREE, corresponding to prefix P, find or
+ INSERT the tree node corresponding to prefix P+C. */
+
+static struct prefixtree *
+get_prefix_tree (struct prefixtree **tree, char c, bool insert)
+{
+ struct prefixtree *t;
+ for (t = *tree; t; t = t->next)
+ if (t->c == c)
+ return t;
+ if (!insert)
+ return NULL;
+ t = (struct prefixtree *) obstack_alloc (&pt_obstack, sizeof *t);
+ t->child = NULL;
+ t->next = *tree;
+ t->c = c;
+ t->stmt = NULL;
+ *tree = t;
+ return t;
+}
+
+/* Add STMT to the set of statements that can be matched by the prefix
+ corresponding to prefix tree T. */
+
+static void
+pt_add_stmt (struct prefixtree *t, lang_wild_statement_type *stmt)
+{
+ struct wild_stmt_list *sl, **psl;
+ sl = (struct wild_stmt_list *) obstack_alloc (&pt_obstack, sizeof *sl);
+ sl->stmt = stmt;
+ sl->next = NULL;
+ psl = &t->stmt;
+ while (*psl)
+ psl = &(*psl)->next;
+ *psl = sl;
+}
+
+/* Insert STMT into the global prefix tree. */
+
+static void
+insert_prefix_tree (lang_wild_statement_type *stmt)
+{
+ struct wildcard_list *sec;
+ struct prefixtree *t;
+
+ if (!stmt->section_list)
+ {
+ /* If we have no section_list (no wildcards in the wild STMT),
+ then every section name will match, so add this to the root. */
+ pt_add_stmt (ptroot, stmt);
+ return;
+ }
+
+ for (sec = stmt->section_list; sec; sec = sec->next)
+ {
+ const char *name = sec->spec.name ? sec->spec.name : "*";
+ char c;
+ t = ptroot;
+ for (; (c = *name); name++)
+ {
+ if (c == '*' || c == '[' || c == '?')
+ break;
+ t = get_prefix_tree (&t->child, c, true);
+ }
+ /* If we hit a glob character, the matching prefix is what we saw
+ until now. If we hit the end of pattern (hence it's no glob) then
+ we can do better: we only need to record a match when a section name
+ completely matches, not merely a prefix, so record the trailing 0
+ as well. */
+ if (!c)
+ t = get_prefix_tree (&t->child, 0, true);
+ pt_add_stmt (t, stmt);
+ }
+}
+
+/* Dump T indented by INDENT spaces. */
+
+static void
+debug_prefix_tree_rec (struct prefixtree *t, int indent)
+{
+ for (; t; t = t->next)
+ {
+ struct wild_stmt_list *sl;
+ printf ("%*s %c", indent, "", t->c);
+ for (sl = t->stmt; sl; sl = sl->next)
+ {
+ struct wildcard_list *curr;
+ printf (" %p ", sl->stmt);
+ for (curr = sl->stmt->section_list; curr; curr = curr->next)
+ printf ("%s ", curr->spec.name ? curr->spec.name : "*");
+ }
+ printf ("\n");
+ debug_prefix_tree_rec (t->child, indent + 2);
+ }
+}
+
+/* Dump the global prefix tree. */
+
+static void
+debug_prefix_tree (void)
+{
+ debug_prefix_tree_rec (ptroot, 2);
+}
+
+/* Like strcspn() but start to look from the end to beginning of
+ S. Returns the length of the suffix of S consisting entirely
+ of characters not in REJECT. */
+
+static size_t
+rstrcspn (const char *s, const char *reject)
+{
+ size_t len = strlen (s), sufflen = 0;
+ while (len--)
+ {
+ char c = s[len];
+ if (strchr (reject, c) != 0)
+ break;
+ sufflen++;
+ }
+ return sufflen;
+}
+
+/* Analyze the wildcards in wild statement PTR to setup various
+ things for quick matching. */
+
+static void
+analyze_walk_wild_section_handler (lang_wild_statement_type *ptr)
+{
+ struct wildcard_list *sec;
+
+ ptr->tree = NULL;
+ ptr->rightmost = &ptr->tree;
+
+ for (sec = ptr->section_list; sec != NULL; sec = sec->next)
+ {
+ if (sec->spec.name)
+ {
+ sec->spec.namelen = strlen (sec->spec.name);
+ sec->spec.prefixlen = strcspn (sec->spec.name, "?*[");
+ sec->spec.suffixlen = rstrcspn (sec->spec.name + sec->spec.prefixlen,
+ "?*]");
+ }
+ else
+ sec->spec.namelen = sec->spec.prefixlen = sec->spec.suffixlen = 0;
+ }
+
+ insert_prefix_tree (ptr);
+}
+
+/* Match all sections from FILE against the global prefix tree,
+ and record them into each wild statement that has a match. */
+
+static void
+resolve_wild_sections (lang_input_statement_type *file)
+{
+ asection *s;
+
+ if (file->flags.just_syms)
+ return;
+
+ for (s = file->the_bfd->sections; s != NULL; s = s->next)
+ {
+ const char *sname = bfd_section_name (s);
+ char c = 1;
+ struct prefixtree *t = ptroot;
+ //printf (" YYY consider %s of %s\n", sname, file->the_bfd->filename);
+ do
+ {
+ if (t->stmt)
+ {
+ struct wild_stmt_list *sl;
+ for (sl = t->stmt; sl; sl = sl->next)
+ {
+ walk_wild_section_match (sl->stmt, file, s);
+ //printf (" ZZZ maybe place into %p\n", sl->stmt);
+ }
+ }
+ if (!c)
+ break;
+ c = *sname++;
+ t = get_prefix_tree (&t->child, c, false);
+ }
+ while (t);
+ }
+}
+
+/* Match all sections from all input files against the global prefix tree. */
+
+static void
+resolve_wilds (void)
+{
+ LANG_FOR_EACH_INPUT_STATEMENT (f)
+ {
+ //printf("XXX %s\n", f->filename);
+ if (f->the_bfd == NULL
+ || !bfd_check_format (f->the_bfd, bfd_archive))
+ resolve_wild_sections (f);
+ else
+ {
+ bfd *member;
+
+ /* This is an archive file. We must map each member of the
+ archive separately. */
+ member = bfd_openr_next_archived_file (f->the_bfd, NULL);
+ while (member != NULL)
+ {
+ /* When lookup_name is called, it will call the add_symbols
+ entry point for the archive. For each element of the
+ archive which is included, BFD will call ldlang_add_file,
+ which will set the usrdata field of the member to the
+ lang_input_statement. */
+ if (bfd_usrdata (member) != NULL)
+ resolve_wild_sections (bfd_usrdata (member));
+
+ member = bfd_openr_next_archived_file (f->the_bfd, member);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/* For each input section that matches wild statement S calls
+ CALLBACK with DATA. */
+
+static void
+walk_wild (lang_wild_statement_type *s, callback_t callback, void *data)
+{
+ lang_statement_union_type *l;
+
+ for (l = s->matching_sections.head; l; l = l->header.next)
+ {
+ (*callback) (s, l->input_matcher.pattern, l->input_matcher.section,
+ l->input_matcher.input_stmt, data);
+ }
+}
+
+/* lang_for_each_statement walks the parse tree and calls the provided
+ function for each node, except those inside output section statements
+ with constraint set to -1. */
+
+void
+lang_for_each_statement_worker (void (*func) (lang_statement_union_type *),
+ lang_statement_union_type *s)
+{
+ for (; s != NULL; s = s->header.next)
+ {
+ func (s);
+
+ switch (s->header.type)
+ {
+ case lang_constructors_statement_enum:
+ lang_for_each_statement_worker (func, constructor_list.head);
+ break;
+ case lang_output_section_statement_enum:
+ if (s->output_section_statement.constraint != -1)
+ lang_for_each_statement_worker
+ (func, s->output_section_statement.children.head);
+ break;
+ case lang_wild_statement_enum:
+ lang_for_each_statement_worker (func,
+ s->wild_statement.children.head);
+ break;
+ case lang_group_statement_enum:
+ lang_for_each_statement_worker (func,
+ s->group_statement.children.head);
+ break;
+ case lang_data_statement_enum:
+ case lang_reloc_statement_enum:
+ case lang_object_symbols_statement_enum:
+ case lang_output_statement_enum:
+ case lang_target_statement_enum:
+ case lang_input_section_enum:
+ case lang_input_statement_enum:
+ case lang_assignment_statement_enum:
+ case lang_padding_statement_enum:
+ case lang_address_statement_enum:
+ case lang_fill_statement_enum:
+ case lang_insert_statement_enum:
+ break;
+ default:
+ FAIL ();
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+void
+lang_for_each_statement (void (*func) (lang_statement_union_type *))
+{
+ lang_for_each_statement_worker (func, statement_list.head);
+}
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+void
+lang_list_init (lang_statement_list_type *list)
+{
+ list->head = NULL;
+ list->tail = &list->head;
+}
+
+static void
+lang_statement_append (lang_statement_list_type *list,
+ void *element,
+ void *field)
+{
+ *(list->tail) = element;
+ list->tail = field;
+}
+
+void
+push_stat_ptr (lang_statement_list_type *new_ptr)
+{
+ if (stat_save_ptr >= stat_save + sizeof (stat_save) / sizeof (stat_save[0]))
+ abort ();
+ *stat_save_ptr++ = stat_ptr;
+ stat_ptr = new_ptr;
+}
+
+void
+pop_stat_ptr (void)
+{
+ if (stat_save_ptr <= stat_save)
+ abort ();
+ stat_ptr = *--stat_save_ptr;
+}
+
+/* Build a new statement node for the parse tree. */
+
+static lang_statement_union_type *
+new_statement (enum statement_enum type,
+ size_t size,
+ lang_statement_list_type *list)
+{
+ lang_statement_union_type *new_stmt;
+
+ new_stmt = stat_alloc (size);
+ new_stmt->header.type = type;
+ new_stmt->header.next = NULL;
+ lang_statement_append (list, new_stmt, &new_stmt->header.next);
+ return new_stmt;
+}
+
+/* Build a new input file node for the language. There are several
+ ways in which we treat an input file, eg, we only look at symbols,
+ or prefix it with a -l etc.
+
+ We can be supplied with requests for input files more than once;
+ they may, for example be split over several lines like foo.o(.text)
+ foo.o(.data) etc, so when asked for a file we check that we haven't
+ got it already so we don't duplicate the bfd. */
+
+static lang_input_statement_type *
+new_afile (const char *name,
+ lang_input_file_enum_type file_type,
+ const char *target,
+ const char *from_filename)
+{
+ lang_input_statement_type *p;
+
+ lang_has_input_file = true;
+
+ /* PR 30632: It is OK for name to be NULL. For example
+ see the initialization of first_file in lang_init(). */
+ if (name != NULL)
+ {
+ name = ldfile_possibly_remap_input (name);
+ /* But if a name is remapped to NULL, it should be ignored. */
+ if (name == NULL)
+ return NULL;
+ }
+
+ p = new_stat (lang_input_statement, stat_ptr);
+ memset (&p->the_bfd, 0,
+ sizeof (*p) - offsetof (lang_input_statement_type, the_bfd));
+ p->extra_search_path = NULL;
+ p->target = target;
+ p->flags.dynamic = input_flags.dynamic;
+ p->flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_dynamic = input_flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_dynamic;
+ p->flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_regular = input_flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_regular;
+ p->flags.whole_archive = input_flags.whole_archive;
+ p->flags.sysrooted = input_flags.sysrooted;
+ p->sort_key = NULL;
+
+ switch (file_type)
+ {
+ case lang_input_file_is_symbols_only_enum:
+ p->filename = name;
+ p->local_sym_name = name;
+ p->flags.real = true;
+ p->flags.just_syms = true;
+ break;
+ case lang_input_file_is_fake_enum:
+ p->filename = name;
+ p->local_sym_name = name;
+ break;
+ case lang_input_file_is_l_enum:
+ if (name[0] == ':' && name[1] != '\0')
+ {
+ p->filename = name + 1;
+ p->flags.full_name_provided = true;
+ }
+ else
+ p->filename = name;
+ p->local_sym_name = concat ("-l", name, (const char *) NULL);
+ p->flags.maybe_archive = true;
+ p->flags.real = true;
+ p->flags.search_dirs = true;
+ break;
+ case lang_input_file_is_marker_enum:
+ p->filename = name;
+ p->local_sym_name = name;
+ p->flags.search_dirs = true;
+ break;
+ case lang_input_file_is_search_file_enum:
+ p->filename = name;
+ p->local_sym_name = name;
+ /* If name is a relative path, search the directory of the current linker
+ script first. */
+ if (from_filename && !IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (name))
+ p->extra_search_path = ldirname (from_filename);
+ p->flags.real = true;
+ p->flags.search_dirs = true;
+ break;
+ case lang_input_file_is_file_enum:
+ p->filename = name;
+ p->local_sym_name = name;
+ p->flags.real = true;
+ break;
+ default:
+ FAIL ();
+ }
+
+ lang_statement_append (&input_file_chain, p, &p->next_real_file);
+ return p;
+}
+
+lang_input_statement_type *
+lang_add_input_file (const char *name,
+ lang_input_file_enum_type file_type,
+ const char *target)
+{
+ if (name != NULL
+ && (*name == '=' || startswith (name, "$SYSROOT")))
+ {
+ lang_input_statement_type *ret;
+ char *sysrooted_name
+ = concat (ld_sysroot,
+ name + (*name == '=' ? 1 : strlen ("$SYSROOT")),
+ (const char *) NULL);
+
+ /* We've now forcibly prepended the sysroot, making the input
+ file independent of the context. Therefore, temporarily
+ force a non-sysrooted context for this statement, so it won't
+ get the sysroot prepended again when opened. (N.B. if it's a
+ script, any child nodes with input files starting with "/"
+ will be handled as "sysrooted" as they'll be found to be
+ within the sysroot subdirectory.) */
+ unsigned int outer_sysrooted = input_flags.sysrooted;
+ input_flags.sysrooted = 0;
+ ret = new_afile (sysrooted_name, file_type, target, NULL);
+ input_flags.sysrooted = outer_sysrooted;
+ return ret;
+ }
+
+ return new_afile (name, file_type, target, current_input_file);
+}
+
+struct out_section_hash_entry
+{
+ struct bfd_hash_entry root;
+ lang_statement_union_type s;
+};
+
+/* The hash table. */
+
+static struct bfd_hash_table output_section_statement_table;
+
+/* Support routines for the hash table used by lang_output_section_find,
+ initialize the table, fill in an entry and remove the table. */
+
+static struct bfd_hash_entry *
+output_section_statement_newfunc (struct bfd_hash_entry *entry,
+ struct bfd_hash_table *table,
+ const char *string)
+{
+ lang_output_section_statement_type **nextp;
+ struct out_section_hash_entry *ret;
+
+ if (entry == NULL)
+ {
+ entry = (struct bfd_hash_entry *) bfd_hash_allocate (table,
+ sizeof (*ret));
+ if (entry == NULL)
+ return entry;
+ }
+
+ entry = bfd_hash_newfunc (entry, table, string);
+ if (entry == NULL)
+ return entry;
+
+ ret = (struct out_section_hash_entry *) entry;
+ memset (&ret->s, 0, sizeof (ret->s));
+ ret->s.header.type = lang_output_section_statement_enum;
+ ret->s.output_section_statement.subsection_alignment = NULL;
+ ret->s.output_section_statement.section_alignment = NULL;
+ ret->s.output_section_statement.block_value = 1;
+ lang_list_init (&ret->s.output_section_statement.children);
+ lang_statement_append (stat_ptr, &ret->s, &ret->s.header.next);
+
+ /* For every output section statement added to the list, except the
+ first one, lang_os_list.tail points to the "next"
+ field of the last element of the list. */
+ if (lang_os_list.head != NULL)
+ ret->s.output_section_statement.prev
+ = ((lang_output_section_statement_type *)
+ ((char *) lang_os_list.tail
+ - offsetof (lang_output_section_statement_type, next)));
+
+ /* GCC's strict aliasing rules prevent us from just casting the
+ address, so we store the pointer in a variable and cast that
+ instead. */
+ nextp = &ret->s.output_section_statement.next;
+ lang_statement_append (&lang_os_list, &ret->s, nextp);
+ return &ret->root;
+}
+
+static void
+output_section_statement_table_init (void)
+{
+ if (!bfd_hash_table_init_n (&output_section_statement_table,
+ output_section_statement_newfunc,
+ sizeof (struct out_section_hash_entry),
+ 61))
+ einfo (_("%F%P: can not create hash table: %E\n"));
+}
+
+static void
+output_section_statement_table_free (void)
+{
+ bfd_hash_table_free (&output_section_statement_table);
+}
+
+/* Build enough state so that the parser can build its tree. */
+
+void
+lang_init (void)
+{
+ obstack_begin (&stat_obstack, 1000);
+ obstack_init (&pt_obstack);
+
+ stat_ptr = &statement_list;
+
+ output_section_statement_table_init ();
+
+ lang_list_init (stat_ptr);
+
+ lang_list_init (&input_file_chain);
+ lang_list_init (&lang_os_list);
+ lang_list_init (&file_chain);
+ first_file = lang_add_input_file (NULL, lang_input_file_is_marker_enum,
+ NULL);
+ abs_output_section =
+ lang_output_section_statement_lookup (BFD_ABS_SECTION_NAME, 0, 1);
+
+ abs_output_section->bfd_section = bfd_abs_section_ptr;
+
+ asneeded_list_head = NULL;
+ asneeded_list_tail = &asneeded_list_head;
+}
+
+void
+lang_finish (void)
+{
+ output_section_statement_table_free ();
+ ldfile_remap_input_free ();
+}
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ A region is an area of memory declared with the
+ MEMORY { name:org=exp, len=exp ... }
+ syntax.
+
+ We maintain a list of all the regions here.
+
+ If no regions are specified in the script, then the default is used
+ which is created when looked up to be the entire data space.
+
+ If create is true we are creating a region inside a MEMORY block.
+ In this case it is probably an error to create a region that has
+ already been created. If we are not inside a MEMORY block it is
+ dubious to use an undeclared region name (except DEFAULT_MEMORY_REGION)
+ and so we issue a warning.
+
+ Each region has at least one name. The first name is either
+ DEFAULT_MEMORY_REGION or the name given in the MEMORY block. You can add
+ alias names to an existing region within a script with
+ REGION_ALIAS (alias, region_name). Each name corresponds to at most one
+ region. */
+
+static lang_memory_region_type *lang_memory_region_list;
+static lang_memory_region_type **lang_memory_region_list_tail
+ = &lang_memory_region_list;
+
+lang_memory_region_type *
+lang_memory_region_lookup (const char *const name, bool create)
+{
+ lang_memory_region_name *n;
+ lang_memory_region_type *r;
+ lang_memory_region_type *new_region;
+
+ /* NAME is NULL for LMA memspecs if no region was specified. */
+ if (name == NULL)
+ return NULL;
+
+ for (r = lang_memory_region_list; r != NULL; r = r->next)
+ for (n = &r->name_list; n != NULL; n = n->next)
+ if (strcmp (n->name, name) == 0)
+ {
+ if (create)
+ einfo (_("%P:%pS: warning: redeclaration of memory region `%s'\n"),
+ NULL, name);
+ return r;
+ }
+
+ if (!create && strcmp (name, DEFAULT_MEMORY_REGION))
+ einfo (_("%P:%pS: warning: memory region `%s' not declared\n"),
+ NULL, name);
+
+ new_region = stat_alloc (sizeof (lang_memory_region_type));
+
+ new_region->name_list.name = xstrdup (name);
+ new_region->name_list.next = NULL;
+ new_region->next = NULL;
+ new_region->origin_exp = NULL;
+ new_region->origin = 0;
+ new_region->length_exp = NULL;
+ new_region->length = ~(bfd_size_type) 0;
+ new_region->current = 0;
+ new_region->last_os = NULL;
+ new_region->flags = 0;
+ new_region->not_flags = 0;
+ new_region->had_full_message = false;
+
+ *lang_memory_region_list_tail = new_region;
+ lang_memory_region_list_tail = &new_region->next;
+
+ return new_region;
+}
+
+void
+lang_memory_region_alias (const char *alias, const char *region_name)
+{
+ lang_memory_region_name *n;
+ lang_memory_region_type *r;
+ lang_memory_region_type *region;
+
+ /* The default region must be unique. This ensures that it is not necessary
+ to iterate through the name list if someone wants the check if a region is
+ the default memory region. */
+ if (strcmp (region_name, DEFAULT_MEMORY_REGION) == 0
+ || strcmp (alias, DEFAULT_MEMORY_REGION) == 0)
+ einfo (_("%F%P:%pS: error: alias for default memory region\n"), NULL);
+
+ /* Look for the target region and check if the alias is not already
+ in use. */
+ region = NULL;
+ for (r = lang_memory_region_list; r != NULL; r = r->next)
+ for (n = &r->name_list; n != NULL; n = n->next)
+ {
+ if (region == NULL && strcmp (n->name, region_name) == 0)
+ region = r;
+ if (strcmp (n->name, alias) == 0)
+ einfo (_("%F%P:%pS: error: redefinition of memory region "
+ "alias `%s'\n"),
+ NULL, alias);
+ }
+
+ /* Check if the target region exists. */
+ if (region == NULL)
+ einfo (_("%F%P:%pS: error: memory region `%s' "
+ "for alias `%s' does not exist\n"),
+ NULL, region_name, alias);
+
+ /* Add alias to region name list. */
+ n = stat_alloc (sizeof (lang_memory_region_name));
+ n->name = xstrdup (alias);
+ n->next = region->name_list.next;
+ region->name_list.next = n;
+}
+
+static lang_memory_region_type *
+lang_memory_default (asection *section)
+{
+ lang_memory_region_type *p;
+
+ flagword sec_flags = section->flags;
+
+ /* Override SEC_DATA to mean a writable section. */
+ if ((sec_flags & (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_READONLY | SEC_CODE)) == SEC_ALLOC)
+ sec_flags |= SEC_DATA;
+
+ for (p = lang_memory_region_list; p != NULL; p = p->next)
+ {
+ if ((p->flags & sec_flags) != 0
+ && (p->not_flags & sec_flags) == 0)
+ {
+ return p;
+ }
+ }
+ return lang_memory_region_lookup (DEFAULT_MEMORY_REGION, false);
+}
+
+/* Get the output section statement directly from the userdata. */
+
+lang_output_section_statement_type *
+lang_output_section_get (const asection *output_section)
+{
+ return bfd_section_userdata (output_section);
+}
+
+/* Find or create an output_section_statement with the given NAME.
+ If CONSTRAINT is non-zero match one with that constraint, otherwise
+ match any non-negative constraint. If CREATE is 0 return NULL when
+ no match exists. If CREATE is 1, create an output_section_statement
+ when no match exists or if CONSTRAINT is SPECIAL. If CREATE is 2,
+ always make a new output_section_statement. */
+
+lang_output_section_statement_type *
+lang_output_section_statement_lookup (const char *name,
+ int constraint,
+ int create)
+{
+ struct out_section_hash_entry *entry;
+
+ entry = ((struct out_section_hash_entry *)
+ bfd_hash_lookup (&output_section_statement_table, name,
+ create != 0, false));
+ if (entry == NULL)
+ {
+ if (create)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: failed creating section `%s': %E\n"), name);
+ return NULL;
+ }
+
+ if (entry->s.output_section_statement.name != NULL)
+ {
+ /* We have a section of this name, but it might not have the correct
+ constraint. */
+ struct out_section_hash_entry *last_ent;
+
+ name = entry->s.output_section_statement.name;
+ do
+ {
+ if (create != 2
+ && !(create && constraint == SPECIAL)
+ && (constraint == entry->s.output_section_statement.constraint
+ || (constraint == 0
+ && entry->s.output_section_statement.constraint >= 0)))
+ return &entry->s.output_section_statement;
+ last_ent = entry;
+ entry = (struct out_section_hash_entry *) entry->root.next;
+ }
+ while (entry != NULL
+ && name == entry->s.output_section_statement.name);
+
+ if (!create)
+ return NULL;
+
+ entry
+ = ((struct out_section_hash_entry *)
+ output_section_statement_newfunc (NULL,
+ &output_section_statement_table,
+ name));
+ if (entry == NULL)
+ {
+ einfo (_("%F%P: failed creating section `%s': %E\n"), name);
+ return NULL;
+ }
+ entry->root = last_ent->root;
+ last_ent->root.next = &entry->root;
+ }
+
+ entry->s.output_section_statement.name = name;
+ entry->s.output_section_statement.constraint = constraint;
+ entry->s.output_section_statement.dup_output = (create == 2
+ || constraint == SPECIAL);
+ return &entry->s.output_section_statement;
+}
+
+/* Find the next output_section_statement with the same name as OS.
+ If CONSTRAINT is non-zero, find one with that constraint otherwise
+ match any non-negative constraint. */
+
+lang_output_section_statement_type *
+next_matching_output_section_statement (lang_output_section_statement_type *os,
+ int constraint)
+{
+ /* All output_section_statements are actually part of a
+ struct out_section_hash_entry. */
+ struct out_section_hash_entry *entry = (struct out_section_hash_entry *)
+ ((char *) os
+ - offsetof (struct out_section_hash_entry, s.output_section_statement));
+ const char *name = os->name;
+
+ ASSERT (name == entry->root.string);
+ do
+ {
+ entry = (struct out_section_hash_entry *) entry->root.next;
+ if (entry == NULL
+ || name != entry->s.output_section_statement.name)
+ return NULL;
+ }
+ while (constraint != entry->s.output_section_statement.constraint
+ && (constraint != 0
+ || entry->s.output_section_statement.constraint < 0));
+
+ return &entry->s.output_section_statement;
+}
+
+/* A variant of lang_output_section_find used by place_orphan.
+ Returns the output statement that should precede a new output
+ statement for SEC. If an exact match is found on certain flags,
+ sets *EXACT too. */
+
+lang_output_section_statement_type *
+lang_output_section_find_by_flags (const asection *sec,
+ flagword sec_flags,
+ lang_output_section_statement_type **exact,
+ lang_match_sec_type_func match_type)
+{
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *first, *look, *found;
+ flagword look_flags, differ;
+
+ /* We know the first statement on this list is *ABS*. May as well
+ skip it. */
+ first = (void *) lang_os_list.head;
+ first = first->next;
+
+ /* First try for an exact match. */
+ found = NULL;
+ for (look = first; look; look = look->next)
+ {
+ look_flags = look->flags;
+ if (look->bfd_section != NULL)
+ {
+ look_flags = look->bfd_section->flags;
+ if (match_type && !match_type (link_info.output_bfd,
+ look->bfd_section,
+ sec->owner, sec))
+ continue;
+ }
+ differ = look_flags ^ sec_flags;
+ if (!(differ & (SEC_HAS_CONTENTS | SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD | SEC_READONLY
+ | SEC_CODE | SEC_SMALL_DATA | SEC_THREAD_LOCAL)))
+ found = look;
+ }
+ if (found != NULL)
+ {
+ if (exact != NULL)
+ *exact = found;
+ return found;
+ }
+
+ if ((sec_flags & SEC_CODE) != 0
+ && (sec_flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0)
+ {
+ /* Try for a rw code section. */
+ for (look = first; look; look = look->next)
+ {
+ look_flags = look->flags;
+ if (look->bfd_section != NULL)
+ {
+ look_flags = look->bfd_section->flags;
+ if (match_type && !match_type (link_info.output_bfd,
+ look->bfd_section,
+ sec->owner, sec))
+ continue;
+ }
+ differ = look_flags ^ sec_flags;
+ if (!(differ & (SEC_HAS_CONTENTS | SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD
+ | SEC_CODE | SEC_SMALL_DATA | SEC_THREAD_LOCAL)))
+ found = look;
+ }
+ }
+ else if ((sec_flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0
+ && (sec_flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0)
+ {
+ /* .rodata can go after .text, .sdata2 after .rodata. */
+ for (look = first; look; look = look->next)
+ {
+ look_flags = look->flags;
+ if (look->bfd_section != NULL)
+ {
+ look_flags = look->bfd_section->flags;
+ if (match_type && !match_type (link_info.output_bfd,
+ look->bfd_section,
+ sec->owner, sec))
+ continue;
+ }
+ differ = look_flags ^ sec_flags;
+ if (!(differ & (SEC_HAS_CONTENTS | SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD
+ | SEC_READONLY | SEC_SMALL_DATA))
+ || (!(differ & (SEC_HAS_CONTENTS | SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD
+ | SEC_READONLY))
+ && !(look_flags & SEC_SMALL_DATA)))
+ found = look;
+ }
+ }
+ else if ((sec_flags & SEC_THREAD_LOCAL) != 0
+ && (sec_flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0)
+ {
+ /* .tdata can go after .data, .tbss after .tdata. Treat .tbss
+ as if it were a loaded section, and don't use match_type. */
+ bool seen_thread_local = false;
+
+ match_type = NULL;
+ for (look = first; look; look = look->next)
+ {
+ look_flags = look->flags;
+ if (look->bfd_section != NULL)
+ look_flags = look->bfd_section->flags;
+
+ differ = look_flags ^ (sec_flags | SEC_LOAD | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS);
+ if (!(differ & (SEC_THREAD_LOCAL | SEC_ALLOC)))
+ {
+ /* .tdata and .tbss must be adjacent and in that order. */
+ if (!(look_flags & SEC_LOAD)
+ && (sec_flags & SEC_LOAD))
+ /* ..so if we're at a .tbss section and we're placing
+ a .tdata section stop looking and return the
+ previous section. */
+ break;
+ found = look;
+ seen_thread_local = true;
+ }
+ else if (seen_thread_local)
+ break;
+ else if (!(differ & (SEC_HAS_CONTENTS | SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD)))
+ found = look;
+ }
+ }
+ else if ((sec_flags & SEC_SMALL_DATA) != 0
+ && (sec_flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0)
+ {
+ /* .sdata goes after .data, .sbss after .sdata. */
+ for (look = first; look; look = look->next)
+ {
+ look_flags = look->flags;
+ if (look->bfd_section != NULL)
+ {
+ look_flags = look->bfd_section->flags;
+ if (match_type && !match_type (link_info.output_bfd,
+ look->bfd_section,
+ sec->owner, sec))
+ continue;
+ }
+ differ = look_flags ^ sec_flags;
+ if (!(differ & (SEC_HAS_CONTENTS | SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD
+ | SEC_THREAD_LOCAL))
+ || ((look_flags & SEC_SMALL_DATA)
+ && !(sec_flags & SEC_HAS_CONTENTS)))
+ found = look;
+ }
+ }
+ else if ((sec_flags & SEC_HAS_CONTENTS) != 0
+ && (sec_flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0)
+ {
+ /* .data goes after .rodata. */
+ for (look = first; look; look = look->next)
+ {
+ look_flags = look->flags;
+ if (look->bfd_section != NULL)
+ {
+ look_flags = look->bfd_section->flags;
+ if (match_type && !match_type (link_info.output_bfd,
+ look->bfd_section,
+ sec->owner, sec))
+ continue;
+ }
+ differ = look_flags ^ sec_flags;
+ if (!(differ & (SEC_HAS_CONTENTS | SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD
+ | SEC_SMALL_DATA | SEC_THREAD_LOCAL)))
+ found = look;
+ }
+ }
+ else if ((sec_flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0)
+ {
+ /* .bss goes after any other alloc section. */
+ for (look = first; look; look = look->next)
+ {
+ look_flags = look->flags;
+ if (look->bfd_section != NULL)
+ {
+ look_flags = look->bfd_section->flags;
+ if (match_type && !match_type (link_info.output_bfd,
+ look->bfd_section,
+ sec->owner, sec))
+ continue;
+ }
+ differ = look_flags ^ sec_flags;
+ if (!(differ & SEC_ALLOC))
+ found = look;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* non-alloc go last. */
+ for (look = first; look; look = look->next)
+ {
+ look_flags = look->flags;
+ if (look->bfd_section != NULL)
+ look_flags = look->bfd_section->flags;
+ differ = look_flags ^ sec_flags;
+ if (!(differ & SEC_DEBUGGING))
+ found = look;
+ }
+ return found;
+ }
+
+ if (found || !match_type)
+ return found;
+
+ return lang_output_section_find_by_flags (sec, sec_flags, NULL, NULL);
+}
+
+/* Find the last output section before given output statement.
+ Used by place_orphan. */
+
+static asection *
+output_prev_sec_find (lang_output_section_statement_type *os)
+{
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *lookup;
+
+ for (lookup = os->prev; lookup != NULL; lookup = lookup->prev)
+ {
+ if (lookup->constraint < 0)
+ continue;
+
+ if (lookup->bfd_section != NULL)
+ return lookup->bfd_section;
+ }
+
+ return NULL;
+}
+
+/* Look for a suitable place for a new output section statement. The
+ idea is to skip over anything that might be inside a SECTIONS {}
+ statement in a script, before we find another output section
+ statement. Assignments to "dot" before an output section statement
+ are assumed to belong to it, except in two cases; The first
+ assignment to dot, and assignments before non-alloc sections.
+ Otherwise we might put an orphan before . = . + SIZEOF_HEADERS or
+ similar assignments that set the initial address, or we might
+ insert non-alloc note sections among assignments setting end of
+ image symbols. */
+
+static lang_statement_union_type **
+insert_os_after (lang_statement_union_type *after)
+{
+ lang_statement_union_type **where;
+ lang_statement_union_type **assign = NULL;
+ bool ignore_first;
+
+ ignore_first = after == lang_os_list.head;
+
+ for (where = &after->header.next;
+ *where != NULL;
+ where = &(*where)->header.next)
+ {
+ switch ((*where)->header.type)
+ {
+ case lang_assignment_statement_enum:
+ if (assign == NULL)
+ {
+ lang_assignment_statement_type *ass;
+
+ ass = &(*where)->assignment_statement;
+ if (ass->exp->type.node_class != etree_assert
+ && ass->exp->assign.dst[0] == '.'
+ && ass->exp->assign.dst[1] == 0)
+ {
+ if (!ignore_first)
+ assign = where;
+ ignore_first = false;
+ }
+ }
+ continue;
+ case lang_wild_statement_enum:
+ case lang_input_section_enum:
+ case lang_object_symbols_statement_enum:
+ case lang_fill_statement_enum:
+ case lang_data_statement_enum:
+ case lang_reloc_statement_enum:
+ case lang_padding_statement_enum:
+ case lang_constructors_statement_enum:
+ assign = NULL;
+ ignore_first = false;
+ continue;
+ case lang_output_section_statement_enum:
+ if (assign != NULL)
+ {
+ asection *s = (*where)->output_section_statement.bfd_section;
+
+ if (s == NULL
+ || s->map_head.s == NULL
+ || (s->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0)
+ where = assign;
+ }
+ break;
+ case lang_input_statement_enum:
+ case lang_address_statement_enum:
+ case lang_target_statement_enum:
+ case lang_output_statement_enum:
+ case lang_group_statement_enum:
+ case lang_insert_statement_enum:
+ continue;
+ case lang_input_matcher_enum:
+ FAIL ();
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+
+ return where;
+}
+
+lang_output_section_statement_type *
+lang_insert_orphan (asection *s,
+ const char *secname,
+ int constraint,
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *after,
+ struct orphan_save *place,
+ etree_type *address,
+ lang_statement_list_type *add_child)
+{
+ lang_statement_list_type add;
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os;
+ lang_output_section_statement_type **os_tail;
+
+ /* If we have found an appropriate place for the output section
+ statements for this orphan, add them to our own private list,
+ inserting them later into the global statement list. */
+ if (after != NULL)
+ {
+ lang_list_init (&add);
+ push_stat_ptr (&add);
+ }
+
+ if (bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info)
+ || (s->flags & (SEC_LOAD | SEC_ALLOC)) == 0)
+ address = exp_intop (0);
+
+ os_tail = (lang_output_section_statement_type **) lang_os_list.tail;
+ os = lang_enter_output_section_statement (
+ secname, address, normal_section, 0, NULL, NULL, NULL, constraint, 0);
+
+ if (add_child == NULL)
+ add_child = &os->children;
+ lang_add_section (add_child, s, NULL, NULL, os);
+
+ if (after && (s->flags & (SEC_LOAD | SEC_ALLOC)) != 0)
+ {
+ const char *region = (after->region
+ ? after->region->name_list.name
+ : DEFAULT_MEMORY_REGION);
+ const char *lma_region = (after->lma_region
+ ? after->lma_region->name_list.name
+ : NULL);
+ lang_leave_output_section_statement (NULL, region, after->phdrs,
+ lma_region);
+ }
+ else
+ lang_leave_output_section_statement (NULL, DEFAULT_MEMORY_REGION, NULL,
+ NULL);
+
+ /* Restore the global list pointer. */
+ if (after != NULL)
+ pop_stat_ptr ();
+
+ if (after != NULL && os->bfd_section != NULL)
+ {
+ asection *snew, *as;
+ bool place_after = place->stmt == NULL;
+ bool insert_after = true;
+
+ snew = os->bfd_section;
+
+ /* Shuffle the bfd section list to make the output file look
+ neater. This is really only cosmetic. */
+ if (place->section == NULL
+ && after != (void *) lang_os_list.head)
+ {
+ asection *bfd_section = after->bfd_section;
+
+ /* If the output statement hasn't been used to place any input
+ sections (and thus doesn't have an output bfd_section),
+ look for the closest prior output statement having an
+ output section. */
+ if (bfd_section == NULL)
+ bfd_section = output_prev_sec_find (after);
+
+ if (bfd_section != NULL
+ && bfd_section->owner != NULL
+ && bfd_section != snew)
+ place->section = &bfd_section->next;
+ }
+
+ if (place->section == NULL)
+ place->section = &link_info.output_bfd->sections;
+
+ as = *place->section;
+
+ if (!as)
+ {
+ /* Put the section at the end of the list. */
+
+ /* Unlink the section. */
+ bfd_section_list_remove (link_info.output_bfd, snew);
+
+ /* Now tack it back on in the right place. */
+ bfd_section_list_append (link_info.output_bfd, snew);
+ }
+ else if ((bfd_get_flavour (link_info.output_bfd)
+ == bfd_target_elf_flavour)
+ && (bfd_get_flavour (s->owner)
+ == bfd_target_elf_flavour)
+ && ((elf_section_type (s) == SHT_NOTE
+ && (s->flags & SEC_LOAD) != 0)
+ || (elf_section_type (as) == SHT_NOTE
+ && (as->flags & SEC_LOAD) != 0)))
+ {
+ /* Make sure that output note sections are grouped and sorted
+ by alignments when inserting a note section or insert a
+ section after a note section, */
+ asection *sec;
+ /* A specific section after which the output note section
+ should be placed. */
+ asection *after_sec;
+ /* True if we need to insert the orphan section after a
+ specific section to maintain output note section order. */
+ bool after_sec_note = false;
+
+ static asection *first_orphan_note = NULL;
+
+ /* Group and sort output note section by alignments in
+ ascending order. */
+ after_sec = NULL;
+ if (elf_section_type (s) == SHT_NOTE
+ && (s->flags & SEC_LOAD) != 0)
+ {
+ /* Search from the beginning for the last output note
+ section with equal or larger alignments. NB: Don't
+ place orphan note section after non-note sections. */
+
+ first_orphan_note = NULL;
+ for (sec = link_info.output_bfd->sections;
+ (sec != NULL
+ && !bfd_is_abs_section (sec));
+ sec = sec->next)
+ if (sec != snew
+ && elf_section_type (sec) == SHT_NOTE
+ && (sec->flags & SEC_LOAD) != 0)
+ {
+ if (!first_orphan_note)
+ first_orphan_note = sec;
+ if (sec->alignment_power >= s->alignment_power)
+ after_sec = sec;
+ }
+ else if (first_orphan_note)
+ {
+ /* Stop if there is non-note section after the first
+ orphan note section. */
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* If this will be the first orphan note section, it can
+ be placed at the default location. */
+ after_sec_note = first_orphan_note != NULL;
+ if (after_sec == NULL && after_sec_note)
+ {
+ /* If all output note sections have smaller
+ alignments, place the section before all
+ output orphan note sections. */
+ after_sec = first_orphan_note;
+ insert_after = false;
+ }
+ }
+ else if (first_orphan_note)
+ {
+ /* Don't place non-note sections in the middle of orphan
+ note sections. */
+ after_sec_note = true;
+ after_sec = as;
+ for (sec = as->next;
+ (sec != NULL
+ && !bfd_is_abs_section (sec));
+ sec = sec->next)
+ if (elf_section_type (sec) == SHT_NOTE
+ && (sec->flags & SEC_LOAD) != 0)
+ after_sec = sec;
+ }
+
+ if (after_sec_note)
+ {
+ if (after_sec)
+ {
+ /* Search forward to insert OS after AFTER_SEC output
+ statement. */
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *stmt, *next;
+ bool found = false;
+ for (stmt = after; stmt != NULL; stmt = next)
+ {
+ next = stmt->next;
+ if (insert_after)
+ {
+ if (stmt->bfd_section == after_sec)
+ {
+ place_after = true;
+ found = true;
+ after = stmt;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* If INSERT_AFTER is FALSE, place OS before
+ AFTER_SEC output statement. */
+ if (next && next->bfd_section == after_sec)
+ {
+ place_after = true;
+ found = true;
+ after = stmt;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Search backward to insert OS after AFTER_SEC output
+ statement. */
+ if (!found)
+ for (stmt = after; stmt != NULL; stmt = stmt->prev)
+ {
+ if (insert_after)
+ {
+ if (stmt->bfd_section == after_sec)
+ {
+ place_after = true;
+ after = stmt;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* If INSERT_AFTER is FALSE, place OS before
+ AFTER_SEC output statement. */
+ if (stmt->next->bfd_section == after_sec)
+ {
+ place_after = true;
+ after = stmt;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ if (after_sec == NULL
+ || (insert_after && after_sec->next != snew)
+ || (!insert_after && after_sec->prev != snew))
+ {
+ /* Unlink the section. */
+ bfd_section_list_remove (link_info.output_bfd, snew);
+
+ /* Place SNEW after AFTER_SEC. If AFTER_SEC is NULL,
+ prepend SNEW. */
+ if (after_sec)
+ {
+ if (insert_after)
+ bfd_section_list_insert_after (link_info.output_bfd,
+ after_sec, snew);
+ else
+ bfd_section_list_insert_before (link_info.output_bfd,
+ after_sec, snew);
+ }
+ else
+ bfd_section_list_prepend (link_info.output_bfd, snew);
+ }
+ }
+ else if (as != snew && as->prev != snew)
+ {
+ /* Unlink the section. */
+ bfd_section_list_remove (link_info.output_bfd, snew);
+
+ /* Now tack it back on in the right place. */
+ bfd_section_list_insert_before (link_info.output_bfd,
+ as, snew);
+ }
+ }
+ else if (as != snew && as->prev != snew)
+ {
+ /* Unlink the section. */
+ bfd_section_list_remove (link_info.output_bfd, snew);
+
+ /* Now tack it back on in the right place. */
+ bfd_section_list_insert_before (link_info.output_bfd, as, snew);
+ }
+
+ /* Save the end of this list. Further ophans of this type will
+ follow the one we've just added. */
+ place->section = &snew->next;
+
+ /* The following is non-cosmetic. We try to put the output
+ statements in some sort of reasonable order here, because they
+ determine the final load addresses of the orphan sections.
+ In addition, placing output statements in the wrong order may
+ require extra segments. For instance, given a typical
+ situation of all read-only sections placed in one segment and
+ following that a segment containing all the read-write
+ sections, we wouldn't want to place an orphan read/write
+ section before or amongst the read-only ones. */
+ if (add.head != NULL)
+ {
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *newly_added_os;
+
+ /* Place OS after AFTER if AFTER_NOTE is TRUE. */
+ if (place_after)
+ {
+ lang_statement_union_type **where;
+
+ where = insert_os_after ((lang_statement_union_type *) after);
+ *add.tail = *where;
+ *where = add.head;
+
+ place->os_tail = &after->next;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Put it after the last orphan statement we added. */
+ *add.tail = *place->stmt;
+ *place->stmt = add.head;
+ }
+
+ /* Fix the global list pointer if we happened to tack our
+ new list at the tail. */
+ if (*stat_ptr->tail == add.head)
+ stat_ptr->tail = add.tail;
+
+ /* Save the end of this list. */
+ place->stmt = add.tail;
+
+ /* Do the same for the list of output section statements. */
+ newly_added_os = *os_tail;
+ *os_tail = NULL;
+ newly_added_os->prev = (lang_output_section_statement_type *)
+ ((char *) place->os_tail
+ - offsetof (lang_output_section_statement_type, next));
+ newly_added_os->next = *place->os_tail;
+ if (newly_added_os->next != NULL)
+ newly_added_os->next->prev = newly_added_os;
+ *place->os_tail = newly_added_os;
+ place->os_tail = &newly_added_os->next;
+
+ /* Fixing the global list pointer here is a little different.
+ We added to the list in lang_enter_output_section_statement,
+ trimmed off the new output_section_statment above when
+ assigning *os_tail = NULL, but possibly added it back in
+ the same place when assigning *place->os_tail. */
+ if (*os_tail == NULL)
+ lang_os_list.tail = (lang_statement_union_type **) os_tail;
+ }
+ }
+ return os;
+}
+
+static void
+lang_print_asneeded (void)
+{
+ struct asneeded_minfo *m;
+
+ if (asneeded_list_head == NULL)
+ return;
+
+ minfo (_("\nAs-needed library included to satisfy reference by file (symbol)\n\n"));
+
+ for (m = asneeded_list_head; m != NULL; m = m->next)
+ {
+ int len;
+
+ minfo ("%s", m->soname);
+ len = strlen (m->soname);
+
+ if (len >= 29)
+ {
+ print_nl ();
+ len = 0;
+ }
+ print_spaces (30 - len);
+
+ if (m->ref != NULL)
+ minfo ("%pB ", m->ref);
+ minfo ("(%pT)\n", m->name);
+ }
+}
+
+static void
+lang_map_flags (flagword flag)
+{
+ if (flag & SEC_ALLOC)
+ minfo ("a");
+
+ if (flag & SEC_CODE)
+ minfo ("x");
+
+ if (flag & SEC_READONLY)
+ minfo ("r");
+
+ if (flag & SEC_DATA)
+ minfo ("w");
+
+ if (flag & SEC_LOAD)
+ minfo ("l");
+}
+
+void
+lang_map (void)
+{
+ lang_memory_region_type *m;
+ bool dis_header_printed = false;
+
+ ldfile_print_input_remaps ();
+
+ LANG_FOR_EACH_INPUT_STATEMENT (file)
+ {
+ asection *s;
+
+ if ((file->the_bfd->flags & (BFD_LINKER_CREATED | DYNAMIC)) != 0
+ || file->flags.just_syms)
+ continue;
+
+ if (config.print_map_discarded)
+ for (s = file->the_bfd->sections; s != NULL; s = s->next)
+ if ((s->output_section == NULL
+ || s->output_section->owner != link_info.output_bfd)
+ && (s->flags & (SEC_LINKER_CREATED | SEC_KEEP)) == 0)
+ {
+ if (! dis_header_printed)
+ {
+ minfo (_("\nDiscarded input sections\n\n"));
+ dis_header_printed = true;
+ }
+
+ print_input_section (s, true);
+ }
+ }
+ if (config.print_map_discarded && ! dis_header_printed)
+ minfo (_("\nThere are no discarded input sections\n"));
+
+ minfo (_("\nMemory Configuration\n\n"));
+ fprintf (config.map_file, "%-16s %-18s %-18s %s\n",
+ _("Name"), _("Origin"), _("Length"), _("Attributes"));
+
+ for (m = lang_memory_region_list; m != NULL; m = m->next)
+ {
+ fprintf (config.map_file, "%-16s", m->name_list.name);
+
+ char buf[32];
+ bfd_sprintf_vma (link_info.output_bfd, buf, m->origin);
+ fprintf (config.map_file, " 0x%-16s", buf);
+ bfd_sprintf_vma (link_info.output_bfd, buf, m->length);
+ fprintf (config.map_file,
+ " 0x%*s", m->flags || m->not_flags ? -17 : 0, buf);
+ if (m->flags)
+ lang_map_flags (m->flags);
+
+ if (m->not_flags)
+ {
+ minfo ("!");
+ lang_map_flags (m->not_flags);
+ }
+
+ print_nl ();
+ }
+
+ minfo (_("\nLinker script and memory map\n\n"));
+
+ if (!link_info.reduce_memory_overheads)
+ {
+ obstack_begin (&map_obstack, 1000);
+ bfd_link_hash_traverse (link_info.hash, sort_def_symbol, 0);
+ }
+ expld.phase = lang_fixed_phase_enum;
+ lang_statement_iteration++;
+ print_statements ();
+
+ ldemul_extra_map_file_text (link_info.output_bfd, &link_info,
+ config.map_file);
+}
+
+static bool
+sort_def_symbol (struct bfd_link_hash_entry *hash_entry,
+ void *info ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
+{
+ if ((hash_entry->type == bfd_link_hash_defined
+ || hash_entry->type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)
+ && hash_entry->u.def.section->owner != link_info.output_bfd
+ && hash_entry->u.def.section->owner != NULL)
+ {
+ input_section_userdata_type *ud;
+ struct map_symbol_def *def;
+
+ ud = bfd_section_userdata (hash_entry->u.def.section);
+ if (!ud)
+ {
+ ud = stat_alloc (sizeof (*ud));
+ bfd_set_section_userdata (hash_entry->u.def.section, ud);
+ ud->map_symbol_def_tail = &ud->map_symbol_def_head;
+ ud->map_symbol_def_count = 0;
+ }
+ else if (!ud->map_symbol_def_tail)
+ ud->map_symbol_def_tail = &ud->map_symbol_def_head;
+
+ def = (struct map_symbol_def *) obstack_alloc (&map_obstack, sizeof *def);
+ def->entry = hash_entry;
+ *(ud->map_symbol_def_tail) = def;
+ ud->map_symbol_def_tail = &def->next;
+ ud->map_symbol_def_count++;
+ }
+ return true;
+}
+
+/* Initialize an output section. */
+
+static void
+init_os (lang_output_section_statement_type *s, flagword flags)
+{
+ if (strcmp (s->name, DISCARD_SECTION_NAME) == 0)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: illegal use of `%s' section\n"), DISCARD_SECTION_NAME);
+
+ if (!s->dup_output)
+ s->bfd_section = bfd_get_section_by_name (link_info.output_bfd, s->name);
+ if (s->bfd_section == NULL)
+ s->bfd_section = bfd_make_section_anyway_with_flags (link_info.output_bfd,
+ s->name, flags);
+ if (s->bfd_section == NULL)
+ {
+ einfo (_("%F%P: output format %s cannot represent section"
+ " called %s: %E\n"),
+ link_info.output_bfd->xvec->name, s->name);
+ }
+ s->bfd_section->output_section = s->bfd_section;
+ s->bfd_section->output_offset = 0;
+
+ /* Set the userdata of the output section to the output section
+ statement to avoid lookup. */
+ bfd_set_section_userdata (s->bfd_section, s);
+
+ /* If there is a base address, make sure that any sections it might
+ mention are initialized. */
+ if (s->addr_tree != NULL)
+ exp_init_os (s->addr_tree);
+
+ if (s->load_base != NULL)
+ exp_init_os (s->load_base);
+
+ /* If supplied an alignment, set it. */
+ if (s->section_alignment != NULL)
+ s->bfd_section->alignment_power = exp_get_power (s->section_alignment,
+ "section alignment");
+}
+
+/* Make sure that all output sections mentioned in an expression are
+ initialized. */
+
+static void
+exp_init_os (etree_type *exp)
+{
+ switch (exp->type.node_class)
+ {
+ case etree_assign:
+ case etree_provide:
+ case etree_provided:
+ exp_init_os (exp->assign.src);
+ break;
+
+ case etree_binary:
+ exp_init_os (exp->binary.lhs);
+ exp_init_os (exp->binary.rhs);
+ break;
+
+ case etree_trinary:
+ exp_init_os (exp->trinary.cond);
+ exp_init_os (exp->trinary.lhs);
+ exp_init_os (exp->trinary.rhs);
+ break;
+
+ case etree_assert:
+ exp_init_os (exp->assert_s.child);
+ break;
+
+ case etree_unary:
+ exp_init_os (exp->unary.child);
+ break;
+
+ case etree_name:
+ switch (exp->type.node_code)
+ {
+ case ADDR:
+ case LOADADDR:
+ {
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os;
+
+ os = lang_output_section_find (exp->name.name);
+ if (os != NULL && os->bfd_section == NULL)
+ init_os (os, 0);
+ }
+ }
+ break;
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+static void
+section_already_linked (bfd *abfd, asection *sec, void *data)
+{
+ lang_input_statement_type *entry = (lang_input_statement_type *) data;
+
+ /* If we are only reading symbols from this object, then we want to
+ discard all sections. */
+ if (entry->flags.just_syms)
+ {
+ bfd_link_just_syms (abfd, sec, &link_info);
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /* Deal with SHF_EXCLUDE ELF sections. */
+ if (!bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info)
+ && (abfd->flags & BFD_PLUGIN) == 0
+ && (sec->flags & (SEC_GROUP | SEC_KEEP | SEC_EXCLUDE)) == SEC_EXCLUDE)
+ sec->output_section = bfd_abs_section_ptr;
+
+ if (!(abfd->flags & DYNAMIC))
+ bfd_section_already_linked (abfd, sec, &link_info);
+}
+
+
+/* Returns true if SECTION is one we know will be discarded based on its
+ section flags, otherwise returns false. */
+
+static bool
+lang_discard_section_p (asection *section)
+{
+ bool discard;
+ flagword flags = section->flags;
+
+ /* Discard sections marked with SEC_EXCLUDE. */
+ discard = (flags & SEC_EXCLUDE) != 0;
+
+ /* Discard the group descriptor sections when we're finally placing the
+ sections from within the group. */
+ if ((flags & SEC_GROUP) != 0
+ && link_info.resolve_section_groups)
+ discard = true;
+
+ /* Discard debugging sections if we are stripping debugging
+ information. */
+ if ((link_info.strip == strip_debugger || link_info.strip == strip_all)
+ && (flags & SEC_DEBUGGING) != 0)
+ discard = true;
+
+ /* Discard non-alloc sections if we are stripping section headers. */
+ else if (config.no_section_header && (flags & SEC_ALLOC) == 0)
+ discard = true;
+
+ return discard;
+}
+
+/* Return TRUE if SECTION is never going to be added to output statement
+ OUTPUT. lang_add_section() definitely won't do anything with SECTION
+ if this returns TRUE. It may do something (or not) if this returns FALSE.
+
+ Can be used as early-out to filter matches. This may set
+ output_section of SECTION, if it was unset, to the abs section in case
+ we discover SECTION to be always discarded. This may also give
+ warning messages. */
+
+static bool
+wont_add_section_p (asection *section,
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *output)
+{
+ bool discard;
+
+ /* Is this section one we know should be discarded? */
+ discard = lang_discard_section_p (section);
+
+ /* Discard input sections which are assigned to a section named
+ DISCARD_SECTION_NAME. */
+ if (strcmp (output->name, DISCARD_SECTION_NAME) == 0)
+ discard = true;
+
+ if (discard)
+ {
+ if (section->output_section == NULL)
+ {
+ /* This prevents future calls from assigning this section or
+ warning about it again. */
+ section->output_section = bfd_abs_section_ptr;
+ }
+ else if (bfd_is_abs_section (section->output_section))
+ ;
+ else if (link_info.non_contiguous_regions_warnings)
+ einfo (_("%P:%pS: warning: --enable-non-contiguous-regions makes "
+ "section `%pA' from `%pB' match /DISCARD/ clause.\n"),
+ NULL, section, section->owner);
+
+ return true;
+ }
+
+ if (section->output_section != NULL)
+ {
+ if (!link_info.non_contiguous_regions)
+ return true;
+
+ /* SECTION has already been handled in a special way
+ (eg. LINK_ONCE): skip it. */
+ if (bfd_is_abs_section (section->output_section))
+ return true;
+
+ /* Already assigned to the same output section, do not process
+ it again, to avoid creating loops between duplicate sections
+ later. */
+ if (section->output_section == output->bfd_section)
+ return true;
+
+ if (link_info.non_contiguous_regions_warnings && output->bfd_section)
+ einfo (_("%P:%pS: warning: --enable-non-contiguous-regions may "
+ "change behaviour for section `%pA' from `%pB' (assigned to "
+ "%pA, but additional match: %pA)\n"),
+ NULL, section, section->owner, section->output_section,
+ output->bfd_section);
+
+ /* SECTION has already been assigned to an output section, but
+ the user allows it to be mapped to another one in case it
+ overflows. We'll later update the actual output section in
+ size_input_section as appropriate. */
+ }
+
+ return false;
+}
+
+/* The wild routines.
+
+ These expand statements like *(.text) and foo.o to a list of
+ explicit actions, like foo.o(.text), bar.o(.text) and
+ foo.o(.text, .data). */
+
+/* Add SECTION to the output section OUTPUT. Do this by creating a
+ lang_input_section statement which is placed at PTR. */
+
+void
+lang_add_section (lang_statement_list_type *ptr,
+ asection *section,
+ struct wildcard_list *pattern,
+ struct flag_info *sflag_info,
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *output)
+{
+ flagword flags = section->flags;
+
+ lang_input_section_type *new_section;
+ bfd *abfd = link_info.output_bfd;
+
+ if (wont_add_section_p (section, output))
+ return;
+
+ if (sflag_info)
+ {
+ bool keep;
+
+ keep = bfd_lookup_section_flags (&link_info, sflag_info, section);
+ if (!keep)
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /* We don't copy the SEC_NEVER_LOAD flag from an input section
+ to an output section, because we want to be able to include a
+ SEC_NEVER_LOAD section in the middle of an otherwise loaded
+ section (I don't know why we want to do this, but we do).
+ build_link_order in ldwrite.c handles this case by turning
+ the embedded SEC_NEVER_LOAD section into a fill. */
+ flags &= ~ SEC_NEVER_LOAD;
+
+ /* If final link, don't copy the SEC_LINK_ONCE flags, they've
+ already been processed. One reason to do this is that on pe
+ format targets, .text$foo sections go into .text and it's odd
+ to see .text with SEC_LINK_ONCE set. */
+ if ((flags & (SEC_LINK_ONCE | SEC_GROUP)) == (SEC_LINK_ONCE | SEC_GROUP))
+ {
+ if (link_info.resolve_section_groups)
+ flags &= ~(SEC_LINK_ONCE | SEC_LINK_DUPLICATES | SEC_RELOC);
+ else
+ flags &= ~(SEC_LINK_DUPLICATES | SEC_RELOC);
+ }
+ else if (!bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info))
+ flags &= ~(SEC_LINK_ONCE | SEC_LINK_DUPLICATES | SEC_RELOC);
+
+ switch (output->sectype)
+ {
+ case normal_section:
+ case overlay_section:
+ case first_overlay_section:
+ case type_section:
+ break;
+ case noalloc_section:
+ flags &= ~SEC_ALLOC;
+ break;
+ case typed_readonly_section:
+ case readonly_section:
+ flags |= SEC_READONLY;
+ break;
+ case noload_section:
+ flags &= ~SEC_LOAD;
+ flags |= SEC_NEVER_LOAD;
+ /* Unfortunately GNU ld has managed to evolve two different
+ meanings to NOLOAD in scripts. ELF gets a .bss style noload,
+ alloc, no contents section. All others get a noload, noalloc
+ section. */
+ if (bfd_get_flavour (link_info.output_bfd) == bfd_target_elf_flavour)
+ flags &= ~SEC_HAS_CONTENTS;
+ else
+ flags &= ~SEC_ALLOC;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ if (output->bfd_section == NULL)
+ init_os (output, flags);
+
+ /* If SEC_READONLY is not set in the input section, then clear
+ it from the output section. */
+ output->bfd_section->flags &= flags | ~SEC_READONLY;
+
+ if (output->bfd_section->linker_has_input)
+ {
+ /* Only set SEC_READONLY flag on the first input section. */
+ flags &= ~ SEC_READONLY;
+
+ /* Keep SEC_MERGE and SEC_STRINGS only if they are the same. */
+ if ((output->bfd_section->flags & (SEC_MERGE | SEC_STRINGS))
+ != (flags & (SEC_MERGE | SEC_STRINGS))
+ || ((flags & SEC_MERGE) != 0
+ && output->bfd_section->entsize != section->entsize))
+ {
+ output->bfd_section->flags &= ~ (SEC_MERGE | SEC_STRINGS);
+ flags &= ~ (SEC_MERGE | SEC_STRINGS);
+ }
+ }
+ output->bfd_section->flags |= flags;
+
+ if (!output->bfd_section->linker_has_input)
+ {
+ output->bfd_section->linker_has_input = 1;
+ /* This must happen after flags have been updated. The output
+ section may have been created before we saw its first input
+ section, eg. for a data statement. */
+ bfd_init_private_section_data (section->owner, section,
+ link_info.output_bfd,
+ output->bfd_section,
+ &link_info);
+ if ((flags & SEC_MERGE) != 0)
+ output->bfd_section->entsize = section->entsize;
+ }
+
+ if ((flags & SEC_TIC54X_BLOCK) != 0
+ && bfd_get_arch (section->owner) == bfd_arch_tic54x)
+ {
+ /* FIXME: This value should really be obtained from the bfd... */
+ output->block_value = 128;
+ }
+
+ /* When a .ctors section is placed in .init_array it must be copied
+ in reverse order. Similarly for .dtors. Set that up. */
+ if (bfd_get_flavour (link_info.output_bfd) == bfd_target_elf_flavour
+ && ((startswith (section->name, ".ctors")
+ && strcmp (output->bfd_section->name, ".init_array") == 0)
+ || (startswith (section->name, ".dtors")
+ && strcmp (output->bfd_section->name, ".fini_array") == 0))
+ && (section->name[6] == 0 || section->name[6] == '.'))
+ section->flags |= SEC_ELF_REVERSE_COPY;
+
+ if (section->alignment_power > output->bfd_section->alignment_power)
+ output->bfd_section->alignment_power = section->alignment_power;
+
+ section->output_section = output->bfd_section;
+
+ if (!map_head_is_link_order)
+ {
+ asection *s = output->bfd_section->map_tail.s;
+ output->bfd_section->map_tail.s = section;
+ section->map_head.s = NULL;
+ section->map_tail.s = s;
+ if (s != NULL)
+ s->map_head.s = section;
+ else
+ output->bfd_section->map_head.s = section;
+ }
+
+ /* Add a section reference to the list. */
+ new_section = new_stat (lang_input_section, ptr);
+ new_section->section = section;
+ new_section->pattern = pattern;
+}
+
+/* Expand a wild statement for a particular FILE. SECTION may be
+ NULL, in which case it is a wild card. This assumes that the
+ wild statement doesn't need any sorting (of filenames or sections). */
+
+static void
+output_section_callback_nosort (lang_wild_statement_type *ptr,
+ struct wildcard_list *sec ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
+ asection *section,
+ lang_input_statement_type *file ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
+ void *output)
+{
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os;
+
+ os = (lang_output_section_statement_type *) output;
+
+ /* Exclude sections that match UNIQUE_SECTION_LIST. */
+ if (unique_section_p (section, os))
+ return;
+
+ lang_add_section (&ptr->children, section, ptr->section_list,
+ ptr->section_flag_list, os);
+}
+
+/* Check if all sections in a wild statement for a particular FILE
+ are readonly. */
+
+static void
+check_section_callback (lang_wild_statement_type *ptr ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
+ struct wildcard_list *sec ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
+ asection *section,
+ lang_input_statement_type *file ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
+ void *output)
+{
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os;
+
+ os = (lang_output_section_statement_type *) output;
+
+ /* Exclude sections that match UNIQUE_SECTION_LIST. */
+ if (unique_section_p (section, os))
+ return;
+
+ if (section->output_section == NULL && (section->flags & SEC_READONLY) == 0)
+ os->all_input_readonly = false;
+}
+
+/* This is passed a file name which must have been seen already and
+ added to the statement tree. We will see if it has been opened
+ already and had its symbols read. If not then we'll read it. */
+
+static lang_input_statement_type *
+lookup_name (const char *name)
+{
+ lang_input_statement_type *search;
+
+ for (search = (void *) input_file_chain.head;
+ search != NULL;
+ search = search->next_real_file)
+ {
+ /* Use the local_sym_name as the name of the file that has
+ already been loaded as filename might have been transformed
+ via the search directory lookup mechanism. */
+ const char *filename = search->local_sym_name;
+
+ if (filename != NULL
+ && filename_cmp (filename, name) == 0)
+ break;
+ }
+
+ if (search == NULL)
+ {
+ /* Arrange to splice the input statement added by new_afile into
+ statement_list after the current input_file_chain tail.
+ We know input_file_chain is not an empty list, and that
+ lookup_name was called via open_input_bfds. Later calls to
+ lookup_name should always match an existing input_statement. */
+ lang_statement_union_type **tail = stat_ptr->tail;
+ lang_statement_union_type **after
+ = (void *) ((char *) input_file_chain.tail
+ - offsetof (lang_input_statement_type, next_real_file)
+ + offsetof (lang_input_statement_type, header.next));
+ lang_statement_union_type *rest = *after;
+ stat_ptr->tail = after;
+ search = new_afile (name, lang_input_file_is_search_file_enum,
+ default_target, NULL);
+ *stat_ptr->tail = rest;
+ if (*tail == NULL)
+ stat_ptr->tail = tail;
+ }
+
+ /* If we have already added this file, or this file is not real
+ don't add this file. */
+ if (search->flags.loaded || !search->flags.real)
+ return search;
+
+ if (!load_symbols (search, NULL))
+ return NULL;
+
+ return search;
+}
+
+/* Save LIST as a list of libraries whose symbols should not be exported. */
+
+struct excluded_lib
+{
+ char *name;
+ struct excluded_lib *next;
+};
+static struct excluded_lib *excluded_libs;
+
+void
+add_excluded_libs (const char *list)
+{
+ const char *p = list, *end;
+
+ while (*p != '\0')
+ {
+ struct excluded_lib *entry;
+ end = strpbrk (p, ",:");
+ if (end == NULL)
+ end = p + strlen (p);
+ entry = (struct excluded_lib *) xmalloc (sizeof (*entry));
+ entry->next = excluded_libs;
+ entry->name = (char *) xmalloc (end - p + 1);
+ memcpy (entry->name, p, end - p);
+ entry->name[end - p] = '\0';
+ excluded_libs = entry;
+ if (*end == '\0')
+ break;
+ p = end + 1;
+ }
+}
+
+static void
+check_excluded_libs (bfd *abfd)
+{
+ struct excluded_lib *lib = excluded_libs;
+
+ while (lib)
+ {
+ int len = strlen (lib->name);
+ const char *filename = lbasename (bfd_get_filename (abfd));
+
+ if (strcmp (lib->name, "ALL") == 0)
+ {
+ abfd->no_export = true;
+ return;
+ }
+
+ if (filename_ncmp (lib->name, filename, len) == 0
+ && (filename[len] == '\0'
+ || (filename[len] == '.' && filename[len + 1] == 'a'
+ && filename[len + 2] == '\0')))
+ {
+ abfd->no_export = true;
+ return;
+ }
+
+ lib = lib->next;
+ }
+}
+
+/* Get the symbols for an input file. */
+
+bool
+load_symbols (lang_input_statement_type *entry,
+ lang_statement_list_type *place)
+{
+ char **matching;
+
+ if (entry->flags.loaded)
+ return true;
+
+ ldfile_open_file (entry);
+
+ /* Do not process further if the file was missing. */
+ if (entry->flags.missing_file)
+ return true;
+
+ if (trace_files || verbose)
+ info_msg ("%pI\n", entry);
+
+ if (!bfd_check_format (entry->the_bfd, bfd_archive)
+ && !bfd_check_format_matches (entry->the_bfd, bfd_object, &matching))
+ {
+ bfd_error_type err;
+ struct lang_input_statement_flags save_flags;
+ extern FILE *yyin;
+
+ err = bfd_get_error ();
+
+ /* See if the emulation has some special knowledge. */
+ if (ldemul_unrecognized_file (entry))
+ {
+ if (err == bfd_error_file_ambiguously_recognized)
+ free (matching);
+ return true;
+ }
+
+ if (err == bfd_error_file_ambiguously_recognized)
+ {
+ char **p;
+
+ einfo (_("%P: %pB: file not recognized: %E;"
+ " matching formats:"), entry->the_bfd);
+ for (p = matching; *p != NULL; p++)
+ einfo (" %s", *p);
+ free (matching);
+ einfo ("%F\n");
+ }
+ else if (err != bfd_error_file_not_recognized
+ || place == NULL)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: %pB: file not recognized: %E\n"), entry->the_bfd);
+
+ bfd_close (entry->the_bfd);
+ entry->the_bfd = NULL;
+
+ /* Try to interpret the file as a linker script. */
+ save_flags = input_flags;
+ ldfile_open_command_file (entry->filename);
+
+ push_stat_ptr (place);
+ input_flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_regular
+ = entry->flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_regular;
+ input_flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_dynamic
+ = entry->flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_dynamic;
+ input_flags.whole_archive = entry->flags.whole_archive;
+ input_flags.dynamic = entry->flags.dynamic;
+
+ ldfile_assumed_script = true;
+ parser_input = input_script;
+ current_input_file = entry->filename;
+ yyparse ();
+ current_input_file = NULL;
+ ldfile_assumed_script = false;
+
+ /* missing_file is sticky. sysrooted will already have been
+ restored when seeing EOF in yyparse, but no harm to restore
+ again. */
+ save_flags.missing_file |= input_flags.missing_file;
+ input_flags = save_flags;
+ pop_stat_ptr ();
+ fclose (yyin);
+ yyin = NULL;
+ entry->flags.loaded = true;
+
+ return true;
+ }
+
+ if (ldemul_recognized_file (entry))
+ return true;
+
+ /* We don't call ldlang_add_file for an archive. Instead, the
+ add_symbols entry point will call ldlang_add_file, via the
+ add_archive_element callback, for each element of the archive
+ which is used. */
+ switch (bfd_get_format (entry->the_bfd))
+ {
+ default:
+ break;
+
+ case bfd_object:
+ if (!entry->flags.reload)
+ ldlang_add_file (entry);
+ break;
+
+ case bfd_archive:
+ check_excluded_libs (entry->the_bfd);
+
+ bfd_set_usrdata (entry->the_bfd, entry);
+ if (entry->flags.whole_archive)
+ {
+ bfd *member = NULL;
+ bool loaded = true;
+
+ for (;;)
+ {
+ bfd *subsbfd;
+ member = bfd_openr_next_archived_file (entry->the_bfd, member);
+
+ if (member == NULL)
+ break;
+
+ if (!bfd_check_format (member, bfd_object))
+ {
+ einfo (_("%F%P: %pB: member %pB in archive is not an object\n"),
+ entry->the_bfd, member);
+ loaded = false;
+ }
+
+ subsbfd = member;
+ if (!(*link_info.callbacks
+ ->add_archive_element) (&link_info, member,
+ "--whole-archive", &subsbfd))
+ abort ();
+
+ /* Potentially, the add_archive_element hook may have set a
+ substitute BFD for us. */
+ if (!bfd_link_add_symbols (subsbfd, &link_info))
+ {
+ einfo (_("%F%P: %pB: error adding symbols: %E\n"), member);
+ loaded = false;
+ }
+ }
+
+ entry->flags.loaded = loaded;
+ return loaded;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+
+ if (bfd_link_add_symbols (entry->the_bfd, &link_info))
+ entry->flags.loaded = true;
+ else
+ einfo (_("%F%P: %pB: error adding symbols: %E\n"), entry->the_bfd);
+
+ return entry->flags.loaded;
+}
+
+/* Handle a wild statement. S->FILENAME or S->SECTION_LIST or both
+ may be NULL, indicating that it is a wildcard. Separate
+ lang_input_section statements are created for each part of the
+ expansion; they are added after the wild statement S. OUTPUT is
+ the output section. */
+
+static void
+wild (lang_wild_statement_type *s,
+ const char *target ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *output)
+{
+ struct wildcard_list *sec;
+
+ if (s->filenames_sorted || s->any_specs_sorted)
+ {
+ lang_section_bst_type *tree;
+
+ walk_wild (s, output_section_callback_sort, output);
+
+ tree = s->tree;
+ if (tree)
+ {
+ output_section_callback_tree_to_list (s, tree, output);
+ s->tree = NULL;
+ s->rightmost = &s->tree;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ walk_wild (s, output_section_callback_nosort, output);
+
+ if (default_common_section == NULL)
+ for (sec = s->section_list; sec != NULL; sec = sec->next)
+ if (sec->spec.name != NULL && strcmp (sec->spec.name, "COMMON") == 0)
+ {
+ /* Remember the section that common is going to in case we
+ later get something which doesn't know where to put it. */
+ default_common_section = output;
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/* Return TRUE iff target is the sought target. */
+
+static int
+get_target (const bfd_target *target, void *data)
+{
+ const char *sought = (const char *) data;
+
+ return strcmp (target->name, sought) == 0;
+}
+
+/* Like strcpy() but convert to lower case as well. */
+
+static void
+stricpy (char *dest, const char *src)
+{
+ char c;
+
+ while ((c = *src++) != 0)
+ *dest++ = TOLOWER (c);
+
+ *dest = 0;
+}
+
+/* Remove the first occurrence of needle (if any) in haystack
+ from haystack. */
+
+static void
+strcut (char *haystack, const char *needle)
+{
+ haystack = strstr (haystack, needle);
+
+ if (haystack)
+ {
+ char *src;
+
+ for (src = haystack + strlen (needle); *src;)
+ *haystack++ = *src++;
+
+ *haystack = 0;
+ }
+}
+
+/* Compare two target format name strings.
+ Return a value indicating how "similar" they are. */
+
+static int
+name_compare (const char *first, const char *second)
+{
+ char *copy1;
+ char *copy2;
+ int result;
+
+ copy1 = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (first) + 1);
+ copy2 = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (second) + 1);
+
+ /* Convert the names to lower case. */
+ stricpy (copy1, first);
+ stricpy (copy2, second);
+
+ /* Remove size and endian strings from the name. */
+ strcut (copy1, "big");
+ strcut (copy1, "little");
+ strcut (copy2, "big");
+ strcut (copy2, "little");
+
+ /* Return a value based on how many characters match,
+ starting from the beginning. If both strings are
+ the same then return 10 * their length. */
+ for (result = 0; copy1[result] == copy2[result]; result++)
+ if (copy1[result] == 0)
+ {
+ result *= 10;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ free (copy1);
+ free (copy2);
+
+ return result;
+}
+
+/* Set by closest_target_match() below. */
+static const bfd_target *winner;
+
+/* Scan all the valid bfd targets looking for one that has the endianness
+ requirement that was specified on the command line, and is the nearest
+ match to the original output target. */
+
+static int
+closest_target_match (const bfd_target *target, void *data)
+{
+ const bfd_target *original = (const bfd_target *) data;
+
+ if (command_line.endian == ENDIAN_BIG
+ && target->byteorder != BFD_ENDIAN_BIG)
+ return 0;
+
+ if (command_line.endian == ENDIAN_LITTLE
+ && target->byteorder != BFD_ENDIAN_LITTLE)
+ return 0;
+
+ /* Must be the same flavour. */
+ if (target->flavour != original->flavour)
+ return 0;
+
+ /* Ignore generic big and little endian elf vectors. */
+ if (strcmp (target->name, "elf32-big") == 0
+ || strcmp (target->name, "elf64-big") == 0
+ || strcmp (target->name, "elf32-little") == 0
+ || strcmp (target->name, "elf64-little") == 0)
+ return 0;
+
+ /* If we have not found a potential winner yet, then record this one. */
+ if (winner == NULL)
+ {
+ winner = target;
+ return 0;
+ }
+
+ /* Oh dear, we now have two potential candidates for a successful match.
+ Compare their names and choose the better one. */
+ if (name_compare (target->name, original->name)
+ > name_compare (winner->name, original->name))
+ winner = target;
+
+ /* Keep on searching until wqe have checked them all. */
+ return 0;
+}
+
+/* Return the BFD target format of the first input file. */
+
+static const char *
+get_first_input_target (void)
+{
+ const char *target = NULL;
+
+ LANG_FOR_EACH_INPUT_STATEMENT (s)
+ {
+ if (s->header.type == lang_input_statement_enum
+ && s->flags.real)
+ {
+ ldfile_open_file (s);
+
+ if (s->the_bfd != NULL
+ && bfd_check_format (s->the_bfd, bfd_object))
+ {
+ target = bfd_get_target (s->the_bfd);
+
+ if (target != NULL)
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ return target;
+}
+
+const char *
+lang_get_output_target (void)
+{
+ const char *target;
+
+ /* Has the user told us which output format to use? */
+ if (output_target != NULL)
+ return output_target;
+
+ /* No - has the current target been set to something other than
+ the default? */
+ if (current_target != default_target && current_target != NULL)
+ return current_target;
+
+ /* No - can we determine the format of the first input file? */
+ target = get_first_input_target ();
+ if (target != NULL)
+ return target;
+
+ /* Failed - use the default output target. */
+ return default_target;
+}
+
+/* Open the output file. */
+
+static void
+open_output (const char *name)
+{
+ lang_input_statement_type *f;
+ char *out = lrealpath (name);
+
+ for (f = (void *) input_file_chain.head;
+ f != NULL;
+ f = f->next_real_file)
+ if (f->flags.real)
+ {
+ char *in = lrealpath (f->local_sym_name);
+ if (filename_cmp (in, out) == 0)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: input file '%s' is the same as output file\n"),
+ f->filename);
+ free (in);
+ }
+ free (out);
+
+ output_target = lang_get_output_target ();
+
+ /* Has the user requested a particular endianness on the command
+ line? */
+ if (command_line.endian != ENDIAN_UNSET)
+ {
+ /* Get the chosen target. */
+ const bfd_target *target
+ = bfd_iterate_over_targets (get_target, (void *) output_target);
+
+ /* If the target is not supported, we cannot do anything. */
+ if (target != NULL)
+ {
+ enum bfd_endian desired_endian;
+
+ if (command_line.endian == ENDIAN_BIG)
+ desired_endian = BFD_ENDIAN_BIG;
+ else
+ desired_endian = BFD_ENDIAN_LITTLE;
+
+ /* See if the target has the wrong endianness. This should
+ not happen if the linker script has provided big and
+ little endian alternatives, but some scrips don't do
+ this. */
+ if (target->byteorder != desired_endian)
+ {
+ /* If it does, then see if the target provides
+ an alternative with the correct endianness. */
+ if (target->alternative_target != NULL
+ && (target->alternative_target->byteorder == desired_endian))
+ output_target = target->alternative_target->name;
+ else
+ {
+ /* Try to find a target as similar as possible to
+ the default target, but which has the desired
+ endian characteristic. */
+ bfd_iterate_over_targets (closest_target_match,
+ (void *) target);
+
+ /* Oh dear - we could not find any targets that
+ satisfy our requirements. */
+ if (winner == NULL)
+ einfo (_("%P: warning: could not find any targets"
+ " that match endianness requirement\n"));
+ else
+ output_target = winner->name;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ link_info.output_bfd = bfd_openw (name, output_target);
+
+ if (link_info.output_bfd == NULL)
+ {
+ if (bfd_get_error () == bfd_error_invalid_target)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: target %s not found\n"), output_target);
+
+ einfo (_("%F%P: cannot open output file %s: %E\n"), name);
+ }
+
+ delete_output_file_on_failure = true;
+
+ if (!bfd_set_format (link_info.output_bfd, bfd_object))
+ einfo (_("%F%P: %s: can not make object file: %E\n"), name);
+ if (!bfd_set_arch_mach (link_info.output_bfd,
+ ldfile_output_architecture,
+ ldfile_output_machine))
+ einfo (_("%F%P: %s: can not set architecture: %E\n"), name);
+
+ link_info.hash = bfd_link_hash_table_create (link_info.output_bfd);
+ if (link_info.hash == NULL)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: can not create hash table: %E\n"));
+
+ bfd_set_gp_size (link_info.output_bfd, g_switch_value);
+}
+
+static void
+ldlang_open_output (lang_statement_union_type *statement)
+{
+ switch (statement->header.type)
+ {
+ case lang_output_statement_enum:
+ ASSERT (link_info.output_bfd == NULL);
+ open_output (statement->output_statement.name);
+ ldemul_set_output_arch ();
+ if (config.magic_demand_paged
+ && !bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info))
+ link_info.output_bfd->flags |= D_PAGED;
+ else
+ link_info.output_bfd->flags &= ~D_PAGED;
+ if (config.text_read_only)
+ link_info.output_bfd->flags |= WP_TEXT;
+ else
+ link_info.output_bfd->flags &= ~WP_TEXT;
+ if (link_info.traditional_format)
+ link_info.output_bfd->flags |= BFD_TRADITIONAL_FORMAT;
+ else
+ link_info.output_bfd->flags &= ~BFD_TRADITIONAL_FORMAT;
+ if (config.no_section_header)
+ link_info.output_bfd->flags |= BFD_NO_SECTION_HEADER;
+ else
+ link_info.output_bfd->flags &= ~BFD_NO_SECTION_HEADER;
+ break;
+
+ case lang_target_statement_enum:
+ current_target = statement->target_statement.target;
+ break;
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+static void
+init_opb (asection *s)
+{
+ unsigned int x;
+
+ opb_shift = 0;
+ if (bfd_get_flavour (link_info.output_bfd) == bfd_target_elf_flavour
+ && s != NULL
+ && (s->flags & SEC_ELF_OCTETS) != 0)
+ return;
+
+ x = bfd_arch_mach_octets_per_byte (ldfile_output_architecture,
+ ldfile_output_machine);
+ if (x > 1)
+ while ((x & 1) == 0)
+ {
+ x >>= 1;
+ ++opb_shift;
+ }
+ ASSERT (x == 1);
+}
+
+/* Open all the input files. */
+
+enum open_bfd_mode
+ {
+ OPEN_BFD_NORMAL = 0,
+ OPEN_BFD_FORCE = 1,
+ OPEN_BFD_RESCAN = 2
+ };
+#if BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS
+static lang_input_statement_type *plugin_insert = NULL;
+static struct bfd_link_hash_entry *plugin_undefs = NULL;
+#endif
+
+static void
+open_input_bfds (lang_statement_union_type *s, enum open_bfd_mode mode)
+{
+ for (; s != NULL; s = s->header.next)
+ {
+ switch (s->header.type)
+ {
+ case lang_constructors_statement_enum:
+ open_input_bfds (constructor_list.head, mode);
+ break;
+ case lang_output_section_statement_enum:
+ open_input_bfds (s->output_section_statement.children.head, mode);
+ break;
+ case lang_wild_statement_enum:
+ /* Maybe we should load the file's symbols. */
+ if ((mode & OPEN_BFD_RESCAN) == 0
+ && s->wild_statement.filename
+ && !wildcardp (s->wild_statement.filename)
+ && !archive_path (s->wild_statement.filename))
+ lookup_name (s->wild_statement.filename);
+ open_input_bfds (s->wild_statement.children.head, mode);
+ break;
+ case lang_group_statement_enum:
+ {
+ struct bfd_link_hash_entry *undefs;
+#if BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS
+ lang_input_statement_type *plugin_insert_save;
+#endif
+
+ /* We must continually search the entries in the group
+ until no new symbols are added to the list of undefined
+ symbols. */
+
+ do
+ {
+#if BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS
+ plugin_insert_save = plugin_insert;
+#endif
+ undefs = link_info.hash->undefs_tail;
+ open_input_bfds (s->group_statement.children.head,
+ mode | OPEN_BFD_FORCE);
+ }
+ while (undefs != link_info.hash->undefs_tail
+#if BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS
+ /* Objects inserted by a plugin, which are loaded
+ before we hit this loop, may have added new
+ undefs. */
+ || (plugin_insert != plugin_insert_save && plugin_undefs)
+#endif
+ );
+ }
+ break;
+ case lang_target_statement_enum:
+ current_target = s->target_statement.target;
+ break;
+ case lang_input_statement_enum:
+ if (s->input_statement.flags.real)
+ {
+ lang_statement_union_type **os_tail;
+ lang_statement_list_type add;
+ bfd *abfd;
+
+ s->input_statement.target = current_target;
+
+ /* If we are being called from within a group, and this
+ is an archive which has already been searched, then
+ force it to be researched unless the whole archive
+ has been loaded already. Do the same for a rescan.
+ Likewise reload --as-needed shared libs. */
+ if (mode != OPEN_BFD_NORMAL
+#if BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS
+ && ((mode & OPEN_BFD_RESCAN) == 0
+ || plugin_insert == NULL)
+#endif
+ && s->input_statement.flags.loaded
+ && (abfd = s->input_statement.the_bfd) != NULL
+ && ((bfd_get_format (abfd) == bfd_archive
+ && !s->input_statement.flags.whole_archive)
+ || (bfd_get_format (abfd) == bfd_object
+ && ((abfd->flags) & DYNAMIC) != 0
+ && s->input_statement.flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_regular
+ && bfd_get_flavour (abfd) == bfd_target_elf_flavour
+ && (elf_dyn_lib_class (abfd) & DYN_AS_NEEDED) != 0)))
+ {
+ s->input_statement.flags.loaded = false;
+ s->input_statement.flags.reload = true;
+ }
+
+ os_tail = lang_os_list.tail;
+ lang_list_init (&add);
+
+ if (!load_symbols (&s->input_statement, &add))
+ config.make_executable = false;
+
+ if (add.head != NULL)
+ {
+ /* If this was a script with output sections then
+ tack any added statements on to the end of the
+ list. This avoids having to reorder the output
+ section statement list. Very likely the user
+ forgot -T, and whatever we do here will not meet
+ naive user expectations. */
+ if (os_tail != lang_os_list.tail)
+ {
+ einfo (_("%P: warning: %s contains output sections;"
+ " did you forget -T?\n"),
+ s->input_statement.filename);
+ *stat_ptr->tail = add.head;
+ stat_ptr->tail = add.tail;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ *add.tail = s->header.next;
+ s->header.next = add.head;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+#if BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS
+ /* If we have found the point at which a plugin added new
+ files, clear plugin_insert to enable archive rescan. */
+ if (&s->input_statement == plugin_insert)
+ plugin_insert = NULL;
+#endif
+ break;
+ case lang_assignment_statement_enum:
+ if (s->assignment_statement.exp->type.node_class != etree_assert)
+ exp_fold_tree_no_dot (s->assignment_statement.exp);
+ break;
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Exit if any of the files were missing. */
+ if (input_flags.missing_file)
+ einfo ("%F");
+}
+
+#ifdef ENABLE_LIBCTF
+/* Emit CTF errors and warnings. fp can be NULL to report errors/warnings
+ that happened specifically at CTF open time. */
+static void
+lang_ctf_errs_warnings (ctf_dict_t *fp)
+{
+ ctf_next_t *i = NULL;
+ char *text;
+ int is_warning;
+ int err;
+
+ while ((text = ctf_errwarning_next (fp, &i, &is_warning, &err)) != NULL)
+ {
+ einfo (_("%s: %s\n"), is_warning ? _("CTF warning"): _("CTF error"),
+ text);
+ free (text);
+ }
+ if (err != ECTF_NEXT_END)
+ {
+ einfo (_("CTF error: cannot get CTF errors: `%s'\n"),
+ ctf_errmsg (err));
+ }
+
+ /* `err' returns errors from the error/warning iterator in particular.
+ These never assert. But if we have an fp, that could have recorded
+ an assertion failure: assert if it has done so. */
+ ASSERT (!fp || ctf_errno (fp) != ECTF_INTERNAL);
+}
+
+/* Open the CTF sections in the input files with libctf: if any were opened,
+ create a fake input file that we'll write the merged CTF data to later
+ on. */
+
+static void
+ldlang_open_ctf (void)
+{
+ int any_ctf = 0;
+ int err;
+
+ LANG_FOR_EACH_INPUT_STATEMENT (file)
+ {
+ asection *sect;
+
+ /* Incoming files from the compiler have a single ctf_dict_t in them
+ (which is presented to us by the libctf API in a ctf_archive_t
+ wrapper): files derived from a previous relocatable link have a CTF
+ archive containing possibly many CTF files. */
+
+ if ((file->the_ctf = ctf_bfdopen (file->the_bfd, &err)) == NULL)
+ {
+ if (err != ECTF_NOCTFDATA)
+ {
+ lang_ctf_errs_warnings (NULL);
+ einfo (_("%P: warning: CTF section in %pB not loaded; "
+ "its types will be discarded: %s\n"), file->the_bfd,
+ ctf_errmsg (err));
+ }
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /* Prevent the contents of this section from being written, while
+ requiring the section itself to be duplicated in the output, but only
+ once. */
+ /* This section must exist if ctf_bfdopen() succeeded. */
+ sect = bfd_get_section_by_name (file->the_bfd, ".ctf");
+ sect->size = 0;
+ sect->flags |= SEC_NEVER_LOAD | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS | SEC_LINKER_CREATED;
+
+ if (any_ctf)
+ sect->flags |= SEC_EXCLUDE;
+ any_ctf = 1;
+ }
+
+ if (!any_ctf)
+ {
+ ctf_output = NULL;
+ return;
+ }
+
+ if ((ctf_output = ctf_create (&err)) != NULL)
+ return;
+
+ einfo (_("%P: warning: CTF output not created: `%s'\n"),
+ ctf_errmsg (err));
+
+ LANG_FOR_EACH_INPUT_STATEMENT (errfile)
+ ctf_close (errfile->the_ctf);
+}
+
+/* Merge together CTF sections. After this, only the symtab-dependent
+ function and data object sections need adjustment. */
+
+static void
+lang_merge_ctf (void)
+{
+ asection *output_sect;
+ int flags = 0;
+
+ if (!ctf_output)
+ return;
+
+ output_sect = bfd_get_section_by_name (link_info.output_bfd, ".ctf");
+
+ /* If the section was discarded, don't waste time merging. */
+ if (output_sect == NULL)
+ {
+ ctf_dict_close (ctf_output);
+ ctf_output = NULL;
+
+ LANG_FOR_EACH_INPUT_STATEMENT (file)
+ {
+ ctf_close (file->the_ctf);
+ file->the_ctf = NULL;
+ }
+ return;
+ }
+
+ LANG_FOR_EACH_INPUT_STATEMENT (file)
+ {
+ if (!file->the_ctf)
+ continue;
+
+ /* Takes ownership of file->the_ctf. */
+ if (ctf_link_add_ctf (ctf_output, file->the_ctf, file->filename) < 0)
+ {
+ einfo (_("%P: warning: CTF section in %pB cannot be linked: `%s'\n"),
+ file->the_bfd, ctf_errmsg (ctf_errno (ctf_output)));
+ ctf_close (file->the_ctf);
+ file->the_ctf = NULL;
+ continue;
+ }
+ }
+
+ if (!config.ctf_share_duplicated)
+ flags = CTF_LINK_SHARE_UNCONFLICTED;
+ else
+ flags = CTF_LINK_SHARE_DUPLICATED;
+ if (!config.ctf_variables)
+ flags |= CTF_LINK_OMIT_VARIABLES_SECTION;
+ if (bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info))
+ flags |= CTF_LINK_NO_FILTER_REPORTED_SYMS;
+
+ if (ctf_link (ctf_output, flags) < 0)
+ {
+ lang_ctf_errs_warnings (ctf_output);
+ einfo (_("%P: warning: CTF linking failed; "
+ "output will have no CTF section: %s\n"),
+ ctf_errmsg (ctf_errno (ctf_output)));
+ if (output_sect)
+ {
+ output_sect->size = 0;
+ output_sect->flags |= SEC_EXCLUDE;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Output any lingering errors that didn't come from ctf_link. */
+ lang_ctf_errs_warnings (ctf_output);
+}
+
+/* Let the emulation acquire strings from the dynamic strtab to help it optimize
+ the CTF, if supported. */
+
+void
+ldlang_ctf_acquire_strings (struct elf_strtab_hash *dynstrtab)
+{
+ ldemul_acquire_strings_for_ctf (ctf_output, dynstrtab);
+}
+
+/* Inform the emulation about the addition of a new dynamic symbol, in BFD
+ internal format. */
+void ldlang_ctf_new_dynsym (int symidx, struct elf_internal_sym *sym)
+{
+ ldemul_new_dynsym_for_ctf (ctf_output, symidx, sym);
+}
+
+/* Write out the CTF section. Called early, if the emulation isn't going to
+ need to dedup against the strtab and symtab, then possibly called from the
+ target linker code if the dedup has happened. */
+static void
+lang_write_ctf (int late)
+{
+ size_t output_size;
+ asection *output_sect;
+
+ if (!ctf_output)
+ return;
+
+ if (late)
+ {
+ /* Emit CTF late if this emulation says it can do so. */
+ if (ldemul_emit_ctf_early ())
+ return;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (!ldemul_emit_ctf_early ())
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /* Inform the emulation that all the symbols that will be received have
+ been. */
+
+ ldemul_new_dynsym_for_ctf (ctf_output, 0, NULL);
+
+ /* Emit CTF. */
+
+ output_sect = bfd_get_section_by_name (link_info.output_bfd, ".ctf");
+ if (output_sect)
+ {
+ output_sect->contents = ctf_link_write (ctf_output, &output_size,
+ CTF_COMPRESSION_THRESHOLD);
+ output_sect->size = output_size;
+ output_sect->flags |= SEC_IN_MEMORY | SEC_KEEP;
+
+ lang_ctf_errs_warnings (ctf_output);
+ if (!output_sect->contents)
+ {
+ einfo (_("%P: warning: CTF section emission failed; "
+ "output will have no CTF section: %s\n"),
+ ctf_errmsg (ctf_errno (ctf_output)));
+ output_sect->size = 0;
+ output_sect->flags |= SEC_EXCLUDE;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* This also closes every CTF input file used in the link. */
+ ctf_dict_close (ctf_output);
+ ctf_output = NULL;
+
+ LANG_FOR_EACH_INPUT_STATEMENT (file)
+ file->the_ctf = NULL;
+}
+
+/* Write out the CTF section late, if the emulation needs that. */
+
+void
+ldlang_write_ctf_late (void)
+{
+ /* Trigger a "late call", if the emulation needs one. */
+
+ lang_write_ctf (1);
+}
+#else
+static void
+ldlang_open_ctf (void)
+{
+ LANG_FOR_EACH_INPUT_STATEMENT (file)
+ {
+ asection *sect;
+
+ /* If built without CTF, warn and delete all CTF sections from the output.
+ (The alternative would be to simply concatenate them, which does not
+ yield a valid CTF section.) */
+
+ if ((sect = bfd_get_section_by_name (file->the_bfd, ".ctf")) != NULL)
+ {
+ einfo (_("%P: warning: CTF section in %pB not linkable: "
+ "%P was built without support for CTF\n"), file->the_bfd);
+ sect->size = 0;
+ sect->flags |= SEC_EXCLUDE;
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+static void lang_merge_ctf (void) {}
+void
+ldlang_ctf_acquire_strings (struct elf_strtab_hash *dynstrtab
+ ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) {}
+void
+ldlang_ctf_new_dynsym (int symidx ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
+ struct elf_internal_sym *sym ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) {}
+static void lang_write_ctf (int late ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) {}
+void ldlang_write_ctf_late (void) {}
+#endif
+
+/* Add the supplied name to the symbol table as an undefined reference.
+ This is a two step process as the symbol table doesn't even exist at
+ the time the ld command line is processed. First we put the name
+ on a list, then, once the output file has been opened, transfer the
+ name to the symbol table. */
+
+typedef struct bfd_sym_chain ldlang_undef_chain_list_type;
+
+#define ldlang_undef_chain_list_head entry_symbol.next
+
+void
+ldlang_add_undef (const char *const name, bool cmdline ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
+{
+ ldlang_undef_chain_list_type *new_undef;
+
+ new_undef = stat_alloc (sizeof (*new_undef));
+ new_undef->next = ldlang_undef_chain_list_head;
+ ldlang_undef_chain_list_head = new_undef;
+
+ new_undef->name = xstrdup (name);
+
+ if (link_info.output_bfd != NULL)
+ insert_undefined (new_undef->name);
+}
+
+/* Insert NAME as undefined in the symbol table. */
+
+static void
+insert_undefined (const char *name)
+{
+ struct bfd_link_hash_entry *h;
+
+ h = bfd_link_hash_lookup (link_info.hash, name, true, false, true);
+ if (h == NULL)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: bfd_link_hash_lookup failed: %E\n"));
+ if (h->type == bfd_link_hash_new)
+ {
+ h->type = bfd_link_hash_undefined;
+ h->u.undef.abfd = NULL;
+ h->non_ir_ref_regular = true;
+ bfd_link_add_undef (link_info.hash, h);
+ }
+}
+
+/* Run through the list of undefineds created above and place them
+ into the linker hash table as undefined symbols belonging to the
+ script file. */
+
+static void
+lang_place_undefineds (void)
+{
+ ldlang_undef_chain_list_type *ptr;
+
+ for (ptr = ldlang_undef_chain_list_head; ptr != NULL; ptr = ptr->next)
+ insert_undefined (ptr->name);
+}
+
+/* Mark -u symbols against garbage collection. */
+
+static void
+lang_mark_undefineds (void)
+{
+ ldlang_undef_chain_list_type *ptr;
+
+ if (is_elf_hash_table (link_info.hash))
+ for (ptr = ldlang_undef_chain_list_head; ptr != NULL; ptr = ptr->next)
+ {
+ struct elf_link_hash_entry *h = (struct elf_link_hash_entry *)
+ bfd_link_hash_lookup (link_info.hash, ptr->name, false, false, true);
+ if (h != NULL)
+ h->mark = 1;
+ }
+}
+
+/* Structure used to build the list of symbols that the user has required
+ be defined. */
+
+struct require_defined_symbol
+{
+ const char *name;
+ struct require_defined_symbol *next;
+};
+
+/* The list of symbols that the user has required be defined. */
+
+static struct require_defined_symbol *require_defined_symbol_list;
+
+/* Add a new symbol NAME to the list of symbols that are required to be
+ defined. */
+
+void
+ldlang_add_require_defined (const char *const name)
+{
+ struct require_defined_symbol *ptr;
+
+ ldlang_add_undef (name, true);
+ ptr = stat_alloc (sizeof (*ptr));
+ ptr->next = require_defined_symbol_list;
+ ptr->name = strdup (name);
+ require_defined_symbol_list = ptr;
+}
+
+/* Check that all symbols the user required to be defined, are defined,
+ raise an error if we find a symbol that is not defined. */
+
+static void
+ldlang_check_require_defined_symbols (void)
+{
+ struct require_defined_symbol *ptr;
+
+ for (ptr = require_defined_symbol_list; ptr != NULL; ptr = ptr->next)
+ {
+ struct bfd_link_hash_entry *h;
+
+ h = bfd_link_hash_lookup (link_info.hash, ptr->name,
+ false, false, true);
+ if (h == NULL
+ || (h->type != bfd_link_hash_defined
+ && h->type != bfd_link_hash_defweak))
+ einfo(_("%X%P: required symbol `%s' not defined\n"), ptr->name);
+ }
+}
+
+/* Check for all readonly or some readwrite sections. */
+
+static void
+check_input_sections
+ (lang_statement_union_type *s,
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *output_section_statement)
+{
+ for (; s != NULL; s = s->header.next)
+ {
+ switch (s->header.type)
+ {
+ case lang_wild_statement_enum:
+ walk_wild (&s->wild_statement, check_section_callback,
+ output_section_statement);
+ if (!output_section_statement->all_input_readonly)
+ return;
+ break;
+ case lang_constructors_statement_enum:
+ check_input_sections (constructor_list.head,
+ output_section_statement);
+ if (!output_section_statement->all_input_readonly)
+ return;
+ break;
+ case lang_group_statement_enum:
+ check_input_sections (s->group_statement.children.head,
+ output_section_statement);
+ if (!output_section_statement->all_input_readonly)
+ return;
+ break;
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/* Update wildcard statements if needed. */
+
+static void
+update_wild_statements (lang_statement_union_type *s)
+{
+ struct wildcard_list *sec;
+
+ switch (sort_section)
+ {
+ default:
+ FAIL ();
+
+ case none:
+ break;
+
+ case by_name:
+ case by_alignment:
+ for (; s != NULL; s = s->header.next)
+ {
+ switch (s->header.type)
+ {
+ default:
+ break;
+
+ case lang_wild_statement_enum:
+ for (sec = s->wild_statement.section_list; sec != NULL;
+ sec = sec->next)
+ /* Don't sort .init/.fini sections. */
+ if (strcmp (sec->spec.name, ".init") != 0
+ && strcmp (sec->spec.name, ".fini") != 0)
+ {
+ switch (sec->spec.sorted)
+ {
+ case none:
+ sec->spec.sorted = sort_section;
+ break;
+ case by_name:
+ if (sort_section == by_alignment)
+ sec->spec.sorted = by_name_alignment;
+ break;
+ case by_alignment:
+ if (sort_section == by_name)
+ sec->spec.sorted = by_alignment_name;
+ break;
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+ s->wild_statement.any_specs_sorted = true;
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case lang_constructors_statement_enum:
+ update_wild_statements (constructor_list.head);
+ break;
+
+ case lang_output_section_statement_enum:
+ update_wild_statements
+ (s->output_section_statement.children.head);
+ break;
+
+ case lang_group_statement_enum:
+ update_wild_statements (s->group_statement.children.head);
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/* Open input files and attach to output sections. */
+
+static void
+map_input_to_output_sections
+ (lang_statement_union_type *s, const char *target,
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os)
+{
+ for (; s != NULL; s = s->header.next)
+ {
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *tos;
+ flagword flags;
+ unsigned int type = 0;
+
+ switch (s->header.type)
+ {
+ case lang_wild_statement_enum:
+ wild (&s->wild_statement, target, os);
+ break;
+ case lang_constructors_statement_enum:
+ map_input_to_output_sections (constructor_list.head,
+ target,
+ os);
+ break;
+ case lang_output_section_statement_enum:
+ tos = &s->output_section_statement;
+ if (tos->constraint == ONLY_IF_RW
+ || tos->constraint == ONLY_IF_RO)
+ {
+ tos->all_input_readonly = true;
+ check_input_sections (tos->children.head, tos);
+ if (tos->all_input_readonly != (tos->constraint == ONLY_IF_RO))
+ tos->constraint = -1;
+ }
+ if (tos->constraint >= 0)
+ map_input_to_output_sections (tos->children.head,
+ target,
+ tos);
+ break;
+ case lang_output_statement_enum:
+ break;
+ case lang_target_statement_enum:
+ target = s->target_statement.target;
+ break;
+ case lang_group_statement_enum:
+ map_input_to_output_sections (s->group_statement.children.head,
+ target,
+ os);
+ break;
+ case lang_data_statement_enum:
+ /* Make sure that any sections mentioned in the expression
+ are initialized. */
+ exp_init_os (s->data_statement.exp);
+ /* The output section gets CONTENTS, ALLOC and LOAD, but
+ these may be overridden by the script. */
+ flags = SEC_HAS_CONTENTS | SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD;
+ switch (os->sectype)
+ {
+ case normal_section:
+ case overlay_section:
+ case first_overlay_section:
+ break;
+ case noalloc_section:
+ flags = SEC_HAS_CONTENTS;
+ break;
+ case readonly_section:
+ flags |= SEC_READONLY;
+ break;
+ case typed_readonly_section:
+ flags |= SEC_READONLY;
+ /* Fall through. */
+ case type_section:
+ if (os->sectype_value->type.node_class == etree_name
+ && os->sectype_value->type.node_code == NAME)
+ {
+ const char *name = os->sectype_value->name.name;
+ if (strcmp (name, "SHT_PROGBITS") == 0)
+ type = SHT_PROGBITS;
+ else if (strcmp (name, "SHT_STRTAB") == 0)
+ type = SHT_STRTAB;
+ else if (strcmp (name, "SHT_NOTE") == 0)
+ type = SHT_NOTE;
+ else if (strcmp (name, "SHT_NOBITS") == 0)
+ type = SHT_NOBITS;
+ else if (strcmp (name, "SHT_INIT_ARRAY") == 0)
+ type = SHT_INIT_ARRAY;
+ else if (strcmp (name, "SHT_FINI_ARRAY") == 0)
+ type = SHT_FINI_ARRAY;
+ else if (strcmp (name, "SHT_PREINIT_ARRAY") == 0)
+ type = SHT_PREINIT_ARRAY;
+ else
+ einfo (_ ("%F%P: invalid type for output section `%s'\n"),
+ os->name);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ exp_fold_tree_no_dot (os->sectype_value);
+ if (expld.result.valid_p)
+ type = expld.result.value;
+ else
+ einfo (_ ("%F%P: invalid type for output section `%s'\n"),
+ os->name);
+ }
+ break;
+ case noload_section:
+ if (bfd_get_flavour (link_info.output_bfd)
+ == bfd_target_elf_flavour)
+ flags = SEC_NEVER_LOAD | SEC_ALLOC;
+ else
+ flags = SEC_NEVER_LOAD | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS;
+ break;
+ }
+ if (os->bfd_section == NULL)
+ init_os (os, flags | SEC_READONLY);
+ else
+ os->bfd_section->flags |= flags;
+ os->bfd_section->type = type;
+ break;
+ case lang_input_section_enum:
+ break;
+ case lang_fill_statement_enum:
+ case lang_object_symbols_statement_enum:
+ case lang_reloc_statement_enum:
+ case lang_padding_statement_enum:
+ case lang_input_statement_enum:
+ if (os != NULL && os->bfd_section == NULL)
+ init_os (os, 0);
+ break;
+ case lang_assignment_statement_enum:
+ if (os != NULL && os->bfd_section == NULL)
+ init_os (os, 0);
+
+ /* Make sure that any sections mentioned in the assignment
+ are initialized. */
+ exp_init_os (s->assignment_statement.exp);
+ break;
+ case lang_address_statement_enum:
+ /* Mark the specified section with the supplied address.
+ If this section was actually a segment marker, then the
+ directive is ignored if the linker script explicitly
+ processed the segment marker. Originally, the linker
+ treated segment directives (like -Ttext on the
+ command-line) as section directives. We honor the
+ section directive semantics for backwards compatibility;
+ linker scripts that do not specifically check for
+ SEGMENT_START automatically get the old semantics. */
+ if (!s->address_statement.segment
+ || !s->address_statement.segment->used)
+ {
+ const char *name = s->address_statement.section_name;
+
+ /* Create the output section statement here so that
+ orphans with a set address will be placed after other
+ script sections. If we let the orphan placement code
+ place them in amongst other sections then the address
+ will affect following script sections, which is
+ likely to surprise naive users. */
+ tos = lang_output_section_statement_lookup (name, 0, 1);
+ tos->addr_tree = s->address_statement.address;
+ if (tos->bfd_section == NULL)
+ init_os (tos, 0);
+ }
+ break;
+ case lang_insert_statement_enum:
+ break;
+ case lang_input_matcher_enum:
+ FAIL ();
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/* An insert statement snips out all the linker statements from the
+ start of the list and places them after the output section
+ statement specified by the insert. This operation is complicated
+ by the fact that we keep a doubly linked list of output section
+ statements as well as the singly linked list of all statements.
+ FIXME someday: Twiddling with the list not only moves statements
+ from the user's script but also input and group statements that are
+ built from command line object files and --start-group. We only
+ get away with this because the list pointers used by file_chain
+ and input_file_chain are not reordered, and processing via
+ statement_list after this point mostly ignores input statements.
+ One exception is the map file, where LOAD and START GROUP/END GROUP
+ can end up looking odd. */
+
+static void
+process_insert_statements (lang_statement_union_type **start)
+{
+ lang_statement_union_type **s;
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *first_os = NULL;
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *last_os = NULL;
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os;
+
+ s = start;
+ while (*s != NULL)
+ {
+ if ((*s)->header.type == lang_output_section_statement_enum)
+ {
+ /* Keep pointers to the first and last output section
+ statement in the sequence we may be about to move. */
+ os = &(*s)->output_section_statement;
+
+ ASSERT (last_os == NULL || last_os->next == os);
+ last_os = os;
+
+ /* Set constraint negative so that lang_output_section_find
+ won't match this output section statement. At this
+ stage in linking constraint has values in the range
+ [-1, ONLY_IN_RW]. */
+ last_os->constraint = -2 - last_os->constraint;
+ if (first_os == NULL)
+ first_os = last_os;
+ }
+ else if ((*s)->header.type == lang_group_statement_enum)
+ {
+ /* A user might put -T between --start-group and
+ --end-group. One way this odd construct might arise is
+ from a wrapper around ld to change library search
+ behaviour. For example:
+ #! /bin/sh
+ exec real_ld --start-group "$@" --end-group
+ This isn't completely unreasonable so go looking inside a
+ group statement for insert statements. */
+ process_insert_statements (&(*s)->group_statement.children.head);
+ }
+ else if ((*s)->header.type == lang_insert_statement_enum)
+ {
+ lang_insert_statement_type *i = &(*s)->insert_statement;
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *where;
+ lang_statement_union_type **ptr;
+ lang_statement_union_type *first;
+
+ if (link_info.non_contiguous_regions)
+ {
+ einfo (_("warning: INSERT statement in linker script is "
+ "incompatible with --enable-non-contiguous-regions.\n"));
+ }
+
+ where = lang_output_section_find (i->where);
+ if (where != NULL && i->is_before)
+ {
+ do
+ where = where->prev;
+ while (where != NULL && where->constraint < 0);
+ }
+ if (where == NULL)
+ {
+ einfo (_("%F%P: %s not found for insert\n"), i->where);
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /* Deal with reordering the output section statement list. */
+ if (last_os != NULL)
+ {
+ asection *first_sec, *last_sec;
+ struct lang_output_section_statement_struct **next;
+
+ /* Snip out the output sections we are moving. */
+ first_os->prev->next = last_os->next;
+ if (last_os->next == NULL)
+ {
+ next = &first_os->prev->next;
+ lang_os_list.tail = (lang_statement_union_type **) next;
+ }
+ else
+ last_os->next->prev = first_os->prev;
+ /* Add them in at the new position. */
+ last_os->next = where->next;
+ if (where->next == NULL)
+ {
+ next = &last_os->next;
+ lang_os_list.tail = (lang_statement_union_type **) next;
+ }
+ else
+ where->next->prev = last_os;
+ first_os->prev = where;
+ where->next = first_os;
+
+ /* Move the bfd sections in the same way. */
+ first_sec = NULL;
+ last_sec = NULL;
+ for (os = first_os; os != NULL; os = os->next)
+ {
+ os->constraint = -2 - os->constraint;
+ if (os->bfd_section != NULL
+ && os->bfd_section->owner != NULL)
+ {
+ last_sec = os->bfd_section;
+ if (first_sec == NULL)
+ first_sec = last_sec;
+ }
+ if (os == last_os)
+ break;
+ }
+ if (last_sec != NULL)
+ {
+ asection *sec = where->bfd_section;
+ if (sec == NULL)
+ sec = output_prev_sec_find (where);
+
+ /* The place we want to insert must come after the
+ sections we are moving. So if we find no
+ section or if the section is the same as our
+ last section, then no move is needed. */
+ if (sec != NULL && sec != last_sec)
+ {
+ /* Trim them off. */
+ if (first_sec->prev != NULL)
+ first_sec->prev->next = last_sec->next;
+ else
+ link_info.output_bfd->sections = last_sec->next;
+ if (last_sec->next != NULL)
+ last_sec->next->prev = first_sec->prev;
+ else
+ link_info.output_bfd->section_last = first_sec->prev;
+ /* Add back. */
+ if (sec->owner == NULL)
+ /* SEC is the absolute section, from the
+ first dummy output section statement. Add
+ back the sections we trimmed off to the
+ start of the bfd sections. */
+ sec = NULL;
+ if (sec != NULL)
+ last_sec->next = sec->next;
+ else
+ last_sec->next = link_info.output_bfd->sections;
+ if (last_sec->next != NULL)
+ last_sec->next->prev = last_sec;
+ else
+ link_info.output_bfd->section_last = last_sec;
+ first_sec->prev = sec;
+ if (first_sec->prev != NULL)
+ first_sec->prev->next = first_sec;
+ else
+ link_info.output_bfd->sections = first_sec;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ lang_statement_union_type *after = (void *) where;
+ if (where == &lang_os_list.head->output_section_statement
+ && where->next == first_os)
+ {
+ /* PR30155. Handle a corner case where the statement
+ list is something like the following:
+ . LOAD t.o
+ . .data 0x0000000000000000 0x0
+ . [0x0000000000000000] b = .
+ . *(.data)
+ . .data 0x0000000000000000 0x0 t.o
+ . 0x0000000000000000 0x4 LONG 0x0
+ . INSERT BEFORE .text.start
+ . [0x0000000000000004] a = .
+ . .text.start 0x0000000000000000 0x0
+ . [0x0000000000000000] c = .
+ . OUTPUT(a.out elf64-x86-64)
+ Here we do not want to allow insert_os_after to
+ choose a point inside the list we are moving.
+ That would lose the list. Instead, let
+ insert_os_after work from the INSERT, which in this
+ particular example will result in inserting after
+ the assignment "a = .". */
+ after = *s;
+ }
+ ptr = insert_os_after (after);
+ /* Snip everything from the start of the list, up to and
+ including the insert statement we are currently processing. */
+ first = *start;
+ *start = (*s)->header.next;
+ /* Add them back where they belong, minus the insert. */
+ *s = *ptr;
+ if (*s == NULL)
+ statement_list.tail = s;
+ *ptr = first;
+ s = start;
+ first_os = NULL;
+ last_os = NULL;
+ continue;
+ }
+ s = &(*s)->header.next;
+ }
+
+ /* Undo constraint twiddling. */
+ for (os = first_os; os != NULL; os = os->next)
+ {
+ os->constraint = -2 - os->constraint;
+ if (os == last_os)
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/* An output section might have been removed after its statement was
+ added. For example, ldemul_before_allocation can remove dynamic
+ sections if they turn out to be not needed. Clean them up here. */
+
+void
+strip_excluded_output_sections (void)
+{
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os;
+
+ /* Run lang_size_sections (if not already done). */
+ if (expld.phase != lang_mark_phase_enum)
+ {
+ expld.phase = lang_mark_phase_enum;
+ expld.dataseg.phase = exp_seg_none;
+ one_lang_size_sections_pass (NULL, false);
+ lang_reset_memory_regions ();
+ }
+
+ for (os = (void *) lang_os_list.head;
+ os != NULL;
+ os = os->next)
+ {
+ asection *output_section;
+ bool exclude;
+
+ if (os->constraint < 0)
+ continue;
+
+ output_section = os->bfd_section;
+ if (output_section == NULL)
+ continue;
+
+ exclude = (output_section->rawsize == 0
+ && (output_section->flags & SEC_KEEP) == 0
+ && !bfd_section_removed_from_list (link_info.output_bfd,
+ output_section));
+
+ /* Some sections have not yet been sized, notably .gnu.version,
+ .dynsym, .dynstr and .hash. These all have SEC_LINKER_CREATED
+ input sections, so don't drop output sections that have such
+ input sections unless they are also marked SEC_EXCLUDE. */
+ if (exclude && output_section->map_head.s != NULL)
+ {
+ asection *s;
+
+ for (s = output_section->map_head.s; s != NULL; s = s->map_head.s)
+ if ((s->flags & SEC_EXCLUDE) == 0
+ && ((s->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED) != 0
+ || link_info.emitrelocations))
+ {
+ exclude = false;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+
+ if (exclude)
+ {
+ /* We don't set bfd_section to NULL since bfd_section of the
+ removed output section statement may still be used. */
+ if (!os->update_dot)
+ os->ignored = true;
+ output_section->flags |= SEC_EXCLUDE;
+ bfd_section_list_remove (link_info.output_bfd, output_section);
+ link_info.output_bfd->section_count--;
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/* Called from ldwrite to clear out asection.map_head and
+ asection.map_tail for use as link_orders in ldwrite. */
+
+void
+lang_clear_os_map (void)
+{
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os;
+
+ if (map_head_is_link_order)
+ return;
+
+ for (os = (void *) lang_os_list.head;
+ os != NULL;
+ os = os->next)
+ {
+ asection *output_section;
+
+ if (os->constraint < 0)
+ continue;
+
+ output_section = os->bfd_section;
+ if (output_section == NULL)
+ continue;
+
+ /* TODO: Don't just junk map_head.s, turn them into link_orders. */
+ output_section->map_head.link_order = NULL;
+ output_section->map_tail.link_order = NULL;
+ }
+
+ /* Stop future calls to lang_add_section from messing with map_head
+ and map_tail link_order fields. */
+ map_head_is_link_order = true;
+}
+
+static void
+print_output_section_statement
+ (lang_output_section_statement_type *output_section_statement)
+{
+ asection *section = output_section_statement->bfd_section;
+ int len;
+
+ if (output_section_statement != abs_output_section)
+ {
+ minfo ("\n%s", output_section_statement->name);
+
+ if (section != NULL)
+ {
+ print_dot = section->vma;
+
+ len = strlen (output_section_statement->name);
+ if (len >= SECTION_NAME_MAP_LENGTH - 1)
+ {
+ print_nl ();
+ len = 0;
+ }
+ print_spaces (SECTION_NAME_MAP_LENGTH - len);
+
+ minfo ("0x%V %W", section->vma, TO_ADDR (section->size));
+
+ if (section->vma != section->lma)
+ minfo (_(" load address 0x%V"), section->lma);
+
+ if (output_section_statement->update_dot_tree != NULL)
+ exp_fold_tree (output_section_statement->update_dot_tree,
+ bfd_abs_section_ptr, &print_dot);
+ }
+
+ print_nl ();
+ }
+
+ print_statement_list (output_section_statement->children.head,
+ output_section_statement);
+}
+
+static void
+print_assignment (lang_assignment_statement_type *assignment,
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *output_section)
+{
+ bool is_dot;
+ etree_type *tree;
+ asection *osec;
+
+ print_spaces (SECTION_NAME_MAP_LENGTH);
+
+ if (assignment->exp->type.node_class == etree_assert)
+ {
+ is_dot = false;
+ tree = assignment->exp->assert_s.child;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ const char *dst = assignment->exp->assign.dst;
+
+ is_dot = (dst[0] == '.' && dst[1] == 0);
+ tree = assignment->exp;
+ }
+
+ osec = output_section->bfd_section;
+ if (osec == NULL)
+ osec = bfd_abs_section_ptr;
+
+ if (assignment->exp->type.node_class != etree_provide)
+ exp_fold_tree (tree, osec, &print_dot);
+ else
+ expld.result.valid_p = false;
+
+ char buf[32];
+ const char *str = buf;
+ if (expld.result.valid_p)
+ {
+ bfd_vma value;
+
+ if (assignment->exp->type.node_class == etree_assert
+ || is_dot
+ || expld.assign_name != NULL)
+ {
+ value = expld.result.value;
+
+ if (expld.result.section != NULL)
+ value += expld.result.section->vma;
+
+ buf[0] = '0';
+ buf[1] = 'x';
+ bfd_sprintf_vma (link_info.output_bfd, buf + 2, value);
+ if (is_dot)
+ print_dot = value;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ struct bfd_link_hash_entry *h;
+
+ h = bfd_link_hash_lookup (link_info.hash, assignment->exp->assign.dst,
+ false, false, true);
+ if (h != NULL
+ && (h->type == bfd_link_hash_defined
+ || h->type == bfd_link_hash_defweak))
+ {
+ value = h->u.def.value;
+ value += h->u.def.section->output_section->vma;
+ value += h->u.def.section->output_offset;
+
+ buf[0] = '[';
+ buf[1] = '0';
+ buf[2] = 'x';
+ bfd_sprintf_vma (link_info.output_bfd, buf + 3, value);
+ strcat (buf, "]");
+ }
+ else
+ str = "[unresolved]";
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (assignment->exp->type.node_class == etree_provide)
+ str = "[!provide]";
+ else
+ str = "*undef*";
+ }
+ expld.assign_name = NULL;
+
+ fprintf (config.map_file, "%-34s", str);
+ exp_print_tree (assignment->exp);
+ print_nl ();
+}
+
+static void
+print_input_statement (lang_input_statement_type *statm)
+{
+ if (statm->filename != NULL)
+ fprintf (config.map_file, "LOAD %s\n", statm->filename);
+}
+
+/* Print all symbols defined in a particular section. This is called
+ via bfd_link_hash_traverse, or by print_all_symbols. */
+
+bool
+print_one_symbol (struct bfd_link_hash_entry *hash_entry, void *ptr)
+{
+ asection *sec = (asection *) ptr;
+
+ if ((hash_entry->type == bfd_link_hash_defined
+ || hash_entry->type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)
+ && sec == hash_entry->u.def.section)
+ {
+ print_spaces (SECTION_NAME_MAP_LENGTH);
+ minfo ("0x%V ",
+ (hash_entry->u.def.value
+ + hash_entry->u.def.section->output_offset
+ + hash_entry->u.def.section->output_section->vma));
+
+ minfo (" %pT\n", hash_entry->root.string);
+ }
+
+ return true;
+}
+
+static int
+hash_entry_addr_cmp (const void *a, const void *b)
+{
+ const struct bfd_link_hash_entry *l = *(const struct bfd_link_hash_entry **)a;
+ const struct bfd_link_hash_entry *r = *(const struct bfd_link_hash_entry **)b;
+
+ if (l->u.def.value < r->u.def.value)
+ return -1;
+ else if (l->u.def.value > r->u.def.value)
+ return 1;
+ else
+ return 0;
+}
+
+static void
+print_all_symbols (asection *sec)
+{
+ input_section_userdata_type *ud = bfd_section_userdata (sec);
+ struct map_symbol_def *def;
+ struct bfd_link_hash_entry **entries;
+ unsigned int i;
+
+ if (!ud)
+ return;
+
+ *ud->map_symbol_def_tail = 0;
+
+ /* Sort the symbols by address. */
+ entries = (struct bfd_link_hash_entry **)
+ obstack_alloc (&map_obstack,
+ ud->map_symbol_def_count * sizeof (*entries));
+
+ for (i = 0, def = ud->map_symbol_def_head; def; def = def->next, i++)
+ entries[i] = def->entry;
+
+ qsort (entries, ud->map_symbol_def_count, sizeof (*entries),
+ hash_entry_addr_cmp);
+
+ /* Print the symbols. */
+ for (i = 0; i < ud->map_symbol_def_count; i++)
+ ldemul_print_symbol (entries[i], sec);
+
+ obstack_free (&map_obstack, entries);
+}
+
+/* Returns TRUE if SYM is a symbol suitable for printing
+ in a linker map as a local symbol. */
+
+static bool
+ld_is_local_symbol (asymbol * sym)
+{
+ const char * name = bfd_asymbol_name (sym);
+
+ if (name == NULL || *name == 0)
+ return false;
+
+ if (strcmp (name, "(null)") == 0)
+ return false;
+
+ /* Skip .Lxxx and such like. */
+ if (bfd_is_local_label (link_info.output_bfd, sym))
+ return false;
+
+ /* FIXME: This is intended to skip ARM mapping symbols,
+ which for some reason are not excluded by bfd_is_local_label,
+ but maybe it is wrong for other architectures.
+ It would be better to fix bfd_is_local_label. */
+ if (*name == '$')
+ return false;
+
+ /* Some local symbols, eg _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_, are present
+ in the hash table, so do not print duplicates here. */
+ struct bfd_link_hash_entry * h;
+ h = bfd_link_hash_lookup (link_info.hash, name, false /* create */,
+ false /* copy */, true /* follow */);
+ if (h == NULL)
+ return true;
+
+ /* Symbols from the plugin owned BFD will not get their own
+ iteration of this function, but can be on the link_info
+ list. So include them here. */
+ if (h->u.def.section->owner != NULL
+ && ((bfd_get_file_flags (h->u.def.section->owner) & (BFD_LINKER_CREATED | BFD_PLUGIN))
+ == (BFD_LINKER_CREATED | BFD_PLUGIN)))
+ return true;
+
+ return false;
+}
+
+/* Print information about an input section to the map file. */
+
+static void
+print_input_section (asection *i, bool is_discarded)
+{
+ bfd_size_type size = i->size;
+ int len;
+ bfd_vma addr;
+
+ init_opb (i);
+
+ minfo (" %s", i->name);
+
+ len = 1 + strlen (i->name);
+ if (len >= SECTION_NAME_MAP_LENGTH - 1)
+ {
+ print_nl ();
+ len = 0;
+ }
+ print_spaces (SECTION_NAME_MAP_LENGTH - len);
+
+ if (i->output_section != NULL
+ && i->output_section->owner == link_info.output_bfd)
+ addr = i->output_section->vma + i->output_offset;
+ else
+ {
+ addr = print_dot;
+ if (!is_discarded)
+ size = 0;
+ }
+
+ char buf[32];
+ bfd_sprintf_vma (link_info.output_bfd, buf, addr);
+ minfo ("0x%s %W %pB\n", buf, TO_ADDR (size), i->owner);
+
+ if (size != i->rawsize && i->rawsize != 0)
+ {
+ len = SECTION_NAME_MAP_LENGTH + 3 + strlen (buf);
+ print_spaces (len);
+ minfo (_("%W (size before relaxing)\n"), TO_ADDR (i->rawsize));
+ }
+
+ if (i->output_section != NULL
+ && i->output_section->owner == link_info.output_bfd)
+ {
+ if (link_info.reduce_memory_overheads)
+ bfd_link_hash_traverse (link_info.hash, ldemul_print_symbol, i);
+ else
+ print_all_symbols (i);
+
+ /* Update print_dot, but make sure that we do not move it
+ backwards - this could happen if we have overlays and a
+ later overlay is shorter than an earier one. */
+ if (addr + TO_ADDR (size) > print_dot)
+ print_dot = addr + TO_ADDR (size);
+
+ if (config.print_map_locals)
+ {
+ long storage_needed;
+
+ /* FIXME: It would be better to cache this table, rather
+ than recreating it for each output section. */
+ /* FIXME: This call is not working for non-ELF based targets.
+ Find out why. */
+ storage_needed = bfd_get_symtab_upper_bound (link_info.output_bfd);
+ if (storage_needed > 0)
+ {
+ asymbol ** symbol_table;
+ long number_of_symbols;
+ long j;
+
+ symbol_table = xmalloc (storage_needed);
+ number_of_symbols = bfd_canonicalize_symtab (link_info.output_bfd, symbol_table);
+
+ for (j = 0; j < number_of_symbols; j++)
+ {
+ asymbol * sym = symbol_table[j];
+ bfd_vma sym_addr = sym->value + i->output_section->vma;
+
+ if (sym->section == i->output_section
+ && (sym->flags & BSF_LOCAL) != 0
+ && sym_addr >= addr
+ && sym_addr < print_dot
+ && ld_is_local_symbol (sym))
+ {
+ print_spaces (SECTION_NAME_MAP_LENGTH);
+ minfo ("0x%V (local) %s\n", sym_addr, bfd_asymbol_name (sym));
+ }
+ }
+
+ free (symbol_table);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+static void
+print_fill_statement (lang_fill_statement_type *fill)
+{
+ size_t size;
+ unsigned char *p;
+ fputs (" FILL mask 0x", config.map_file);
+ for (p = fill->fill->data, size = fill->fill->size; size != 0; p++, size--)
+ fprintf (config.map_file, "%02x", *p);
+ fputs ("\n", config.map_file);
+}
+
+static void
+print_data_statement (lang_data_statement_type *data)
+{
+ bfd_vma addr;
+ bfd_size_type size;
+ const char *name;
+
+ init_opb (data->output_section);
+ print_spaces (SECTION_NAME_MAP_LENGTH);
+
+ addr = data->output_offset;
+ if (data->output_section != NULL)
+ addr += data->output_section->vma;
+
+ switch (data->type)
+ {
+ default:
+ abort ();
+ case BYTE:
+ size = BYTE_SIZE;
+ name = "BYTE";
+ break;
+ case SHORT:
+ size = SHORT_SIZE;
+ name = "SHORT";
+ break;
+ case LONG:
+ size = LONG_SIZE;
+ name = "LONG";
+ break;
+ case QUAD:
+ size = QUAD_SIZE;
+ name = "QUAD";
+ break;
+ case SQUAD:
+ size = QUAD_SIZE;
+ name = "SQUAD";
+ break;
+ }
+
+ if (size < TO_SIZE ((unsigned) 1))
+ size = TO_SIZE ((unsigned) 1);
+ minfo ("0x%V %W %s 0x%v", addr, TO_ADDR (size), name, data->value);
+
+ if (data->exp->type.node_class != etree_value)
+ {
+ print_space ();
+ exp_print_tree (data->exp);
+ }
+
+ print_nl ();
+
+ print_dot = addr + TO_ADDR (size);
+}
+
+/* Print an address statement. These are generated by options like
+ -Ttext. */
+
+static void
+print_address_statement (lang_address_statement_type *address)
+{
+ minfo (_("Address of section %s set to "), address->section_name);
+ exp_print_tree (address->address);
+ print_nl ();
+}
+
+/* Print a reloc statement. */
+
+static void
+print_reloc_statement (lang_reloc_statement_type *reloc)
+{
+ bfd_vma addr;
+ bfd_size_type size;
+
+ init_opb (reloc->output_section);
+ print_spaces (SECTION_NAME_MAP_LENGTH);
+
+ addr = reloc->output_offset;
+ if (reloc->output_section != NULL)
+ addr += reloc->output_section->vma;
+
+ size = bfd_get_reloc_size (reloc->howto);
+
+ minfo ("0x%V %W RELOC %s ", addr, TO_ADDR (size), reloc->howto->name);
+
+ if (reloc->name != NULL)
+ minfo ("%s+", reloc->name);
+ else
+ minfo ("%s+", reloc->section->name);
+
+ exp_print_tree (reloc->addend_exp);
+
+ print_nl ();
+
+ print_dot = addr + TO_ADDR (size);
+}
+
+static void
+print_padding_statement (lang_padding_statement_type *s)
+{
+ int len;
+ bfd_vma addr;
+
+ init_opb (s->output_section);
+ minfo (" *fill*");
+
+ len = sizeof " *fill*" - 1;
+ print_spaces (SECTION_NAME_MAP_LENGTH - len);
+
+ addr = s->output_offset;
+ if (s->output_section != NULL)
+ addr += s->output_section->vma;
+ minfo ("0x%V %W ", addr, TO_ADDR (s->size));
+
+ if (s->fill->size != 0)
+ {
+ size_t size;
+ unsigned char *p;
+ for (p = s->fill->data, size = s->fill->size; size != 0; p++, size--)
+ fprintf (config.map_file, "%02x", *p);
+ }
+
+ print_nl ();
+
+ print_dot = addr + TO_ADDR (s->size);
+}
+
+static void
+print_wild_statement (lang_wild_statement_type *w,
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os)
+{
+ struct wildcard_list *sec;
+
+ print_space ();
+
+ if (w->exclude_name_list)
+ {
+ name_list *tmp;
+ minfo ("EXCLUDE_FILE(%s", w->exclude_name_list->name);
+ for (tmp = w->exclude_name_list->next; tmp; tmp = tmp->next)
+ minfo (" %s", tmp->name);
+ minfo (") ");
+ }
+
+ if (w->filenames_sorted)
+ minfo ("SORT_BY_NAME(");
+ if (w->filename != NULL)
+ minfo ("%s", w->filename);
+ else
+ minfo ("*");
+ if (w->filenames_sorted)
+ minfo (")");
+
+ minfo ("(");
+ for (sec = w->section_list; sec; sec = sec->next)
+ {
+ int closing_paren = 0;
+
+ switch (sec->spec.sorted)
+ {
+ case none:
+ break;
+
+ case by_name:
+ minfo ("SORT_BY_NAME(");
+ closing_paren = 1;
+ break;
+
+ case by_alignment:
+ minfo ("SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT(");
+ closing_paren = 1;
+ break;
+
+ case by_name_alignment:
+ minfo ("SORT_BY_NAME(SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT(");
+ closing_paren = 2;
+ break;
+
+ case by_alignment_name:
+ minfo ("SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT(SORT_BY_NAME(");
+ closing_paren = 2;
+ break;
+
+ case by_none:
+ minfo ("SORT_NONE(");
+ closing_paren = 1;
+ break;
+
+ case by_init_priority:
+ minfo ("SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY(");
+ closing_paren = 1;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ if (sec->spec.exclude_name_list != NULL)
+ {
+ name_list *tmp;
+ minfo ("EXCLUDE_FILE(%s", sec->spec.exclude_name_list->name);
+ for (tmp = sec->spec.exclude_name_list->next; tmp; tmp = tmp->next)
+ minfo (" %s", tmp->name);
+ minfo (") ");
+ }
+ if (sec->spec.name != NULL)
+ minfo ("%s", sec->spec.name);
+ else
+ minfo ("*");
+ for (;closing_paren > 0; closing_paren--)
+ minfo (")");
+ if (sec->next)
+ minfo (" ");
+ }
+ minfo (")");
+
+ print_nl ();
+
+ print_statement_list (w->children.head, os);
+}
+
+/* Print a group statement. */
+
+static void
+print_group (lang_group_statement_type *s,
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os)
+{
+ fprintf (config.map_file, "START GROUP\n");
+ print_statement_list (s->children.head, os);
+ fprintf (config.map_file, "END GROUP\n");
+}
+
+/* Print the list of statements in S.
+ This can be called for any statement type. */
+
+static void
+print_statement_list (lang_statement_union_type *s,
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os)
+{
+ while (s != NULL)
+ {
+ print_statement (s, os);
+ s = s->header.next;
+ }
+}
+
+/* Print the first statement in statement list S.
+ This can be called for any statement type. */
+
+static void
+print_statement (lang_statement_union_type *s,
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os)
+{
+ switch (s->header.type)
+ {
+ default:
+ fprintf (config.map_file, _("Fail with %d\n"), s->header.type);
+ FAIL ();
+ break;
+ case lang_constructors_statement_enum:
+ if (constructor_list.head != NULL)
+ {
+ if (constructors_sorted)
+ minfo (" SORT (CONSTRUCTORS)\n");
+ else
+ minfo (" CONSTRUCTORS\n");
+ print_statement_list (constructor_list.head, os);
+ }
+ break;
+ case lang_wild_statement_enum:
+ print_wild_statement (&s->wild_statement, os);
+ break;
+ case lang_address_statement_enum:
+ print_address_statement (&s->address_statement);
+ break;
+ case lang_object_symbols_statement_enum:
+ minfo (" CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS\n");
+ break;
+ case lang_fill_statement_enum:
+ print_fill_statement (&s->fill_statement);
+ break;
+ case lang_data_statement_enum:
+ print_data_statement (&s->data_statement);
+ break;
+ case lang_reloc_statement_enum:
+ print_reloc_statement (&s->reloc_statement);
+ break;
+ case lang_input_section_enum:
+ print_input_section (s->input_section.section, false);
+ break;
+ case lang_padding_statement_enum:
+ print_padding_statement (&s->padding_statement);
+ break;
+ case lang_output_section_statement_enum:
+ print_output_section_statement (&s->output_section_statement);
+ break;
+ case lang_assignment_statement_enum:
+ print_assignment (&s->assignment_statement, os);
+ break;
+ case lang_target_statement_enum:
+ fprintf (config.map_file, "TARGET(%s)\n", s->target_statement.target);
+ break;
+ case lang_output_statement_enum:
+ minfo ("OUTPUT(%s", s->output_statement.name);
+ if (output_target != NULL)
+ minfo (" %s", output_target);
+ minfo (")\n");
+ break;
+ case lang_input_statement_enum:
+ print_input_statement (&s->input_statement);
+ break;
+ case lang_group_statement_enum:
+ print_group (&s->group_statement, os);
+ break;
+ case lang_insert_statement_enum:
+ minfo ("INSERT %s %s\n",
+ s->insert_statement.is_before ? "BEFORE" : "AFTER",
+ s->insert_statement.where);
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+static void
+print_statements (void)
+{
+ print_statement_list (statement_list.head, abs_output_section);
+}
+
+/* Print the first N statements in statement list S to STDERR.
+ If N == 0, nothing is printed.
+ If N < 0, the entire list is printed.
+ Intended to be called from GDB. */
+
+void
+dprint_statement (lang_statement_union_type *s, int n)
+{
+ FILE *map_save = config.map_file;
+
+ config.map_file = stderr;
+
+ if (n < 0)
+ print_statement_list (s, abs_output_section);
+ else
+ {
+ while (s && --n >= 0)
+ {
+ print_statement (s, abs_output_section);
+ s = s->header.next;
+ }
+ }
+
+ config.map_file = map_save;
+}
+
+static void
+insert_pad (lang_statement_union_type **ptr,
+ fill_type *fill,
+ bfd_size_type alignment_needed,
+ asection *output_section,
+ bfd_vma dot)
+{
+ static fill_type zero_fill;
+ lang_statement_union_type *pad = NULL;
+
+ if (ptr != &statement_list.head)
+ pad = ((lang_statement_union_type *)
+ ((char *) ptr - offsetof (lang_statement_union_type, header.next)));
+ if (pad != NULL
+ && pad->header.type == lang_padding_statement_enum
+ && pad->padding_statement.output_section == output_section)
+ {
+ /* Use the existing pad statement. */
+ }
+ else if ((pad = *ptr) != NULL
+ && pad->header.type == lang_padding_statement_enum
+ && pad->padding_statement.output_section == output_section)
+ {
+ /* Use the existing pad statement. */
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Make a new padding statement, linked into existing chain. */
+ pad = stat_alloc (sizeof (lang_padding_statement_type));
+ pad->header.next = *ptr;
+ *ptr = pad;
+ pad->header.type = lang_padding_statement_enum;
+ pad->padding_statement.output_section = output_section;
+ if (fill == NULL)
+ fill = &zero_fill;
+ pad->padding_statement.fill = fill;
+ }
+ pad->padding_statement.output_offset = dot - output_section->vma;
+ pad->padding_statement.size = alignment_needed;
+ if (!(output_section->flags & SEC_FIXED_SIZE))
+ output_section->size = TO_SIZE (dot + TO_ADDR (alignment_needed)
+ - output_section->vma);
+}
+
+/* Work out how much this section will move the dot point. */
+
+static bfd_vma
+size_input_section
+ (lang_statement_union_type **this_ptr,
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *output_section_statement,
+ fill_type *fill,
+ bool *removed,
+ bfd_vma dot)
+{
+ lang_input_section_type *is = &((*this_ptr)->input_section);
+ asection *i = is->section;
+ asection *o = output_section_statement->bfd_section;
+ *removed = 0;
+
+ if (link_info.non_contiguous_regions)
+ {
+ /* If the input section I has already been successfully assigned
+ to an output section other than O, don't bother with it and
+ let the caller remove it from the list. Keep processing in
+ case we have already handled O, because the repeated passes
+ have reinitialized its size. */
+ if (i->already_assigned && i->already_assigned != o)
+ {
+ *removed = 1;
+ return dot;
+ }
+ }
+
+ if (i->sec_info_type == SEC_INFO_TYPE_JUST_SYMS)
+ i->output_offset = i->vma - o->vma;
+ else if (((i->flags & SEC_EXCLUDE) != 0)
+ || output_section_statement->ignored)
+ i->output_offset = dot - o->vma;
+ else
+ {
+ bfd_size_type alignment_needed;
+
+ /* Align this section first to the input sections requirement,
+ then to the output section's requirement. If this alignment
+ is greater than any seen before, then record it too. Perform
+ the alignment by inserting a magic 'padding' statement. */
+
+ if (output_section_statement->subsection_alignment != NULL)
+ i->alignment_power
+ = exp_get_power (output_section_statement->subsection_alignment,
+ "subsection alignment");
+
+ if (o->alignment_power < i->alignment_power)
+ o->alignment_power = i->alignment_power;
+
+ alignment_needed = align_power (dot, i->alignment_power) - dot;
+
+ if (alignment_needed != 0)
+ {
+ insert_pad (this_ptr, fill, TO_SIZE (alignment_needed), o, dot);
+ dot += alignment_needed;
+ }
+
+ if (link_info.non_contiguous_regions)
+ {
+ /* If I would overflow O, let the caller remove I from the
+ list. */
+ if (output_section_statement->region)
+ {
+ bfd_vma end = output_section_statement->region->origin
+ + output_section_statement->region->length;
+
+ if (dot + TO_ADDR (i->size) > end)
+ {
+ if (i->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: Output section `%pA' not large enough for "
+ "the linker-created stubs section `%pA'.\n"),
+ i->output_section, i);
+
+ if (i->rawsize && i->rawsize != i->size)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: Relaxation not supported with "
+ "--enable-non-contiguous-regions (section `%pA' "
+ "would overflow `%pA' after it changed size).\n"),
+ i, i->output_section);
+
+ *removed = 1;
+ dot = end;
+ i->output_section = NULL;
+ return dot;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Remember where in the output section this input section goes. */
+ i->output_offset = dot - o->vma;
+
+ /* Mark how big the output section must be to contain this now. */
+ dot += TO_ADDR (i->size);
+ if (!(o->flags & SEC_FIXED_SIZE))
+ o->size = TO_SIZE (dot - o->vma);
+
+ if (link_info.non_contiguous_regions)
+ {
+ /* Record that I was successfully assigned to O, and update
+ its actual output section too. */
+ i->already_assigned = o;
+ i->output_section = o;
+ }
+ }
+
+ return dot;
+}
+
+struct check_sec
+{
+ asection *sec;
+ bool warned;
+};
+
+static int
+sort_sections_by_lma (const void *arg1, const void *arg2)
+{
+ const asection *sec1 = ((const struct check_sec *) arg1)->sec;
+ const asection *sec2 = ((const struct check_sec *) arg2)->sec;
+
+ if (sec1->lma < sec2->lma)
+ return -1;
+ else if (sec1->lma > sec2->lma)
+ return 1;
+ else if (sec1->id < sec2->id)
+ return -1;
+ else if (sec1->id > sec2->id)
+ return 1;
+
+ return 0;
+}
+
+static int
+sort_sections_by_vma (const void *arg1, const void *arg2)
+{
+ const asection *sec1 = ((const struct check_sec *) arg1)->sec;
+ const asection *sec2 = ((const struct check_sec *) arg2)->sec;
+
+ if (sec1->vma < sec2->vma)
+ return -1;
+ else if (sec1->vma > sec2->vma)
+ return 1;
+ else if (sec1->id < sec2->id)
+ return -1;
+ else if (sec1->id > sec2->id)
+ return 1;
+
+ return 0;
+}
+
+#define IS_TBSS(s) \
+ ((s->flags & (SEC_LOAD | SEC_THREAD_LOCAL)) == SEC_THREAD_LOCAL)
+
+#define IGNORE_SECTION(s) \
+ ((s->flags & SEC_ALLOC) == 0 || IS_TBSS (s))
+
+/* Check to see if any allocated sections overlap with other allocated
+ sections. This can happen if a linker script specifies the output
+ section addresses of the two sections. Also check whether any memory
+ region has overflowed. */
+
+static void
+lang_check_section_addresses (void)
+{
+ asection *s, *p;
+ struct check_sec *sections;
+ size_t i, count;
+ bfd_vma addr_mask;
+ bfd_vma s_start;
+ bfd_vma s_end;
+ bfd_vma p_start = 0;
+ bfd_vma p_end = 0;
+ lang_memory_region_type *m;
+ bool overlays;
+
+ /* Detect address space overflow on allocated sections. */
+ addr_mask = ((bfd_vma) 1 <<
+ (bfd_arch_bits_per_address (link_info.output_bfd) - 1)) - 1;
+ addr_mask = (addr_mask << 1) + 1;
+ for (s = link_info.output_bfd->sections; s != NULL; s = s->next)
+ if ((s->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0)
+ {
+ s_end = (s->vma + s->size) & addr_mask;
+ if (s_end != 0 && s_end < (s->vma & addr_mask))
+ einfo (_("%X%P: section %s VMA wraps around address space\n"),
+ s->name);
+ else
+ {
+ s_end = (s->lma + s->size) & addr_mask;
+ if (s_end != 0 && s_end < (s->lma & addr_mask))
+ einfo (_("%X%P: section %s LMA wraps around address space\n"),
+ s->name);
+ }
+ }
+
+ if (bfd_count_sections (link_info.output_bfd) <= 1)
+ return;
+
+ count = bfd_count_sections (link_info.output_bfd);
+ sections = XNEWVEC (struct check_sec, count);
+
+ /* Scan all sections in the output list. */
+ count = 0;
+ for (s = link_info.output_bfd->sections; s != NULL; s = s->next)
+ {
+ if (IGNORE_SECTION (s)
+ || s->size == 0)
+ continue;
+
+ sections[count].sec = s;
+ sections[count].warned = false;
+ count++;
+ }
+
+ if (count <= 1)
+ {
+ free (sections);
+ return;
+ }
+
+ qsort (sections, count, sizeof (*sections), sort_sections_by_lma);
+
+ /* First check section LMAs. There should be no overlap of LMAs on
+ loadable sections, even with overlays. */
+ for (p = NULL, i = 0; i < count; i++)
+ {
+ s = sections[i].sec;
+ init_opb (s);
+ if ((s->flags & SEC_LOAD) != 0)
+ {
+ s_start = s->lma;
+ s_end = s_start + TO_ADDR (s->size) - 1;
+
+ /* Look for an overlap. We have sorted sections by lma, so
+ we know that s_start >= p_start. Besides the obvious
+ case of overlap when the current section starts before
+ the previous one ends, we also must have overlap if the
+ previous section wraps around the address space. */
+ if (p != NULL
+ && (s_start <= p_end
+ || p_end < p_start))
+ {
+ einfo (_("%X%P: section %s LMA [%V,%V]"
+ " overlaps section %s LMA [%V,%V]\n"),
+ s->name, s_start, s_end, p->name, p_start, p_end);
+ sections[i].warned = true;
+ }
+ p = s;
+ p_start = s_start;
+ p_end = s_end;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* If any non-zero size allocated section (excluding tbss) starts at
+ exactly the same VMA as another such section, then we have
+ overlays. Overlays generated by the OVERLAY keyword will have
+ this property. It is possible to intentionally generate overlays
+ that fail this test, but it would be unusual. */
+ qsort (sections, count, sizeof (*sections), sort_sections_by_vma);
+ overlays = false;
+ p_start = sections[0].sec->vma;
+ for (i = 1; i < count; i++)
+ {
+ s_start = sections[i].sec->vma;
+ if (p_start == s_start)
+ {
+ overlays = true;
+ break;
+ }
+ p_start = s_start;
+ }
+
+ /* Now check section VMAs if no overlays were detected. */
+ if (!overlays)
+ {
+ for (p = NULL, i = 0; i < count; i++)
+ {
+ s = sections[i].sec;
+ init_opb (s);
+ s_start = s->vma;
+ s_end = s_start + TO_ADDR (s->size) - 1;
+
+ if (p != NULL
+ && !sections[i].warned
+ && (s_start <= p_end
+ || p_end < p_start))
+ einfo (_("%X%P: section %s VMA [%V,%V]"
+ " overlaps section %s VMA [%V,%V]\n"),
+ s->name, s_start, s_end, p->name, p_start, p_end);
+ p = s;
+ p_start = s_start;
+ p_end = s_end;
+ }
+ }
+
+ free (sections);
+
+ /* If any memory region has overflowed, report by how much.
+ We do not issue this diagnostic for regions that had sections
+ explicitly placed outside their bounds; os_region_check's
+ diagnostics are adequate for that case.
+
+ FIXME: It is conceivable that m->current - (m->origin + m->length)
+ might overflow a 32-bit integer. There is, alas, no way to print
+ a bfd_vma quantity in decimal. */
+ for (m = lang_memory_region_list; m; m = m->next)
+ if (m->had_full_message)
+ {
+ unsigned long over = m->current - (m->origin + m->length);
+ einfo (ngettext ("%X%P: region `%s' overflowed by %lu byte\n",
+ "%X%P: region `%s' overflowed by %lu bytes\n",
+ over),
+ m->name_list.name, over);
+ }
+}
+
+/* Make sure the new address is within the region. We explicitly permit the
+ current address to be at the exact end of the region when the address is
+ non-zero, in case the region is at the end of addressable memory and the
+ calculation wraps around. */
+
+static void
+os_region_check (lang_output_section_statement_type *os,
+ lang_memory_region_type *region,
+ etree_type *tree,
+ bfd_vma rbase)
+{
+ if ((region->current < region->origin
+ || (region->current - region->origin > region->length))
+ && ((region->current != region->origin + region->length)
+ || rbase == 0))
+ {
+ if (tree != NULL)
+ {
+ einfo (_("%X%P: address 0x%v of %pB section `%s'"
+ " is not within region `%s'\n"),
+ region->current,
+ os->bfd_section->owner,
+ os->bfd_section->name,
+ region->name_list.name);
+ }
+ else if (!region->had_full_message)
+ {
+ region->had_full_message = true;
+
+ einfo (_("%X%P: %pB section `%s' will not fit in region `%s'\n"),
+ os->bfd_section->owner,
+ os->bfd_section->name,
+ region->name_list.name);
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+static void
+ldlang_check_relro_region (lang_statement_union_type *s)
+{
+ seg_align_type *seg = &expld.dataseg;
+
+ if (seg->relro == exp_seg_relro_start)
+ {
+ if (!seg->relro_start_stat)
+ seg->relro_start_stat = s;
+ else
+ {
+ ASSERT (seg->relro_start_stat == s);
+ }
+ }
+ else if (seg->relro == exp_seg_relro_end)
+ {
+ if (!seg->relro_end_stat)
+ seg->relro_end_stat = s;
+ else
+ {
+ ASSERT (seg->relro_end_stat == s);
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/* Set the sizes for all the output sections. */
+
+static bfd_vma
+lang_size_sections_1
+ (lang_statement_union_type **prev,
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *output_section_statement,
+ fill_type *fill,
+ bfd_vma dot,
+ bool *relax,
+ bool check_regions)
+{
+ lang_statement_union_type *s;
+ lang_statement_union_type *prev_s = NULL;
+ bool removed_prev_s = false;
+
+ /* Size up the sections from their constituent parts. */
+ for (s = *prev; s != NULL; prev_s = s, s = s->header.next)
+ {
+ bool removed = false;
+
+ switch (s->header.type)
+ {
+ case lang_output_section_statement_enum:
+ {
+ bfd_vma newdot, after, dotdelta;
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os;
+ lang_memory_region_type *r;
+ int section_alignment = 0;
+
+ os = &s->output_section_statement;
+ init_opb (os->bfd_section);
+ if (os->constraint == -1)
+ break;
+
+ /* FIXME: We shouldn't need to zero section vmas for ld -r
+ here, in lang_insert_orphan, or in the default linker scripts.
+ This is covering for coff backend linker bugs. See PR6945. */
+ if (os->addr_tree == NULL
+ && bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info)
+ && (bfd_get_flavour (link_info.output_bfd)
+ == bfd_target_coff_flavour))
+ os->addr_tree = exp_intop (0);
+ if (os->addr_tree != NULL)
+ {
+ exp_fold_tree (os->addr_tree, bfd_abs_section_ptr, &dot);
+
+ if (expld.result.valid_p)
+ {
+ dot = expld.result.value;
+ if (expld.result.section != NULL)
+ dot += expld.result.section->vma;
+ }
+ else if (expld.phase != lang_mark_phase_enum)
+ einfo (_("%F%P:%pS: non constant or forward reference"
+ " address expression for section %s\n"),
+ os->addr_tree, os->name);
+ }
+
+ if (os->bfd_section == NULL)
+ /* This section was removed or never actually created. */
+ break;
+
+ /* If this is a COFF shared library section, use the size and
+ address from the input section. FIXME: This is COFF
+ specific; it would be cleaner if there were some other way
+ to do this, but nothing simple comes to mind. */
+ if (((bfd_get_flavour (link_info.output_bfd)
+ == bfd_target_ecoff_flavour)
+ || (bfd_get_flavour (link_info.output_bfd)
+ == bfd_target_coff_flavour))
+ && (os->bfd_section->flags & SEC_COFF_SHARED_LIBRARY) != 0)
+ {
+ asection *input;
+
+ if (os->children.head == NULL
+ || os->children.head->header.next != NULL
+ || (os->children.head->header.type
+ != lang_input_section_enum))
+ einfo (_("%X%P: internal error on COFF shared library"
+ " section %s\n"), os->name);
+
+ input = os->children.head->input_section.section;
+ bfd_set_section_vma (os->bfd_section,
+ bfd_section_vma (input));
+ if (!(os->bfd_section->flags & SEC_FIXED_SIZE))
+ os->bfd_section->size = input->size;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ newdot = dot;
+ dotdelta = 0;
+ if (bfd_is_abs_section (os->bfd_section))
+ {
+ /* No matter what happens, an abs section starts at zero. */
+ ASSERT (os->bfd_section->vma == 0);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (os->addr_tree == NULL)
+ {
+ /* No address specified for this section, get one
+ from the region specification. */
+ if (os->region == NULL
+ || ((os->bfd_section->flags & (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD))
+ && os->region->name_list.name[0] == '*'
+ && strcmp (os->region->name_list.name,
+ DEFAULT_MEMORY_REGION) == 0))
+ {
+ os->region = lang_memory_default (os->bfd_section);
+ }
+
+ /* If a loadable section is using the default memory
+ region, and some non default memory regions were
+ defined, issue an error message. */
+ if (!os->ignored
+ && !IGNORE_SECTION (os->bfd_section)
+ && !bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info)
+ && check_regions
+ && strcmp (os->region->name_list.name,
+ DEFAULT_MEMORY_REGION) == 0
+ && lang_memory_region_list != NULL
+ && (strcmp (lang_memory_region_list->name_list.name,
+ DEFAULT_MEMORY_REGION) != 0
+ || lang_memory_region_list->next != NULL)
+ && lang_sizing_iteration == 1)
+ {
+ /* By default this is an error rather than just a
+ warning because if we allocate the section to the
+ default memory region we can end up creating an
+ excessively large binary, or even seg faulting when
+ attempting to perform a negative seek. See
+ sources.redhat.com/ml/binutils/2003-04/msg00423.html
+ for an example of this. This behaviour can be
+ overridden by the using the --no-check-sections
+ switch. */
+ if (command_line.check_section_addresses)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: error: no memory region specified"
+ " for loadable section `%s'\n"),
+ bfd_section_name (os->bfd_section));
+ else
+ einfo (_("%P: warning: no memory region specified"
+ " for loadable section `%s'\n"),
+ bfd_section_name (os->bfd_section));
+ }
+
+ newdot = os->region->current;
+ section_alignment = os->bfd_section->alignment_power;
+ }
+ else
+ section_alignment = exp_get_power (os->section_alignment,
+ "section alignment");
+
+ /* Align to what the section needs. */
+ if (section_alignment > 0)
+ {
+ bfd_vma savedot = newdot;
+ bfd_vma diff = 0;
+
+ newdot = align_power (newdot, section_alignment);
+ dotdelta = newdot - savedot;
+
+ if (lang_sizing_iteration == 1)
+ diff = dotdelta;
+ else if (lang_sizing_iteration > 1)
+ {
+ /* Only report adjustments that would change
+ alignment from what we have already reported. */
+ diff = newdot - os->bfd_section->vma;
+ if (!(diff & (((bfd_vma) 1 << section_alignment) - 1)))
+ diff = 0;
+ }
+ if (diff != 0
+ && (config.warn_section_align
+ || os->addr_tree != NULL))
+ einfo (_("%P: warning: "
+ "start of section %s changed by %ld\n"),
+ os->name, (long) diff);
+ }
+
+ bfd_set_section_vma (os->bfd_section, newdot);
+
+ os->bfd_section->output_offset = 0;
+ }
+
+ lang_size_sections_1 (&os->children.head, os,
+ os->fill, newdot, relax, check_regions);
+
+ os->processed_vma = true;
+
+ if (bfd_is_abs_section (os->bfd_section) || os->ignored)
+ /* Except for some special linker created sections,
+ no output section should change from zero size
+ after strip_excluded_output_sections. A non-zero
+ size on an ignored section indicates that some
+ input section was not sized early enough. */
+ ASSERT (os->bfd_section->size == 0);
+ else
+ {
+ dot = os->bfd_section->vma;
+
+ /* Put the section within the requested block size, or
+ align at the block boundary. */
+ after = ((dot
+ + TO_ADDR (os->bfd_section->size)
+ + os->block_value - 1)
+ & - (bfd_vma) os->block_value);
+
+ if (!(os->bfd_section->flags & SEC_FIXED_SIZE))
+ os->bfd_section->size = TO_SIZE (after
+ - os->bfd_section->vma);
+ }
+
+ /* Set section lma. */
+ r = os->region;
+ if (r == NULL)
+ r = lang_memory_region_lookup (DEFAULT_MEMORY_REGION, false);
+
+ if (os->load_base)
+ {
+ bfd_vma lma = exp_get_abs_int (os->load_base, 0, "load base");
+ os->bfd_section->lma = lma;
+ }
+ else if (os->lma_region != NULL)
+ {
+ bfd_vma lma = os->lma_region->current;
+
+ if (os->align_lma_with_input)
+ lma += dotdelta;
+ else
+ {
+ /* When LMA_REGION is the same as REGION, align the LMA
+ as we did for the VMA, possibly including alignment
+ from the bfd section. If a different region, then
+ only align according to the value in the output
+ statement. */
+ if (os->lma_region != os->region)
+ section_alignment = exp_get_power (os->section_alignment,
+ "section alignment");
+ if (section_alignment > 0)
+ lma = align_power (lma, section_alignment);
+ }
+ os->bfd_section->lma = lma;
+ }
+ else if (r->last_os != NULL
+ && (os->bfd_section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0)
+ {
+ bfd_vma lma;
+ asection *last;
+
+ last = r->last_os->output_section_statement.bfd_section;
+
+ /* A backwards move of dot should be accompanied by
+ an explicit assignment to the section LMA (ie.
+ os->load_base set) because backwards moves can
+ create overlapping LMAs. */
+ if (dot < last->vma
+ && os->bfd_section->size != 0
+ && dot + TO_ADDR (os->bfd_section->size) <= last->vma)
+ {
+ /* If dot moved backwards then leave lma equal to
+ vma. This is the old default lma, which might
+ just happen to work when the backwards move is
+ sufficiently large. Nag if this changes anything,
+ so people can fix their linker scripts. */
+
+ if (last->vma != last->lma)
+ einfo (_("%P: warning: dot moved backwards "
+ "before `%s'\n"), os->name);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* If this is an overlay, set the current lma to that
+ at the end of the previous section. */
+ if (os->sectype == overlay_section)
+ lma = last->lma + TO_ADDR (last->size);
+
+ /* Otherwise, keep the same lma to vma relationship
+ as the previous section. */
+ else
+ lma = os->bfd_section->vma + last->lma - last->vma;
+
+ if (section_alignment > 0)
+ lma = align_power (lma, section_alignment);
+ os->bfd_section->lma = lma;
+ }
+ }
+ os->processed_lma = true;
+
+ /* Keep track of normal sections using the default
+ lma region. We use this to set the lma for
+ following sections. Overlays or other linker
+ script assignment to lma might mean that the
+ default lma == vma is incorrect.
+ To avoid warnings about dot moving backwards when using
+ -Ttext, don't start tracking sections until we find one
+ of non-zero size or with lma set differently to vma.
+ Do this tracking before we short-cut the loop so that we
+ track changes for the case where the section size is zero,
+ but the lma is set differently to the vma. This is
+ important, if an orphan section is placed after an
+ otherwise empty output section that has an explicit lma
+ set, we want that lma reflected in the orphans lma. */
+ if (((!IGNORE_SECTION (os->bfd_section)
+ && (os->bfd_section->size != 0
+ || (r->last_os == NULL
+ && os->bfd_section->vma != os->bfd_section->lma)
+ || (r->last_os != NULL
+ && dot >= (r->last_os->output_section_statement
+ .bfd_section->vma))))
+ || os->sectype == first_overlay_section)
+ && os->lma_region == NULL
+ && !bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info))
+ r->last_os = s;
+
+ if (bfd_is_abs_section (os->bfd_section) || os->ignored)
+ break;
+
+ /* .tbss sections effectively have zero size. */
+ if (!IS_TBSS (os->bfd_section)
+ || bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info))
+ dotdelta = TO_ADDR (os->bfd_section->size);
+ else
+ dotdelta = 0;
+ dot += dotdelta;
+
+ if (os->update_dot_tree != 0)
+ exp_fold_tree (os->update_dot_tree, bfd_abs_section_ptr, &dot);
+
+ /* Update dot in the region ?
+ We only do this if the section is going to be allocated,
+ since unallocated sections do not contribute to the region's
+ overall size in memory. */
+ if (os->region != NULL
+ && (os->bfd_section->flags & (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD)))
+ {
+ os->region->current = dot;
+
+ if (check_regions)
+ /* Make sure the new address is within the region. */
+ os_region_check (os, os->region, os->addr_tree,
+ os->bfd_section->vma);
+
+ if (os->lma_region != NULL && os->lma_region != os->region
+ && ((os->bfd_section->flags & SEC_LOAD)
+ || os->align_lma_with_input))
+ {
+ os->lma_region->current = os->bfd_section->lma + dotdelta;
+
+ if (check_regions)
+ os_region_check (os, os->lma_region, NULL,
+ os->bfd_section->lma);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case lang_constructors_statement_enum:
+ dot = lang_size_sections_1 (&constructor_list.head,
+ output_section_statement,
+ fill, dot, relax, check_regions);
+ break;
+
+ case lang_data_statement_enum:
+ {
+ unsigned int size = 0;
+
+ s->data_statement.output_offset =
+ dot - output_section_statement->bfd_section->vma;
+ s->data_statement.output_section =
+ output_section_statement->bfd_section;
+
+ /* We might refer to provided symbols in the expression, and
+ need to mark them as needed. */
+ exp_fold_tree (s->data_statement.exp, bfd_abs_section_ptr, &dot);
+
+ switch (s->data_statement.type)
+ {
+ default:
+ abort ();
+ case QUAD:
+ case SQUAD:
+ size = QUAD_SIZE;
+ break;
+ case LONG:
+ size = LONG_SIZE;
+ break;
+ case SHORT:
+ size = SHORT_SIZE;
+ break;
+ case BYTE:
+ size = BYTE_SIZE;
+ break;
+ }
+ if (size < TO_SIZE ((unsigned) 1))
+ size = TO_SIZE ((unsigned) 1);
+ dot += TO_ADDR (size);
+ if (!(output_section_statement->bfd_section->flags
+ & SEC_FIXED_SIZE))
+ output_section_statement->bfd_section->size
+ = TO_SIZE (dot - output_section_statement->bfd_section->vma);
+
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case lang_reloc_statement_enum:
+ {
+ int size;
+
+ s->reloc_statement.output_offset =
+ dot - output_section_statement->bfd_section->vma;
+ s->reloc_statement.output_section =
+ output_section_statement->bfd_section;
+ size = bfd_get_reloc_size (s->reloc_statement.howto);
+ dot += TO_ADDR (size);
+ if (!(output_section_statement->bfd_section->flags
+ & SEC_FIXED_SIZE))
+ output_section_statement->bfd_section->size
+ = TO_SIZE (dot - output_section_statement->bfd_section->vma);
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case lang_wild_statement_enum:
+ dot = lang_size_sections_1 (&s->wild_statement.children.head,
+ output_section_statement,
+ fill, dot, relax, check_regions);
+ break;
+
+ case lang_object_symbols_statement_enum:
+ link_info.create_object_symbols_section
+ = output_section_statement->bfd_section;
+ output_section_statement->bfd_section->flags |= SEC_KEEP;
+ break;
+
+ case lang_output_statement_enum:
+ case lang_target_statement_enum:
+ break;
+
+ case lang_input_section_enum:
+ {
+ asection *i;
+
+ i = s->input_section.section;
+ if (relax)
+ {
+ bool again;
+
+ if (!bfd_relax_section (i->owner, i, &link_info, &again))
+ einfo (_("%F%P: can't relax section: %E\n"));
+ if (again)
+ *relax = true;
+ }
+ dot = size_input_section (prev, output_section_statement,
+ fill, &removed, dot);
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case lang_input_statement_enum:
+ break;
+
+ case lang_fill_statement_enum:
+ s->fill_statement.output_section =
+ output_section_statement->bfd_section;
+
+ fill = s->fill_statement.fill;
+ break;
+
+ case lang_assignment_statement_enum:
+ {
+ bfd_vma newdot = dot;
+ etree_type *tree = s->assignment_statement.exp;
+
+ expld.dataseg.relro = exp_seg_relro_none;
+
+ exp_fold_tree (tree,
+ output_section_statement->bfd_section,
+ &newdot);
+
+ ldlang_check_relro_region (s);
+
+ expld.dataseg.relro = exp_seg_relro_none;
+
+ /* This symbol may be relative to this section. */
+ if ((tree->type.node_class == etree_provided
+ || tree->type.node_class == etree_assign)
+ && (tree->assign.dst [0] != '.'
+ || tree->assign.dst [1] != '\0'))
+ output_section_statement->update_dot = 1;
+
+ if (!output_section_statement->ignored)
+ {
+ if (output_section_statement == abs_output_section)
+ {
+ /* If we don't have an output section, then just adjust
+ the default memory address. */
+ lang_memory_region_lookup (DEFAULT_MEMORY_REGION,
+ false)->current = newdot;
+ }
+ else if (newdot != dot)
+ {
+ /* Insert a pad after this statement. We can't
+ put the pad before when relaxing, in case the
+ assignment references dot. */
+ insert_pad (&s->header.next, fill, TO_SIZE (newdot - dot),
+ output_section_statement->bfd_section, dot);
+
+ /* Don't neuter the pad below when relaxing. */
+ s = s->header.next;
+
+ /* If dot is advanced, this implies that the section
+ should have space allocated to it, unless the
+ user has explicitly stated that the section
+ should not be allocated. */
+ if (output_section_statement->sectype != noalloc_section
+ && (output_section_statement->sectype != noload_section
+ || (bfd_get_flavour (link_info.output_bfd)
+ == bfd_target_elf_flavour)))
+ output_section_statement->bfd_section->flags |= SEC_ALLOC;
+ }
+ dot = newdot;
+ }
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case lang_padding_statement_enum:
+ /* If this is the first time lang_size_sections is called,
+ we won't have any padding statements. If this is the
+ second or later passes when relaxing, we should allow
+ padding to shrink. If padding is needed on this pass, it
+ will be added back in. */
+ s->padding_statement.size = 0;
+
+ /* Make sure output_offset is valid. If relaxation shrinks
+ the section and this pad isn't needed, it's possible to
+ have output_offset larger than the final size of the
+ section. bfd_set_section_contents will complain even for
+ a pad size of zero. */
+ s->padding_statement.output_offset
+ = dot - output_section_statement->bfd_section->vma;
+ break;
+
+ case lang_group_statement_enum:
+ dot = lang_size_sections_1 (&s->group_statement.children.head,
+ output_section_statement,
+ fill, dot, relax, check_regions);
+ break;
+
+ case lang_insert_statement_enum:
+ break;
+
+ /* We can only get here when relaxing is turned on. */
+ case lang_address_statement_enum:
+ break;
+
+ default:
+ FAIL ();
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* If an input section doesn't fit in the current output
+ section, remove it from the list. Handle the case where we
+ have to remove an input_section statement here: there is a
+ special case to remove the first element of the list. */
+ if (link_info.non_contiguous_regions && removed)
+ {
+ /* If we removed the first element during the previous
+ iteration, override the loop assignment of prev_s. */
+ if (removed_prev_s)
+ prev_s = NULL;
+
+ if (prev_s)
+ {
+ /* If there was a real previous input section, just skip
+ the current one. */
+ prev_s->header.next=s->header.next;
+ s = prev_s;
+ removed_prev_s = false;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Remove the first input section of the list. */
+ *prev = s->header.next;
+ removed_prev_s = true;
+ }
+
+ /* Move to next element, unless we removed the head of the
+ list. */
+ if (!removed_prev_s)
+ prev = &s->header.next;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ prev = &s->header.next;
+ removed_prev_s = false;
+ }
+ }
+ return dot;
+}
+
+/* Callback routine that is used in _bfd_elf_map_sections_to_segments.
+ The BFD library has set NEW_SEGMENT to TRUE iff it thinks that
+ CURRENT_SECTION and PREVIOUS_SECTION ought to be placed into different
+ segments. We are allowed an opportunity to override this decision. */
+
+bool
+ldlang_override_segment_assignment (struct bfd_link_info *info ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
+ bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
+ asection *current_section,
+ asection *previous_section,
+ bool new_segment)
+{
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *cur;
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *prev;
+
+ /* The checks below are only necessary when the BFD library has decided
+ that the two sections ought to be placed into the same segment. */
+ if (new_segment)
+ return true;
+
+ /* Paranoia checks. */
+ if (current_section == NULL || previous_section == NULL)
+ return new_segment;
+
+ /* If this flag is set, the target never wants code and non-code
+ sections comingled in the same segment. */
+ if (config.separate_code
+ && ((current_section->flags ^ previous_section->flags) & SEC_CODE))
+ return true;
+
+ /* Find the memory regions associated with the two sections.
+ We call lang_output_section_find() here rather than scanning the list
+ of output sections looking for a matching section pointer because if
+ we have a large number of sections then a hash lookup is faster. */
+ cur = lang_output_section_find (current_section->name);
+ prev = lang_output_section_find (previous_section->name);
+
+ /* More paranoia. */
+ if (cur == NULL || prev == NULL)
+ return new_segment;
+
+ /* If the regions are different then force the sections to live in
+ different segments. See the email thread starting at the following
+ URL for the reasons why this is necessary:
+ http://sourceware.org/ml/binutils/2007-02/msg00216.html */
+ return cur->region != prev->region;
+}
+
+void
+one_lang_size_sections_pass (bool *relax, bool check_regions)
+{
+ lang_statement_iteration++;
+ if (expld.phase != lang_mark_phase_enum)
+ lang_sizing_iteration++;
+ lang_size_sections_1 (&statement_list.head, abs_output_section,
+ 0, 0, relax, check_regions);
+}
+
+static bool
+lang_size_segment (void)
+{
+ /* If XXX_SEGMENT_ALIGN XXX_SEGMENT_END pair was seen, check whether
+ a page could be saved in the data segment. */
+ seg_align_type *seg = &expld.dataseg;
+ bfd_vma first, last;
+
+ first = -seg->base & (seg->commonpagesize - 1);
+ last = seg->end & (seg->commonpagesize - 1);
+ if (first && last
+ && ((seg->base & ~(seg->commonpagesize - 1))
+ != (seg->end & ~(seg->commonpagesize - 1)))
+ && first + last <= seg->commonpagesize)
+ {
+ seg->phase = exp_seg_adjust;
+ return true;
+ }
+
+ seg->phase = exp_seg_done;
+ return false;
+}
+
+static bfd_vma
+lang_size_relro_segment_1 (void)
+{
+ seg_align_type *seg = &expld.dataseg;
+ bfd_vma relro_end, desired_end;
+ asection *sec;
+
+ /* Compute the expected PT_GNU_RELRO/PT_LOAD segment end. */
+ relro_end = (seg->relro_end + seg->relropagesize - 1) & -seg->relropagesize;
+
+ /* Adjust by the offset arg of XXX_SEGMENT_RELRO_END. */
+ desired_end = relro_end - seg->relro_offset;
+
+ /* For sections in the relro segment.. */
+ for (sec = link_info.output_bfd->section_last; sec; sec = sec->prev)
+ if ((sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0
+ && sec->vma >= seg->base
+ && sec->vma < seg->relro_end - seg->relro_offset)
+ {
+ /* Where do we want to put this section so that it ends as
+ desired? */
+ bfd_vma start, end, bump;
+
+ end = start = sec->vma;
+ if (!IS_TBSS (sec))
+ end += TO_ADDR (sec->size);
+ bump = desired_end - end;
+ /* We'd like to increase START by BUMP, but we must heed
+ alignment so the increase might be less than optimum. */
+ start += bump;
+ start &= ~(((bfd_vma) 1 << sec->alignment_power) - 1);
+ /* This is now the desired end for the previous section. */
+ desired_end = start;
+ }
+
+ seg->phase = exp_seg_relro_adjust;
+ ASSERT (desired_end >= seg->base);
+ seg->base = desired_end;
+ return relro_end;
+}
+
+static bool
+lang_size_relro_segment (bool *relax, bool check_regions)
+{
+ bool do_reset = false;
+
+ if (link_info.relro && expld.dataseg.relro_end)
+ {
+ bfd_vma data_initial_base = expld.dataseg.base;
+ bfd_vma data_relro_end = lang_size_relro_segment_1 ();
+
+ lang_reset_memory_regions ();
+ one_lang_size_sections_pass (relax, check_regions);
+
+ /* Assignments to dot, or to output section address in a user
+ script have increased padding over the original. Revert. */
+ if (expld.dataseg.relro_end > data_relro_end)
+ {
+ expld.dataseg.base = data_initial_base;
+ do_reset = true;
+ }
+ }
+ else if (lang_size_segment ())
+ do_reset = true;
+
+ return do_reset;
+}
+
+void
+lang_size_sections (bool *relax, bool check_regions)
+{
+ expld.phase = lang_allocating_phase_enum;
+ expld.dataseg.phase = exp_seg_none;
+
+ one_lang_size_sections_pass (relax, check_regions);
+
+ if (expld.dataseg.phase != exp_seg_end_seen)
+ expld.dataseg.phase = exp_seg_done;
+
+ if (expld.dataseg.phase == exp_seg_end_seen)
+ {
+ bool do_reset
+ = lang_size_relro_segment (relax, check_regions);
+
+ if (do_reset)
+ {
+ lang_reset_memory_regions ();
+ one_lang_size_sections_pass (relax, check_regions);
+ }
+
+ if (link_info.relro && expld.dataseg.relro_end)
+ {
+ link_info.relro_start = expld.dataseg.base;
+ link_info.relro_end = expld.dataseg.relro_end;
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+static lang_output_section_statement_type *current_section;
+static lang_assignment_statement_type *current_assign;
+static bool prefer_next_section;
+
+/* Worker function for lang_do_assignments. Recursiveness goes here. */
+
+static bfd_vma
+lang_do_assignments_1 (lang_statement_union_type *s,
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *current_os,
+ fill_type *fill,
+ bfd_vma dot,
+ bool *found_end)
+{
+ for (; s != NULL; s = s->header.next)
+ {
+ switch (s->header.type)
+ {
+ case lang_constructors_statement_enum:
+ dot = lang_do_assignments_1 (constructor_list.head,
+ current_os, fill, dot, found_end);
+ break;
+
+ case lang_output_section_statement_enum:
+ {
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os;
+ bfd_vma newdot;
+
+ os = &(s->output_section_statement);
+ os->after_end = *found_end;
+ init_opb (os->bfd_section);
+ newdot = dot;
+ if (os->bfd_section != NULL)
+ {
+ if (!os->ignored && (os->bfd_section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0)
+ {
+ current_section = os;
+ prefer_next_section = false;
+ }
+ newdot = os->bfd_section->vma;
+ }
+ newdot = lang_do_assignments_1 (os->children.head,
+ os, os->fill, newdot, found_end);
+ if (!os->ignored)
+ {
+ if (os->bfd_section != NULL)
+ {
+ newdot = os->bfd_section->vma;
+
+ /* .tbss sections effectively have zero size. */
+ if (!IS_TBSS (os->bfd_section)
+ || bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info))
+ newdot += TO_ADDR (os->bfd_section->size);
+
+ if (os->update_dot_tree != NULL)
+ exp_fold_tree (os->update_dot_tree,
+ bfd_abs_section_ptr, &newdot);
+ }
+ dot = newdot;
+ }
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case lang_wild_statement_enum:
+
+ dot = lang_do_assignments_1 (s->wild_statement.children.head,
+ current_os, fill, dot, found_end);
+ break;
+
+ case lang_object_symbols_statement_enum:
+ case lang_output_statement_enum:
+ case lang_target_statement_enum:
+ break;
+
+ case lang_data_statement_enum:
+ exp_fold_tree (s->data_statement.exp, bfd_abs_section_ptr, &dot);
+ if (expld.result.valid_p)
+ {
+ s->data_statement.value = expld.result.value;
+ if (expld.result.section != NULL)
+ s->data_statement.value += expld.result.section->vma;
+ }
+ else if (expld.phase == lang_final_phase_enum)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: invalid data statement\n"));
+ {
+ unsigned int size;
+ switch (s->data_statement.type)
+ {
+ default:
+ abort ();
+ case QUAD:
+ case SQUAD:
+ size = QUAD_SIZE;
+ break;
+ case LONG:
+ size = LONG_SIZE;
+ break;
+ case SHORT:
+ size = SHORT_SIZE;
+ break;
+ case BYTE:
+ size = BYTE_SIZE;
+ break;
+ }
+ if (size < TO_SIZE ((unsigned) 1))
+ size = TO_SIZE ((unsigned) 1);
+ dot += TO_ADDR (size);
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case lang_reloc_statement_enum:
+ exp_fold_tree (s->reloc_statement.addend_exp,
+ bfd_abs_section_ptr, &dot);
+ if (expld.result.valid_p)
+ s->reloc_statement.addend_value = expld.result.value;
+ else if (expld.phase == lang_final_phase_enum)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: invalid reloc statement\n"));
+ dot += TO_ADDR (bfd_get_reloc_size (s->reloc_statement.howto));
+ break;
+
+ case lang_input_section_enum:
+ {
+ asection *in = s->input_section.section;
+
+ if ((in->flags & SEC_EXCLUDE) == 0)
+ dot += TO_ADDR (in->size);
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case lang_input_statement_enum:
+ break;
+
+ case lang_fill_statement_enum:
+ fill = s->fill_statement.fill;
+ break;
+
+ case lang_assignment_statement_enum:
+ current_assign = &s->assignment_statement;
+ if (current_assign->exp->type.node_class != etree_assert)
+ {
+ const char *p = current_assign->exp->assign.dst;
+
+ if (current_os == abs_output_section && p[0] == '.' && p[1] == 0)
+ prefer_next_section = true;
+
+ while (*p == '_')
+ ++p;
+ if (strcmp (p, "end") == 0)
+ *found_end = true;
+ }
+ exp_fold_tree (s->assignment_statement.exp,
+ (current_os->bfd_section != NULL
+ ? current_os->bfd_section : bfd_und_section_ptr),
+ &dot);
+ break;
+
+ case lang_padding_statement_enum:
+ dot += TO_ADDR (s->padding_statement.size);
+ break;
+
+ case lang_group_statement_enum:
+ dot = lang_do_assignments_1 (s->group_statement.children.head,
+ current_os, fill, dot, found_end);
+ break;
+
+ case lang_insert_statement_enum:
+ break;
+
+ case lang_address_statement_enum:
+ break;
+
+ default:
+ FAIL ();
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ return dot;
+}
+
+void
+lang_do_assignments (lang_phase_type phase)
+{
+ bool found_end = false;
+
+ current_section = NULL;
+ prefer_next_section = false;
+ expld.phase = phase;
+ lang_statement_iteration++;
+ lang_do_assignments_1 (statement_list.head,
+ abs_output_section, NULL, 0, &found_end);
+}
+
+/* For an assignment statement outside of an output section statement,
+ choose the best of neighbouring output sections to use for values
+ of "dot". */
+
+asection *
+section_for_dot (void)
+{
+ asection *s;
+
+ /* Assignments belong to the previous output section, unless there
+ has been an assignment to "dot", in which case following
+ assignments belong to the next output section. (The assumption
+ is that an assignment to "dot" is setting up the address for the
+ next output section.) Except that past the assignment to "_end"
+ we always associate with the previous section. This exception is
+ for targets like SH that define an alloc .stack or other
+ weirdness after non-alloc sections. */
+ if (current_section == NULL || prefer_next_section)
+ {
+ lang_statement_union_type *stmt;
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os;
+
+ for (stmt = (lang_statement_union_type *) current_assign;
+ stmt != NULL;
+ stmt = stmt->header.next)
+ if (stmt->header.type == lang_output_section_statement_enum)
+ break;
+
+ os = stmt ? &stmt->output_section_statement : NULL;
+ while (os != NULL
+ && !os->after_end
+ && (os->bfd_section == NULL
+ || (os->bfd_section->flags & SEC_EXCLUDE) != 0
+ || bfd_section_removed_from_list (link_info.output_bfd,
+ os->bfd_section)))
+ os = os->next;
+
+ if (current_section == NULL || os == NULL || !os->after_end)
+ {
+ if (os != NULL)
+ s = os->bfd_section;
+ else
+ s = link_info.output_bfd->section_last;
+ while (s != NULL
+ && ((s->flags & SEC_ALLOC) == 0
+ || (s->flags & SEC_THREAD_LOCAL) != 0))
+ s = s->prev;
+ if (s != NULL)
+ return s;
+
+ return bfd_abs_section_ptr;
+ }
+ }
+
+ s = current_section->bfd_section;
+
+ /* The section may have been stripped. */
+ while (s != NULL
+ && ((s->flags & SEC_EXCLUDE) != 0
+ || (s->flags & SEC_ALLOC) == 0
+ || (s->flags & SEC_THREAD_LOCAL) != 0
+ || bfd_section_removed_from_list (link_info.output_bfd, s)))
+ s = s->prev;
+ if (s == NULL)
+ s = link_info.output_bfd->sections;
+ while (s != NULL
+ && ((s->flags & SEC_ALLOC) == 0
+ || (s->flags & SEC_THREAD_LOCAL) != 0))
+ s = s->next;
+ if (s != NULL)
+ return s;
+
+ return bfd_abs_section_ptr;
+}
+
+/* Array of __start/__stop/.startof./.sizeof/ symbols. */
+
+static struct bfd_link_hash_entry **start_stop_syms;
+static size_t start_stop_count = 0;
+static size_t start_stop_alloc = 0;
+
+/* Give start/stop SYMBOL for SEC a preliminary definition, and add it
+ to start_stop_syms. */
+
+static void
+lang_define_start_stop (const char *symbol, asection *sec)
+{
+ struct bfd_link_hash_entry *h;
+
+ h = bfd_define_start_stop (link_info.output_bfd, &link_info, symbol, sec);
+ if (h != NULL)
+ {
+ if (start_stop_count == start_stop_alloc)
+ {
+ start_stop_alloc = 2 * start_stop_alloc + 10;
+ start_stop_syms
+ = xrealloc (start_stop_syms,
+ start_stop_alloc * sizeof (*start_stop_syms));
+ }
+ start_stop_syms[start_stop_count++] = h;
+ }
+}
+
+/* Check for input sections whose names match references to
+ __start_SECNAME or __stop_SECNAME symbols. Give the symbols
+ preliminary definitions. */
+
+static void
+lang_init_start_stop (void)
+{
+ bfd *abfd;
+ asection *s;
+ char leading_char = bfd_get_symbol_leading_char (link_info.output_bfd);
+
+ for (abfd = link_info.input_bfds; abfd != NULL; abfd = abfd->link.next)
+ for (s = abfd->sections; s != NULL; s = s->next)
+ {
+ const char *ps;
+ const char *secname = s->name;
+
+ for (ps = secname; *ps != '\0'; ps++)
+ if (!ISALNUM ((unsigned char) *ps) && *ps != '_')
+ break;
+ if (*ps == '\0')
+ {
+ char *symbol = (char *) xmalloc (10 + strlen (secname));
+
+ symbol[0] = leading_char;
+ sprintf (symbol + (leading_char != 0), "__start_%s", secname);
+ lang_define_start_stop (symbol, s);
+
+ symbol[1] = leading_char;
+ memcpy (symbol + 1 + (leading_char != 0), "__stop", 6);
+ lang_define_start_stop (symbol + 1, s);
+
+ free (symbol);
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/* Iterate over start_stop_syms. */
+
+static void
+foreach_start_stop (void (*func) (struct bfd_link_hash_entry *))
+{
+ size_t i;
+
+ for (i = 0; i < start_stop_count; ++i)
+ func (start_stop_syms[i]);
+}
+
+/* __start and __stop symbols are only supposed to be defined by the
+ linker for orphan sections, but we now extend that to sections that
+ map to an output section of the same name. The symbols were
+ defined early for --gc-sections, before we mapped input to output
+ sections, so undo those that don't satisfy this rule. */
+
+static void
+undef_start_stop (struct bfd_link_hash_entry *h)
+{
+ if (h->ldscript_def)
+ return;
+
+ if (h->u.def.section->output_section == NULL
+ || h->u.def.section->output_section->owner != link_info.output_bfd
+ || strcmp (h->u.def.section->name,
+ h->u.def.section->output_section->name) != 0)
+ {
+ asection *sec = bfd_get_section_by_name (link_info.output_bfd,
+ h->u.def.section->name);
+ if (sec != NULL)
+ {
+ /* When there are more than one input sections with the same
+ section name, SECNAME, linker picks the first one to define
+ __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME symbols. When the first
+ input section is removed by comdat group, we need to check
+ if there is still an output section with section name
+ SECNAME. */
+ asection *i;
+ for (i = sec->map_head.s; i != NULL; i = i->map_head.s)
+ if (strcmp (h->u.def.section->name, i->name) == 0)
+ {
+ h->u.def.section = i;
+ return;
+ }
+ }
+ h->type = bfd_link_hash_undefined;
+ h->u.undef.abfd = NULL;
+ if (is_elf_hash_table (link_info.hash))
+ {
+ const struct elf_backend_data *bed;
+ struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh = (struct elf_link_hash_entry *) h;
+ unsigned int was_forced = eh->forced_local;
+
+ bed = get_elf_backend_data (link_info.output_bfd);
+ (*bed->elf_backend_hide_symbol) (&link_info, eh, true);
+ if (!eh->ref_regular_nonweak)
+ h->type = bfd_link_hash_undefweak;
+ eh->def_regular = 0;
+ eh->forced_local = was_forced;
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+static void
+lang_undef_start_stop (void)
+{
+ foreach_start_stop (undef_start_stop);
+}
+
+/* Check for output sections whose names match references to
+ .startof.SECNAME or .sizeof.SECNAME symbols. Give the symbols
+ preliminary definitions. */
+
+static void
+lang_init_startof_sizeof (void)
+{
+ asection *s;
+
+ for (s = link_info.output_bfd->sections; s != NULL; s = s->next)
+ {
+ const char *secname = s->name;
+ char *symbol = (char *) xmalloc (10 + strlen (secname));
+
+ sprintf (symbol, ".startof.%s", secname);
+ lang_define_start_stop (symbol, s);
+
+ memcpy (symbol + 1, ".size", 5);
+ lang_define_start_stop (symbol + 1, s);
+ free (symbol);
+ }
+}
+
+/* Set .startof., .sizeof., __start and __stop symbols final values. */
+
+static void
+set_start_stop (struct bfd_link_hash_entry *h)
+{
+ if (h->ldscript_def
+ || h->type != bfd_link_hash_defined)
+ return;
+
+ if (h->root.string[0] == '.')
+ {
+ /* .startof. or .sizeof. symbol.
+ .startof. already has final value. */
+ if (h->root.string[2] == 'i')
+ {
+ /* .sizeof. */
+ h->u.def.value = TO_ADDR (h->u.def.section->size);
+ h->u.def.section = bfd_abs_section_ptr;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* __start or __stop symbol. */
+ int has_lead = bfd_get_symbol_leading_char (link_info.output_bfd) != 0;
+
+ h->u.def.section = h->u.def.section->output_section;
+ if (h->root.string[4 + has_lead] == 'o')
+ {
+ /* __stop_ */
+ h->u.def.value = TO_ADDR (h->u.def.section->size);
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+static void
+lang_finalize_start_stop (void)
+{
+ foreach_start_stop (set_start_stop);
+}
+
+static void
+lang_symbol_tweaks (void)
+{
+ /* Give initial values for __start and __stop symbols, so that ELF
+ gc_sections will keep sections referenced by these symbols. Must
+ be done before lang_do_assignments. */
+ if (config.build_constructors)
+ lang_init_start_stop ();
+
+ /* Make __ehdr_start hidden, and set def_regular even though it is
+ likely undefined at this stage. For lang_check_relocs. */
+ if (is_elf_hash_table (link_info.hash)
+ && !bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info))
+ {
+ struct elf_link_hash_entry *h = (struct elf_link_hash_entry *)
+ bfd_link_hash_lookup (link_info.hash, "__ehdr_start",
+ false, false, true);
+
+ /* Only adjust the export class if the symbol was referenced
+ and not defined, otherwise leave it alone. */
+ if (h != NULL
+ && (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_new
+ || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined
+ || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak
+ || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_common))
+ {
+ const struct elf_backend_data *bed;
+ bed = get_elf_backend_data (link_info.output_bfd);
+ (*bed->elf_backend_hide_symbol) (&link_info, h, true);
+ if (ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) != STV_INTERNAL)
+ h->other = (h->other & ~ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (-1)) | STV_HIDDEN;
+ h->def_regular = 1;
+ h->root.linker_def = 1;
+ h->root.rel_from_abs = 1;
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+static void
+lang_end (void)
+{
+ struct bfd_link_hash_entry *h;
+ bool warn;
+
+ if ((bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info) && !link_info.gc_sections)
+ || bfd_link_dll (&link_info))
+ warn = entry_from_cmdline;
+ else
+ warn = true;
+
+ /* Force the user to specify a root when generating a relocatable with
+ --gc-sections, unless --gc-keep-exported was also given. */
+ if (bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info)
+ && link_info.gc_sections
+ && !link_info.gc_keep_exported)
+ {
+ struct bfd_sym_chain *sym;
+
+ for (sym = link_info.gc_sym_list; sym != NULL; sym = sym->next)
+ {
+ h = bfd_link_hash_lookup (link_info.hash, sym->name,
+ false, false, false);
+ if (h != NULL
+ && (h->type == bfd_link_hash_defined
+ || h->type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)
+ && !bfd_is_const_section (h->u.def.section))
+ break;
+ }
+ if (!sym)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: --gc-sections requires a defined symbol root "
+ "specified by -e or -u\n"));
+ }
+
+ if (entry_symbol.name == NULL)
+ {
+ /* No entry has been specified. Look for the default entry, but
+ don't warn if we don't find it. */
+ entry_symbol.name = entry_symbol_default;
+ warn = false;
+ }
+
+ h = bfd_link_hash_lookup (link_info.hash, entry_symbol.name,
+ false, false, true);
+ if (h != NULL
+ && (h->type == bfd_link_hash_defined
+ || h->type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)
+ && h->u.def.section->output_section != NULL)
+ {
+ bfd_vma val;
+
+ val = (h->u.def.value
+ + bfd_section_vma (h->u.def.section->output_section)
+ + h->u.def.section->output_offset);
+ if (!bfd_set_start_address (link_info.output_bfd, val))
+ einfo (_("%F%P: %s: can't set start address\n"), entry_symbol.name);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bfd_vma val;
+ const char *send;
+
+ /* We couldn't find the entry symbol. Try parsing it as a
+ number. */
+ val = bfd_scan_vma (entry_symbol.name, &send, 0);
+ if (*send == '\0')
+ {
+ if (!bfd_set_start_address (link_info.output_bfd, val))
+ einfo (_("%F%P: can't set start address\n"));
+ }
+ /* BZ 2004952: Only use the start of the entry section for executables. */
+ else if bfd_link_executable (&link_info)
+ {
+ asection *ts;
+
+ /* Can't find the entry symbol, and it's not a number. Use
+ the first address in the text section. */
+ ts = bfd_get_section_by_name (link_info.output_bfd, entry_section);
+ if (ts != NULL)
+ {
+ if (warn)
+ einfo (_("%P: warning: cannot find entry symbol %s;"
+ " defaulting to %V\n"),
+ entry_symbol.name,
+ bfd_section_vma (ts));
+ if (!bfd_set_start_address (link_info.output_bfd,
+ bfd_section_vma (ts)))
+ einfo (_("%F%P: can't set start address\n"));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (warn)
+ einfo (_("%P: warning: cannot find entry symbol %s;"
+ " not setting start address\n"),
+ entry_symbol.name);
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (warn)
+ einfo (_("%P: warning: cannot find entry symbol %s;"
+ " not setting start address\n"),
+ entry_symbol.name);
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/* This is a small function used when we want to ignore errors from
+ BFD. */
+
+static void
+ignore_bfd_errors (const char *fmt ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
+ va_list ap ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
+{
+ /* Don't do anything. */
+}
+
+/* Check that the architecture of all the input files is compatible
+ with the output file. Also call the backend to let it do any
+ other checking that is needed. */
+
+static void
+lang_check (void)
+{
+ lang_input_statement_type *file;
+ bfd *input_bfd;
+ const bfd_arch_info_type *compatible;
+
+ for (file = (void *) file_chain.head;
+ file != NULL;
+ file = file->next)
+ {
+#if BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS
+ /* Don't check format of files claimed by plugin. */
+ if (file->flags.claimed)
+ continue;
+#endif /* BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS */
+ input_bfd = file->the_bfd;
+ compatible
+ = bfd_arch_get_compatible (input_bfd, link_info.output_bfd,
+ command_line.accept_unknown_input_arch);
+
+ /* In general it is not possible to perform a relocatable
+ link between differing object formats when the input
+ file has relocations, because the relocations in the
+ input format may not have equivalent representations in
+ the output format (and besides BFD does not translate
+ relocs for other link purposes than a final link). */
+ if (!file->flags.just_syms
+ && (bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info)
+ || link_info.emitrelocations)
+ && (compatible == NULL
+ || (bfd_get_flavour (input_bfd)
+ != bfd_get_flavour (link_info.output_bfd)))
+ && (bfd_get_file_flags (input_bfd) & HAS_RELOC) != 0)
+ {
+ einfo (_("%F%P: relocatable linking with relocations from"
+ " format %s (%pB) to format %s (%pB) is not supported\n"),
+ bfd_get_target (input_bfd), input_bfd,
+ bfd_get_target (link_info.output_bfd), link_info.output_bfd);
+ /* einfo with %F exits. */
+ }
+
+ if (compatible == NULL)
+ {
+ if (command_line.warn_mismatch)
+ einfo (_("%X%P: %s architecture of input file `%pB'"
+ " is incompatible with %s output\n"),
+ bfd_printable_name (input_bfd), input_bfd,
+ bfd_printable_name (link_info.output_bfd));
+ }
+
+ /* If the input bfd has no contents, it shouldn't set the
+ private data of the output bfd. */
+ else if (!file->flags.just_syms
+ && ((input_bfd->flags & DYNAMIC) != 0
+ || bfd_count_sections (input_bfd) != 0))
+ {
+ bfd_error_handler_type pfn = NULL;
+
+ /* If we aren't supposed to warn about mismatched input
+ files, temporarily set the BFD error handler to a
+ function which will do nothing. We still want to call
+ bfd_merge_private_bfd_data, since it may set up
+ information which is needed in the output file. */
+ if (!command_line.warn_mismatch)
+ pfn = bfd_set_error_handler (ignore_bfd_errors);
+ if (!bfd_merge_private_bfd_data (input_bfd, &link_info))
+ {
+ if (command_line.warn_mismatch)
+ einfo (_("%X%P: failed to merge target specific data"
+ " of file %pB\n"), input_bfd);
+ }
+ if (!command_line.warn_mismatch)
+ bfd_set_error_handler (pfn);
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/* Look through all the global common symbols and attach them to the
+ correct section. The -sort-common command line switch may be used
+ to roughly sort the entries by alignment. */
+
+static void
+lang_common (void)
+{
+ if (link_info.inhibit_common_definition)
+ return;
+ if (bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info)
+ && !command_line.force_common_definition)
+ return;
+
+ if (!config.sort_common)
+ bfd_link_hash_traverse (link_info.hash, lang_one_common, NULL);
+ else
+ {
+ unsigned int power;
+
+ if (config.sort_common == sort_descending)
+ {
+ for (power = 4; power > 0; power--)
+ bfd_link_hash_traverse (link_info.hash, lang_one_common, &power);
+
+ power = 0;
+ bfd_link_hash_traverse (link_info.hash, lang_one_common, &power);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ for (power = 0; power <= 4; power++)
+ bfd_link_hash_traverse (link_info.hash, lang_one_common, &power);
+
+ power = (unsigned int) -1;
+ bfd_link_hash_traverse (link_info.hash, lang_one_common, &power);
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/* Place one common symbol in the correct section. */
+
+static bool
+lang_one_common (struct bfd_link_hash_entry *h, void *info)
+{
+ unsigned int power_of_two;
+ bfd_vma size;
+ asection *section;
+
+ if (h->type != bfd_link_hash_common)
+ return true;
+
+ size = h->u.c.size;
+ power_of_two = h->u.c.p->alignment_power;
+
+ if (config.sort_common == sort_descending
+ && power_of_two < *(unsigned int *) info)
+ return true;
+ else if (config.sort_common == sort_ascending
+ && power_of_two > *(unsigned int *) info)
+ return true;
+
+ section = h->u.c.p->section;
+ if (!bfd_define_common_symbol (link_info.output_bfd, &link_info, h))
+ einfo (_("%F%P: could not define common symbol `%pT': %E\n"),
+ h->root.string);
+
+ if (config.map_file != NULL)
+ {
+ static bool header_printed;
+ int len;
+ char *name;
+ char buf[32];
+
+ if (!header_printed)
+ {
+ minfo (_("\nAllocating common symbols\n"));
+ minfo (_("Common symbol size file\n\n"));
+ header_printed = true;
+ }
+
+ name = bfd_demangle (link_info.output_bfd, h->root.string,
+ DMGL_ANSI | DMGL_PARAMS);
+ if (name == NULL)
+ {
+ minfo ("%s", h->root.string);
+ len = strlen (h->root.string);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ minfo ("%s", name);
+ len = strlen (name);
+ free (name);
+ }
+
+ if (len >= 19)
+ {
+ print_nl ();
+ len = 0;
+ }
+
+ sprintf (buf, "%" PRIx64, (uint64_t) size);
+ fprintf (config.map_file, "%*s0x%-16s", 20 - len, "", buf);
+
+ minfo ("%pB\n", section->owner);
+ }
+
+ return true;
+}
+
+/* Handle a single orphan section S, placing the orphan into an appropriate
+ output section. The effects of the --orphan-handling command line
+ option are handled here. */
+
+static void
+ldlang_place_orphan (asection *s)
+{
+ if (config.orphan_handling == orphan_handling_discard)
+ {
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os;
+ os = lang_output_section_statement_lookup (DISCARD_SECTION_NAME, 0, 1);
+ if (os->addr_tree == NULL
+ && (bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info)
+ || (s->flags & (SEC_LOAD | SEC_ALLOC)) == 0))
+ os->addr_tree = exp_intop (0);
+ lang_add_section (&os->children, s, NULL, NULL, os);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os;
+ const char *name = s->name;
+ int constraint = 0;
+
+ if (config.orphan_handling == orphan_handling_error)
+ einfo (_("%X%P: error: unplaced orphan section `%pA' from `%pB'\n"),
+ s, s->owner);
+
+ if (config.unique_orphan_sections || unique_section_p (s, NULL))
+ constraint = SPECIAL;
+
+ os = ldemul_place_orphan (s, name, constraint);
+ if (os == NULL)
+ {
+ os = lang_output_section_statement_lookup (name, constraint, 1);
+ if (os->addr_tree == NULL
+ && (bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info)
+ || (s->flags & (SEC_LOAD | SEC_ALLOC)) == 0))
+ os->addr_tree = exp_intop (0);
+ lang_add_section (&os->children, s, NULL, NULL, os);
+ }
+
+ if (config.orphan_handling == orphan_handling_warn)
+ einfo (_("%P: warning: orphan section `%pA' from `%pB' being "
+ "placed in section `%s'\n"),
+ s, s->owner, os->name);
+ }
+}
+
+/* Run through the input files and ensure that every input section has
+ somewhere to go. If one is found without a destination then create
+ an input request and place it into the statement tree. */
+
+static void
+lang_place_orphans (void)
+{
+ LANG_FOR_EACH_INPUT_STATEMENT (file)
+ {
+ asection *s;
+
+ for (s = file->the_bfd->sections; s != NULL; s = s->next)
+ {
+ if (s->output_section == NULL)
+ {
+ /* This section of the file is not attached, root
+ around for a sensible place for it to go. */
+
+ if (file->flags.just_syms)
+ bfd_link_just_syms (file->the_bfd, s, &link_info);
+ else if (lang_discard_section_p (s))
+ s->output_section = bfd_abs_section_ptr;
+ else if (strcmp (s->name, "COMMON") == 0)
+ {
+ /* This is a lonely common section which must have
+ come from an archive. We attach to the section
+ with the wildcard. */
+ if (!bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info)
+ || command_line.force_common_definition)
+ {
+ if (default_common_section == NULL)
+ default_common_section
+ = lang_output_section_statement_lookup (".bss", 0, 1);
+ lang_add_section (&default_common_section->children, s,
+ NULL, NULL, default_common_section);
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ ldlang_place_orphan (s);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+void
+lang_set_flags (lang_memory_region_type *ptr, const char *flags, int invert)
+{
+ flagword *ptr_flags;
+
+ ptr_flags = invert ? &ptr->not_flags : &ptr->flags;
+
+ while (*flags)
+ {
+ switch (*flags)
+ {
+ /* PR 17900: An exclamation mark in the attributes reverses
+ the sense of any of the attributes that follow. */
+ case '!':
+ invert = !invert;
+ ptr_flags = invert ? &ptr->not_flags : &ptr->flags;
+ break;
+
+ case 'A': case 'a':
+ *ptr_flags |= SEC_ALLOC;
+ break;
+
+ case 'R': case 'r':
+ *ptr_flags |= SEC_READONLY;
+ break;
+
+ case 'W': case 'w':
+ *ptr_flags |= SEC_DATA;
+ break;
+
+ case 'X': case 'x':
+ *ptr_flags |= SEC_CODE;
+ break;
+
+ case 'L': case 'l':
+ case 'I': case 'i':
+ *ptr_flags |= SEC_LOAD;
+ break;
+
+ default:
+ einfo (_("%F%P: invalid character %c (%d) in flags\n"),
+ *flags, *flags);
+ break;
+ }
+ flags++;
+ }
+}
+
+/* Call a function on each real input file. This function will be
+ called on an archive, but not on the elements. */
+
+void
+lang_for_each_input_file (void (*func) (lang_input_statement_type *))
+{
+ lang_input_statement_type *f;
+
+ for (f = (void *) input_file_chain.head;
+ f != NULL;
+ f = f->next_real_file)
+ if (f->flags.real)
+ func (f);
+}
+
+/* Call a function on each real file. The function will be called on
+ all the elements of an archive which are included in the link, but
+ will not be called on the archive file itself. */
+
+void
+lang_for_each_file (void (*func) (lang_input_statement_type *))
+{
+ LANG_FOR_EACH_INPUT_STATEMENT (f)
+ {
+ if (f->flags.real)
+ func (f);
+ }
+}
+
+void
+ldlang_add_file (lang_input_statement_type *entry)
+{
+ lang_statement_append (&file_chain, entry, &entry->next);
+
+ /* The BFD linker needs to have a list of all input BFDs involved in
+ a link. */
+ ASSERT (link_info.input_bfds_tail != &entry->the_bfd->link.next
+ && entry->the_bfd->link.next == NULL);
+ ASSERT (entry->the_bfd != link_info.output_bfd);
+
+ *link_info.input_bfds_tail = entry->the_bfd;
+ link_info.input_bfds_tail = &entry->the_bfd->link.next;
+ bfd_set_usrdata (entry->the_bfd, entry);
+ bfd_set_gp_size (entry->the_bfd, g_switch_value);
+
+ /* Look through the sections and check for any which should not be
+ included in the link. We need to do this now, so that we can
+ notice when the backend linker tries to report multiple
+ definition errors for symbols which are in sections we aren't
+ going to link. FIXME: It might be better to entirely ignore
+ symbols which are defined in sections which are going to be
+ discarded. This would require modifying the backend linker for
+ each backend which might set the SEC_LINK_ONCE flag. If we do
+ this, we should probably handle SEC_EXCLUDE in the same way. */
+
+ bfd_map_over_sections (entry->the_bfd, section_already_linked, entry);
+}
+
+void
+lang_add_output (const char *name, int from_script)
+{
+ /* Make -o on command line override OUTPUT in script. */
+ if (!had_output_filename || !from_script)
+ {
+ output_filename = name;
+ had_output_filename = true;
+ }
+}
+
+lang_output_section_statement_type *
+lang_enter_output_section_statement (const char *output_section_statement_name,
+ etree_type *address_exp,
+ enum section_type sectype,
+ etree_type *sectype_value,
+ etree_type *align,
+ etree_type *subalign,
+ etree_type *ebase,
+ int constraint,
+ int align_with_input)
+{
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os;
+
+ os = lang_output_section_statement_lookup (output_section_statement_name,
+ constraint, 2);
+ current_section = os;
+
+ if (os->addr_tree == NULL)
+ {
+ os->addr_tree = address_exp;
+ }
+ os->sectype = sectype;
+ if (sectype == type_section || sectype == typed_readonly_section)
+ os->sectype_value = sectype_value;
+ else if (sectype == noload_section)
+ os->flags = SEC_NEVER_LOAD;
+ else
+ os->flags = SEC_NO_FLAGS;
+ os->block_value = 1;
+
+ /* Make next things chain into subchain of this. */
+ push_stat_ptr (&os->children);
+
+ os->align_lma_with_input = align_with_input == ALIGN_WITH_INPUT;
+ if (os->align_lma_with_input && align != NULL)
+ einfo (_("%F%P:%pS: error: align with input and explicit align specified\n"),
+ NULL);
+
+ os->subsection_alignment = subalign;
+ os->section_alignment = align;
+
+ os->load_base = ebase;
+ return os;
+}
+
+void
+lang_final (void)
+{
+ lang_output_statement_type *new_stmt;
+
+ new_stmt = new_stat (lang_output_statement, stat_ptr);
+ new_stmt->name = output_filename;
+}
+
+/* Reset the current counters in the regions. */
+
+void
+lang_reset_memory_regions (void)
+{
+ lang_memory_region_type *p = lang_memory_region_list;
+ asection *o;
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os;
+
+ for (p = lang_memory_region_list; p != NULL; p = p->next)
+ {
+ p->current = p->origin;
+ p->last_os = NULL;
+ }
+
+ for (os = (void *) lang_os_list.head;
+ os != NULL;
+ os = os->next)
+ {
+ os->processed_vma = false;
+ os->processed_lma = false;
+ }
+
+ for (o = link_info.output_bfd->sections; o != NULL; o = o->next)
+ {
+ /* Save the last size for possible use by bfd_relax_section. */
+ o->rawsize = o->size;
+ if (!(o->flags & SEC_FIXED_SIZE))
+ o->size = 0;
+ }
+}
+
+/* Worker for lang_gc_sections_1. */
+
+static void
+gc_section_callback (lang_wild_statement_type *ptr,
+ struct wildcard_list *sec ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
+ asection *section,
+ lang_input_statement_type *file ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
+ void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
+{
+ /* If the wild pattern was marked KEEP, the member sections
+ should be as well. */
+ if (ptr->keep_sections)
+ section->flags |= SEC_KEEP;
+}
+
+/* Iterate over sections marking them against GC. */
+
+static void
+lang_gc_sections_1 (lang_statement_union_type *s)
+{
+ for (; s != NULL; s = s->header.next)
+ {
+ switch (s->header.type)
+ {
+ case lang_wild_statement_enum:
+ walk_wild (&s->wild_statement, gc_section_callback, NULL);
+ break;
+ case lang_constructors_statement_enum:
+ lang_gc_sections_1 (constructor_list.head);
+ break;
+ case lang_output_section_statement_enum:
+ lang_gc_sections_1 (s->output_section_statement.children.head);
+ break;
+ case lang_group_statement_enum:
+ lang_gc_sections_1 (s->group_statement.children.head);
+ break;
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+static void
+lang_gc_sections (void)
+{
+ /* Keep all sections so marked in the link script. */
+ lang_gc_sections_1 (statement_list.head);
+
+ /* SEC_EXCLUDE is ignored when doing a relocatable link, except in
+ the special case of .stabstr debug info. (See bfd/stabs.c)
+ Twiddle the flag here, to simplify later linker code. */
+ if (bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info))
+ {
+ LANG_FOR_EACH_INPUT_STATEMENT (f)
+ {
+ asection *sec;
+#if BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS
+ if (f->flags.claimed)
+ continue;
+#endif
+ for (sec = f->the_bfd->sections; sec != NULL; sec = sec->next)
+ if ((sec->flags & SEC_DEBUGGING) == 0
+ || strcmp (sec->name, ".stabstr") != 0)
+ sec->flags &= ~SEC_EXCLUDE;
+ }
+ }
+
+ if (link_info.gc_sections)
+ bfd_gc_sections (link_info.output_bfd, &link_info);
+}
+
+/* Worker for lang_find_relro_sections_1. */
+
+static void
+find_relro_section_callback (lang_wild_statement_type *ptr ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
+ struct wildcard_list *sec ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
+ asection *section,
+ lang_input_statement_type *file ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
+ void *data)
+{
+ /* Discarded, excluded and ignored sections effectively have zero
+ size. */
+ if (section->output_section != NULL
+ && section->output_section->owner == link_info.output_bfd
+ && (section->output_section->flags & SEC_EXCLUDE) == 0
+ && !IGNORE_SECTION (section)
+ && section->size != 0)
+ {
+ bool *has_relro_section = (bool *) data;
+ *has_relro_section = true;
+ }
+}
+
+/* Iterate over sections for relro sections. */
+
+static void
+lang_find_relro_sections_1 (lang_statement_union_type *s,
+ bool *has_relro_section)
+{
+ if (*has_relro_section)
+ return;
+
+ for (; s != NULL; s = s->header.next)
+ {
+ if (s == expld.dataseg.relro_end_stat)
+ break;
+
+ switch (s->header.type)
+ {
+ case lang_wild_statement_enum:
+ walk_wild (&s->wild_statement,
+ find_relro_section_callback,
+ has_relro_section);
+ break;
+ case lang_constructors_statement_enum:
+ lang_find_relro_sections_1 (constructor_list.head,
+ has_relro_section);
+ break;
+ case lang_output_section_statement_enum:
+ lang_find_relro_sections_1 (s->output_section_statement.children.head,
+ has_relro_section);
+ break;
+ case lang_group_statement_enum:
+ lang_find_relro_sections_1 (s->group_statement.children.head,
+ has_relro_section);
+ break;
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+static void
+lang_find_relro_sections (void)
+{
+ bool has_relro_section = false;
+
+ /* Check all sections in the link script. */
+
+ lang_find_relro_sections_1 (expld.dataseg.relro_start_stat,
+ &has_relro_section);
+
+ if (!has_relro_section)
+ link_info.relro = false;
+}
+
+/* Relax all sections until bfd_relax_section gives up. */
+
+void
+lang_relax_sections (bool need_layout)
+{
+ /* NB: Also enable relaxation to layout sections for DT_RELR. */
+ if (RELAXATION_ENABLED || link_info.enable_dt_relr)
+ {
+ /* We may need more than one relaxation pass. */
+ int i = link_info.relax_pass;
+
+ /* The backend can use it to determine the current pass. */
+ link_info.relax_pass = 0;
+
+ while (i--)
+ {
+ /* Keep relaxing until bfd_relax_section gives up. */
+ bool relax_again;
+
+ link_info.relax_trip = -1;
+ do
+ {
+ link_info.relax_trip++;
+
+ /* Note: pe-dll.c does something like this also. If you find
+ you need to change this code, you probably need to change
+ pe-dll.c also. DJ */
+
+ /* Do all the assignments with our current guesses as to
+ section sizes. */
+ lang_do_assignments (lang_assigning_phase_enum);
+
+ /* We must do this after lang_do_assignments, because it uses
+ size. */
+ lang_reset_memory_regions ();
+
+ /* Perform another relax pass - this time we know where the
+ globals are, so can make a better guess. */
+ relax_again = false;
+ lang_size_sections (&relax_again, false);
+ }
+ while (relax_again);
+
+ link_info.relax_pass++;
+ }
+ need_layout = true;
+ }
+
+ if (need_layout)
+ {
+ /* Final extra sizing to report errors. */
+ lang_do_assignments (lang_assigning_phase_enum);
+ lang_reset_memory_regions ();
+ lang_size_sections (NULL, true);
+ }
+}
+
+#if BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS
+/* Find the insert point for the plugin's replacement files. We
+ place them after the first claimed real object file, or if the
+ first claimed object is an archive member, after the last real
+ object file immediately preceding the archive. In the event
+ no objects have been claimed at all, we return the first dummy
+ object file on the list as the insert point; that works, but
+ the callee must be careful when relinking the file_chain as it
+ is not actually on that chain, only the statement_list and the
+ input_file list; in that case, the replacement files must be
+ inserted at the head of the file_chain. */
+
+static lang_input_statement_type *
+find_replacements_insert_point (bool *before)
+{
+ lang_input_statement_type *claim1, *lastobject;
+ lastobject = (void *) input_file_chain.head;
+ for (claim1 = (void *) file_chain.head;
+ claim1 != NULL;
+ claim1 = claim1->next)
+ {
+ if (claim1->flags.claimed)
+ {
+ *before = claim1->flags.claim_archive;
+ return claim1->flags.claim_archive ? lastobject : claim1;
+ }
+ /* Update lastobject if this is a real object file. */
+ if (claim1->the_bfd != NULL && claim1->the_bfd->my_archive == NULL)
+ lastobject = claim1;
+ }
+ /* No files were claimed by the plugin. Choose the last object
+ file found on the list (maybe the first, dummy entry) as the
+ insert point. */
+ *before = false;
+ return lastobject;
+}
+
+/* Find where to insert ADD, an archive element or shared library
+ added during a rescan. */
+
+static lang_input_statement_type **
+find_rescan_insertion (lang_input_statement_type *add)
+{
+ bfd *add_bfd = add->the_bfd;
+ lang_input_statement_type *f;
+ lang_input_statement_type *last_loaded = NULL;
+ lang_input_statement_type *before = NULL;
+ lang_input_statement_type **iter = NULL;
+
+ if (add_bfd->my_archive != NULL)
+ add_bfd = add_bfd->my_archive;
+
+ /* First look through the input file chain, to find an object file
+ before the one we've rescanned. Normal object files always
+ appear on both the input file chain and the file chain, so this
+ lets us get quickly to somewhere near the correct place on the
+ file chain if it is full of archive elements. Archives don't
+ appear on the file chain, but if an element has been extracted
+ then their input_statement->next points at it. */
+ for (f = (void *) input_file_chain.head;
+ f != NULL;
+ f = f->next_real_file)
+ {
+ if (f->the_bfd == add_bfd)
+ {
+ before = last_loaded;
+ if (f->next != NULL)
+ return &f->next->next;
+ }
+ if (f->the_bfd != NULL && f->next != NULL)
+ last_loaded = f;
+ }
+
+ for (iter = before ? &before->next : &file_chain.head->input_statement.next;
+ *iter != NULL;
+ iter = &(*iter)->next)
+ if (!(*iter)->flags.claim_archive
+ && (*iter)->the_bfd->my_archive == NULL)
+ break;
+
+ return iter;
+}
+
+/* Insert SRCLIST into DESTLIST after given element by chaining
+ on FIELD as the next-pointer. (Counterintuitively does not need
+ a pointer to the actual after-node itself, just its chain field.) */
+
+static void
+lang_list_insert_after (lang_statement_list_type *destlist,
+ lang_statement_list_type *srclist,
+ lang_statement_union_type **field)
+{
+ *(srclist->tail) = *field;
+ *field = srclist->head;
+ if (destlist->tail == field)
+ destlist->tail = srclist->tail;
+}
+
+/* Detach new nodes added to DESTLIST since the time ORIGLIST
+ was taken as a copy of it and leave them in ORIGLIST. */
+
+static void
+lang_list_remove_tail (lang_statement_list_type *destlist,
+ lang_statement_list_type *origlist)
+{
+ union lang_statement_union **savetail;
+ /* Check that ORIGLIST really is an earlier state of DESTLIST. */
+ ASSERT (origlist->head == destlist->head);
+ savetail = origlist->tail;
+ origlist->head = *(savetail);
+ origlist->tail = destlist->tail;
+ destlist->tail = savetail;
+ *savetail = NULL;
+}
+
+static lang_statement_union_type **
+find_next_input_statement (lang_statement_union_type **s)
+{
+ for ( ; *s; s = &(*s)->header.next)
+ {
+ lang_statement_union_type **t;
+ switch ((*s)->header.type)
+ {
+ case lang_input_statement_enum:
+ return s;
+ case lang_wild_statement_enum:
+ t = &(*s)->wild_statement.children.head;
+ break;
+ case lang_group_statement_enum:
+ t = &(*s)->group_statement.children.head;
+ break;
+ case lang_output_section_statement_enum:
+ t = &(*s)->output_section_statement.children.head;
+ break;
+ default:
+ continue;
+ }
+ t = find_next_input_statement (t);
+ if (*t)
+ return t;
+ }
+ return s;
+}
+#endif /* BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS */
+
+/* Add NAME to the list of garbage collection entry points. */
+
+void
+lang_add_gc_name (const char *name)
+{
+ struct bfd_sym_chain *sym;
+
+ if (name == NULL)
+ return;
+
+ sym = stat_alloc (sizeof (*sym));
+
+ sym->next = link_info.gc_sym_list;
+ sym->name = name;
+ link_info.gc_sym_list = sym;
+}
+
+/* Check relocations. */
+
+static void
+lang_check_relocs (void)
+{
+ if (link_info.check_relocs_after_open_input)
+ {
+ bfd *abfd;
+
+ for (abfd = link_info.input_bfds;
+ abfd != (bfd *) NULL; abfd = abfd->link.next)
+ if (!bfd_link_check_relocs (abfd, &link_info))
+ {
+ /* No object output, fail return. */
+ config.make_executable = false;
+ /* Note: we do not abort the loop, but rather
+ continue the scan in case there are other
+ bad relocations to report. */
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/* Look through all output sections looking for places where we can
+ propagate forward the lma region. */
+
+static void
+lang_propagate_lma_regions (void)
+{
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os;
+
+ for (os = (void *) lang_os_list.head;
+ os != NULL;
+ os = os->next)
+ {
+ if (os->prev != NULL
+ && os->lma_region == NULL
+ && os->load_base == NULL
+ && os->addr_tree == NULL
+ && os->region == os->prev->region)
+ os->lma_region = os->prev->lma_region;
+ }
+}
+
+static void
+warn_non_contiguous_discards (void)
+{
+ LANG_FOR_EACH_INPUT_STATEMENT (file)
+ {
+ if ((file->the_bfd->flags & (BFD_LINKER_CREATED | DYNAMIC)) != 0
+ || file->flags.just_syms)
+ continue;
+
+ for (asection *s = file->the_bfd->sections; s != NULL; s = s->next)
+ if (s->output_section == NULL
+ && (s->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED) == 0)
+ einfo (_("%P: warning: --enable-non-contiguous-regions "
+ "discards section `%pA' from `%pB'\n"),
+ s, file->the_bfd);
+ }
+}
+
+static void
+reset_one_wild (lang_statement_union_type *statement)
+{
+ if (statement->header.type == lang_wild_statement_enum)
+ {
+ lang_wild_statement_type *stmt = &statement->wild_statement;
+ lang_list_init (&stmt->matching_sections);
+ }
+}
+
+static void
+reset_resolved_wilds (void)
+{
+ lang_for_each_statement (reset_one_wild);
+}
+
+void
+lang_process (void)
+{
+ /* Finalize dynamic list. */
+ if (link_info.dynamic_list)
+ lang_finalize_version_expr_head (&link_info.dynamic_list->head);
+
+ current_target = default_target;
+
+ /* Open the output file. */
+ lang_for_each_statement (ldlang_open_output);
+ init_opb (NULL);
+
+ ldemul_create_output_section_statements ();
+
+ /* Add to the hash table all undefineds on the command line. */
+ lang_place_undefineds ();
+
+ if (!bfd_section_already_linked_table_init ())
+ einfo (_("%F%P: can not create hash table: %E\n"));
+
+ /* A first pass through the memory regions ensures that if any region
+ references a symbol for its origin or length then this symbol will be
+ added to the symbol table. Having these symbols in the symbol table
+ means that when we call open_input_bfds PROVIDE statements will
+ trigger to provide any needed symbols. The regions origins and
+ lengths are not assigned as a result of this call. */
+ lang_do_memory_regions (false);
+
+ /* Create a bfd for each input file. */
+ current_target = default_target;
+ lang_statement_iteration++;
+ open_input_bfds (statement_list.head, OPEN_BFD_NORMAL);
+
+ /* Now that open_input_bfds has processed assignments and provide
+ statements we can give values to symbolic origin/length now. */
+ lang_do_memory_regions (true);
+
+ ldemul_before_plugin_all_symbols_read ();
+
+#if BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS
+ if (link_info.lto_plugin_active)
+ {
+ lang_statement_list_type added;
+ lang_statement_list_type files, inputfiles;
+
+ /* Now all files are read, let the plugin(s) decide if there
+ are any more to be added to the link before we call the
+ emulation's after_open hook. We create a private list of
+ input statements for this purpose, which we will eventually
+ insert into the global statement list after the first claimed
+ file. */
+ added = *stat_ptr;
+ /* We need to manipulate all three chains in synchrony. */
+ files = file_chain;
+ inputfiles = input_file_chain;
+ if (plugin_call_all_symbols_read ())
+ einfo (_("%F%P: %s: plugin reported error after all symbols read\n"),
+ plugin_error_plugin ());
+ link_info.lto_all_symbols_read = true;
+ /* Open any newly added files, updating the file chains. */
+ plugin_undefs = link_info.hash->undefs_tail;
+ open_input_bfds (*added.tail, OPEN_BFD_NORMAL);
+ if (plugin_undefs == link_info.hash->undefs_tail)
+ plugin_undefs = NULL;
+ /* Restore the global list pointer now they have all been added. */
+ lang_list_remove_tail (stat_ptr, &added);
+ /* And detach the fresh ends of the file lists. */
+ lang_list_remove_tail (&file_chain, &files);
+ lang_list_remove_tail (&input_file_chain, &inputfiles);
+ /* Were any new files added? */
+ if (added.head != NULL)
+ {
+ /* If so, we will insert them into the statement list immediately
+ after the first input file that was claimed by the plugin,
+ unless that file was an archive in which case it is inserted
+ immediately before. */
+ bool before;
+ lang_statement_union_type **prev;
+ plugin_insert = find_replacements_insert_point (&before);
+ /* If a plugin adds input files without having claimed any, we
+ don't really have a good idea where to place them. Just putting
+ them at the start or end of the list is liable to leave them
+ outside the crtbegin...crtend range. */
+ ASSERT (plugin_insert != NULL);
+ /* Splice the new statement list into the old one. */
+ prev = &plugin_insert->header.next;
+ if (before)
+ {
+ prev = find_next_input_statement (prev);
+ if (*prev != (void *) plugin_insert->next_real_file)
+ {
+ /* We didn't find the expected input statement.
+ Fall back to adding after plugin_insert. */
+ prev = &plugin_insert->header.next;
+ }
+ }
+ lang_list_insert_after (stat_ptr, &added, prev);
+ /* Likewise for the file chains. */
+ lang_list_insert_after (&input_file_chain, &inputfiles,
+ (void *) &plugin_insert->next_real_file);
+ /* We must be careful when relinking file_chain; we may need to
+ insert the new files at the head of the list if the insert
+ point chosen is the dummy first input file. */
+ if (plugin_insert->filename)
+ lang_list_insert_after (&file_chain, &files,
+ (void *) &plugin_insert->next);
+ else
+ lang_list_insert_after (&file_chain, &files, &file_chain.head);
+
+ /* Rescan archives in case new undefined symbols have appeared. */
+ files = file_chain;
+ lang_statement_iteration++;
+ open_input_bfds (statement_list.head, OPEN_BFD_RESCAN);
+ lang_list_remove_tail (&file_chain, &files);
+ while (files.head != NULL)
+ {
+ lang_input_statement_type **insert;
+ lang_input_statement_type **iter, *temp;
+ bfd *my_arch;
+
+ insert = find_rescan_insertion (&files.head->input_statement);
+ /* All elements from an archive can be added at once. */
+ iter = &files.head->input_statement.next;
+ my_arch = files.head->input_statement.the_bfd->my_archive;
+ if (my_arch != NULL)
+ for (; *iter != NULL; iter = &(*iter)->next)
+ if ((*iter)->the_bfd->my_archive != my_arch)
+ break;
+ temp = *insert;
+ *insert = &files.head->input_statement;
+ files.head = (lang_statement_union_type *) *iter;
+ *iter = temp;
+ if (file_chain.tail == (lang_statement_union_type **) insert)
+ file_chain.tail = (lang_statement_union_type **) iter;
+ if (my_arch != NULL)
+ {
+ lang_input_statement_type *parent = bfd_usrdata (my_arch);
+ if (parent != NULL)
+ parent->next = (lang_input_statement_type *)
+ ((char *) iter
+ - offsetof (lang_input_statement_type, next));
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+#endif /* BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS */
+
+ struct bfd_sym_chain **sym = &link_info.gc_sym_list;
+ while (*sym)
+ sym = &(*sym)->next;
+
+ *sym = &entry_symbol;
+
+ if (entry_symbol.name == NULL)
+ {
+ *sym = ldlang_undef_chain_list_head;
+
+ /* entry_symbol is normally initialised by an ENTRY definition in the
+ linker script or the -e command line option. But if neither of
+ these have been used, the target specific backend may still have
+ provided an entry symbol via a call to lang_default_entry().
+ Unfortunately this value will not be processed until lang_end()
+ is called, long after this function has finished. So detect this
+ case here and add the target's entry symbol to the list of starting
+ points for garbage collection resolution. */
+ lang_add_gc_name (entry_symbol_default);
+ }
+
+ lang_add_gc_name (link_info.init_function);
+ lang_add_gc_name (link_info.fini_function);
+
+ ldemul_after_open ();
+ if (config.map_file != NULL)
+ lang_print_asneeded ();
+
+ ldlang_open_ctf ();
+
+ bfd_section_already_linked_table_free ();
+
+ /* Make sure that we're not mixing architectures. We call this
+ after all the input files have been opened, but before we do any
+ other processing, so that any operations merge_private_bfd_data
+ does on the output file will be known during the rest of the
+ link. */
+ lang_check ();
+
+ /* Handle .exports instead of a version script if we're told to do so. */
+ if (command_line.version_exports_section)
+ lang_do_version_exports_section ();
+
+ /* Build all sets based on the information gathered from the input
+ files. */
+ ldctor_build_sets ();
+
+ lang_symbol_tweaks ();
+
+ /* PR 13683: We must rerun the assignments prior to running garbage
+ collection in order to make sure that all symbol aliases are resolved. */
+ lang_do_assignments (lang_mark_phase_enum);
+ expld.phase = lang_first_phase_enum;
+
+ /* Size up the common data. */
+ lang_common ();
+
+ if (0)
+ debug_prefix_tree ();
+
+ resolve_wilds ();
+
+ /* Remove unreferenced sections if asked to. */
+ lang_gc_sections ();
+
+ lang_mark_undefineds ();
+
+ /* Check relocations. */
+ lang_check_relocs ();
+
+ ldemul_after_check_relocs ();
+
+ /* There might have been new sections created (e.g. as result of
+ checking relocs to need a .got, or suchlike), so to properly order
+ them into our lists of matching sections reset them here. */
+ reset_resolved_wilds ();
+ resolve_wilds ();
+
+ /* Update wild statements in case the user gave --sort-section.
+ Note how the option might have come after the linker script and
+ so couldn't have been set when the wild statements were created. */
+ update_wild_statements (statement_list.head);
+
+ /* Run through the contours of the script and attach input sections
+ to the correct output sections. */
+ lang_statement_iteration++;
+ map_input_to_output_sections (statement_list.head, NULL, NULL);
+
+ /* Start at the statement immediately after the special abs_section
+ output statement, so that it isn't reordered. */
+ process_insert_statements (&lang_os_list.head->header.next);
+
+ ldemul_before_place_orphans ();
+
+ /* Find any sections not attached explicitly and handle them. */
+ lang_place_orphans ();
+
+ if (!bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info))
+ {
+ asection *found;
+
+ /* Merge SEC_MERGE sections. This has to be done after GC of
+ sections, so that GCed sections are not merged, but before
+ assigning dynamic symbols, since removing whole input sections
+ is hard then. */
+ bfd_merge_sections (link_info.output_bfd, &link_info);
+
+ /* Look for a text section and set the readonly attribute in it. */
+ found = bfd_get_section_by_name (link_info.output_bfd, ".text");
+
+ if (found != NULL)
+ {
+ if (config.text_read_only)
+ found->flags |= SEC_READONLY;
+ else
+ found->flags &= ~SEC_READONLY;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Merge together CTF sections. After this, only the symtab-dependent
+ function and data object sections need adjustment. */
+ lang_merge_ctf ();
+
+ /* Emit the CTF, iff the emulation doesn't need to do late emission after
+ examining things laid out late, like the strtab. */
+ lang_write_ctf (0);
+
+ /* Copy forward lma regions for output sections in same lma region. */
+ lang_propagate_lma_regions ();
+
+ /* Defining __start/__stop symbols early for --gc-sections to work
+ around a glibc build problem can result in these symbols being
+ defined when they should not be. Fix them now. */
+ if (config.build_constructors)
+ lang_undef_start_stop ();
+
+ /* Define .startof./.sizeof. symbols with preliminary values before
+ dynamic symbols are created. */
+ if (!bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info))
+ lang_init_startof_sizeof ();
+
+ /* Do anything special before sizing sections. This is where ELF
+ and other back-ends size dynamic sections. */
+ ldemul_before_allocation ();
+
+ /* We must record the program headers before we try to fix the
+ section positions, since they will affect SIZEOF_HEADERS. */
+ lang_record_phdrs ();
+
+ /* Check relro sections. */
+ if (link_info.relro && !bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info))
+ lang_find_relro_sections ();
+
+ /* Size up the sections. */
+ lang_size_sections (NULL, !RELAXATION_ENABLED);
+
+ /* See if anything special should be done now we know how big
+ everything is. This is where relaxation is done. */
+ ldemul_after_allocation ();
+
+ /* Fix any __start, __stop, .startof. or .sizeof. symbols. */
+ lang_finalize_start_stop ();
+
+ /* Do all the assignments again, to report errors. Assignment
+ statements are processed multiple times, updating symbols; In
+ open_input_bfds, lang_do_assignments, and lang_size_sections.
+ Since lang_relax_sections calls lang_do_assignments, symbols are
+ also updated in ldemul_after_allocation. */
+ lang_do_assignments (lang_final_phase_enum);
+
+ ldemul_finish ();
+
+ /* Convert absolute symbols to section relative. */
+ ldexp_finalize_syms ();
+
+ /* Make sure that the section addresses make sense. */
+ if (command_line.check_section_addresses)
+ lang_check_section_addresses ();
+
+ if (link_info.non_contiguous_regions
+ && link_info.non_contiguous_regions_warnings)
+ warn_non_contiguous_discards ();
+
+ /* Check any required symbols are known. */
+ ldlang_check_require_defined_symbols ();
+
+ lang_end ();
+}
+
+void
+lang_add_version_string (void)
+{
+ if (! enable_linker_version)
+ return;
+
+ const char * str = "GNU ld ";
+ int len = strlen (str);
+ int i;
+
+ for (i = 0 ; i < len ; i++)
+ lang_add_data (BYTE, exp_intop (str[i]));
+
+ str = BFD_VERSION_STRING;
+ len = strlen (str);
+
+ for (i = 0 ; i < len ; i++)
+ lang_add_data (BYTE, exp_intop (str[i]));
+
+ lang_add_data (BYTE, exp_intop ('\0'));
+}
+
+/* EXPORTED TO YACC */
+
+void
+lang_add_wild (struct wildcard_spec *filespec,
+ struct wildcard_list *section_list,
+ bool keep_sections)
+{
+ struct wildcard_list *curr, *next;
+ lang_wild_statement_type *new_stmt;
+ bool any_specs_sorted = false;
+
+ /* Reverse the list as the parser puts it back to front. */
+ for (curr = section_list, section_list = NULL;
+ curr != NULL;
+ section_list = curr, curr = next)
+ {
+ if (curr->spec.sorted != none && curr->spec.sorted != by_none)
+ any_specs_sorted = true;
+ next = curr->next;
+ curr->next = section_list;
+ }
+
+ if (filespec != NULL && filespec->name != NULL)
+ {
+ if (strcmp (filespec->name, "*") == 0)
+ filespec->name = NULL;
+ else if (!wildcardp (filespec->name))
+ lang_has_input_file = true;
+ }
+
+ new_stmt = new_stat (lang_wild_statement, stat_ptr);
+ new_stmt->filename = NULL;
+ new_stmt->filenames_sorted = false;
+ new_stmt->any_specs_sorted = any_specs_sorted;
+ new_stmt->section_flag_list = NULL;
+ new_stmt->exclude_name_list = NULL;
+ if (filespec != NULL)
+ {
+ new_stmt->filename = filespec->name;
+ new_stmt->filenames_sorted = filespec->sorted == by_name;
+ new_stmt->section_flag_list = filespec->section_flag_list;
+ new_stmt->exclude_name_list = filespec->exclude_name_list;
+ }
+ new_stmt->section_list = section_list;
+ new_stmt->keep_sections = keep_sections;
+ lang_list_init (&new_stmt->children);
+ lang_list_init (&new_stmt->matching_sections);
+ analyze_walk_wild_section_handler (new_stmt);
+ if (0)
+ {
+ printf ("wild %s(", new_stmt->filename ? new_stmt->filename : "*");
+ for (curr = new_stmt->section_list; curr; curr = curr->next)
+ printf ("%s ", curr->spec.name ? curr->spec.name : "*");
+ printf (")\n");
+ }
+}
+
+void
+lang_section_start (const char *name, etree_type *address,
+ const segment_type *segment)
+{
+ lang_address_statement_type *ad;
+
+ ad = new_stat (lang_address_statement, stat_ptr);
+ ad->section_name = name;
+ ad->address = address;
+ ad->segment = segment;
+}
+
+/* Set the start symbol to NAME. CMDLINE is nonzero if this is called
+ because of a -e argument on the command line, or zero if this is
+ called by ENTRY in a linker script. Command line arguments take
+ precedence. */
+
+void
+lang_add_entry (const char *name, bool cmdline)
+{
+ if (entry_symbol.name == NULL
+ || cmdline
+ || !entry_from_cmdline)
+ {
+ entry_symbol.name = name;
+ entry_from_cmdline = cmdline;
+ }
+}
+
+/* Set the default start symbol to NAME. .em files should use this,
+ not lang_add_entry, to override the use of "start" if neither the
+ linker script nor the command line specifies an entry point. NAME
+ must be permanently allocated. */
+void
+lang_default_entry (const char *name)
+{
+ entry_symbol_default = name;
+}
+
+void
+lang_add_target (const char *name)
+{
+ lang_target_statement_type *new_stmt;
+
+ new_stmt = new_stat (lang_target_statement, stat_ptr);
+ new_stmt->target = name;
+}
+
+void
+lang_add_map (const char *name)
+{
+ while (*name)
+ {
+ switch (*name)
+ {
+ case 'F':
+ map_option_f = true;
+ break;
+ }
+ name++;
+ }
+}
+
+void
+lang_add_fill (fill_type *fill)
+{
+ lang_fill_statement_type *new_stmt;
+
+ new_stmt = new_stat (lang_fill_statement, stat_ptr);
+ new_stmt->fill = fill;
+}
+
+void
+lang_add_data (int type, union etree_union *exp)
+{
+ lang_data_statement_type *new_stmt;
+
+ new_stmt = new_stat (lang_data_statement, stat_ptr);
+ new_stmt->exp = exp;
+ new_stmt->type = type;
+}
+
+void
+lang_add_string (const char *s)
+{
+ bfd_vma len = strlen (s);
+ bfd_vma i;
+ bool escape = false;
+
+ /* Add byte expressions until end of string. */
+ for (i = 0 ; i < len; i++)
+ {
+ char c = *s++;
+
+ if (escape)
+ {
+ switch (c)
+ {
+ default:
+ /* Ignore the escape. */
+ break;
+
+ case 'n': c = '\n'; break;
+ case 'r': c = '\r'; break;
+ case 't': c = '\t'; break;
+
+ case '0':
+ case '1':
+ case '2':
+ case '3':
+ case '4':
+ case '5':
+ case '6':
+ case '7':
+ /* We have an octal number. */
+ {
+ unsigned int value = c - '0';
+
+ c = *s;
+ if ((c >= '0') && (c <= '7'))
+ {
+ value <<= 3;
+ value += (c - '0');
+ i++;
+ s++;
+
+ c = *s;
+ if ((c >= '0') && (c <= '7'))
+ {
+ value <<= 3;
+ value += (c - '0');
+ i++;
+ s++;
+ }
+ }
+
+ if (value > 0xff)
+ {
+ /* octal: \777 is treated as '\077' + '7' */
+ value >>= 3;
+ i--;
+ s--;
+ }
+
+ c = value;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+
+ lang_add_data (BYTE, exp_intop (c));
+ escape = false;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (c == '\\')
+ escape = true;
+ else
+ lang_add_data (BYTE, exp_intop (c));
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Remeber to terminate the string. */
+ lang_add_data (BYTE, exp_intop (0));
+}
+
+/* Create a new reloc statement. RELOC is the BFD relocation type to
+ generate. HOWTO is the corresponding howto structure (we could
+ look this up, but the caller has already done so). SECTION is the
+ section to generate a reloc against, or NAME is the name of the
+ symbol to generate a reloc against. Exactly one of SECTION and
+ NAME must be NULL. ADDEND is an expression for the addend. */
+
+void
+lang_add_reloc (bfd_reloc_code_real_type reloc,
+ reloc_howto_type *howto,
+ asection *section,
+ const char *name,
+ union etree_union *addend)
+{
+ lang_reloc_statement_type *p = new_stat (lang_reloc_statement, stat_ptr);
+
+ p->reloc = reloc;
+ p->howto = howto;
+ p->section = section;
+ p->name = name;
+ p->addend_exp = addend;
+
+ p->addend_value = 0;
+ p->output_section = NULL;
+ p->output_offset = 0;
+}
+
+lang_assignment_statement_type *
+lang_add_assignment (etree_type *exp)
+{
+ lang_assignment_statement_type *new_stmt;
+
+ new_stmt = new_stat (lang_assignment_statement, stat_ptr);
+ new_stmt->exp = exp;
+ return new_stmt;
+}
+
+void
+lang_add_attribute (enum statement_enum attribute)
+{
+ new_statement (attribute, sizeof (lang_statement_header_type), stat_ptr);
+}
+
+void
+lang_startup (const char *name)
+{
+ if (first_file->filename != NULL)
+ {
+ einfo (_("%F%P: multiple STARTUP files\n"));
+ }
+ first_file->filename = name;
+ first_file->local_sym_name = name;
+ first_file->flags.real = true;
+}
+
+void
+lang_float (bool maybe)
+{
+ lang_float_flag = maybe;
+}
+
+
+/* Work out the load- and run-time regions from a script statement, and
+ store them in *LMA_REGION and *REGION respectively.
+
+ MEMSPEC is the name of the run-time region, or the value of
+ DEFAULT_MEMORY_REGION if the statement didn't specify one.
+ LMA_MEMSPEC is the name of the load-time region, or null if the
+ statement didn't specify one.HAVE_LMA_P is TRUE if the statement
+ had an explicit load address.
+
+ It is an error to specify both a load region and a load address. */
+
+static void
+lang_get_regions (lang_memory_region_type **region,
+ lang_memory_region_type **lma_region,
+ const char *memspec,
+ const char *lma_memspec,
+ bool have_lma,
+ bool have_vma)
+{
+ *lma_region = lang_memory_region_lookup (lma_memspec, false);
+
+ /* If no runtime region or VMA has been specified, but the load region
+ has been specified, then use the load region for the runtime region
+ as well. */
+ if (lma_memspec != NULL
+ && !have_vma
+ && strcmp (memspec, DEFAULT_MEMORY_REGION) == 0)
+ *region = *lma_region;
+ else
+ *region = lang_memory_region_lookup (memspec, false);
+
+ if (have_lma && lma_memspec != 0)
+ einfo (_("%X%P:%pS: section has both a load address and a load region\n"),
+ NULL);
+}
+
+void
+lang_leave_output_section_statement (fill_type *fill, const char *memspec,
+ lang_output_section_phdr_list *phdrs,
+ const char *lma_memspec)
+{
+ lang_get_regions (&current_section->region,
+ &current_section->lma_region,
+ memspec, lma_memspec,
+ current_section->load_base != NULL,
+ current_section->addr_tree != NULL);
+
+ current_section->fill = fill;
+ current_section->phdrs = phdrs;
+ pop_stat_ptr ();
+}
+
+/* Set the output format type. -oformat overrides scripts. */
+
+void
+lang_add_output_format (const char *format,
+ const char *big,
+ const char *little,
+ int from_script)
+{
+ if (output_target == NULL || !from_script)
+ {
+ if (command_line.endian == ENDIAN_BIG
+ && big != NULL)
+ format = big;
+ else if (command_line.endian == ENDIAN_LITTLE
+ && little != NULL)
+ format = little;
+
+ output_target = format;
+ }
+}
+
+void
+lang_add_insert (const char *where, int is_before)
+{
+ lang_insert_statement_type *new_stmt;
+
+ new_stmt = new_stat (lang_insert_statement, stat_ptr);
+ new_stmt->where = where;
+ new_stmt->is_before = is_before;
+ saved_script_handle = previous_script_handle;
+}
+
+/* Enter a group. This creates a new lang_group_statement, and sets
+ stat_ptr to build new statements within the group. */
+
+void
+lang_enter_group (void)
+{
+ lang_group_statement_type *g;
+
+ g = new_stat (lang_group_statement, stat_ptr);
+ lang_list_init (&g->children);
+ push_stat_ptr (&g->children);
+}
+
+/* Leave a group. This just resets stat_ptr to start writing to the
+ regular list of statements again. Note that this will not work if
+ groups can occur inside anything else which can adjust stat_ptr,
+ but currently they can't. */
+
+void
+lang_leave_group (void)
+{
+ pop_stat_ptr ();
+}
+
+/* Add a new program header. This is called for each entry in a PHDRS
+ command in a linker script. */
+
+void
+lang_new_phdr (const char *name,
+ etree_type *type,
+ bool filehdr,
+ bool phdrs,
+ etree_type *at,
+ etree_type *flags)
+{
+ struct lang_phdr *n, **pp;
+ bool hdrs;
+
+ n = stat_alloc (sizeof (struct lang_phdr));
+ n->next = NULL;
+ n->name = name;
+ n->type = exp_get_vma (type, 0, "program header type");
+ n->filehdr = filehdr;
+ n->phdrs = phdrs;
+ n->at = at;
+ n->flags = flags;
+
+ hdrs = n->type == 1 && (phdrs || filehdr);
+
+ for (pp = &lang_phdr_list; *pp != NULL; pp = &(*pp)->next)
+ if (hdrs
+ && (*pp)->type == 1
+ && !((*pp)->filehdr || (*pp)->phdrs))
+ {
+ einfo (_("%X%P:%pS: PHDRS and FILEHDR are not supported"
+ " when prior PT_LOAD headers lack them\n"), NULL);
+ hdrs = false;
+ }
+
+ *pp = n;
+}
+
+/* Record the program header information in the output BFD. FIXME: We
+ should not be calling an ELF specific function here. */
+
+static void
+lang_record_phdrs (void)
+{
+ unsigned int alc;
+ asection **secs;
+ lang_output_section_phdr_list *last;
+ struct lang_phdr *l;
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os;
+
+ alc = 10;
+ secs = (asection **) xmalloc (alc * sizeof (asection *));
+ last = NULL;
+
+ for (l = lang_phdr_list; l != NULL; l = l->next)
+ {
+ unsigned int c;
+ flagword flags;
+ bfd_vma at;
+
+ c = 0;
+ for (os = (void *) lang_os_list.head;
+ os != NULL;
+ os = os->next)
+ {
+ lang_output_section_phdr_list *pl;
+
+ if (os->constraint < 0)
+ continue;
+
+ pl = os->phdrs;
+ if (pl != NULL)
+ last = pl;
+ else
+ {
+ if (os->sectype == noload_section
+ || os->bfd_section == NULL
+ || (os->bfd_section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) == 0)
+ continue;
+
+ /* Don't add orphans to PT_INTERP header. */
+ if (l->type == 3)
+ continue;
+
+ if (last == NULL)
+ {
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *tmp_os;
+
+ /* If we have not run across a section with a program
+ header assigned to it yet, then scan forwards to find
+ one. This prevents inconsistencies in the linker's
+ behaviour when a script has specified just a single
+ header and there are sections in that script which are
+ not assigned to it, and which occur before the first
+ use of that header. See here for more details:
+ http://sourceware.org/ml/binutils/2007-02/msg00291.html */
+ for (tmp_os = os; tmp_os; tmp_os = tmp_os->next)
+ if (tmp_os->phdrs)
+ {
+ last = tmp_os->phdrs;
+ break;
+ }
+ if (last == NULL)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: no sections assigned to phdrs\n"));
+ }
+ pl = last;
+ }
+
+ if (os->bfd_section == NULL)
+ continue;
+
+ for (; pl != NULL; pl = pl->next)
+ {
+ if (strcmp (pl->name, l->name) == 0)
+ {
+ if (c >= alc)
+ {
+ alc *= 2;
+ secs = (asection **) xrealloc (secs,
+ alc * sizeof (asection *));
+ }
+ secs[c] = os->bfd_section;
+ ++c;
+ pl->used = true;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ if (l->flags == NULL)
+ flags = 0;
+ else
+ flags = exp_get_vma (l->flags, 0, "phdr flags");
+
+ if (l->at == NULL)
+ at = 0;
+ else
+ at = exp_get_vma (l->at, 0, "phdr load address");
+
+ if (!bfd_record_phdr (link_info.output_bfd, l->type,
+ l->flags != NULL, flags, l->at != NULL,
+ at, l->filehdr, l->phdrs, c, secs))
+ einfo (_("%F%P: bfd_record_phdr failed: %E\n"));
+ }
+
+ free (secs);
+
+ /* Make sure all the phdr assignments succeeded. */
+ for (os = (void *) lang_os_list.head;
+ os != NULL;
+ os = os->next)
+ {
+ lang_output_section_phdr_list *pl;
+
+ if (os->constraint < 0
+ || os->bfd_section == NULL)
+ continue;
+
+ for (pl = os->phdrs;
+ pl != NULL;
+ pl = pl->next)
+ if (!pl->used && strcmp (pl->name, "NONE") != 0)
+ einfo (_("%X%P: section `%s' assigned to non-existent phdr `%s'\n"),
+ os->name, pl->name);
+ }
+}
+
+/* Record a list of sections which may not be cross referenced. */
+
+void
+lang_add_nocrossref (lang_nocrossref_type *l)
+{
+ struct lang_nocrossrefs *n;
+
+ n = (struct lang_nocrossrefs *) xmalloc (sizeof *n);
+ n->next = nocrossref_list;
+ n->list = l;
+ n->onlyfirst = false;
+ nocrossref_list = n;
+
+ /* Set notice_all so that we get informed about all symbols. */
+ link_info.notice_all = true;
+}
+
+/* Record a section that cannot be referenced from a list of sections. */
+
+void
+lang_add_nocrossref_to (lang_nocrossref_type *l)
+{
+ lang_add_nocrossref (l);
+ nocrossref_list->onlyfirst = true;
+}
+
+/* Overlay handling. We handle overlays with some static variables. */
+
+/* The overlay virtual address. */
+static etree_type *overlay_vma;
+/* And subsection alignment. */
+static etree_type *overlay_subalign;
+
+/* An expression for the maximum section size seen so far. */
+static etree_type *overlay_max;
+
+/* A list of all the sections in this overlay. */
+
+struct overlay_list {
+ struct overlay_list *next;
+ lang_output_section_statement_type *os;
+};
+
+static struct overlay_list *overlay_list;
+
+/* Start handling an overlay. */
+
+void
+lang_enter_overlay (etree_type *vma_expr, etree_type *subalign)
+{
+ /* The grammar should prevent nested overlays from occurring. */
+ ASSERT (overlay_vma == NULL
+ && overlay_subalign == NULL
+ && overlay_max == NULL);
+
+ overlay_vma = vma_expr;
+ overlay_subalign = subalign;
+}
+
+/* Start a section in an overlay. We handle this by calling
+ lang_enter_output_section_statement with the correct VMA.
+ lang_leave_overlay sets up the LMA and memory regions. */
+
+void
+lang_enter_overlay_section (const char *name)
+{
+ struct overlay_list *n;
+ etree_type *size;
+
+ lang_enter_output_section_statement (name, overlay_vma, overlay_section,
+ 0, 0, overlay_subalign, 0, 0, 0);
+
+ /* If this is the first section, then base the VMA of future
+ sections on this one. This will work correctly even if `.' is
+ used in the addresses. */
+ if (overlay_list == NULL)
+ overlay_vma = exp_nameop (ADDR, name);
+
+ /* Remember the section. */
+ n = (struct overlay_list *) xmalloc (sizeof *n);
+ n->os = current_section;
+ n->next = overlay_list;
+ overlay_list = n;
+
+ size = exp_nameop (SIZEOF, name);
+
+ /* Arrange to work out the maximum section end address. */
+ if (overlay_max == NULL)
+ overlay_max = size;
+ else
+ overlay_max = exp_binop (MAX_K, overlay_max, size);
+}
+
+/* Finish a section in an overlay. There isn't any special to do
+ here. */
+
+void
+lang_leave_overlay_section (fill_type *fill,
+ lang_output_section_phdr_list *phdrs)
+{
+ const char *name;
+ char *clean, *s2;
+ const char *s1;
+ char *buf;
+
+ name = current_section->name;
+
+ /* For now, assume that DEFAULT_MEMORY_REGION is the run-time memory
+ region and that no load-time region has been specified. It doesn't
+ really matter what we say here, since lang_leave_overlay will
+ override it. */
+ lang_leave_output_section_statement (fill, DEFAULT_MEMORY_REGION, phdrs, 0);
+
+ /* Define the magic symbols. */
+
+ clean = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (name) + 1);
+ s2 = clean;
+ for (s1 = name; *s1 != '\0'; s1++)
+ if (ISALNUM (*s1) || *s1 == '_')
+ *s2++ = *s1;
+ *s2 = '\0';
+
+ buf = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (clean) + sizeof "__load_start_");
+ sprintf (buf, "__load_start_%s", clean);
+ lang_add_assignment (exp_provide (buf,
+ exp_nameop (LOADADDR, name),
+ false));
+
+ buf = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (clean) + sizeof "__load_stop_");
+ sprintf (buf, "__load_stop_%s", clean);
+ lang_add_assignment (exp_provide (buf,
+ exp_binop ('+',
+ exp_nameop (LOADADDR, name),
+ exp_nameop (SIZEOF, name)),
+ false));
+
+ free (clean);
+}
+
+/* Finish an overlay. If there are any overlay wide settings, this
+ looks through all the sections in the overlay and sets them. */
+
+void
+lang_leave_overlay (etree_type *lma_expr,
+ int nocrossrefs,
+ fill_type *fill,
+ const char *memspec,
+ lang_output_section_phdr_list *phdrs,
+ const char *lma_memspec)
+{
+ lang_memory_region_type *region;
+ lang_memory_region_type *lma_region;
+ struct overlay_list *l;
+ lang_nocrossref_type *nocrossref;
+
+ lang_get_regions (&region, &lma_region,
+ memspec, lma_memspec,
+ lma_expr != NULL, false);
+
+ nocrossref = NULL;
+
+ /* After setting the size of the last section, set '.' to end of the
+ overlay region. */
+ if (overlay_list != NULL)
+ {
+ overlay_list->os->update_dot = 1;
+ overlay_list->os->update_dot_tree
+ = exp_assign (".", exp_binop ('+', overlay_vma, overlay_max), false);
+ }
+
+ l = overlay_list;
+ while (l != NULL)
+ {
+ struct overlay_list *next;
+
+ if (fill != NULL && l->os->fill == NULL)
+ l->os->fill = fill;
+
+ l->os->region = region;
+ l->os->lma_region = lma_region;
+
+ /* The first section has the load address specified in the
+ OVERLAY statement. The rest are worked out from that.
+ The base address is not needed (and should be null) if
+ an LMA region was specified. */
+ if (l->next == 0)
+ {
+ l->os->load_base = lma_expr;
+ l->os->sectype = first_overlay_section;
+ }
+ if (phdrs != NULL && l->os->phdrs == NULL)
+ l->os->phdrs = phdrs;
+
+ if (nocrossrefs)
+ {
+ lang_nocrossref_type *nc;
+
+ nc = (lang_nocrossref_type *) xmalloc (sizeof *nc);
+ nc->name = l->os->name;
+ nc->next = nocrossref;
+ nocrossref = nc;
+ }
+
+ next = l->next;
+ free (l);
+ l = next;
+ }
+
+ if (nocrossref != NULL)
+ lang_add_nocrossref (nocrossref);
+
+ overlay_vma = NULL;
+ overlay_list = NULL;
+ overlay_max = NULL;
+ overlay_subalign = NULL;
+}
+
+/* Version handling. This is only useful for ELF. */
+
+/* If PREV is NULL, return first version pattern matching particular symbol.
+ If PREV is non-NULL, return first version pattern matching particular
+ symbol after PREV (previously returned by lang_vers_match). */
+
+static struct bfd_elf_version_expr *
+lang_vers_match (struct bfd_elf_version_expr_head *head,
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr *prev,
+ const char *sym)
+{
+ const char *c_sym;
+ const char *cxx_sym = sym;
+ const char *java_sym = sym;
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr *expr = NULL;
+ enum demangling_styles curr_style;
+
+ curr_style = CURRENT_DEMANGLING_STYLE;
+ cplus_demangle_set_style (no_demangling);
+ c_sym = bfd_demangle (link_info.output_bfd, sym, DMGL_NO_OPTS);
+ if (!c_sym)
+ c_sym = sym;
+ cplus_demangle_set_style (curr_style);
+
+ if (head->mask & BFD_ELF_VERSION_CXX_TYPE)
+ {
+ cxx_sym = bfd_demangle (link_info.output_bfd, sym,
+ DMGL_PARAMS | DMGL_ANSI);
+ if (!cxx_sym)
+ cxx_sym = sym;
+ }
+ if (head->mask & BFD_ELF_VERSION_JAVA_TYPE)
+ {
+ java_sym = bfd_demangle (link_info.output_bfd, sym, DMGL_JAVA);
+ if (!java_sym)
+ java_sym = sym;
+ }
+
+ if (head->htab && (prev == NULL || prev->literal))
+ {
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr e;
+
+ switch (prev ? prev->mask : 0)
+ {
+ case 0:
+ if (head->mask & BFD_ELF_VERSION_C_TYPE)
+ {
+ e.pattern = c_sym;
+ expr = (struct bfd_elf_version_expr *)
+ htab_find ((htab_t) head->htab, &e);
+ while (expr && strcmp (expr->pattern, c_sym) == 0)
+ if (expr->mask == BFD_ELF_VERSION_C_TYPE)
+ goto out_ret;
+ else
+ expr = expr->next;
+ }
+ /* Fallthrough */
+ case BFD_ELF_VERSION_C_TYPE:
+ if (head->mask & BFD_ELF_VERSION_CXX_TYPE)
+ {
+ e.pattern = cxx_sym;
+ expr = (struct bfd_elf_version_expr *)
+ htab_find ((htab_t) head->htab, &e);
+ while (expr && strcmp (expr->pattern, cxx_sym) == 0)
+ if (expr->mask == BFD_ELF_VERSION_CXX_TYPE)
+ goto out_ret;
+ else
+ expr = expr->next;
+ }
+ /* Fallthrough */
+ case BFD_ELF_VERSION_CXX_TYPE:
+ if (head->mask & BFD_ELF_VERSION_JAVA_TYPE)
+ {
+ e.pattern = java_sym;
+ expr = (struct bfd_elf_version_expr *)
+ htab_find ((htab_t) head->htab, &e);
+ while (expr && strcmp (expr->pattern, java_sym) == 0)
+ if (expr->mask == BFD_ELF_VERSION_JAVA_TYPE)
+ goto out_ret;
+ else
+ expr = expr->next;
+ }
+ /* Fallthrough */
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Finally, try the wildcards. */
+ if (prev == NULL || prev->literal)
+ expr = head->remaining;
+ else
+ expr = prev->next;
+ for (; expr; expr = expr->next)
+ {
+ const char *s;
+
+ if (!expr->pattern)
+ continue;
+
+ if (expr->pattern[0] == '*' && expr->pattern[1] == '\0')
+ break;
+
+ if (expr->mask == BFD_ELF_VERSION_JAVA_TYPE)
+ s = java_sym;
+ else if (expr->mask == BFD_ELF_VERSION_CXX_TYPE)
+ s = cxx_sym;
+ else
+ s = c_sym;
+ if (fnmatch (expr->pattern, s, 0) == 0)
+ break;
+ }
+
+ out_ret:
+ if (c_sym != sym)
+ free ((char *) c_sym);
+ if (cxx_sym != sym)
+ free ((char *) cxx_sym);
+ if (java_sym != sym)
+ free ((char *) java_sym);
+ return expr;
+}
+
+/* Return NULL if the PATTERN argument is a glob pattern, otherwise,
+ return a pointer to the symbol name with any backslash quotes removed. */
+
+static const char *
+realsymbol (const char *pattern)
+{
+ const char *p;
+ bool changed = false, backslash = false;
+ char *s, *symbol = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (pattern) + 1);
+
+ for (p = pattern, s = symbol; *p != '\0'; ++p)
+ {
+ /* It is a glob pattern only if there is no preceding
+ backslash. */
+ if (backslash)
+ {
+ /* Remove the preceding backslash. */
+ *(s - 1) = *p;
+ backslash = false;
+ changed = true;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (*p == '?' || *p == '*' || *p == '[')
+ {
+ free (symbol);
+ return NULL;
+ }
+
+ *s++ = *p;
+ backslash = *p == '\\';
+ }
+ }
+
+ if (changed)
+ {
+ *s = '\0';
+ return symbol;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ free (symbol);
+ return pattern;
+ }
+}
+
+/* This is called for each variable name or match expression. NEW_NAME is
+ the name of the symbol to match, or, if LITERAL_P is FALSE, a glob
+ pattern to be matched against symbol names. */
+
+struct bfd_elf_version_expr *
+lang_new_vers_pattern (struct bfd_elf_version_expr *orig,
+ const char *new_name,
+ const char *lang,
+ bool literal_p)
+{
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr *ret;
+
+ ret = (struct bfd_elf_version_expr *) xmalloc (sizeof *ret);
+ ret->next = orig;
+ ret->symver = 0;
+ ret->script = 0;
+ ret->literal = true;
+ ret->pattern = literal_p ? new_name : realsymbol (new_name);
+ if (ret->pattern == NULL)
+ {
+ ret->pattern = new_name;
+ ret->literal = false;
+ }
+
+ if (lang == NULL || strcasecmp (lang, "C") == 0)
+ ret->mask = BFD_ELF_VERSION_C_TYPE;
+ else if (strcasecmp (lang, "C++") == 0)
+ ret->mask = BFD_ELF_VERSION_CXX_TYPE;
+ else if (strcasecmp (lang, "Java") == 0)
+ ret->mask = BFD_ELF_VERSION_JAVA_TYPE;
+ else
+ {
+ einfo (_("%X%P: unknown language `%s' in version information\n"),
+ lang);
+ ret->mask = BFD_ELF_VERSION_C_TYPE;
+ }
+
+ return ldemul_new_vers_pattern (ret);
+}
+
+/* This is called for each set of variable names and match
+ expressions. */
+
+struct bfd_elf_version_tree *
+lang_new_vers_node (struct bfd_elf_version_expr *globals,
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr *locals)
+{
+ struct bfd_elf_version_tree *ret;
+
+ ret = (struct bfd_elf_version_tree *) xcalloc (1, sizeof *ret);
+ ret->globals.list = globals;
+ ret->locals.list = locals;
+ ret->match = lang_vers_match;
+ ret->name_indx = (unsigned int) -1;
+ return ret;
+}
+
+/* This static variable keeps track of version indices. */
+
+static int version_index;
+
+static hashval_t
+version_expr_head_hash (const void *p)
+{
+ const struct bfd_elf_version_expr *e =
+ (const struct bfd_elf_version_expr *) p;
+
+ return htab_hash_string (e->pattern);
+}
+
+static int
+version_expr_head_eq (const void *p1, const void *p2)
+{
+ const struct bfd_elf_version_expr *e1 =
+ (const struct bfd_elf_version_expr *) p1;
+ const struct bfd_elf_version_expr *e2 =
+ (const struct bfd_elf_version_expr *) p2;
+
+ return strcmp (e1->pattern, e2->pattern) == 0;
+}
+
+static void
+lang_finalize_version_expr_head (struct bfd_elf_version_expr_head *head)
+{
+ size_t count = 0;
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr *e, *next;
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr **list_loc, **remaining_loc;
+
+ for (e = head->list; e; e = e->next)
+ {
+ if (e->literal)
+ count++;
+ head->mask |= e->mask;
+ }
+
+ if (count)
+ {
+ head->htab = htab_create (count * 2, version_expr_head_hash,
+ version_expr_head_eq, NULL);
+ list_loc = &head->list;
+ remaining_loc = &head->remaining;
+ for (e = head->list; e; e = next)
+ {
+ next = e->next;
+ if (!e->literal)
+ {
+ *remaining_loc = e;
+ remaining_loc = &e->next;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ void **loc = htab_find_slot ((htab_t) head->htab, e, INSERT);
+
+ if (*loc)
+ {
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr *e1, *last;
+
+ e1 = (struct bfd_elf_version_expr *) *loc;
+ last = NULL;
+ do
+ {
+ if (e1->mask == e->mask)
+ {
+ last = NULL;
+ break;
+ }
+ last = e1;
+ e1 = e1->next;
+ }
+ while (e1 && strcmp (e1->pattern, e->pattern) == 0);
+
+ if (last == NULL)
+ {
+ /* This is a duplicate. */
+ /* FIXME: Memory leak. Sometimes pattern is not
+ xmalloced alone, but in larger chunk of memory. */
+ /* free (e->pattern); */
+ free (e);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ e->next = last->next;
+ last->next = e;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ *loc = e;
+ *list_loc = e;
+ list_loc = &e->next;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ *remaining_loc = NULL;
+ *list_loc = head->remaining;
+ }
+ else
+ head->remaining = head->list;
+}
+
+/* This is called when we know the name and dependencies of the
+ version. */
+
+void
+lang_register_vers_node (const char *name,
+ struct bfd_elf_version_tree *version,
+ struct bfd_elf_version_deps *deps)
+{
+ struct bfd_elf_version_tree *t, **pp;
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr *e1;
+
+ if (name == NULL)
+ name = "";
+
+ if (link_info.version_info != NULL
+ && (name[0] == '\0' || link_info.version_info->name[0] == '\0'))
+ {
+ einfo (_("%X%P: anonymous version tag cannot be combined"
+ " with other version tags\n"));
+ free (version);
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /* Make sure this node has a unique name. */
+ for (t = link_info.version_info; t != NULL; t = t->next)
+ if (strcmp (t->name, name) == 0)
+ einfo (_("%X%P: duplicate version tag `%s'\n"), name);
+
+ lang_finalize_version_expr_head (&version->globals);
+ lang_finalize_version_expr_head (&version->locals);
+
+ /* Check the global and local match names, and make sure there
+ aren't any duplicates. */
+
+ for (e1 = version->globals.list; e1 != NULL; e1 = e1->next)
+ {
+ for (t = link_info.version_info; t != NULL; t = t->next)
+ {
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr *e2;
+
+ if (t->locals.htab && e1->literal)
+ {
+ e2 = (struct bfd_elf_version_expr *)
+ htab_find ((htab_t) t->locals.htab, e1);
+ while (e2 && strcmp (e1->pattern, e2->pattern) == 0)
+ {
+ if (e1->mask == e2->mask)
+ einfo (_("%X%P: duplicate expression `%s'"
+ " in version information\n"), e1->pattern);
+ e2 = e2->next;
+ }
+ }
+ else if (!e1->literal)
+ for (e2 = t->locals.remaining; e2 != NULL; e2 = e2->next)
+ if (strcmp (e1->pattern, e2->pattern) == 0
+ && e1->mask == e2->mask)
+ einfo (_("%X%P: duplicate expression `%s'"
+ " in version information\n"), e1->pattern);
+ }
+ }
+
+ for (e1 = version->locals.list; e1 != NULL; e1 = e1->next)
+ {
+ for (t = link_info.version_info; t != NULL; t = t->next)
+ {
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr *e2;
+
+ if (t->globals.htab && e1->literal)
+ {
+ e2 = (struct bfd_elf_version_expr *)
+ htab_find ((htab_t) t->globals.htab, e1);
+ while (e2 && strcmp (e1->pattern, e2->pattern) == 0)
+ {
+ if (e1->mask == e2->mask)
+ einfo (_("%X%P: duplicate expression `%s'"
+ " in version information\n"),
+ e1->pattern);
+ e2 = e2->next;
+ }
+ }
+ else if (!e1->literal)
+ for (e2 = t->globals.remaining; e2 != NULL; e2 = e2->next)
+ if (strcmp (e1->pattern, e2->pattern) == 0
+ && e1->mask == e2->mask)
+ einfo (_("%X%P: duplicate expression `%s'"
+ " in version information\n"), e1->pattern);
+ }
+ }
+
+ version->deps = deps;
+ version->name = name;
+ if (name[0] != '\0')
+ {
+ ++version_index;
+ version->vernum = version_index;
+ }
+ else
+ version->vernum = 0;
+
+ for (pp = &link_info.version_info; *pp != NULL; pp = &(*pp)->next)
+ ;
+ *pp = version;
+}
+
+/* This is called when we see a version dependency. */
+
+struct bfd_elf_version_deps *
+lang_add_vers_depend (struct bfd_elf_version_deps *list, const char *name)
+{
+ struct bfd_elf_version_deps *ret;
+ struct bfd_elf_version_tree *t;
+
+ ret = (struct bfd_elf_version_deps *) xmalloc (sizeof *ret);
+ ret->next = list;
+
+ for (t = link_info.version_info; t != NULL; t = t->next)
+ {
+ if (strcmp (t->name, name) == 0)
+ {
+ ret->version_needed = t;
+ return ret;
+ }
+ }
+
+ einfo (_("%X%P: unable to find version dependency `%s'\n"), name);
+
+ ret->version_needed = NULL;
+ return ret;
+}
+
+static void
+lang_do_version_exports_section (void)
+{
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr *greg = NULL, *lreg;
+
+ LANG_FOR_EACH_INPUT_STATEMENT (is)
+ {
+ asection *sec = bfd_get_section_by_name (is->the_bfd, ".exports");
+ char *contents, *p;
+ bfd_size_type len;
+
+ if (sec == NULL)
+ continue;
+
+ len = sec->size;
+ contents = (char *) xmalloc (len);
+ if (!bfd_get_section_contents (is->the_bfd, sec, contents, 0, len))
+ einfo (_("%X%P: unable to read .exports section contents\n"), sec);
+
+ p = contents;
+ while (p < contents + len)
+ {
+ greg = lang_new_vers_pattern (greg, p, NULL, false);
+ p = strchr (p, '\0') + 1;
+ }
+
+ /* Do not free the contents, as we used them creating the regex. */
+
+ /* Do not include this section in the link. */
+ sec->flags |= SEC_EXCLUDE | SEC_KEEP;
+ }
+
+ lreg = lang_new_vers_pattern (NULL, "*", NULL, false);
+ lang_register_vers_node (command_line.version_exports_section,
+ lang_new_vers_node (greg, lreg), NULL);
+}
+
+/* Evaluate LENGTH and ORIGIN parts of MEMORY spec. This is initially
+ called with UPDATE_REGIONS_P set to FALSE, in this case no errors are
+ thrown, however, references to symbols in the origin and length fields
+ will be pushed into the symbol table, this allows PROVIDE statements to
+ then provide these symbols. This function is called a second time with
+ UPDATE_REGIONS_P set to TRUE, this time the we update the actual region
+ data structures, and throw errors if missing symbols are encountered. */
+
+static void
+lang_do_memory_regions (bool update_regions_p)
+{
+ lang_memory_region_type *r = lang_memory_region_list;
+
+ for (; r != NULL; r = r->next)
+ {
+ if (r->origin_exp)
+ {
+ exp_fold_tree_no_dot (r->origin_exp);
+ if (update_regions_p)
+ {
+ if (expld.result.valid_p)
+ {
+ r->origin = expld.result.value;
+ r->current = r->origin;
+ }
+ else
+ einfo (_("%P: invalid origin for memory region %s\n"),
+ r->name_list.name);
+ }
+ }
+ if (r->length_exp)
+ {
+ exp_fold_tree_no_dot (r->length_exp);
+ if (update_regions_p)
+ {
+ if (expld.result.valid_p)
+ r->length = expld.result.value;
+ else
+ einfo (_("%P: invalid length for memory region %s\n"),
+ r->name_list.name);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+void
+lang_add_unique (const char *name)
+{
+ struct unique_sections *ent;
+
+ for (ent = unique_section_list; ent; ent = ent->next)
+ if (strcmp (ent->name, name) == 0)
+ return;
+
+ ent = (struct unique_sections *) xmalloc (sizeof *ent);
+ ent->name = xstrdup (name);
+ ent->next = unique_section_list;
+ unique_section_list = ent;
+}
+
+/* Append the list of dynamic symbols to the existing one. */
+
+void
+lang_append_dynamic_list (struct bfd_elf_dynamic_list **list_p,
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr *dynamic)
+{
+ if (*list_p)
+ {
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr *tail;
+ for (tail = dynamic; tail->next != NULL; tail = tail->next)
+ ;
+ tail->next = (*list_p)->head.list;
+ (*list_p)->head.list = dynamic;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ struct bfd_elf_dynamic_list *d;
+
+ d = (struct bfd_elf_dynamic_list *) xcalloc (1, sizeof *d);
+ d->head.list = dynamic;
+ d->match = lang_vers_match;
+ *list_p = d;
+ }
+}
+
+/* Append the list of C++ typeinfo dynamic symbols to the existing
+ one. */
+
+void
+lang_append_dynamic_list_cpp_typeinfo (void)
+{
+ const char *symbols[] =
+ {
+ "typeinfo name for*",
+ "typeinfo for*"
+ };
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr *dynamic = NULL;
+ unsigned int i;
+
+ for (i = 0; i < ARRAY_SIZE (symbols); i++)
+ dynamic = lang_new_vers_pattern (dynamic, symbols [i], "C++",
+ false);
+
+ lang_append_dynamic_list (&link_info.dynamic_list, dynamic);
+}
+
+/* Append the list of C++ operator new and delete dynamic symbols to the
+ existing one. */
+
+void
+lang_append_dynamic_list_cpp_new (void)
+{
+ const char *symbols[] =
+ {
+ "operator new*",
+ "operator delete*"
+ };
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr *dynamic = NULL;
+ unsigned int i;
+
+ for (i = 0; i < ARRAY_SIZE (symbols); i++)
+ dynamic = lang_new_vers_pattern (dynamic, symbols [i], "C++",
+ false);
+
+ lang_append_dynamic_list (&link_info.dynamic_list, dynamic);
+}
+
+/* Scan a space and/or comma separated string of features. */
+
+void
+lang_ld_feature (char *str)
+{
+ char *p, *q;
+
+ p = str;
+ while (*p)
+ {
+ char sep;
+ while (*p == ',' || ISSPACE (*p))
+ ++p;
+ if (!*p)
+ break;
+ q = p + 1;
+ while (*q && *q != ',' && !ISSPACE (*q))
+ ++q;
+ sep = *q;
+ *q = 0;
+ if (strcasecmp (p, "SANE_EXPR") == 0)
+ config.sane_expr = true;
+ else
+ einfo (_("%X%P: unknown feature `%s'\n"), p);
+ *q = sep;
+ p = q;
+ }
+}
+
+/* Pretty print memory amount. */
+
+static void
+lang_print_memory_size (uint64_t sz)
+{
+ if ((sz & 0x3fffffff) == 0)
+ printf ("%10" PRIu64 " GB", sz >> 30);
+ else if ((sz & 0xfffff) == 0)
+ printf ("%10" PRIu64 " MB", sz >> 20);
+ else if ((sz & 0x3ff) == 0)
+ printf ("%10" PRIu64 " KB", sz >> 10);
+ else
+ printf (" %10" PRIu64 " B", sz);
+}
+
+/* Implement --print-memory-usage: disply per region memory usage. */
+
+void
+lang_print_memory_usage (void)
+{
+ lang_memory_region_type *r;
+
+ printf ("Memory region Used Size Region Size %%age Used\n");
+ for (r = lang_memory_region_list; r->next != NULL; r = r->next)
+ {
+ bfd_vma used_length = r->current - r->origin;
+
+ printf ("%16s: ",r->name_list.name);
+ lang_print_memory_size (used_length);
+ lang_print_memory_size (r->length);
+
+ if (r->length != 0)
+ {
+ double percent = used_length * 100.0 / r->length;
+ printf (" %6.2f%%", percent);
+ }
+ printf ("\n");
+ }
+}
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/ldlang.h binutils-2.41/ld/ldlang.h
--- binutils.orig/ld/ldlang.h 2024-05-13 13:03:47.804601777 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/ldlang.h 2024-05-13 13:04:08.599633306 +0100
@@ -141,7 +141,12 @@ typedef struct lang_output_section_phdr_
typedef struct lang_output_section_statement_struct
{
lang_statement_header_type header;
+ /* Input sections to be mapped to this output section. */
lang_statement_list_type children;
+ /* Input sections to be mapped to the start of this output section.
+ These sections are provided by the --section-ordering file, if used. */
+ lang_statement_list_type sort_children;
+
struct lang_output_section_statement_struct *next;
struct lang_output_section_statement_struct *prev;
const char *name;
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/ldlex.h binutils-2.41/ld/ldlex.h
--- binutils.orig/ld/ldlex.h 2024-05-13 13:03:48.141602288 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/ldlex.h 2024-05-13 13:04:08.599633306 +0100
@@ -62,6 +62,7 @@ enum option_values
OPTION_SONAME,
OPTION_SORT_COMMON,
OPTION_SORT_SECTION,
+ OPTION_SECTION_ORDERING_FILE,
OPTION_STATS,
OPTION_SYMBOLIC,
OPTION_SYMBOLIC_FUNCTIONS,
@@ -190,6 +191,7 @@ typedef enum input_enum
input_script,
input_mri_script,
input_version_script,
+ input_section_ordering_script,
input_dynamic_list,
input_defsym
} input_type;
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/ldlex.h.orig binutils-2.41/ld/ldlex.h.orig
--- binutils.orig/ld/ldlex.h.orig 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/ldlex.h.orig 2024-05-13 13:03:25.176567468 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,222 @@
+/* ldlex.h -
+ Copyright (C) 1991-2023 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+ This file is part of the GNU Binutils.
+
+ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or
+ (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+ Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street - Fifth Floor, Boston,
+ MA 02110-1301, USA. */
+
+#ifndef LDLEX_H
+#define LDLEX_H
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+
+/* Codes used for the long options with no short synonyms. 150 isn't
+ special; it's just an arbitrary non-ASCII char value. */
+enum option_values
+{
+ OPTION_ASSERT = 150,
+ OPTION_CALL_SHARED,
+ OPTION_CREF,
+ OPTION_DEFSYM,
+ OPTION_DEMANGLE,
+ OPTION_DYNAMIC_LINKER,
+ OPTION_NO_DYNAMIC_LINKER,
+ OPTION_SYSROOT,
+ OPTION_OUT_IMPLIB,
+ OPTION_EB,
+ OPTION_EL,
+ OPTION_EMBEDDED_RELOCS,
+ OPTION_EXPORT_DYNAMIC,
+ OPTION_NO_EXPORT_DYNAMIC,
+ OPTION_HELP,
+ OPTION_IGNORE,
+ OPTION_MAP,
+ OPTION_NO_DEMANGLE,
+ OPTION_NO_KEEP_MEMORY,
+ OPTION_NO_WARN_MISMATCH,
+ OPTION_NO_WARN_SEARCH_MISMATCH,
+ OPTION_NOINHIBIT_EXEC,
+ OPTION_NON_SHARED,
+ OPTION_NO_WHOLE_ARCHIVE,
+ OPTION_OFORMAT,
+ OPTION_RELAX,
+ OPTION_NO_RELAX,
+ OPTION_NO_SYMBOLIC,
+ OPTION_RETAIN_SYMBOLS_FILE,
+ OPTION_RPATH,
+ OPTION_RPATH_LINK,
+ OPTION_SHARED,
+ OPTION_SONAME,
+ OPTION_SORT_COMMON,
+ OPTION_SORT_SECTION,
+ OPTION_STATS,
+ OPTION_SYMBOLIC,
+ OPTION_SYMBOLIC_FUNCTIONS,
+ OPTION_TASK_LINK,
+ OPTION_TBSS,
+ OPTION_TDATA,
+ OPTION_TTEXT,
+ OPTION_TTEXT_SEGMENT,
+ OPTION_TRODATA_SEGMENT,
+ OPTION_TLDATA_SEGMENT,
+ OPTION_TRADITIONAL_FORMAT,
+ OPTION_UR,
+ OPTION_VERBOSE,
+ OPTION_VERSION,
+ OPTION_VERSION_SCRIPT,
+ OPTION_VERSION_EXPORTS_SECTION,
+ OPTION_DYNAMIC_LIST,
+ OPTION_DYNAMIC_LIST_CPP_NEW,
+ OPTION_DYNAMIC_LIST_CPP_TYPEINFO,
+ OPTION_DYNAMIC_LIST_DATA,
+ OPTION_EXPORT_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL,
+ OPTION_EXPORT_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL_LIST,
+ OPTION_WARN_COMMON,
+ OPTION_WARN_CONSTRUCTORS,
+ OPTION_WARN_FATAL,
+ OPTION_NO_WARN_FATAL,
+ OPTION_NO_WARNINGS,
+ OPTION_WARN_MULTIPLE_GP,
+ OPTION_WARN_ONCE,
+ OPTION_WARN_SECTION_ALIGN,
+ OPTION_SPLIT_BY_RELOC,
+ OPTION_SPLIT_BY_FILE ,
+ OPTION_WHOLE_ARCHIVE,
+ OPTION_ADD_DT_NEEDED_FOR_DYNAMIC,
+ OPTION_NO_ADD_DT_NEEDED_FOR_DYNAMIC,
+ OPTION_ADD_DT_NEEDED_FOR_REGULAR,
+ OPTION_NO_ADD_DT_NEEDED_FOR_REGULAR,
+ OPTION_WRAP,
+ OPTION_FORCE_EXE_SUFFIX,
+ OPTION_GC_SECTIONS,
+ OPTION_NO_GC_SECTIONS,
+ OPTION_PRINT_GC_SECTIONS,
+ OPTION_NO_PRINT_GC_SECTIONS,
+ OPTION_GC_KEEP_EXPORTED,
+ OPTION_HASH_SIZE,
+ OPTION_CHECK_SECTIONS,
+ OPTION_NO_CHECK_SECTIONS,
+ OPTION_NO_UNDEFINED,
+ OPTION_INIT,
+ OPTION_FINI,
+ OPTION_SECTION_START,
+ OPTION_UNIQUE,
+ OPTION_TARGET_HELP,
+ OPTION_ALLOW_SHLIB_UNDEFINED,
+ OPTION_NO_ALLOW_SHLIB_UNDEFINED,
+ OPTION_ALLOW_MULTIPLE_DEFINITION,
+#if SUPPORT_ERROR_HANDLING_SCRIPT
+ OPTION_ERROR_HANDLING_SCRIPT,
+#endif
+ OPTION_UNDEFINED_VERSION,
+ OPTION_NO_UNDEFINED_VERSION,
+ OPTION_DEFAULT_SYMVER,
+ OPTION_DEFAULT_IMPORTED_SYMVER,
+ OPTION_DISCARD_NONE,
+ OPTION_SPARE_DYNAMIC_TAGS,
+ OPTION_NO_DEFINE_COMMON,
+ OPTION_NOSTDLIB,
+ OPTION_NO_OMAGIC,
+ OPTION_STRIP_DISCARDED,
+ OPTION_NO_STRIP_DISCARDED,
+ OPTION_ACCEPT_UNKNOWN_INPUT_ARCH,
+ OPTION_NO_ACCEPT_UNKNOWN_INPUT_ARCH,
+ OPTION_PIE,
+ OPTION_NO_PIE,
+ OPTION_UNRESOLVED_SYMBOLS,
+ OPTION_WARN_UNRESOLVED_SYMBOLS,
+ OPTION_ERROR_UNRESOLVED_SYMBOLS,
+ OPTION_WARN_TEXTREL,
+ OPTION_WARN_ALTERNATE_EM,
+ OPTION_REDUCE_MEMORY_OVERHEADS,
+ OPTION_MAX_CACHE_SIZE,
+#if BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS
+ OPTION_PLUGIN,
+ OPTION_PLUGIN_OPT,
+#endif /* BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS */
+ OPTION_DEFAULT_SCRIPT,
+ OPTION_PRINT_OUTPUT_FORMAT,
+ OPTION_PRINT_SYSROOT,
+ OPTION_IGNORE_UNRESOLVED_SYMBOL,
+ OPTION_PUSH_STATE,
+ OPTION_POP_STATE,
+ OPTION_DISABLE_MULTIPLE_DEFS_ABS,
+ OPTION_PRINT_MEMORY_USAGE,
+ OPTION_REQUIRE_DEFINED_SYMBOL,
+ OPTION_ORPHAN_HANDLING,
+ OPTION_FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION,
+ OPTION_PRINT_MAP_DISCARDED,
+ OPTION_NO_PRINT_MAP_DISCARDED,
+ OPTION_PRINT_MAP_LOCALS,
+ OPTION_NO_PRINT_MAP_LOCALS,
+ OPTION_NON_CONTIGUOUS_REGIONS,
+ OPTION_NON_CONTIGUOUS_REGIONS_WARNINGS,
+ OPTION_DEPENDENCY_FILE,
+ OPTION_CTF_VARIABLES,
+ OPTION_NO_CTF_VARIABLES,
+ OPTION_CTF_SHARE_TYPES,
+ OPTION_ERROR_EXECSTACK,
+ OPTION_NO_ERROR_EXECSTACK,
+ OPTION_WARN_EXECSTACK_OBJECTS,
+ OPTION_WARN_EXECSTACK,
+ OPTION_NO_WARN_EXECSTACK,
+ OPTION_WARN_RWX_SEGMENTS,
+ OPTION_NO_WARN_RWX_SEGMENTS,
+ OPTION_ERROR_RWX_SEGMENTS,
+ OPTION_NO_ERROR_RWX_SEGMENTS,
+ OPTION_ENABLE_LINKER_VERSION,
+ OPTION_DISABLE_LINKER_VERSION,
+ OPTION_REMAP_INPUTS,
+ OPTION_REMAP_INPUTS_FILE,
+};
+
+/* The initial parser states. */
+typedef enum input_enum
+{
+ input_selected, /* We've set the initial state. */
+ input_script,
+ input_mri_script,
+ input_version_script,
+ input_dynamic_list,
+ input_defsym
+} input_type;
+
+extern input_type parser_input;
+
+extern unsigned int lineno;
+extern const char *lex_string;
+
+/* In ldlex.l. */
+extern int yylex (void);
+extern void lex_push_file (FILE *, const char *, unsigned int);
+extern void lex_redirect (const char *, const char *, unsigned int);
+extern void ldlex_script (void);
+extern void ldlex_inputlist (void);
+extern void ldlex_mri_script (void);
+extern void ldlex_version_script (void);
+extern void ldlex_version_file (void);
+extern void ldlex_expression (void);
+extern void ldlex_wild (void);
+extern void ldlex_popstate (void);
+extern void ldlex_backup (void);
+extern const char* ldlex_filename (void);
+
+/* In lexsup.c. */
+extern int lex_input (void);
+extern void lex_unput (int);
+extern void parse_args (unsigned, char **);
+
+#endif
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/ldlex.l binutils-2.41/ld/ldlex.l
--- binutils.orig/ld/ldlex.l 2024-05-13 13:03:47.805601779 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/ldlex.l 2024-05-13 13:04:08.599633306 +0100
@@ -120,11 +120,12 @@ V_IDENTIFIER [*?.$_a-zA-Z\[\]\-\!\^\\]([
parser_input = input_selected;
switch (t)
{
- case input_script: return INPUT_SCRIPT; break;
- case input_mri_script: return INPUT_MRI_SCRIPT; break;
- case input_version_script: return INPUT_VERSION_SCRIPT; break;
- case input_dynamic_list: return INPUT_DYNAMIC_LIST; break;
- case input_defsym: return INPUT_DEFSYM; break;
+ case input_script: return INPUT_SCRIPT;
+ case input_mri_script: return INPUT_MRI_SCRIPT;
+ case input_version_script: return INPUT_VERSION_SCRIPT;
+ case input_section_ordering_script: return INPUT_SECTION_ORDERING_SCRIPT;
+ case input_dynamic_list: return INPUT_DYNAMIC_LIST;
+ case input_defsym: return INPUT_DEFSYM;
default: abort ();
}
}
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/ldmain.c binutils-2.41/ld/ldmain.c
--- binutils.orig/ld/ldmain.c 2024-05-13 13:03:47.805601779 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/ldmain.c 2024-05-13 13:04:08.599633306 +0100
@@ -90,6 +90,8 @@ bool version_printed;
/* TRUE if we should demangle symbol names. */
bool demangling;
+bool in_section_ordering;
+
args_type command_line;
ld_config_type config;
@@ -246,6 +248,26 @@ ld_bfd_error_handler (const char *fmt, v
(*default_bfd_error_handler) (fmt, ap);
}
+static void
+display_external_script (void)
+{
+ if (saved_script_handle == NULL)
+ return;
+
+ static const int ld_bufsz = 8193;
+ size_t n;
+ char *buf = (char *) xmalloc (ld_bufsz);
+
+ rewind (saved_script_handle);
+ while ((n = fread (buf, 1, ld_bufsz - 1, saved_script_handle)) > 0)
+ {
+ buf[n] = 0;
+ info_msg ("%s", buf);
+ }
+ rewind (saved_script_handle);
+ free (buf);
+}
+
int
main (int argc, char **argv)
{
@@ -416,26 +438,13 @@ main (int argc, char **argv)
if (verbose)
{
if (saved_script_handle)
- info_msg (_("using external linker script:"));
+ info_msg (_("using external linker script: %s"), processed_scripts->name);
else
info_msg (_("using internal linker script:"));
info_msg ("\n==================================================\n");
if (saved_script_handle)
- {
- static const int ld_bufsz = 8193;
- size_t n;
- char *buf = (char *) xmalloc (ld_bufsz);
-
- rewind (saved_script_handle);
- while ((n = fread (buf, 1, ld_bufsz - 1, saved_script_handle)) > 0)
- {
- buf[n] = 0;
- info_msg ("%s", buf);
- }
- rewind (saved_script_handle);
- free (buf);
- }
+ display_external_script ();
else
{
int isfile;
@@ -446,6 +455,22 @@ main (int argc, char **argv)
info_msg ("\n==================================================\n");
}
+ if (command_line.section_ordering_file)
+ {
+ FILE *hold_script_handle;
+
+ hold_script_handle = saved_script_handle;
+ ldfile_open_command_file (command_line.section_ordering_file);
+ if (verbose)
+ display_external_script ();
+ saved_script_handle = hold_script_handle;
+ in_section_ordering = true;
+ parser_input = input_section_ordering_script;
+ yyparse ();
+ in_section_ordering = false;
+
+ }
+
if (command_line.force_group_allocation
|| !bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info))
link_info.resolve_section_groups = true;
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/lexsup.c binutils-2.41/ld/lexsup.c
--- binutils.orig/ld/lexsup.c 2024-05-13 13:03:48.141602288 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/lexsup.c 2024-05-13 13:04:08.599633306 +0100
@@ -484,6 +484,9 @@ static const struct ld_option ld_options
{ {"sort-section", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_SORT_SECTION},
'\0', N_("name|alignment"),
N_("Sort sections by name or maximum alignment"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"section-ordering-file", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_SECTION_ORDERING_FILE},
+ '\0', N_("FILE"),
+ N_("Sort sections by statements in FILE"), TWO_DASHES },
{ {"spare-dynamic-tags", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_SPARE_DYNAMIC_TAGS},
'\0', N_("COUNT"), N_("How many tags to reserve in .dynamic section"),
TWO_DASHES },
@@ -1394,6 +1397,12 @@ parse_args (unsigned argc, char **argv)
einfo (_("%F%P: invalid section sorting option: %s\n"),
optarg);
break;
+ case OPTION_SECTION_ORDERING_FILE:
+ if (command_line.section_ordering_file != NULL
+ && strcmp (optarg, command_line.section_ordering_file) != 0)
+ einfo (_("%P: warning: section ordering file changed. Ignoring earlier definition\n"));
+ command_line.section_ordering_file = optarg;
+ break;
case OPTION_STATS:
config.stats = true;
break;
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/lexsup.c.orig binutils-2.41/ld/lexsup.c.orig
--- binutils.orig/ld/lexsup.c.orig 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/lexsup.c.orig 2024-05-13 13:03:25.177567469 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,2476 @@
+/* Parse options for the GNU linker.
+ Copyright (C) 1991-2023 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+ This file is part of the GNU Binutils.
+
+ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or
+ (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+ Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street - Fifth Floor, Boston,
+ MA 02110-1301, USA. */
+
+#include "sysdep.h"
+#include "bfd.h"
+#include "bfdver.h"
+#include "libiberty.h"
+#include "filenames.h"
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include "safe-ctype.h"
+#include "getopt.h"
+#include "bfdlink.h"
+#include "ctf-api.h"
+#include "ld.h"
+#include "ldmain.h"
+#include "ldmisc.h"
+#include "ldexp.h"
+#include "ldlang.h"
+#include <ldgram.h>
+#include "ldlex.h"
+#include "ldfile.h"
+#include "ldver.h"
+#include "ldemul.h"
+#include "demangle.h"
+#if BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS
+#include "plugin.h"
+#endif /* BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS */
+
+#ifndef PATH_SEPARATOR
+#if defined (__MSDOS__) || (defined (_WIN32) && ! defined (__CYGWIN32__))
+#define PATH_SEPARATOR ';'
+#else
+#define PATH_SEPARATOR ':'
+#endif
+#endif
+
+/* Somewhere above, sys/stat.h got included . . . . */
+#if !defined(S_ISDIR) && defined(S_IFDIR)
+#define S_ISDIR(m) (((m) & S_IFMT) == S_IFDIR)
+#endif
+
+static void set_default_dirlist (char *);
+static void set_section_start (char *, char *);
+static void set_segment_start (const char *, char *);
+static void help (void);
+
+/* The long options. This structure is used for both the option
+ parsing and the help text. */
+
+enum control_enum {
+ /* Use one dash before long option name. */
+ ONE_DASH = 1,
+ /* Use two dashes before long option name. */
+ TWO_DASHES = 2,
+ /* Only accept two dashes before the long option name.
+ This is an overloading of the use of this enum, since originally it
+ was only intended to tell the --help display function how to display
+ the long option name. This feature was added in order to resolve
+ the confusion about the -omagic command line switch. Is it setting
+ the output file name to "magic" or is it setting the NMAGIC flag on
+ the output ? It has been decided that it is setting the output file
+ name, and that if you want to set the NMAGIC flag you should use -N
+ or --omagic. */
+ EXACTLY_TWO_DASHES,
+ /* Don't mention this option in --help output. */
+ NO_HELP
+};
+
+struct ld_option
+{
+ /* The long option information. */
+ struct option opt;
+ /* The short option with the same meaning ('\0' if none). */
+ char shortopt;
+ /* The name of the argument (NULL if none). */
+ const char *arg;
+ /* The documentation string. If this is NULL, this is a synonym for
+ the previous option. */
+ const char *doc;
+ enum control_enum control;
+};
+
+static const struct ld_option ld_options[] =
+{
+ { {NULL, required_argument, NULL, '\0'},
+ 'a', N_("KEYWORD"), N_("Shared library control for HP/UX compatibility"),
+ ONE_DASH },
+ { {"architecture", required_argument, NULL, 'A'},
+ 'A', N_("ARCH"), N_("Set architecture") , TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"format", required_argument, NULL, 'b'},
+ 'b', N_("TARGET"), N_("Specify target for following input files"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"mri-script", required_argument, NULL, 'c'},
+ 'c', N_("FILE"), N_("Read MRI format linker script"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"dc", no_argument, NULL, 'd'},
+ 'd', NULL, N_("Force common symbols to be defined"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"dp", no_argument, NULL, 'd'},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, ONE_DASH },
+ { {"dependency-file", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_DEPENDENCY_FILE},
+ '\0', N_("FILE"), N_("Write dependency file"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"force-group-allocation", no_argument, NULL,
+ OPTION_FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Force group members out of groups"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"entry", required_argument, NULL, 'e'},
+ 'e', N_("ADDRESS"), N_("Set start address"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"export-dynamic", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_EXPORT_DYNAMIC},
+ 'E', NULL, N_("Export all dynamic symbols"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-export-dynamic", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_EXPORT_DYNAMIC},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Undo the effect of --export-dynamic"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"enable-non-contiguous-regions", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NON_CONTIGUOUS_REGIONS},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Enable support of non-contiguous memory regions"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NON_CONTIGUOUS_REGIONS_WARNINGS},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Enable warnings when --enable-non-contiguous-regions may cause unexpected behaviour"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"disable-linker-version", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_DISABLE_LINKER_VERSION},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Disable the LINKER_VERSION linker script directive"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"enable-linker-version", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_ENABLE_LINKER_VERSION},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Enable the LINKER_VERSION linker script directive"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"EB", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_EB},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Link big-endian objects"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"EL", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_EL},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Link little-endian objects"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"auxiliary", required_argument, NULL, 'f'},
+ 'f', N_("SHLIB"), N_("Auxiliary filter for shared object symbol table"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"filter", required_argument, NULL, 'F'},
+ 'F', N_("SHLIB"), N_("Filter for shared object symbol table"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {NULL, no_argument, NULL, '\0'},
+ 'g', NULL, N_("Ignored"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"gpsize", required_argument, NULL, 'G'},
+ 'G', N_("SIZE"), N_("Small data size (if no size, same as --shared)"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"soname", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_SONAME},
+ 'h', N_("FILENAME"), N_("Set internal name of shared library"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"dynamic-linker", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_DYNAMIC_LINKER},
+ 'I', N_("PROGRAM"), N_("Set PROGRAM as the dynamic linker to use"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-dynamic-linker", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_DYNAMIC_LINKER},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Produce an executable with no program interpreter header"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"library", required_argument, NULL, 'l'},
+ 'l', N_("LIBNAME"), N_("Search for library LIBNAME"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"library-path", required_argument, NULL, 'L'},
+ 'L', N_("DIRECTORY"), N_("Add DIRECTORY to library search path"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"sysroot=<DIRECTORY>", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_SYSROOT},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Override the default sysroot location"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {NULL, required_argument, NULL, '\0'},
+ 'm', N_("EMULATION"), N_("Set emulation"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"print-map", no_argument, NULL, 'M'},
+ 'M', NULL, N_("Print map file on standard output"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"nmagic", no_argument, NULL, 'n'},
+ 'n', NULL, N_("Do not page align data"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"omagic", no_argument, NULL, 'N'},
+ 'N', NULL, N_("Do not page align data, do not make text readonly"),
+ EXACTLY_TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-omagic", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_OMAGIC},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Page align data, make text readonly"),
+ EXACTLY_TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"output", required_argument, NULL, 'o'},
+ 'o', N_("FILE"), N_("Set output file name"), EXACTLY_TWO_DASHES },
+ { {NULL, required_argument, NULL, '\0'},
+ 'O', NULL, N_("Optimize output file"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"out-implib", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_OUT_IMPLIB},
+ '\0', N_("FILE"), N_("Generate import library"), TWO_DASHES },
+#if BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS
+ { {"plugin", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_PLUGIN},
+ '\0', N_("PLUGIN"), N_("Load named plugin"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"plugin-opt", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_PLUGIN_OPT},
+ '\0', N_("ARG"), N_("Send arg to last-loaded plugin"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"flto", optional_argument, NULL, OPTION_IGNORE},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Ignored for GCC LTO option compatibility"),
+ ONE_DASH },
+ { {"flto-partition=", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_IGNORE},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Ignored for GCC LTO option compatibility"),
+ ONE_DASH },
+#else
+ { {"plugin", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_IGNORE},
+ '\0', N_("PLUGIN"), N_("Load named plugin (ignored)"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"plugin-opt", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_IGNORE},
+ '\0', N_("ARG"), N_("Send arg to last-loaded plugin (ignored)"), ONE_DASH },
+#endif /* BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS */
+ { {"fuse-ld=", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_IGNORE},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Ignored for GCC linker option compatibility"),
+ ONE_DASH },
+ { {"map-whole-files", optional_argument, NULL, OPTION_IGNORE},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Ignored for gold option compatibility"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-map-whole-files", optional_argument, NULL, OPTION_IGNORE},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Ignored for gold option compatibility"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"Qy", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_IGNORE},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Ignored for SVR4 compatibility"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"emit-relocs", no_argument, NULL, 'q'},
+ 'q', NULL, "Generate relocations in final output", TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"relocatable", no_argument, NULL, 'r'},
+ 'r', NULL, N_("Generate relocatable output"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {NULL, no_argument, NULL, '\0'},
+ 'i', NULL, NULL, ONE_DASH },
+ { {"just-symbols", required_argument, NULL, 'R'},
+ 'R', N_("FILE"), N_("Just link symbols (if directory, same as --rpath)"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+
+ { {"remap-inputs-file", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_REMAP_INPUTS_FILE},
+ '\0', N_("FILE"), "Provide a FILE containing input remapings", TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"remap-inputs", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_REMAP_INPUTS},
+ '\0', N_("PATTERN=FILE"), "Remap input files matching PATTERN to FILE", TWO_DASHES },
+
+ { {"strip-all", no_argument, NULL, 's'},
+ 's', NULL, N_("Strip all symbols"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"strip-debug", no_argument, NULL, 'S'},
+ 'S', NULL, N_("Strip debugging symbols"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"strip-discarded", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_STRIP_DISCARDED},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Strip symbols in discarded sections"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-strip-discarded", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_STRIP_DISCARDED},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Do not strip symbols in discarded sections"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"trace", no_argument, NULL, 't'},
+ 't', NULL, N_("Trace file opens"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"script", required_argument, NULL, 'T'},
+ 'T', N_("FILE"), N_("Read linker script"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"default-script", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_DEFAULT_SCRIPT},
+ '\0', N_("FILE"), N_("Read default linker script"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"dT", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_DEFAULT_SCRIPT},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, ONE_DASH },
+ { {"undefined", required_argument, NULL, 'u'},
+ 'u', N_("SYMBOL"), N_("Start with undefined reference to SYMBOL"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"require-defined", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_REQUIRE_DEFINED_SYMBOL},
+ '\0', N_("SYMBOL"), N_("Require SYMBOL be defined in the final output"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"unique", optional_argument, NULL, OPTION_UNIQUE},
+ '\0', N_("[=SECTION]"),
+ N_("Don't merge input [SECTION | orphan] sections"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"Ur", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_UR},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Build global constructor/destructor tables"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"version", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_VERSION},
+ 'v', NULL, N_("Print version information"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {NULL, no_argument, NULL, '\0'},
+ 'V', NULL, N_("Print version and emulation information"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"discard-all", no_argument, NULL, 'x'},
+ 'x', NULL, N_("Discard all local symbols"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"discard-locals", no_argument, NULL, 'X'},
+ 'X', NULL, N_("Discard temporary local symbols (default)"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"discard-none", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_DISCARD_NONE},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Don't discard any local symbols"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"trace-symbol", required_argument, NULL, 'y'},
+ 'y', N_("SYMBOL"), N_("Trace mentions of SYMBOL"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {NULL, required_argument, NULL, '\0'},
+ 'Y', N_("PATH"), N_("Default search path for Solaris compatibility"),
+ ONE_DASH },
+ { {"start-group", no_argument, NULL, '('},
+ '(', NULL, N_("Start a group"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"end-group", no_argument, NULL, ')'},
+ ')', NULL, N_("End a group"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"accept-unknown-input-arch", no_argument, NULL,
+ OPTION_ACCEPT_UNKNOWN_INPUT_ARCH},
+ '\0', NULL,
+ N_("Accept input files whose architecture cannot be determined"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-accept-unknown-input-arch", no_argument, NULL,
+ OPTION_NO_ACCEPT_UNKNOWN_INPUT_ARCH},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Reject input files whose architecture is unknown"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+
+ /* The next two options are deprecated because of their similarity to
+ --as-needed and --no-as-needed. They have been replaced by
+ --copy-dt-needed-entries and --no-copy-dt-needed-entries. */
+ { {"add-needed", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_ADD_DT_NEEDED_FOR_DYNAMIC},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, NO_HELP },
+ { {"no-add-needed", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_ADD_DT_NEEDED_FOR_DYNAMIC},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, NO_HELP },
+
+ { {"as-needed", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_ADD_DT_NEEDED_FOR_REGULAR},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Only set DT_NEEDED for following dynamic libs if used"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-as-needed", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_ADD_DT_NEEDED_FOR_REGULAR},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Always set DT_NEEDED for dynamic libraries mentioned on\n"
+ " the command line"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"assert", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_ASSERT},
+ '\0', N_("KEYWORD"), N_("Ignored for SunOS compatibility"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"Bdynamic", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_CALL_SHARED},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Link against shared libraries"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"dy", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_CALL_SHARED},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, ONE_DASH },
+ { {"call_shared", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_CALL_SHARED},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, ONE_DASH },
+ { {"Bstatic", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NON_SHARED},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Do not link against shared libraries"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"dn", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NON_SHARED},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, ONE_DASH },
+ { {"non_shared", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NON_SHARED},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, ONE_DASH },
+ { {"static", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NON_SHARED},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, ONE_DASH },
+ { {"Bno-symbolic", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_SYMBOLIC},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Don't bind global references locally"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"Bsymbolic", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_SYMBOLIC},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Bind global references locally"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"Bsymbolic-functions", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_SYMBOLIC_FUNCTIONS},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Bind global function references locally"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"check-sections", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_CHECK_SECTIONS},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Check section addresses for overlaps (default)"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-check-sections", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_CHECK_SECTIONS},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Do not check section addresses for overlaps"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"copy-dt-needed-entries", no_argument, NULL,
+ OPTION_ADD_DT_NEEDED_FOR_DYNAMIC},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Copy DT_NEEDED links mentioned inside DSOs that follow"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-copy-dt-needed-entries", no_argument, NULL,
+ OPTION_NO_ADD_DT_NEEDED_FOR_DYNAMIC},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Do not copy DT_NEEDED links mentioned inside DSOs that follow"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+
+ { {"cref", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_CREF},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Output cross reference table"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"defsym", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_DEFSYM},
+ '\0', N_("SYMBOL=EXPRESSION"), N_("Define a symbol"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"demangle", optional_argument, NULL, OPTION_DEMANGLE},
+ '\0', N_("[=STYLE]"), N_("Demangle symbol names [using STYLE]"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"disable-multiple-abs-defs", no_argument, NULL,
+ OPTION_DISABLE_MULTIPLE_DEFS_ABS},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included\n"
+ " in filename invoked by -R "
+ "or --just-symbols"),
+ TWO_DASHES},
+ { {"embedded-relocs", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_EMBEDDED_RELOCS},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Generate embedded relocs"), TWO_DASHES},
+ { {"fatal-warnings", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_WARN_FATAL},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Treat warnings as errors"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-fatal-warnings", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_WARN_FATAL},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Do not treat warnings as errors (default)"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"fini", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_FINI},
+ '\0', N_("SYMBOL"), N_("Call SYMBOL at unload-time"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"force-exe-suffix", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_FORCE_EXE_SUFFIX},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Force generation of file with .exe suffix"), TWO_DASHES},
+ { {"gc-sections", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_GC_SECTIONS},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Remove unused sections (on some targets)"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-gc-sections", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_GC_SECTIONS},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Don't remove unused sections (default)"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"print-gc-sections", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_PRINT_GC_SECTIONS},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("List removed unused sections on stderr"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-print-gc-sections", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_PRINT_GC_SECTIONS},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Do not list removed unused sections"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"gc-keep-exported", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_GC_KEEP_EXPORTED},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Keep exported symbols when removing unused sections"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"hash-size=<NUMBER>", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_HASH_SIZE},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Set default hash table size close to <NUMBER>"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"help", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_HELP},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Print option help"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"init", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_INIT},
+ '\0', N_("SYMBOL"), N_("Call SYMBOL at load-time"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"Map", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_MAP},
+ '\0', N_("FILE/DIR"), N_("Write a linker map to FILE or DIR/<outputname>.map"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"no-define-common", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_DEFINE_COMMON},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Do not define Common storage"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-demangle", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_DEMANGLE },
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Do not demangle symbol names"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-keep-memory", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_KEEP_MEMORY},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Use less memory and more disk I/O"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-undefined", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_UNDEFINED},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Do not allow unresolved references in object files"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-warnings", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_WARNINGS},
+ 'w', NULL, N_("Do not display any warning or error messages"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"allow-shlib-undefined", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_ALLOW_SHLIB_UNDEFINED},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Allow unresolved references in shared libraries"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-allow-shlib-undefined", no_argument, NULL,
+ OPTION_NO_ALLOW_SHLIB_UNDEFINED},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Do not allow unresolved references in shared libs"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"allow-multiple-definition", no_argument, NULL,
+ OPTION_ALLOW_MULTIPLE_DEFINITION},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Allow multiple definitions"), TWO_DASHES },
+#if SUPPORT_ERROR_HANDLING_SCRIPT
+ { {"error-handling-script", required_argument, NULL,
+ OPTION_ERROR_HANDLING_SCRIPT},
+ '\0', N_("SCRIPT"), N_("Provide a script to help with undefined symbol errors"), TWO_DASHES},
+#endif
+ { {"undefined-version", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_UNDEFINED_VERSION},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Allow undefined version"), EXACTLY_TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-undefined-version", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_UNDEFINED_VERSION},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Disallow undefined version"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"default-symver", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_DEFAULT_SYMVER},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Create default symbol version"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"default-imported-symver", no_argument, NULL,
+ OPTION_DEFAULT_IMPORTED_SYMVER},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Create default symbol version for imported symbols"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-warn-mismatch", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_WARN_MISMATCH},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Don't warn about mismatched input files"), TWO_DASHES},
+ { {"no-warn-search-mismatch", no_argument, NULL,
+ OPTION_NO_WARN_SEARCH_MISMATCH},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Don't warn on finding an incompatible library"),
+ TWO_DASHES},
+ { {"no-whole-archive", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_WHOLE_ARCHIVE},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Turn off --whole-archive"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"noinhibit-exec", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NOINHIBIT_EXEC},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Create an output file even if errors occur"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"noinhibit_exec", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NOINHIBIT_EXEC},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, NO_HELP },
+ { {"nostdlib", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NOSTDLIB},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Only use library directories specified on\n"
+ " the command line"),
+ ONE_DASH },
+ { {"oformat", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_OFORMAT},
+ '\0', N_("TARGET"), N_("Specify target of output file"),
+ EXACTLY_TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"print-output-format", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_PRINT_OUTPUT_FORMAT},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Print default output format"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"print-sysroot", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_PRINT_SYSROOT},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Print current sysroot"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"qmagic", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_IGNORE},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Ignored for Linux compatibility"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"reduce-memory-overheads", no_argument, NULL,
+ OPTION_REDUCE_MEMORY_OVERHEADS},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Reduce memory overheads, possibly taking much longer"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"max-cache-size=SIZE", required_argument, NULL,
+ OPTION_MAX_CACHE_SIZE},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Set the maximum cache size to SIZE bytes"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"relax", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_RELAX},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Reduce code size by using target specific optimizations"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-relax", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_RELAX},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Do not use relaxation techniques to reduce code size"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"retain-symbols-file", required_argument, NULL,
+ OPTION_RETAIN_SYMBOLS_FILE},
+ '\0', N_("FILE"), N_("Keep only symbols listed in FILE"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"rpath", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_RPATH},
+ '\0', N_("PATH"), N_("Set runtime shared library search path"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"rpath-link", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_RPATH_LINK},
+ '\0', N_("PATH"), N_("Set link time shared library search path"),
+ ONE_DASH },
+ { {"shared", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_SHARED},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Create a shared library"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"Bshareable", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_SHARED }, /* FreeBSD. */
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, ONE_DASH },
+ { {"pie", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_PIE},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Create a position independent executable"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"pic-executable", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_PIE},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-pie", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_PIE},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Create a position dependent executable (default)"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"sort-common", optional_argument, NULL, OPTION_SORT_COMMON},
+ '\0', N_("[=ascending|descending]"),
+ N_("Sort common symbols by alignment [in specified order]"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"sort_common", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_SORT_COMMON},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, NO_HELP },
+ { {"sort-section", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_SORT_SECTION},
+ '\0', N_("name|alignment"),
+ N_("Sort sections by name or maximum alignment"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"spare-dynamic-tags", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_SPARE_DYNAMIC_TAGS},
+ '\0', N_("COUNT"), N_("How many tags to reserve in .dynamic section"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"split-by-file", optional_argument, NULL, OPTION_SPLIT_BY_FILE},
+ '\0', N_("[=SIZE]"), N_("Split output sections every SIZE octets"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"split-by-reloc", optional_argument, NULL, OPTION_SPLIT_BY_RELOC},
+ '\0', N_("[=COUNT]"), N_("Split output sections every COUNT relocs"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"stats", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_STATS},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Print memory usage statistics"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"target-help", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_TARGET_HELP},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Display target specific options"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"task-link", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_TASK_LINK},
+ '\0', N_("SYMBOL"), N_("Do task level linking"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"traditional-format", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_TRADITIONAL_FORMAT},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Use same format as native linker"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"section-start", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_SECTION_START},
+ '\0', N_("SECTION=ADDRESS"), N_("Set address of named section"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"Tbss", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_TBSS},
+ '\0', N_("ADDRESS"), N_("Set address of .bss section"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"Tdata", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_TDATA},
+ '\0', N_("ADDRESS"), N_("Set address of .data section"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"Ttext", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_TTEXT},
+ '\0', N_("ADDRESS"), N_("Set address of .text section"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"Ttext-segment", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_TTEXT_SEGMENT},
+ '\0', N_("ADDRESS"), N_("Set address of text segment"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"Trodata-segment", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_TRODATA_SEGMENT},
+ '\0', N_("ADDRESS"), N_("Set address of rodata segment"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"Tldata-segment", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_TLDATA_SEGMENT},
+ '\0', N_("ADDRESS"), N_("Set address of ldata segment"), ONE_DASH },
+ { {"unresolved-symbols=<method>", required_argument, NULL,
+ OPTION_UNRESOLVED_SYMBOLS},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("How to handle unresolved symbols. <method> is:\n"
+ " ignore-all, report-all, ignore-in-object-files,\n"
+ " ignore-in-shared-libs"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"verbose", optional_argument, NULL, OPTION_VERBOSE},
+ '\0', N_("[=NUMBER]"),
+ N_("Output lots of information during link"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"dll-verbose", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_VERBOSE}, /* Linux. */
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, NO_HELP },
+ { {"version-script", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_VERSION_SCRIPT },
+ '\0', N_("FILE"), N_("Read version information script"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"version-exports-section", required_argument, NULL,
+ OPTION_VERSION_EXPORTS_SECTION },
+ '\0', N_("SYMBOL"), N_("Take export symbols list from .exports, using\n"
+ " SYMBOL as the version."),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"dynamic-list-data", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_DYNAMIC_LIST_DATA},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Add data symbols to dynamic list"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"dynamic-list-cpp-new", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_DYNAMIC_LIST_CPP_NEW},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Use C++ operator new/delete dynamic list"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_DYNAMIC_LIST_CPP_TYPEINFO},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Use C++ typeinfo dynamic list"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"dynamic-list", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_DYNAMIC_LIST},
+ '\0', N_("FILE"), N_("Read dynamic list"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"export-dynamic-symbol", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_EXPORT_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL},
+ '\0', N_("SYMBOL"), N_("Export the specified symbol"), EXACTLY_TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"export-dynamic-symbol-list", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_EXPORT_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL_LIST},
+ '\0', N_("FILE"), N_("Read export dynamic symbol list"), EXACTLY_TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"warn-common", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_WARN_COMMON},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Warn about duplicate common symbols"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"warn-constructors", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_WARN_CONSTRUCTORS},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Warn if global constructors/destructors are seen"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+
+ { {"error-execstack", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_ERROR_EXECSTACK},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-error-execstack", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_ERROR_EXECSTACK},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"warn-execstack-objects", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_WARN_EXECSTACK_OBJECTS},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"warn-execstack", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_WARN_EXECSTACK},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-warn-execstack", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_WARN_EXECSTACK},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, TWO_DASHES },
+
+ { {"error-rwx-segments", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_ERROR_RWX_SEGMENTS},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-error-rwx-segments", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_ERROR_RWX_SEGMENTS},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"warn-rwx-segments", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_WARN_RWX_SEGMENTS},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-warn-rwx-segments", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_WARN_RWX_SEGMENTS},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, TWO_DASHES },
+
+ { {"warn-multiple-gp", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_WARN_MULTIPLE_GP},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Warn if the multiple GP values are used"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"warn-once", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_WARN_ONCE},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Warn only once per undefined symbol"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"warn-section-align", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_WARN_SECTION_ALIGN},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Warn if start of section changes due to alignment"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"warn-textrel", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_WARN_TEXTREL},
+ '\0', NULL,
+#if DEFAULT_LD_TEXTREL_CHECK_WARNING
+ N_("Warn if output has DT_TEXTREL (default)"),
+#else
+ N_("Warn if output has DT_TEXTREL"),
+#endif
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"warn-shared-textrel", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_WARN_TEXTREL},
+ '\0', NULL, NULL, NO_HELP },
+ { {"warn-alternate-em", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_WARN_ALTERNATE_EM},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"warn-unresolved-symbols", no_argument, NULL,
+ OPTION_WARN_UNRESOLVED_SYMBOLS},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Report unresolved symbols as warnings"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"error-unresolved-symbols", no_argument, NULL,
+ OPTION_ERROR_UNRESOLVED_SYMBOLS},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Report unresolved symbols as errors"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"whole-archive", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_WHOLE_ARCHIVE},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Include all objects from following archives"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"wrap", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_WRAP},
+ '\0', N_("SYMBOL"), N_("Use wrapper functions for SYMBOL"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"ignore-unresolved-symbol", required_argument, NULL,
+ OPTION_IGNORE_UNRESOLVED_SYMBOL},
+ '\0', N_("SYMBOL"),
+ N_("Unresolved SYMBOL will not cause an error or warning"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"push-state", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_PUSH_STATE},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Push state of flags governing input file handling"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"pop-state", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_POP_STATE},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Pop state of flags governing input file handling"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"print-memory-usage", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_PRINT_MEMORY_USAGE},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Report target memory usage"), TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"orphan-handling", required_argument, NULL, OPTION_ORPHAN_HANDLING},
+ '\0', N_("=MODE"), N_("Control how orphan sections are handled."),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"print-map-discarded", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_PRINT_MAP_DISCARDED},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Show discarded sections in map file output (default)"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-print-map-discarded", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_PRINT_MAP_DISCARDED},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Do not show discarded sections in map file output"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"print-map-locals", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_PRINT_MAP_LOCALS},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Show local symbols in map file output"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-print-map-locals", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_PRINT_MAP_LOCALS},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Do not show local symbols in map file output (default)"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"ctf-variables", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_CTF_VARIABLES},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Emit names and types of static variables in CTF"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"no-ctf-variables", no_argument, NULL, OPTION_NO_CTF_VARIABLES},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("Do not emit names and types of static variables in CTF"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+ { {"ctf-share-types=<method>", required_argument, NULL,
+ OPTION_CTF_SHARE_TYPES},
+ '\0', NULL, N_("How to share CTF types between translation units.\n"
+ " <method> is: share-unconflicted (default),\n"
+ " share-duplicated"),
+ TWO_DASHES },
+};
+
+#define OPTION_COUNT ARRAY_SIZE (ld_options)
+
+void
+parse_args (unsigned argc, char **argv)
+{
+ unsigned i;
+ int is, il, irl;
+ int ingroup = 0;
+ char *default_dirlist = NULL;
+ char *shortopts;
+ struct option *longopts;
+ struct option *really_longopts;
+ int last_optind;
+ enum symbolic_enum
+ {
+ symbolic_unset = 0,
+ symbolic,
+ symbolic_functions,
+ } opt_symbolic = symbolic_unset;
+ enum dynamic_list_enum
+ {
+ dynamic_list_unset = 0,
+ dynamic_list_data,
+ dynamic_list
+ } opt_dynamic_list = dynamic_list_unset;
+ struct bfd_elf_dynamic_list *export_list = NULL;
+
+ shortopts = (char *) xmalloc (OPTION_COUNT * 3 + 2);
+ longopts = (struct option *)
+ xmalloc (sizeof (*longopts) * (OPTION_COUNT + 1));
+ really_longopts = (struct option *)
+ xmalloc (sizeof (*really_longopts) * (OPTION_COUNT + 1));
+
+ /* Starting the short option string with '-' is for programs that
+ expect options and other ARGV-elements in any order and that care about
+ the ordering of the two. We describe each non-option ARGV-element
+ as if it were the argument of an option with character code 1. */
+ shortopts[0] = '-';
+ is = 1;
+ il = 0;
+ irl = 0;
+ for (i = 0; i < OPTION_COUNT; i++)
+ {
+ if (ld_options[i].shortopt != '\0')
+ {
+ shortopts[is] = ld_options[i].shortopt;
+ ++is;
+ if (ld_options[i].opt.has_arg == required_argument
+ || ld_options[i].opt.has_arg == optional_argument)
+ {
+ shortopts[is] = ':';
+ ++is;
+ if (ld_options[i].opt.has_arg == optional_argument)
+ {
+ shortopts[is] = ':';
+ ++is;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ if (ld_options[i].opt.name != NULL)
+ {
+ if (ld_options[i].control == EXACTLY_TWO_DASHES)
+ {
+ really_longopts[irl] = ld_options[i].opt;
+ ++irl;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ longopts[il] = ld_options[i].opt;
+ ++il;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ shortopts[is] = '\0';
+ longopts[il].name = NULL;
+ really_longopts[irl].name = NULL;
+
+ ldemul_add_options (is, &shortopts, il, &longopts, irl, &really_longopts);
+
+ /* The -G option is ambiguous on different platforms. Sometimes it
+ specifies the largest data size to put into the small data
+ section. Sometimes it is equivalent to --shared. Unfortunately,
+ the first form takes an argument, while the second does not.
+
+ We need to permit the --shared form because on some platforms,
+ such as Solaris, gcc -shared will pass -G to the linker.
+
+ To permit either usage, we look through the argument list. If we
+ find -G not followed by a number, we change it into --shared.
+ This will work for most normal cases. */
+ for (i = 1; i < argc; i++)
+ if (strcmp (argv[i], "-G") == 0
+ && (i + 1 >= argc
+ || ! ISDIGIT (argv[i + 1][0])))
+ argv[i] = (char *) "--shared";
+
+ /* Because we permit long options to start with a single dash, and
+ we have a --library option, and the -l option is conventionally
+ used with an immediately following argument, we can have bad
+ results if somebody tries to use -l with a library whose name
+ happens to start with "ibrary", as in -li. We avoid problems by
+ simply turning -l into --library. This means that users will
+ have to use two dashes in order to use --library, which is OK
+ since that's how it is documented.
+
+ FIXME: It's possible that this problem can arise for other short
+ options as well, although the user does always have the recourse
+ of adding a space between the option and the argument. */
+ for (i = 1; i < argc; i++)
+ {
+ if (argv[i][0] == '-'
+ && argv[i][1] == 'l'
+ && argv[i][2] != '\0')
+ {
+ char *n;
+
+ n = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (argv[i]) + 20);
+ sprintf (n, "--library=%s", argv[i] + 2);
+ argv[i] = n;
+ }
+ }
+
+ last_optind = -1;
+ while (1)
+ {
+ int longind = 0;
+ int optc;
+ static unsigned int defsym_count;
+
+ /* Using last_optind lets us avoid calling ldemul_parse_args
+ multiple times on a single option, which would lead to
+ confusion in the internal static variables maintained by
+ getopt. This could otherwise happen for an argument like
+ -nx, in which the -n is parsed as a single option, and we
+ loop around to pick up the -x. */
+ if (optind != last_optind)
+ if (ldemul_parse_args (argc, argv))
+ continue;
+
+ /* getopt_long_only is like getopt_long, but '-' as well as '--'
+ can indicate a long option. */
+ opterr = 0;
+ last_optind = optind;
+ optc = getopt_long_only (argc, argv, shortopts, longopts, &longind);
+ if (optc == '?')
+ {
+ optind = last_optind;
+ optc = getopt_long (argc, argv, "-", really_longopts, &longind);
+ }
+ /* Attempt to detect grouped short options, eg: "-non-start".
+ Accepting such options is error prone as it is not clear if the user
+ intended "-n -o n-start" or "--non-start". */
+ else if (longind == 0 /* This is a short option. */
+ && optc > 32 /* It is a valid option. */
+ /* The character is not the second character of argv[last_optind]. */
+ && optc != argv[last_optind][1])
+ {
+ if (optarg)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: Error: unable to disambiguate: %s (did you mean -%s ?)\n"),
+ argv[last_optind], argv[last_optind]);
+ else
+ einfo (_("%P: Warning: grouped short command line options are deprecated: %s\n"), argv[last_optind]);
+ }
+
+ if (ldemul_handle_option (optc))
+ continue;
+
+ if (optc == -1)
+ break;
+
+ switch (optc)
+ {
+ case '?':
+ {
+ /* If the last word on the command line is an option that
+ requires an argument, getopt will refuse to recognise it.
+ Try to catch such options here and issue a more helpful
+ error message than just "unrecognized option". */
+ int opt;
+
+ for (opt = ARRAY_SIZE (ld_options); opt--;)
+ if (ld_options[opt].opt.has_arg == required_argument
+ /* FIXME: There are a few short options that do not
+ have long equivalents, but which require arguments.
+ We should handle them too. */
+ && ld_options[opt].opt.name != NULL
+ && strcmp (argv[last_optind] + ld_options[opt].control, ld_options[opt].opt.name) == 0)
+ {
+ einfo (_("%P: %s: missing argument\n"), argv[last_optind]);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ if (opt == -1)
+ einfo (_("%P: unrecognized option '%s'\n"), argv[last_optind]);
+ }
+ /* Fall through. */
+
+ default:
+ einfo (_("%F%P: use the --help option for usage information\n"));
+ break;
+
+ case 1: /* File name. */
+ lang_add_input_file (optarg, lang_input_file_is_file_enum, NULL);
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_IGNORE:
+ break;
+ case 'a':
+ /* For HP/UX compatibility. Actually -a shared should mean
+ ``use only shared libraries'' but, then, we don't
+ currently support shared libraries on HP/UX anyhow. */
+ if (strcmp (optarg, "archive") == 0)
+ input_flags.dynamic = false;
+ else if (strcmp (optarg, "shared") == 0
+ || strcmp (optarg, "default") == 0)
+ input_flags.dynamic = true;
+ else
+ einfo (_("%F%P: unrecognized -a option `%s'\n"), optarg);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_ASSERT:
+ /* FIXME: We just ignore these, but we should handle them. */
+ if (strcmp (optarg, "definitions") == 0)
+ ;
+ else if (strcmp (optarg, "nodefinitions") == 0)
+ ;
+ else if (strcmp (optarg, "nosymbolic") == 0)
+ ;
+ else if (strcmp (optarg, "pure-text") == 0)
+ ;
+ else
+ einfo (_("%F%P: unrecognized -assert option `%s'\n"), optarg);
+ break;
+ case 'A':
+ ldfile_add_arch (optarg);
+ break;
+ case 'b':
+ lang_add_target (optarg);
+ break;
+ case 'c':
+ ldfile_open_command_file (optarg);
+ parser_input = input_mri_script;
+ yyparse ();
+ break;
+ case OPTION_CALL_SHARED:
+ input_flags.dynamic = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NON_SHARED:
+ input_flags.dynamic = false;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_CREF:
+ command_line.cref = true;
+ link_info.notice_all = true;
+ break;
+ case 'd':
+ command_line.force_common_definition = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION:
+ command_line.force_group_allocation = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_DEFSYM:
+ lex_string = optarg;
+ lex_redirect (optarg, "--defsym", ++defsym_count);
+ parser_input = input_defsym;
+ yyparse ();
+ lex_string = NULL;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_DEMANGLE:
+ demangling = true;
+ if (optarg != NULL)
+ {
+ enum demangling_styles style;
+
+ style = cplus_demangle_name_to_style (optarg);
+ if (style == unknown_demangling)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: unknown demangling style `%s'\n"),
+ optarg);
+
+ cplus_demangle_set_style (style);
+ }
+ break;
+ case 'I': /* Used on Solaris. */
+ case OPTION_DYNAMIC_LINKER:
+ command_line.interpreter = optarg;
+ link_info.nointerp = 0;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_DYNAMIC_LINKER:
+ link_info.nointerp = 1;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_SYSROOT:
+ /* Already handled in ldmain.c. */
+ break;
+ case OPTION_EB:
+ command_line.endian = ENDIAN_BIG;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_EL:
+ command_line.endian = ENDIAN_LITTLE;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_EMBEDDED_RELOCS:
+ command_line.embedded_relocs = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_EXPORT_DYNAMIC:
+ case 'E': /* HP/UX compatibility. */
+ link_info.export_dynamic = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_EXPORT_DYNAMIC:
+ link_info.export_dynamic = false;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NON_CONTIGUOUS_REGIONS:
+ link_info.non_contiguous_regions = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NON_CONTIGUOUS_REGIONS_WARNINGS:
+ link_info.non_contiguous_regions_warnings = true;
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_ERROR_EXECSTACK:
+ link_info.error_execstack = 1;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_ERROR_EXECSTACK:
+ link_info.error_execstack = 0;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_WARN_EXECSTACK_OBJECTS:
+ link_info.warn_execstack = 2;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_WARN_EXECSTACK:
+ link_info.warn_execstack = 1;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_WARN_EXECSTACK:
+ link_info.warn_execstack = 0;
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_ERROR_RWX_SEGMENTS:
+ link_info.warn_is_error_for_rwx_segments = 1;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_ERROR_RWX_SEGMENTS:
+ link_info.warn_is_error_for_rwx_segments = 0;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_WARN_RWX_SEGMENTS:
+ link_info.no_warn_rwx_segments = 0;
+ link_info.user_warn_rwx_segments = 1;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_WARN_RWX_SEGMENTS:
+ link_info.no_warn_rwx_segments = 1;
+ link_info.user_warn_rwx_segments = 1;
+ break;
+
+ case 'e':
+ lang_add_entry (optarg, true);
+ break;
+ case 'f':
+ if (command_line.auxiliary_filters == NULL)
+ {
+ command_line.auxiliary_filters = (char **)
+ xmalloc (2 * sizeof (char *));
+ command_line.auxiliary_filters[0] = optarg;
+ command_line.auxiliary_filters[1] = NULL;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ int c;
+ char **p;
+
+ c = 0;
+ for (p = command_line.auxiliary_filters; *p != NULL; p++)
+ ++c;
+ command_line.auxiliary_filters = (char **)
+ xrealloc (command_line.auxiliary_filters,
+ (c + 2) * sizeof (char *));
+ command_line.auxiliary_filters[c] = optarg;
+ command_line.auxiliary_filters[c + 1] = NULL;
+ }
+ break;
+ case 'F':
+ command_line.filter_shlib = optarg;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_FORCE_EXE_SUFFIX:
+ command_line.force_exe_suffix = true;
+ break;
+ case 'G':
+ {
+ char *end;
+ g_switch_value = strtoul (optarg, &end, 0);
+ if (*end)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: invalid number `%s'\n"), optarg);
+ }
+ break;
+ case 'g':
+ /* Ignore. */
+ break;
+ case OPTION_GC_SECTIONS:
+ link_info.gc_sections = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_PRINT_GC_SECTIONS:
+ link_info.print_gc_sections = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_GC_KEEP_EXPORTED:
+ link_info.gc_keep_exported = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_HELP:
+ help ();
+ xexit (0);
+ break;
+ case 'L':
+ ldfile_add_library_path (optarg, true);
+ break;
+ case 'l':
+ lang_add_input_file (optarg, lang_input_file_is_l_enum, NULL);
+ break;
+ case 'M':
+ config.map_filename = "-";
+ break;
+ case 'm':
+ /* Ignore. Was handled in a pre-parse. */
+ break;
+ case OPTION_MAP:
+ config.map_filename = optarg;
+ break;
+ case 'N':
+ config.text_read_only = false;
+ config.magic_demand_paged = false;
+ input_flags.dynamic = false;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_OMAGIC:
+ config.text_read_only = true;
+ config.magic_demand_paged = true;
+ /* NB/ Does not set input_flags.dynamic to TRUE.
+ Use --call-shared or -Bdynamic for this. */
+ break;
+ case 'n':
+ config.text_read_only = true;
+ config.magic_demand_paged = false;
+ input_flags.dynamic = false;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_DEFINE_COMMON:
+ link_info.inhibit_common_definition = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_DEMANGLE:
+ demangling = false;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_GC_SECTIONS:
+ link_info.gc_sections = false;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_PRINT_GC_SECTIONS:
+ link_info.print_gc_sections = false;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_KEEP_MEMORY:
+ link_info.keep_memory = false;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_UNDEFINED:
+ link_info.unresolved_syms_in_objects = RM_DIAGNOSE;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_ALLOW_SHLIB_UNDEFINED:
+ link_info.unresolved_syms_in_shared_libs = RM_IGNORE;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_ALLOW_SHLIB_UNDEFINED:
+ link_info.unresolved_syms_in_shared_libs = RM_DIAGNOSE;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_UNRESOLVED_SYMBOLS:
+ if (strcmp (optarg, "ignore-all") == 0)
+ {
+ link_info.unresolved_syms_in_objects = RM_IGNORE;
+ link_info.unresolved_syms_in_shared_libs = RM_IGNORE;
+ }
+ else if (strcmp (optarg, "report-all") == 0)
+ {
+ link_info.unresolved_syms_in_objects = RM_DIAGNOSE;
+ link_info.unresolved_syms_in_shared_libs = RM_DIAGNOSE;
+ }
+ else if (strcmp (optarg, "ignore-in-object-files") == 0)
+ {
+ link_info.unresolved_syms_in_objects = RM_IGNORE;
+ link_info.unresolved_syms_in_shared_libs = RM_DIAGNOSE;
+ }
+ else if (strcmp (optarg, "ignore-in-shared-libs") == 0)
+ {
+ link_info.unresolved_syms_in_objects = RM_DIAGNOSE;
+ link_info.unresolved_syms_in_shared_libs = RM_IGNORE;
+ }
+ else
+ einfo (_("%F%P: bad --unresolved-symbols option: %s\n"), optarg);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_WARN_UNRESOLVED_SYMBOLS:
+ link_info.warn_unresolved_syms = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_ERROR_UNRESOLVED_SYMBOLS:
+ link_info.warn_unresolved_syms = false;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_ALLOW_MULTIPLE_DEFINITION:
+ link_info.allow_multiple_definition = true;
+ break;
+
+#if SUPPORT_ERROR_HANDLING_SCRIPT
+ case OPTION_ERROR_HANDLING_SCRIPT:
+ /* FIXME: Should we warn if the script is being overridden by another ?
+ Or maybe they should be chained together ? */
+ error_handling_script = optarg;
+ break;
+#endif
+
+ case OPTION_ENABLE_LINKER_VERSION:
+ enable_linker_version = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_DISABLE_LINKER_VERSION:
+ enable_linker_version = false;
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_UNDEFINED_VERSION:
+ link_info.allow_undefined_version = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_UNDEFINED_VERSION:
+ link_info.allow_undefined_version = false;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_DEFAULT_SYMVER:
+ link_info.create_default_symver = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_DEFAULT_IMPORTED_SYMVER:
+ link_info.default_imported_symver = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_WARN_MISMATCH:
+ command_line.warn_mismatch = false;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_WARN_SEARCH_MISMATCH:
+ command_line.warn_search_mismatch = false;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NOINHIBIT_EXEC:
+ force_make_executable = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NOSTDLIB:
+ config.only_cmd_line_lib_dirs = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_WHOLE_ARCHIVE:
+ input_flags.whole_archive = false;
+ break;
+ case 'O':
+ /* FIXME "-O<non-digits> <value>" used to set the address of
+ section <non-digits>. Was this for compatibility with
+ something, or can we create a new option to do that
+ (with a syntax similar to -defsym)?
+ getopt can't handle two args to an option without kludges. */
+
+ /* Enable optimizations of output files. */
+ link_info.optimize = strtoul (optarg, NULL, 0) != 0;
+ break;
+ case 'o':
+ lang_add_output (optarg, 0);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_OFORMAT:
+ lang_add_output_format (optarg, NULL, NULL, 0);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_OUT_IMPLIB:
+ command_line.out_implib_filename = xstrdup (optarg);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_PRINT_SYSROOT:
+ if (*ld_sysroot)
+ puts (ld_sysroot);
+ xexit (0);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_PRINT_OUTPUT_FORMAT:
+ command_line.print_output_format = true;
+ break;
+#if BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS
+ case OPTION_PLUGIN:
+ plugin_opt_plugin (optarg);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_PLUGIN_OPT:
+ if (plugin_opt_plugin_arg (optarg))
+ einfo (_("%F%P: bad -plugin-opt option\n"));
+ break;
+#endif /* BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS */
+ case 'q':
+ link_info.emitrelocations = true;
+ break;
+ case 'i':
+ case 'r':
+ if (optind == last_optind)
+ /* This can happen if the user put "-rpath,a" on the command
+ line. (Or something similar. The comma is important).
+ Getopt becomes confused and thinks that this is a -r option
+ but it cannot parse the text after the -r so it refuses to
+ increment the optind counter. Detect this case and issue
+ an error message here. We cannot just make this a warning,
+ increment optind, and continue because getopt is too confused
+ and will seg-fault the next time around. */
+ einfo(_("%F%P: unrecognised option: %s\n"), argv[optind]);
+
+ if (bfd_link_pic (&link_info))
+ einfo (_("%F%P: -r and %s may not be used together\n"),
+ bfd_link_dll (&link_info) ? "-shared" : "-pie");
+
+ link_info.type = type_relocatable;
+ config.build_constructors = false;
+ config.magic_demand_paged = false;
+ config.text_read_only = false;
+ input_flags.dynamic = false;
+ break;
+ case 'R':
+ /* The GNU linker traditionally uses -R to mean to include
+ only the symbols from a file. The Solaris linker uses -R
+ to set the path used by the runtime linker to find
+ libraries. This is the GNU linker -rpath argument. We
+ try to support both simultaneously by checking the file
+ named. If it is a directory, rather than a regular file,
+ we assume -rpath was meant. */
+ {
+ struct stat s;
+
+ if (stat (optarg, &s) >= 0
+ && ! S_ISDIR (s.st_mode))
+ {
+ lang_add_input_file (optarg,
+ lang_input_file_is_symbols_only_enum,
+ NULL);
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Fall through. */
+ case OPTION_RPATH:
+ if (command_line.rpath == NULL)
+ command_line.rpath = xstrdup (optarg);
+ else
+ {
+ size_t rpath_len = strlen (command_line.rpath);
+ size_t optarg_len = strlen (optarg);
+ char *buf;
+ char *cp = command_line.rpath;
+
+ /* First see whether OPTARG is already in the path. */
+ do
+ {
+ if (strncmp (optarg, cp, optarg_len) == 0
+ && (cp[optarg_len] == 0
+ || cp[optarg_len] == config.rpath_separator))
+ /* We found it. */
+ break;
+
+ /* Not yet found. */
+ cp = strchr (cp, config.rpath_separator);
+ if (cp != NULL)
+ ++cp;
+ }
+ while (cp != NULL);
+
+ if (cp == NULL)
+ {
+ buf = (char *) xmalloc (rpath_len + optarg_len + 2);
+ sprintf (buf, "%s%c%s", command_line.rpath,
+ config.rpath_separator, optarg);
+ free (command_line.rpath);
+ command_line.rpath = buf;
+ }
+ }
+ break;
+ case OPTION_RPATH_LINK:
+ if (command_line.rpath_link == NULL)
+ command_line.rpath_link = xstrdup (optarg);
+ else
+ {
+ char *buf;
+
+ buf = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (command_line.rpath_link)
+ + strlen (optarg)
+ + 2);
+ sprintf (buf, "%s%c%s", command_line.rpath_link,
+ config.rpath_separator, optarg);
+ free (command_line.rpath_link);
+ command_line.rpath_link = buf;
+ }
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_RELAX:
+ DISABLE_RELAXATION;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_RELAX:
+ ENABLE_RELAXATION;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_RETAIN_SYMBOLS_FILE:
+ add_keepsyms_file (optarg);
+ break;
+ case 'S':
+ link_info.strip = strip_debugger;
+ break;
+ case 's':
+ link_info.strip = strip_all;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_STRIP_DISCARDED:
+ link_info.strip_discarded = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_STRIP_DISCARDED:
+ link_info.strip_discarded = false;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_DISABLE_MULTIPLE_DEFS_ABS:
+ link_info.prohibit_multiple_definition_absolute = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_SHARED:
+ if (config.has_shared)
+ {
+ if (bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info))
+ einfo (_("%F%P: -r and %s may not be used together\n"),
+ "-shared");
+
+ link_info.type = type_dll;
+ /* When creating a shared library, the default
+ behaviour is to ignore any unresolved references. */
+ if (link_info.unresolved_syms_in_objects == RM_NOT_YET_SET)
+ link_info.unresolved_syms_in_objects = RM_IGNORE;
+ if (link_info.unresolved_syms_in_shared_libs == RM_NOT_YET_SET)
+ link_info.unresolved_syms_in_shared_libs = RM_IGNORE;
+ }
+ else
+ einfo (_("%F%P: -shared not supported\n"));
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_PIE:
+ link_info.type = type_pde;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_PIE:
+ if (config.has_shared)
+ {
+ if (bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info))
+ einfo (_("%F%P: -r and %s may not be used together\n"), "-pie");
+
+ link_info.type = type_pie;
+ }
+ else
+ einfo (_("%F%P: -pie not supported\n"));
+ break;
+ case 'h': /* Used on Solaris. */
+ case OPTION_SONAME:
+ if (optarg[0] == '\0' && command_line.soname
+ && command_line.soname[0])
+ einfo (_("%P: SONAME must not be empty string; keeping previous one\n"));
+ else
+ command_line.soname = optarg;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_SORT_COMMON:
+ if (optarg == NULL
+ || strcmp (optarg, N_("descending")) == 0)
+ config.sort_common = sort_descending;
+ else if (strcmp (optarg, N_("ascending")) == 0)
+ config.sort_common = sort_ascending;
+ else
+ einfo (_("%F%P: invalid common section sorting option: %s\n"),
+ optarg);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_SORT_SECTION:
+ if (strcmp (optarg, N_("name")) == 0)
+ sort_section = by_name;
+ else if (strcmp (optarg, N_("alignment")) == 0)
+ sort_section = by_alignment;
+ else
+ einfo (_("%F%P: invalid section sorting option: %s\n"),
+ optarg);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_STATS:
+ config.stats = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_SYMBOLIC:
+ opt_symbolic = symbolic_unset;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_SYMBOLIC:
+ opt_symbolic = symbolic;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_SYMBOLIC_FUNCTIONS:
+ opt_symbolic = symbolic_functions;
+ break;
+ case 't':
+ ++trace_files;
+ break;
+ case 'T':
+ previous_script_handle = saved_script_handle;
+ ldfile_open_script_file (optarg);
+ parser_input = input_script;
+ yyparse ();
+ previous_script_handle = NULL;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_DEFAULT_SCRIPT:
+ command_line.default_script = optarg;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_SECTION_START:
+ {
+ char *optarg2;
+ char *sec_name;
+ int len;
+
+ /* Check for <something>=<somthing>... */
+ optarg2 = strchr (optarg, '=');
+ if (optarg2 == NULL)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: invalid argument to option"
+ " \"--section-start\"\n"));
+
+ optarg2++;
+
+ /* So far so good. Are all the args present? */
+ if ((*optarg == '\0') || (*optarg2 == '\0'))
+ einfo (_("%F%P: missing argument(s) to option"
+ " \"--section-start\"\n"));
+
+ /* We must copy the section name as set_section_start
+ doesn't do it for us. */
+ len = optarg2 - optarg;
+ sec_name = (char *) xmalloc (len);
+ memcpy (sec_name, optarg, len - 1);
+ sec_name[len - 1] = 0;
+
+ /* Then set it... */
+ set_section_start (sec_name, optarg2);
+ }
+ break;
+ case OPTION_TARGET_HELP:
+ /* Mention any target specific options. */
+ ldemul_list_emulation_options (stdout);
+ exit (0);
+ case OPTION_TBSS:
+ set_segment_start (".bss", optarg);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_TDATA:
+ set_segment_start (".data", optarg);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_TTEXT:
+ set_segment_start (".text", optarg);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_TTEXT_SEGMENT:
+ set_segment_start (".text-segment", optarg);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_TRODATA_SEGMENT:
+ set_segment_start (".rodata-segment", optarg);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_TLDATA_SEGMENT:
+ set_segment_start (".ldata-segment", optarg);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_TRADITIONAL_FORMAT:
+ link_info.traditional_format = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_TASK_LINK:
+ link_info.task_link = true;
+ /* Fall through. */
+ case OPTION_UR:
+ if (bfd_link_pic (&link_info))
+ einfo (_("%F%P: -r and %s may not be used together\n"),
+ bfd_link_dll (&link_info) ? "-shared" : "-pie");
+
+ link_info.type = type_relocatable;
+ config.build_constructors = true;
+ config.magic_demand_paged = false;
+ config.text_read_only = false;
+ input_flags.dynamic = false;
+ break;
+ case 'u':
+ ldlang_add_undef (optarg, true);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_REQUIRE_DEFINED_SYMBOL:
+ ldlang_add_require_defined (optarg);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_UNIQUE:
+ if (optarg != NULL)
+ lang_add_unique (optarg);
+ else
+ config.unique_orphan_sections = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_VERBOSE:
+ ldversion (1);
+ version_printed = true;
+ verbose = true;
+ overflow_cutoff_limit = -2;
+ if (optarg != NULL)
+ {
+ char *end;
+ int level ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED = strtoul (optarg, &end, 0);
+ if (*end)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: invalid number `%s'\n"), optarg);
+#if BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS
+ report_plugin_symbols = level > 1;
+#endif /* BFD_SUPPORTS_PLUGINS */
+ }
+ break;
+ case 'v':
+ ldversion (0);
+ version_printed = true;
+ break;
+ case 'V':
+ ldversion (1);
+ version_printed = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_VERSION:
+ ldversion (2);
+ xexit (0);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_VERSION_SCRIPT:
+ /* This option indicates a small script that only specifies
+ version information. Read it, but don't assume that
+ we've seen a linker script. */
+ {
+ FILE *hold_script_handle;
+
+ hold_script_handle = saved_script_handle;
+ ldfile_open_command_file (optarg);
+ saved_script_handle = hold_script_handle;
+ parser_input = input_version_script;
+ yyparse ();
+ }
+ break;
+ case OPTION_VERSION_EXPORTS_SECTION:
+ /* This option records a version symbol to be applied to the
+ symbols listed for export to be found in the object files
+ .exports sections. */
+ command_line.version_exports_section = optarg;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_DYNAMIC_LIST_DATA:
+ opt_dynamic_list = dynamic_list_data;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_DYNAMIC_LIST_CPP_TYPEINFO:
+ lang_append_dynamic_list_cpp_typeinfo ();
+ if (opt_dynamic_list != dynamic_list_data)
+ opt_dynamic_list = dynamic_list;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_DYNAMIC_LIST_CPP_NEW:
+ lang_append_dynamic_list_cpp_new ();
+ if (opt_dynamic_list != dynamic_list_data)
+ opt_dynamic_list = dynamic_list;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_DYNAMIC_LIST:
+ /* This option indicates a small script that only specifies
+ a dynamic list. Read it, but don't assume that we've
+ seen a linker script. */
+ {
+ FILE *hold_script_handle;
+
+ hold_script_handle = saved_script_handle;
+ ldfile_open_command_file (optarg);
+ saved_script_handle = hold_script_handle;
+ parser_input = input_dynamic_list;
+ current_dynamic_list_p = &link_info.dynamic_list;
+ yyparse ();
+ }
+ if (opt_dynamic_list != dynamic_list_data)
+ opt_dynamic_list = dynamic_list;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_EXPORT_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL:
+ {
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr *expr
+ = lang_new_vers_pattern (NULL, xstrdup (optarg), NULL,
+ false);
+ lang_append_dynamic_list (&export_list, expr);
+ }
+ break;
+ case OPTION_EXPORT_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL_LIST:
+ /* This option indicates a small script that only specifies
+ an export list. Read it, but don't assume that we've
+ seen a linker script. */
+ {
+ FILE *hold_script_handle;
+
+ hold_script_handle = saved_script_handle;
+ ldfile_open_command_file (optarg);
+ saved_script_handle = hold_script_handle;
+ parser_input = input_dynamic_list;
+ current_dynamic_list_p = &export_list;
+ yyparse ();
+ }
+ break;
+ case OPTION_WARN_COMMON:
+ config.warn_common = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_WARN_CONSTRUCTORS:
+ config.warn_constructors = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_WARN_FATAL:
+ config.fatal_warnings = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_WARN_FATAL:
+ config.fatal_warnings = false;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_WARNINGS:
+ case 'w':
+ config.no_warnings = true;
+ config.fatal_warnings = false;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_WARN_MULTIPLE_GP:
+ config.warn_multiple_gp = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_WARN_ONCE:
+ config.warn_once = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_WARN_SECTION_ALIGN:
+ config.warn_section_align = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_WARN_TEXTREL:
+ link_info.textrel_check = textrel_check_warning;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_WARN_ALTERNATE_EM:
+ link_info.warn_alternate_em = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_WHOLE_ARCHIVE:
+ input_flags.whole_archive = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_ADD_DT_NEEDED_FOR_DYNAMIC:
+ input_flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_dynamic = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_ADD_DT_NEEDED_FOR_DYNAMIC:
+ input_flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_dynamic = false;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_ADD_DT_NEEDED_FOR_REGULAR:
+ input_flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_regular = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_ADD_DT_NEEDED_FOR_REGULAR:
+ input_flags.add_DT_NEEDED_for_regular = false;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_WRAP:
+ add_wrap (optarg);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_IGNORE_UNRESOLVED_SYMBOL:
+ add_ignoresym (&link_info, optarg);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_DISCARD_NONE:
+ link_info.discard = discard_none;
+ break;
+ case 'X':
+ link_info.discard = discard_l;
+ break;
+ case 'x':
+ link_info.discard = discard_all;
+ break;
+ case 'Y':
+ if (startswith (optarg, "P,"))
+ optarg += 2;
+ free (default_dirlist);
+ default_dirlist = xstrdup (optarg);
+ break;
+ case 'y':
+ add_ysym (optarg);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_SPARE_DYNAMIC_TAGS:
+ link_info.spare_dynamic_tags = strtoul (optarg, NULL, 0);
+ break;
+ case OPTION_SPLIT_BY_RELOC:
+ if (optarg != NULL)
+ config.split_by_reloc = strtoul (optarg, NULL, 0);
+ else
+ config.split_by_reloc = 32768;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_SPLIT_BY_FILE:
+ if (optarg != NULL)
+ config.split_by_file = bfd_scan_vma (optarg, NULL, 0);
+ else
+ config.split_by_file = 1;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_CHECK_SECTIONS:
+ command_line.check_section_addresses = 1;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_CHECK_SECTIONS:
+ command_line.check_section_addresses = 0;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_ACCEPT_UNKNOWN_INPUT_ARCH:
+ command_line.accept_unknown_input_arch = true;
+ break;
+ case OPTION_NO_ACCEPT_UNKNOWN_INPUT_ARCH:
+ command_line.accept_unknown_input_arch = false;
+ break;
+ case '(':
+ lang_enter_group ();
+ ingroup++;
+ break;
+ case ')':
+ if (! ingroup)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: group ended before it began (--help for usage)\n"));
+
+ lang_leave_group ();
+ ingroup--;
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_INIT:
+ link_info.init_function = optarg;
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_FINI:
+ link_info.fini_function = optarg;
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_REMAP_INPUTS_FILE:
+ if (! ldfile_add_remap_file (optarg))
+ einfo (_("%F%P: failed to add remap file %s\n"), optarg);
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_REMAP_INPUTS:
+ {
+ char *optarg2 = strchr (optarg, '=');
+ if (optarg2 == NULL)
+ /* FIXME: Should we allow --remap-inputs=@myfile as a synonym
+ for --remap-inputs-file=myfile ? */
+ einfo (_("%F%P: invalid argument to option --remap-inputs\n"));
+ size_t len = optarg2 - optarg;
+ char * pattern = xmalloc (len + 1);
+ memcpy (pattern, optarg, len);
+ pattern[len] = 0;
+ ldfile_add_remap (pattern, optarg2 + 1);
+ free (pattern);
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_REDUCE_MEMORY_OVERHEADS:
+ link_info.reduce_memory_overheads = true;
+ if (config.hash_table_size == 0)
+ config.hash_table_size = 1021;
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_MAX_CACHE_SIZE:
+ {
+ char *end;
+ bfd_size_type cache_size = strtoul (optarg, &end, 0);
+ if (*end != '\0')
+ einfo (_("%F%P: invalid cache memory size: %s\n"),
+ optarg);
+ link_info.max_cache_size = cache_size;
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_HASH_SIZE:
+ {
+ bfd_size_type new_size;
+
+ new_size = strtoul (optarg, NULL, 0);
+ if (new_size)
+ config.hash_table_size = new_size;
+ else
+ einfo (_("%X%P: --hash-size needs a numeric argument\n"));
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_PUSH_STATE:
+ input_flags.pushed = xmemdup (&input_flags,
+ sizeof (input_flags),
+ sizeof (input_flags));
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_POP_STATE:
+ if (input_flags.pushed == NULL)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: no state pushed before popping\n"));
+ else
+ {
+ struct lang_input_statement_flags *oldp = input_flags.pushed;
+ memcpy (&input_flags, oldp, sizeof (input_flags));
+ free (oldp);
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_PRINT_MEMORY_USAGE:
+ command_line.print_memory_usage = true;
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_ORPHAN_HANDLING:
+ if (strcasecmp (optarg, "place") == 0)
+ config.orphan_handling = orphan_handling_place;
+ else if (strcasecmp (optarg, "warn") == 0)
+ config.orphan_handling = orphan_handling_warn;
+ else if (strcasecmp (optarg, "error") == 0)
+ config.orphan_handling = orphan_handling_error;
+ else if (strcasecmp (optarg, "discard") == 0)
+ config.orphan_handling = orphan_handling_discard;
+ else
+ einfo (_("%F%P: invalid argument to option"
+ " \"--orphan-handling\"\n"));
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_NO_PRINT_MAP_DISCARDED:
+ config.print_map_discarded = false;
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_PRINT_MAP_DISCARDED:
+ config.print_map_discarded = true;
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_NO_PRINT_MAP_LOCALS:
+ config.print_map_locals = false;
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_PRINT_MAP_LOCALS:
+ config.print_map_locals = true;
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_DEPENDENCY_FILE:
+ config.dependency_file = optarg;
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_CTF_VARIABLES:
+ config.ctf_variables = true;
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_NO_CTF_VARIABLES:
+ config.ctf_variables = false;
+ break;
+
+ case OPTION_CTF_SHARE_TYPES:
+ if (strcmp (optarg, "share-unconflicted") == 0)
+ config.ctf_share_duplicated = false;
+ else if (strcmp (optarg, "share-duplicated") == 0)
+ config.ctf_share_duplicated = true;
+ else
+ einfo (_("%F%P: bad --ctf-share-types option: %s\n"), optarg);
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+
+ free (really_longopts);
+ free (longopts);
+ free (shortopts);
+
+ /* Run a couple of checks on the map filename. */
+ if (config.map_filename)
+ {
+ char * new_name = NULL;
+ char * percent;
+ int res = 0;
+
+ if (config.map_filename[0] == 0)
+ {
+ einfo (_("%P: no file/directory name provided for map output; ignored\n"));
+ config.map_filename = NULL;
+ }
+ else if (strcmp (config.map_filename, "-") == 0)
+ ; /* Write to stdout. Handled in main(). */
+ else if ((percent = strchr (config.map_filename, '%')) != NULL)
+ {
+ /* FIXME: Check for a second % character and issue an error ? */
+
+ /* Construct a map file by replacing the % character with the (full)
+ output filename. If the % character was the last character in
+ the original map filename then add a .map extension. */
+ percent[0] = 0;
+ res = asprintf (&new_name, "%s%s%s", config.map_filename,
+ output_filename,
+ percent[1] ? percent + 1 : ".map");
+
+ /* FIXME: Should we ensure that any directory components in new_name exist ? */
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ struct stat s;
+
+ /* If the map filename is actually a directory then create
+ a file inside it, based upon the output filename. */
+ if (stat (config.map_filename, &s) < 0)
+ {
+ if (errno != ENOENT)
+ einfo (_("%P: cannot stat linker map file: %E\n"));
+ }
+ else if (S_ISDIR (s.st_mode))
+ {
+ char lastc = config.map_filename[strlen (config.map_filename) - 1];
+ res = asprintf (&new_name, "%s%s%s.map",
+ config.map_filename,
+ IS_DIR_SEPARATOR (lastc) ? "" : "/",
+ lbasename (output_filename));
+ }
+ else if (! S_ISREG (s.st_mode))
+ {
+ einfo (_("%P: linker map file is not a regular file\n"));
+ config.map_filename = NULL;
+ }
+ /* else FIXME: Check write permission ? */
+ }
+
+ if (res < 0)
+ {
+ /* If the asprintf failed then something is probably very
+ wrong. Better to halt now rather than continue on
+ into more problems. */
+ einfo (_("%P%F: cannot create name for linker map file: %E\n"));
+ }
+ else if (new_name != NULL)
+ {
+ /* This is a trivial memory leak. */
+ config.map_filename = new_name;
+ }
+ }
+
+ if (command_line.soname && command_line.soname[0] == '\0')
+ {
+ einfo (_("%P: SONAME must not be empty string; ignored\n"));
+ command_line.soname = NULL;
+ }
+
+ while (ingroup)
+ {
+ einfo (_("%P: missing --end-group; added as last command line option\n"));
+ lang_leave_group ();
+ ingroup--;
+ }
+
+ if (default_dirlist != NULL)
+ {
+ set_default_dirlist (default_dirlist);
+ free (default_dirlist);
+ }
+
+ if (link_info.unresolved_syms_in_objects == RM_NOT_YET_SET)
+ /* FIXME: Should we allow emulations a chance to set this ? */
+ link_info.unresolved_syms_in_objects = RM_DIAGNOSE;
+
+ if (link_info.unresolved_syms_in_shared_libs == RM_NOT_YET_SET)
+ /* FIXME: Should we allow emulations a chance to set this ? */
+ link_info.unresolved_syms_in_shared_libs = RM_DIAGNOSE;
+
+ if (bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info)
+ && command_line.check_section_addresses < 0)
+ command_line.check_section_addresses = 0;
+
+ if (export_list)
+ {
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr *head = export_list->head.list;
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr *next;
+
+ /* For --export-dynamic-symbol[-list]:
+ 1. When building executable, treat like --dynamic-list.
+ 2. When building shared object:
+ a. If -Bsymbolic or --dynamic-list are used, treat like
+ --dynamic-list.
+ b. Otherwise, ignored.
+ */
+ if (!bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info)
+ && (bfd_link_executable (&link_info)
+ || opt_symbolic != symbolic_unset
+ || opt_dynamic_list != dynamic_list_unset))
+ {
+ /* Append the export list to link_info.dynamic_list. */
+ if (link_info.dynamic_list)
+ {
+ for (next = head; next->next != NULL; next = next->next)
+ ;
+ next->next = link_info.dynamic_list->head.list;
+ link_info.dynamic_list->head.list = head;
+ }
+ else
+ link_info.dynamic_list = export_list;
+
+ if (opt_dynamic_list != dynamic_list_data)
+ opt_dynamic_list = dynamic_list;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Free the export list. */
+ for (; head->next != NULL; head = next)
+ {
+ next = head->next;
+ free (head);
+ }
+ free (export_list);
+ }
+ }
+
+ switch (opt_dynamic_list)
+ {
+ case dynamic_list_unset:
+ break;
+ case dynamic_list_data:
+ link_info.dynamic_data = true;
+ /* Fall through. */
+ case dynamic_list:
+ link_info.dynamic = true;
+ opt_symbolic = symbolic_unset;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* -Bsymbolic and -Bsymbols-functions are for shared library output. */
+ if (bfd_link_dll (&link_info))
+ switch (opt_symbolic)
+ {
+ case symbolic_unset:
+ break;
+ case symbolic:
+ link_info.symbolic = true;
+ if (link_info.dynamic_list)
+ {
+ struct bfd_elf_version_expr *ent, *next;
+ for (ent = link_info.dynamic_list->head.list; ent; ent = next)
+ {
+ next = ent->next;
+ free (ent);
+ }
+ free (link_info.dynamic_list);
+ link_info.dynamic_list = NULL;
+ }
+ break;
+ case symbolic_functions:
+ link_info.dynamic = true;
+ link_info.dynamic_data = true;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* -z nosectionheader implies --strip-all. */
+ if (config.no_section_header)
+ {
+ if (bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info))
+ einfo (_("%F%P: -r and -z nosectionheader may not be used together\n"));
+
+ link_info.strip = strip_all;
+ }
+
+ if (!bfd_link_dll (&link_info))
+ {
+ if (command_line.filter_shlib)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: -F may not be used without -shared\n"));
+ if (command_line.auxiliary_filters)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: -f may not be used without -shared\n"));
+ }
+
+ /* Treat ld -r -s as ld -r -S -x (i.e., strip all local symbols). I
+ don't see how else this can be handled, since in this case we
+ must preserve all externally visible symbols. */
+ if (bfd_link_relocatable (&link_info) && link_info.strip == strip_all)
+ {
+ link_info.strip = strip_debugger;
+ if (link_info.discard == discard_sec_merge)
+ link_info.discard = discard_all;
+ }
+}
+
+/* Add the (colon-separated) elements of DIRLIST_PTR to the
+ library search path. */
+
+static void
+set_default_dirlist (char *dirlist_ptr)
+{
+ char *p;
+
+ while (1)
+ {
+ p = strchr (dirlist_ptr, PATH_SEPARATOR);
+ if (p != NULL)
+ *p = '\0';
+ if (*dirlist_ptr != '\0')
+ ldfile_add_library_path (dirlist_ptr, true);
+ if (p == NULL)
+ break;
+ dirlist_ptr = p + 1;
+ }
+}
+
+static void
+set_section_start (char *sect, char *valstr)
+{
+ const char *end;
+ bfd_vma val = bfd_scan_vma (valstr, &end, 16);
+ if (*end)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: invalid hex number `%s'\n"), valstr);
+ lang_section_start (sect, exp_intop (val), NULL);
+}
+
+static void
+set_segment_start (const char *section, char *valstr)
+{
+ const char *name;
+ const char *end;
+ segment_type *seg;
+
+ bfd_vma val = bfd_scan_vma (valstr, &end, 16);
+ if (*end)
+ einfo (_("%F%P: invalid hex number `%s'\n"), valstr);
+ /* If we already have an entry for this segment, update the existing
+ value. */
+ name = section + 1;
+ for (seg = segments; seg; seg = seg->next)
+ if (strcmp (seg->name, name) == 0)
+ {
+ seg->value = val;
+ lang_section_start (section, exp_intop (val), seg);
+ return;
+ }
+ /* There was no existing value so we must create a new segment
+ entry. */
+ seg = stat_alloc (sizeof (*seg));
+ seg->name = name;
+ seg->value = val;
+ seg->used = false;
+ /* Add it to the linked list of segments. */
+ seg->next = segments;
+ segments = seg;
+ /* Historically, -Ttext and friends set the base address of a
+ particular section. For backwards compatibility, we still do
+ that. If a SEGMENT_START directive is seen, the section address
+ assignment will be disabled. */
+ lang_section_start (section, exp_intop (val), seg);
+}
+
+static void
+elf_shlib_list_options (FILE *file)
+{
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --audit=AUDITLIB Specify a library to use for auditing\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -Bgroup Selects group name lookup rules for DSO\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --disable-new-dtags Disable new dynamic tags\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --enable-new-dtags Enable new dynamic tags\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --eh-frame-hdr Create .eh_frame_hdr section\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --no-eh-frame-hdr Do not create .eh_frame_hdr section\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --exclude-libs=LIBS Make all symbols in LIBS hidden\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --hash-style=STYLE Set hash style to sysv/gnu/both. Default: "));
+ if (DEFAULT_EMIT_SYSV_HASH)
+ {
+ /* Note - these strings are not translated as
+ they are keywords not descriptive text. */
+ if (DEFAULT_EMIT_GNU_HASH)
+ fprintf (file, "both\n");
+ else
+ fprintf (file, "sysv\n");
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (DEFAULT_EMIT_GNU_HASH)
+ fprintf (file, "gnu\n");
+ else
+ /* FIXME: Can this happen ? */
+ fprintf (file, "none\n");
+ }
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -P AUDITLIB, --depaudit=AUDITLIB\n" "\
+ Specify a library to use for auditing dependencies\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z combreloc Merge dynamic relocs into one section and sort\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z nocombreloc Don't merge dynamic relocs into one section\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z global Make symbols in DSO available for subsequently\n\
+ loaded objects\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z initfirst Mark DSO to be initialized first at runtime\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z interpose Mark object to interpose all DSOs but executable\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z unique Mark DSO to be loaded at most once by default, and only in the main namespace\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z nounique Don't mark DSO as a loadable at most once\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z lazy Mark object lazy runtime binding (default)\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z loadfltr Mark object requiring immediate process\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z nocopyreloc Don't create copy relocs\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z nodefaultlib Mark object not to use default search paths\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z nodelete Mark DSO non-deletable at runtime\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z nodlopen Mark DSO not available to dlopen\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z nodump Mark DSO not available to dldump\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z now Mark object non-lazy runtime binding\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z origin Mark object requiring immediate $ORIGIN\n\
+ processing at runtime\n"));
+#if DEFAULT_LD_Z_RELRO
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z relro Create RELRO program header (default)\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z norelro Don't create RELRO program header\n"));
+#else
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z relro Create RELRO program header\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z norelro Don't create RELRO program header (default)\n"));
+#endif
+#if DEFAULT_LD_Z_SEPARATE_CODE
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z separate-code Create separate code program header (default)\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z noseparate-code Don't create separate code program header\n"));
+#else
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z separate-code Create separate code program header\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z noseparate-code Don't create separate code program header (default)\n"));
+#endif
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z common Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z nocommon Generate common symbols with STT_OBJECT type\n"));
+ if (link_info.textrel_check == textrel_check_error)
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z text Treat DT_TEXTREL in output as error (default)\n"));
+ else
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z text Treat DT_TEXTREL in output as error\n"));
+ if (link_info.textrel_check == textrel_check_none)
+ {
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z notext Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in output as error (default)\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z textoff Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in output as error (default)\n"));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z notext Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in output as error\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z textoff Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in output as error\n"));
+ }
+}
+
+static void
+elf_static_list_options (FILE *file)
+{
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --build-id[=STYLE] Generate build ID note\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --package-metadata[=JSON] Generate package metadata note\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --compress-debug-sections=[none|zlib|zlib-gnu|zlib-gabi|zstd]\n\
+ Compress DWARF debug sections\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ Default: %s\n"),
+ bfd_get_compression_algorithm_name (config.compress_debug));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z common-page-size=SIZE Set common page size to SIZE\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z max-page-size=SIZE Set maximum page size to SIZE\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z defs Report unresolved symbols in object files\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z undefs Ignore unresolved symbols in object files\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z muldefs Allow multiple definitions\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z stack-size=SIZE Set size of stack segment\n"));
+
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z execstack Mark executable as requiring executable stack\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z noexecstack Mark executable as not requiring executable stack\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --warn-execstack-objects Generate a warning if an object file requests an executable stack\n"));
+#if DEFAULT_LD_WARN_EXECSTACK == 0
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --warn-execstack Generate a warning if creating an executable stack\n"));
+#else
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --warn-execstack Generate a warning if creating an executable stack (default)\n"));
+#endif
+#if DEFAULT_LD_WARN_EXECSTACK == 0
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --no-warn-execstack Do not generate a warning if creating an executable stack (default)\n"));
+#else
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --no-warn-execstack Do not generate a warning if creating an executable stack\n"));
+#endif
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --error-execstack Turn warnings about executable stacks into errors\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --no-error-execstack Do not turn warnings about executable stacks into errors\n"));
+
+#if DEFAULT_LD_WARN_RWX_SEGMENTS
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --warn-rwx-segments Generate a warning if a LOAD segment has RWX permissions (default)\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --no-warn-rwx-segments Do not generate a warning if a LOAD segments has RWX permissions\n"));
+#else
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --warn-rwx-segments Generate a warning if a LOAD segment has RWX permissions\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --no-warn-rwx-segments Do not generate a warning if a LOAD segments has RWX permissions (default)\n"));
+#endif
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --error-rwx-segments Turn warnings about loadable RWX segments into errors\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --no-error-rwx-segments Do not turn warnings about loadable RWX segments into errors\n"));
+
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z unique-symbol Avoid duplicated local symbol names\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z nounique-symbol Keep duplicated local symbol names (default)\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z globalaudit Mark executable requiring global auditing\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z start-stop-gc Enable garbage collection on __start/__stop\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z nostart-stop-gc Don't garbage collect __start/__stop (default)\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z start-stop-visibility=V Set visibility of built-in __start/__stop symbols\n\
+ to DEFAULT, PROTECTED, HIDDEN or INTERNAL\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z sectionheader Generate section header (default)\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ -z nosectionheader Do not generate section header\n"));
+}
+
+static void
+elf_plt_unwind_list_options (FILE *file)
+{
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --ld-generated-unwind-info Generate exception handling info for PLT\n"));
+ fprintf (file, _("\
+ --no-ld-generated-unwind-info\n\
+ Don't generate exception handling info for PLT\n"));
+}
+
+static void
+ld_list_options (FILE *file, bool elf, bool shlib, bool plt_unwind)
+{
+ if (!elf)
+ return;
+ printf (_("ELF emulations:\n"));
+ if (plt_unwind)
+ elf_plt_unwind_list_options (file);
+ elf_static_list_options (file);
+ if (shlib)
+ elf_shlib_list_options (file);
+}
+
+
+/* Print help messages for the options. */
+
+static void
+help (void)
+{
+ unsigned i;
+ const char **targets, **pp;
+ int len;
+
+ printf (_("Usage: %s [options] file...\n"), program_name);
+
+ printf (_("Options:\n"));
+ for (i = 0; i < OPTION_COUNT; i++)
+ {
+ if (ld_options[i].doc != NULL)
+ {
+ bool comma;
+ unsigned j;
+
+ printf (" ");
+
+ comma = false;
+ len = 2;
+
+ j = i;
+ do
+ {
+ if (ld_options[j].shortopt != '\0'
+ && ld_options[j].control != NO_HELP)
+ {
+ printf ("%s-%c", comma ? ", " : "", ld_options[j].shortopt);
+ len += (comma ? 2 : 0) + 2;
+ if (ld_options[j].arg != NULL)
+ {
+ if (ld_options[j].opt.has_arg != optional_argument)
+ {
+ printf (" ");
+ ++len;
+ }
+ printf ("%s", _(ld_options[j].arg));
+ len += strlen (_(ld_options[j].arg));
+ }
+ comma = true;
+ }
+ ++j;
+ }
+ while (j < OPTION_COUNT && ld_options[j].doc == NULL);
+
+ j = i;
+ do
+ {
+ if (ld_options[j].opt.name != NULL
+ && ld_options[j].control != NO_HELP)
+ {
+ int two_dashes =
+ (ld_options[j].control == TWO_DASHES
+ || ld_options[j].control == EXACTLY_TWO_DASHES);
+
+ printf ("%s-%s%s",
+ comma ? ", " : "",
+ two_dashes ? "-" : "",
+ ld_options[j].opt.name);
+ len += ((comma ? 2 : 0)
+ + 1
+ + (two_dashes ? 1 : 0)
+ + strlen (ld_options[j].opt.name));
+ if (ld_options[j].arg != NULL)
+ {
+ printf (" %s", _(ld_options[j].arg));
+ len += 1 + strlen (_(ld_options[j].arg));
+ }
+ comma = true;
+ }
+ ++j;
+ }
+ while (j < OPTION_COUNT && ld_options[j].doc == NULL);
+
+ if (len >= 30)
+ {
+ printf ("\n");
+ len = 0;
+ }
+
+ for (; len < 30; len++)
+ putchar (' ');
+
+ printf ("%s\n", _(ld_options[i].doc));
+ }
+ }
+ printf (_(" @FILE"));
+ for (len = strlen (" @FILE"); len < 30; len++)
+ putchar (' ');
+ printf (_("Read options from FILE\n"));
+
+ /* Note: Various tools (such as libtool) depend upon the
+ format of the listings below - do not change them. */
+ /* xgettext:c-format */
+ printf (_("%s: supported targets:"), program_name);
+ targets = bfd_target_list ();
+ for (pp = targets; *pp != NULL; pp++)
+ printf (" %s", *pp);
+ free (targets);
+ printf ("\n");
+
+ /* xgettext:c-format */
+ printf (_("%s: supported emulations: "), program_name);
+ ldemul_list_emulations (stdout);
+ printf ("\n");
+
+ /* xgettext:c-format */
+ printf (_("%s: emulation specific options:\n"), program_name);
+ ld_list_options (stdout, ELF_LIST_OPTIONS, ELF_SHLIB_LIST_OPTIONS,
+ ELF_PLT_UNWIND_LIST_OPTIONS);
+ ldemul_list_emulation_options (stdout);
+ printf ("\n");
+
+ if (REPORT_BUGS_TO[0])
+ printf (_("Report bugs to %s\n"), REPORT_BUGS_TO);
+}
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1a.d binutils-2.41/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1a.d
--- binutils.orig/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1a.d 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1a.d 2024-05-13 13:04:08.599633306 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+#name: Text Section Ordering (section-order-1a)
+#source: section-order-1b.s
+#source: section-order-1a.s
+#source: start.s
+#ld: --section-ordering-file section-order-1a.t
+#nm: -n
+
+#...
+[0-9a-f]+ T yyy
+#...
+[0-9a-f]+ T bar
+#...
+[0-9a-f]+ T [_]+start
+#...
+[0-9a-f]+ T xxx
+#...
+[0-9a-f]+ T foo
+#...
+[0-9a-f]+ T qqq
+#...
+[0-9a-f]+ T zzz
+#pass
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1a.s binutils-2.41/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1a.s
--- binutils.orig/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1a.s 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1a.s 2024-05-13 13:04:08.599633306 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+ .section .text.foo
+ .globl foo
+foo:
+ .dc.a 0
+
+ .section .text.bar
+ .globl bar
+bar:
+ .dc.a 0
+
+ .section .data.small
+ .globl small
+small:
+ .dc.a 0
+
+ .section .bar
+ .global bar
+bart:
+ .dc.a 0
+
+ .section .text.zzz
+ .global zzz
+zzz:
+ .dc.a 0
+
+ .section .data.bbb
+ .global bbb
+bbb:
+ .dc.a 0
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1a.t binutils-2.41/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1a.t
--- binutils.orig/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1a.t 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1a.t 2024-05-13 13:04:08.599633306 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+.text : {
+ *(.text.yyy)
+ *(.text.b?r)
+ *(.text)
+ *(.text.xxx .text.foo)
+}
+
+.data : {
+ *(.data.small)
+ *(.big*)
+ *(.bar .baz*)
+ *(.data.ccc)
+}
+
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1b.d binutils-2.41/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1b.d
--- binutils.orig/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1b.d 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1b.d 2024-05-13 13:04:08.599633306 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+#name: Text Section Ordering (section-order-1b)
+#source: section-order-1a.s
+#source: section-order-1b.s
+#source: start.s
+#ld: --section-ordering-file section-order-1b.t
+#nm: -n
+
+#...
+[0-9a-f]+ T yyy
+#...
+[0-9a-f]+ T bar
+#...
+[0-9a-f]+ T [_]+start
+#...
+[0-9a-f]+ T xxx
+#...
+[0-9a-f]+ T foo
+#pass
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1b.s binutils-2.41/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1b.s
--- binutils.orig/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1b.s 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1b.s 2024-05-13 13:04:08.599633306 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+ .section .text.xxx
+ .globl xxx
+xxx:
+ .dc.a 0
+
+ .section .text.yyy
+ .globl yyy
+yyy:
+ .dc.a 0
+
+ .section .big
+ .global big
+big:
+ .dc.a 0
+
+ .section .baz
+ .global baz
+baz:
+ .dc.a 0
+
+ .section .text.qqq
+ .global qqq
+qqq:
+ .dc.a 0
+
+ .section .data.ccc
+ .global ccc
+ccc:
+ .dc.a 0
+
+ .data
+ .global data_symbol
+data_symbol:
+ .dc.a 0
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1b.t binutils-2.41/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1b.t
--- binutils.orig/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1b.t 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1b.t 2024-05-13 13:04:08.599633306 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+.text : {
+ *(.text.yyy)
+ *(.text.b?r)
+ *(*t)
+ *(.text.xxx)
+ *(.text.foo)
+}
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1c.d binutils-2.41/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1c.d
--- binutils.orig/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1c.d 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1c.d 2024-05-13 13:04:08.599633306 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+#name: Data Section Ordering (section-order-1c)
+#source: section-order-1b.s
+#source: section-order-1a.s
+#source: start.s
+#ld: --section-ordering-file section-order-1a.t
+#nm: -n
+
+#...
+[0-9a-f]+ D small
+#...
+[0-9a-f]+ D big
+#...
+[0-9a-f]+ D ba.*
+#pass
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1d.d binutils-2.41/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1d.d
--- binutils.orig/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1d.d 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order-1d.d 2024-05-13 13:04:08.599633306 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+#name: Data Section Ordering (section-order-1d)
+#source: section-order-1a.s
+#source: section-order-1b.s
+#source: start.s
+#ld: --section-ordering-file section-order-1a.t
+#nm: -n
+
+#...
+[0-9a-f]+ D small
+#...
+[0-9a-f]+ D big
+#...
+[0-9a-f]+ d bart
+#...
+[0-9a-f]+ D ccc
+#...
+[0-9a-f]+ D bbb
+#pass
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order.exp binutils-2.41/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order.exp
--- binutils.orig/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order.exp 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/section-order.exp 2024-05-13 13:04:08.599633306 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+# Test for --section-ordering-file FILE.
+# Copyright (C) 2024 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+# This file is part of the GNU Binutils.
+#
+# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or
+# (at your option) any later version.
+#
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street - Fifth Floor, Boston,
+# MA 02110-1301, USA.
+
+# The --section-ordering-file option is only supported by ELF and
+# PE COFF linkers, which allow for arbitrarily named sections, eg:
+# .text.*
+if { !([is_elf_format] || [is_pecoff_format]) } {
+ return
+}
+
+set old_ldflags $LDFLAGS
+if { [istarget spu*-*-*] } then {
+ set LDFLAGS "$LDFLAGS --local-store 0:0 --no-overlays"
+} elseif { [is_pecoff_format] } then {
+ set LDFLAGS "$LDFLAGS --image-base 0"
+} elseif { [is_xcoff_format] } then {
+ set LDFLAGS "$LDFLAGS -bnogc"
+}
+
+set test_list [lsort [glob -nocomplain $srcdir/$subdir/section-order*.d]]
+foreach test_file $test_list {
+ set test_name [file rootname $test_file]
+ set map_file "tmpdir/[file tail $test_name].map"
+ verbose $test_name
+ run_dump_test $test_name
+}
+
+set LDFLAGS $old_ldflags
diff -rupN binutils.orig/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/start.s binutils-2.41/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/start.s
--- binutils.orig/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/start.s 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ binutils-2.41/ld/testsuite/ld-scripts/start.s 2024-05-13 13:04:08.599633306 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+ .text
+ .global start /* Used by SH targets. */
+start:
+ .global _start
+_start:
+ .global __start
+__start:
+ .global _mainCRTStartup /* Used by PE targets. */
+_mainCRTStartup:
+ .global main /* Used by HPPA targets. */
+main:
+ .globl _main /* Used by LynxOS targets. */
+_main:
+ .dc.a 0
Reference in New Issue View Git Blame Copy Permalink